# Full text of "The Science Of Mechanics"

## See other formats

121 223 PROFESSOR ERXST MACH IS&S- lOKi THE; SCIENCE OF MECHANICS A CRITICAL AND HISTORICAL ACCOUNT OF ITS DEVELOPMENT DR. ERNST MACH PROFESSOR OF TE HISTORY AND THEORY OF INDUCTIVE SCIENCE IN THE UNIVERSITY OF VIENNA TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN BY THOMAS J. McCORMACK \VITir TWO HUNDRED AND FIFTY CUTS AND ILLUSTRATIONS FOURTH EDITION CHICAGO LONDON THE OPEN COURT PUBLISHING CO. 1919 COPYRIGHT 1893, 1902, 1919 BY Til Li OWN Coi'UT PUBLISH INO COMPANY TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE TO THE SECOND ENGLISH EDITION. SINCE the appearance of the first edition of the present translation of Mach's Mechanics ',* the views which Professor Mach has advanced on the philoso- phy of science have found wide and steadily increas- ing acceptance. Many fruitful and elucidative con- troversies have sprung from his discussions of the historical, logical, and psychological foundations of physical science, and in consideration of the great ideal success which his works have latterly met with in Continental Europe, the time seems ripe for a still wider dissemination of his views in English-speaking countries. The study of the history and theory of science is finding fuller and fuller recognition In our universities, and it Is to be hoped that the present ex- emplary treatment of the simplest and most typical branch* of physics will stimulate^ further progress in this direction, The text of the present edition, which contains the extensive additions made by the author to the * Die Mechanik in ihrer Entwickelung historisch-kritisch dargesiellt. Von Dr. Ernst Mach, Professor an der Universitat zu Wien. Mit 257 Abbildungen. First German edition, 1883. Fourth German edition, 1901. First edition of the English translation, Chicago, The Open Court Publishing Co., 1893. vi TRANS LA TOR' S PREFA CM. latest German editions, has been thoroughly revised by the translator. All errors, either of substance or typography, so far as they have come to the trans- lator's notice, have been removed, and in many cases the phraseology has been altered. The sub-title of the work has, in compliance with certain criticisms, also been changed, to accord more with the wording of the original title and to bring out the idea that the work treats of the principles of mechanics predomi- nantly under the aspect of their development (Entwicke- lung). To avoid confusion in the matter of references, the main title stands as in the first edition. The author's additions, which are considerable, have been relegated to the Appendix. This course has been deemed preferable to that of incorporating them in the text, first, because the numerous refer- ences in other works to the pages of the first edition thus hold good for the present edition also, and sec- ondly, because with few exceptions the additions are either supplementary in character, or in answer to criticisms. A list of the subjects treated in these ad- ditions is given in the Table of Contents, under the heading "Appendix" on page xix. Special reference, however, must be made to the additions referring to Hertz's Mechanics (pp. 548-555), and to the history of the development of Professor Mach's own philosophical and scientific views, notably to his criticisms of the concepts of mass, inertia, ab- solute motion, etc., on pp. 542-547, 555574, and 579 TJtANSLA TOR'S PREFA CE. vii -583. The remarks here made will be found highly elucidative, while the references given to the rich lit- erature dealing with the history and philosophy of science will also be found helpful. As for the rest, the text of the present edition of the translation is the same as that of the first. It has had the sanction of the author and the advantage of revision by Mr. C. S. Peirce, well known for his studies both of analytical mechanics and of the his- tory and logic of physics. Mr. Peirce read the proofs of the first edition and rewrote Sec. 8 in the chapter on Units and Measures, where the original was in- applicable to the system commonly taught in this county. THOMAS J. McCoRMACK. LA SALLE, ILL., February, 1902. AUTHOR'S PREFACE TO THE TRANS- LATION. Having read the proofs of the present translation of my work, Die Mechanik in ihrer JLntwickeliing, I can testify that the publishers have supplied an excellent, accurate, and faithful rendering of it, as their previous translations of essays of mine gave me every reason to expect. My thanks are due to all concerned, and especially to Mr. McCormack, whose intelligent care in the conduct of the translation has led to the dis- covery of many errors, heretofore overlooked. I may, thus, confidently hope, that the rise and growth of the ideas of the great inquirers, which it was my task to portray, will appear to my new public in distinct and sharp outlines. E. MACH. PRAGUE, April 8th, 1893. PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. THAT the Interest in the foundations of mechanics is still unimpaired, is shown by the works published since 1889 by Budde, P. and J. Friedlander, H. Hertz, P. Johannesson, K. Lasswitz, MacGregor, K. Pearson, J. Petzoldt, Rosenberger, E. Strauss, Vicaire, P. Volkmann, E. Wohlwill, and others, many of which are deserving of consideration, even though briefly. In Prof. Karl Pearson {Grammar of Science, Lon- don, .1892), I have become acquainted with an inquirer with whose epistemological views I am in accord at nearly all essential points, and who has always taken a frank and courageous stand against all pseudo- scientific tendencies in science. Mechanics appears at present to be entering on a new relationship to physics, as is noticeable particularly in the publica- tion of H. Hertz. The nascent transformation in our conception of forces acting at a distance will perhaps be influenced also by the interesting investigations of H. Seeliger ("Ueber das Newton'sche Gravitations- gesetz," Sitzungsbericht der Miinchener Akademie, 1896), who has shown the incompatibility of a rigorous inter- pretation of Newton's law with the assumption of an unlimited mass of the universe. VIENNA, January, 1897. E. Mach. x PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. ing these cases must ever remain the method at once the most effective and the most natural for laying this gist and kernel bare. Indeed, it is not too much to say that it is the only way in which a real comprehen- sion of the general upshot of mechanics is to be at- tained. I have framed my exposition of the subject agree- ably to these views. It is perhaps a little long, but, on the other hand, I trust that it Is clear. I have not in every case been able to avoid the use of the abbrevi- ated and precise terminology of mathematics. To do so would have been to sacrifice matter to form ; for the language of everyday life has not yet grown to be suf- ficiently accurate for the purposes of so exact a science as mechanics. The elucidations which I here offer are, In part, substantially contained In my treatise, Die Geschichte und die Wurzel de$ Satzes von dcr Erhaltung der Arbeit (Prague, Calve, 1872). At a later date nearly the same views were expressed by KIRCHHOFF ( Vorlcsungen iel>er mathematische Physik: Mechanik, Leipsic, 1874) an d by HELMHOLTZ {Die Thatsachen in der Wahrnehmitng, Berlin, 1879), and have since become commonplace enough. Still the matter, as I conceive it, does not seem to have been exhausted, and I cannot deem my exposition to be at all superfluous. In my fundamental conception of the nature of sci- ence as Economy of Thought, a view which I In- dicated both in the treatise above cited and In my PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. xi pamphlet, Die Gestaltcn der Fliissigkeit (Prague, Calve, 1872), and which I somewhat more extensively devel- oped in my academical memorial address, Die okono- mische Natur der physikalischen Forschung (Vienna, Ge- rold, 1882, I no longer .stand alone. I have been much gratified to find closely allied ideas developed, in an original manner, by Dr. R. AVENARIUS {Philoso- phie als Denken der Welt, gemdss dem Princip des klein- sten KraftmaasseS) Leipsic, Fues, 1876). Regard for the true endeavor of philosophy, that of guiding into one common stream the many rills of knowledge, will not be found wanting in my work, although it takes a determined stand against the encroachments of meta- physical methods. The questions here dealt with have occupied me since my earliest youth, when my interest for them was powerfully stimulated by the beautiful introductions of LAGRANGE to the chapters of his Analytic Mechanics, as well as by the lucid and lively tract of JOLLY, Prindpien der Mechanik (Stuttgart, 1852). If DUEHRING'S esti- mable work, Kritische Geschichte der Principien der Me- chanik (Berlin, 1873), did not particularly influence me, it was that at the time of its appearance, my ideas had been not only substantially worked out, but actually published. Nevertheless, the reader will, at least on the destructive side, find many points of agreement between Diihring's criticisms and those here expressed. The new apparatus for the illustration of the sub- ject, here figured and described, were designed entirely xii PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. by me and constructed by Mr. F. Hajek, the mechani- cian of the physical institute under my control. In less immediate connection with the text stand the fac-simile reproductions of old originals in my pos- session. The quaint and naive traits of the great in- quirers, which find in them their expression, have al- ways exerted upon me a refreshing influence in my studies, and I have desired that my readers should share this pleasure with me. K. MACH. PRAGUE, May, 1883. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. IN consequence of the kind reception which this book has met with, a very large edition has been ex- hausted in less than five years. This circumstance and the treatises that have since then appeared of E. Wohl- will, H. Streintz, L. Lange, J. Epstein, F. A. Muller, J. Popper, G. Helm, M. Planck, F. Poske, and others are evidence of the gratifying fact that at the present day questions relating to the theory of cognition are pursued with interest, which twenty years ago scarcely anybody noticed. As a thoroughgoing revision of my work did not yet seem to me to be expedient, I have restricted my- self, so far as the text is concerned, to the correction of typographical errors, and have referred to the works that have appeared since its original publication, as far as possible, in a few appendices. E. MACH. PRAGUE, June, 1888. PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. THE present volume is not a treatise upon the ap- plication of the principles of mechanics. Its aim is to clear up ideas, expose the real significance of the matter, and get rid of metaphysical obscurities. The little mathematics it contains is merely secondary to this purpose. Mechanics will here be treated, not as a branch of mathematics, but as one of the physical sciences. Ii the reader's interest is in that side of the subject, if he is curious to know how the principles of mechanics have been ascertained, from what sources they take their origin, and how far they can be regarded as permanent acquisitions, he will find, I hope, in these pages some enlightenment. All this, the positive and physical essence of mechanics, which makes its chief and highest interest for a student of nature, is in ex- isting treatises completely buried and concealed be- neath a mass of technical considerations. The gist and kernel of mechanical Ideas has in al- most every case grown up In the Investigation of very simple and special cases of mechanical processes ; and the analysis of the history of the discussions concern- PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. THE number of the friends of this work appears to have increased in the course of seventeen years, and the partial consideration which my expositions have received in the writings of Boltzmann, Foppl, Hertz, Love, Maggi, Pearson, and Slate, have awakened in me the hope that my work shall not have been in vain. Especial gratification has been afforded me by finding in ]. B. Stallo (The Concepts of Modern Physics} another staunch ally in my attitude toward mechanics, and in W. K. Clifford (Lectures and Essays and The Common Sense of the JZxact Sciences}, a thinker of kin- dred aims and points of view. New books and criticisms touching on my discus- sions have received attention in special additions, which in some instances have assumed considerable proportions. Of these strictures, O. Holder's note on my criticism of the Archimedean deduction (Denken nnd Anschauutig in der Geometrie, p. 63, note 62) has been of special value, inasmuch as it afforded me the opportunity of establishing my view on still firmer foundations (see pages 512-517). I do not at all dis- pute that rigorous demonstrations are as possible in mechanics as in mathematics. But with respect to xv i PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. the Archimedean and certain other deductions, I am still of the opinion that my position is the correct one. Other slight corrections in my work may have been made necessary by detailed historical research, but upon the whole I am of the opinion that I have correctly portrayed the picture of the transformations through which mechanics has passed, and presumably will pass. The original text, from which the later in- sertions are quite distinct, could therefore remain as it first stood in the first edition. I also desire that no changes shall be made in it even if after my death a new edition should become necessary. E. MACJL VIENNA, January, 1901. TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE Translator's Preface to the Second Edition v Author's Preface to the Translation. via Preface to the First Edition ix Preface to the Second Edition xiii Preface to the Third Edition xiv Preface to the Fourth Edition xv Table of Contents xvii Introduction i CHAPTER I. THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. I. The Principle of the Lever 8 II. The Principle of the Inclined Plane 24 III. The Principle of the Composition of Forces .... 33 IV. The Principle of Virtual Velocities 49 V. Retrospect of the Development of Statics 77 VI. The Principles of Statics in Their Application to Fluids 86 VII. The Principles of Statics in Their Application to Gas- eous Bodies no CHAPTER II. THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. I. Galileo's Achievements 128 II. The Achievements of Huygens . 155 III. The Achievements of Newton 187 IV. Discussion and Illustration of the Principle of Reaction 201 V. Criticism of the Principle of Reaction and of the Con- cept of Mass 216 VI. Newton's Views of Time, Space, and Motion .... 222 xviil TJETjS SCIJKATCJZ OF MECHANICS. PAGE VII. Synoptical Critique of the Newtonian Enunciations . 238 VIII Retrospect of the Development of Dynamics .... 245 CHAPTER III. THE EXTENDED APPLICATION OF THE PRINCIPLES OF MECHANICS AND THE DEDUCTIVE DEVELOP- MENT OF THE SCIENCE. I. Scope of the Newtonian Principles 256 II. The Formulae and Units of Mechanics 269 III. The Laws of the Conservation of Momentum, of the Conservation of the Centre of Gravity, and of the Conservation of Areas 287 IV. The Laws of Impact 305 V. D'Alembert's Principle . , 331 VI. The Principle of Vis Viva 343 VII. The Principle of Least Constraint 350 VIII. The Principle of Least Action 364 IX, Hamilton's Principle 380 X. Some Applications of the Principles of Mechanics to Hydrostatic and Hydrodynamic Questions . 384 CHAPTER IV. THE FORMAL DEVELOPMENT OF MECHANICS. I. The Isoperimetrical Problems 421 II. Theological, Animistic, and Mystical Points of View in Mechanics 446 III. Analytical Mechanics 465 IV. The Economy of Science 481 CHAPTER V. THE RELATION OF MECHANICS TO OTHER DEPART- MENTS OF KNOWLEDGE. I. The Relations of Mechanics to Physics 495 II. The Relations of Mechanics to Physiology 504 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xix PAGE Appendix 509 I. The Science of Antiquity, 509. II. Mechanical Researches of the Greeks, 510. III.. and IV. The Archimedean Deduction of the Law of the Lever, 512, 514. V. Mode of Procedure of Stevinus, 515. VI. Ancient Notions of the Nature of the Air, 517, VII. Galileo's Predecessors, 520 VIII. Galileo on Falling Bodies, 522. IX. Gali- leo on the Law of Inertia, 523. X. Galileo on the Motion of Projec- tiles, 525. XL Deduction of the Expression for Centrifugal Force (Hamilton's Hodograph), 527. XII. Descartes and Huygens on Gravitation, 528. XIII. Physical Achievements of Huygens, 530. XIV. Newton's Predecessors, 531. XV. The Explanations of Gravi- tation, 533 XVI. Mass and Quantity of Matter, 536. XVII. Gali- leo on Tides, 537. XVIII. Mach's Definition of Mass, 539. XIX, Mach on Physiological Time, 541, XX. Recent Discussions of the Law of Inertia and Absolute Motion, 542. XXI. Hertz's System of Mechanics, 548. XXII. History of Mach's Views of Physical Sci- ence (Mass, Inertia, etc.), 555. XXIII. Descartes's Achievements in Physics, 574. XXIV. Minimum Principles, 575. XXV. Grass- mann's Mechanics, 577. XXVI. Concept of Cause, 579- XXVII. Mach's Theory of the Economy of Thought, 579. XXVIII. Descrip- tion of Phenomena by Differential Equations, 583 XXIX. Mayer and the Mechanical Theory of Heat, 584. XXX. Principle of En- ergy, 585- Chronological Table of a Few Kminent Inquirers and of Their More Important Mechanical Works 589 Index 593 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS INTRODUCTION. 1. THAT branch of physics which is at once the old- The science 11 -i i i i i r i of mechan- est and the simplest and which is therefore treated ics. as introductory to other departments of this science, is concerned with the motions and equilibrium of masses. It bears the name of mechanics. 2. The history of the development of mechanics, is quite indispensable to a full comprehension of the science in its present condition. It also affords a sim- ple and instructive example of the processes by which natural science generally is developed. An instinctive, irreflective knowledge of the processes instinctive knowledge. of nature will doubtless always precede the scientific, conscious apprehension, or investigation, of phenom- ena. The former is the outcome of the relation in which the processes of nature stand to the satisfac- tion of our wants. The acquisition of the most ele- mentary truth does not devolve upon the individual alone : it is pre-effected in the development of the race. In point of fact, it is necessary to make a dis- Mechanical tinction between mechanical experience and median- expenences ical science, in the sense in which the latter term is at present employed. Mechanical experiences are, un- questionably, very old. If we carefully examine the ancient Egyptian and Assyrian monuments, we shall find there pictorial representations of many kinds of THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Theme- implements and mechanical contrivances; but ac- knowfe a dge counts of the scientific knowledge of these peoples antiqulty are either totally lacking, or point conclusively to a very inferior grade of attainment. By the side of highly ingenious ap- pliances, we behold the cru dest and rough- est expedients em- ployed-astheuseof sleds, for instance, for the transportation of enormous blocks of stone. All bears an instinctive, unperfec- ted, accidental char- acter. So, too, prehistoric graves contain imple- ments whose construc- tion and employment imply no little skill and much mechanical experience. Thus, long before theory was dreamed of, imple- ments, machines, me- chanical experien- ces, and mechanical knowledge were abun- dant. 3. The idea often suggests itself that perhaps the incom- plete accounts we pos- INTRODUCTION. 3 sess have led us to underrate the science of the ancient world. Passages occur in ancient authors which seem to indicate a profounder knowledge than we are wont to ascribe to those nations. Take, for instance, the following passage from Vitruvius, De Architectures, Lib. V, Cap. Ill, 6 : " The voice is a flowing breath, made sensible to A passage "the organ of hearing by the movements it produces Jius! Vltm " "in the air. It is propagated In infinite numbers of "circular zones- exactly as when a stone is thrown "into a pool of standing water countless circular un- "dulations are generated therein, which, increasing "as they recede from the centre, spread out over a "great distance, unless the narrowness of the locality "or some obstacle prevent their reaching their ter- " mination ; for the first line of waves, when Impeded "by obstructions, throw by their backward swell the "succeeding circular lines of waves into confusion. " Conformably to the very same law, the voice also "generates circular motions ; but with this distinction, "that in water the circles, remaining upon the surface, "are propagated horizontally only, while the voice Is "propagated both horizontally and vertically." Does not this sound like the Imperfect exposition Controvert- of a popular author, drawn from more accurate disqui- evidence. 61 * sitions now lost? In what a strange light should we ourselves appear, centuries hence, If our popular lit- erature, which by reason of its quantity is less easily destructible, should alone outlive the productions of science ? This too favorable view, however, Is very rudely shaken by the multitude of other passages con- taining such crude and patent errors as cannot be con- ceived to exist in any high stage of scientific culture. (See Appendix, I., p. 509.) 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The origin 4. When, where, and In what manner the develop- ment of science actually began, is at this day difficult historically to determine. It appears reasonable to assume, however, that the instinctive gathering of ex- periential facts preceded the scientific classification of them. Traces of this process may still be detected in the science of to-day; indeed, they are to be met with, now and then, in ourselves. The experiments that man heedlessly and instinctively makes in his strug- gles to satisfy his wants, are just as thoughtlessly and unconsciously applied. Here, for instance, belong the primitive experiments concerning the application of the lever in all its manifold forms. But the things that are thus unthinkingly and instinctively discovered, can never appear as peculiar, can never strike i|S as surprising, and as a rule therefore will never supply an impetus to further thought. Thefunc- The transition from this stage to the classified, cia? S ciasses scientific knowledge and apprehension of facts, first be- veiop^ett comes possible on the rise of special classes and pro- fessions who make the satisfaction of definite social wants their lifelong vocation. A class of this sort oc- cupies itself with particular kinds of natural processes. The individuals of the class change ; old members drop out, and new ones come in. Thus arises a need of imparting to those who are newly come in, the stock of experience and knowledge already possessed ; a need of acquainting them with the conditions of the The com- attainment of a definite end so that the result may be munication , , . , , _, . . ofknowi- determined beforehand. The communication of knowl- e ge< edge is thus the first occasion that compels distinct re- flection, as everybody can still observe in himself. Further, that which the old members of a guild me- chanically pursue, strikes a new member as unusual INTRODUCTION. 5 and strange, and thus an impulse Is given to fresh re- flection and investigation. When we wish to bring to the knowledge of a per- involves 1 description. son any phenomena or processes of nature, we have the choice of two methods : we may allow the person to observe matters for himself, when instruction comes to an end ; or, we may describe to him the phenomena in some way, so as to save him the trouble of per- sonally making anew each experiment. Description, however, is only possible of events that constantly re- cur, or of events that are made up of component parts that constantly recur. That only can be de- scribed, and conceptually represented which is uniform and conformable to law ; for description presupposes the,, employment of names by which to designate its elements ; and names can acquire meanings only when applied to elements that constantly reappear. 5. In the infinite variety of nature many ordinary A unitary _ J conception events occur; while others appear uncommon, per- f nature, plexing, astonishing, or even contradictory to the or- dinary run of things. As long as this is the case we do not possess a well-settled and unitary conception of nature. Thence is imposed the task of everywhere seeking out in the natural phenomena those elements that are the same, and that amid all multiplicity are ever present. By this means, on the one hand, the most economical and briefest description and com- munication are rendered possible ; and on the other, The nature , - i i i -11 r ofknowi- when once a person has acquired the skill of recog- edge, nising these permanent elements throughout the great- est range and variety of phenomena, of seeing them in the same, this ability leads to a comprehensive, compact, consistent^ and facile conception of the facts. When once we have reached the point where we are everywhere 6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The adap- able to detect the same few simple elements, combin- tation of . . thoughts to ing in the ordinary manner, then they appear to us as things that are familiar; we are no longer surprised, there is nothing new or strange to us in the phenom- ena, we feel at home with them, they no longer per- plex us, they are explained. It is a process of adaptation of thoughts to facts with which we are here concerned. The econ- 6. Economy of communication and of apprehen- ?hought. sion is of the very essence of science. Herein lies its pacificatory, its enlightening, its refining element. Herein, too, we possess an unerring guide to the his- torical origin of science. In the beginning, all economy had in immediate view the satisfaction simply of bodily wants. With the artisan, and still more so with the investigator, the concisest and simplest possible knowl- edge of a given province of natural phenomena a knowledge that is attained with the least intellectual expenditure naturally becomes in itself an econom- ical aim ; but though it was at first a means to an end, when the mental motives connected therewith are once developed and demand their satisfaction, all thought of its original purpose, the personal need, disappears. Further de- To find, then, what remains unaltered in the phe- velopment r - . 11 if of these nomena ot nature, to discover the elements thereof and the mode of their interconnection and interdepend- ence this is the business of physical science. It en- deavors, by comprehensive and thorough description, to make the waiting for new experiences unnecessary ; it seeks to save us the trouble of experimentation, by making use, for example, of the known interdepend- ence of phenomena, according to which, if one kind of event occurs, we may be sure beforehand that a certain other event will occur. Even in the description itself labor may be saved, by discovering methods of de- INTRODUCTION. 7 scribing the greatest possible number of different ob~ Their pres- jects at once and in the concisest manner. All this will sion merely be made clearer by the examination of points of detail than can be done by a general discussion. It is fitting, however, to prepare the way, at this stage, for the most important points of outlook which in the course of our work we shall have occasion to occupy. 7. We now propose to enter more minutely into the Proposed subject of our inquiries, and, at the same time, without treatment, making the history of mechanics the chief topic of discussion, to consider its historical development so far as this is requisite to an understanding of the pres- ent state of mechanical science, and so far as it does not conflict with the unity of treatment of our main subject. Apart from the consideration that we cannot afford to neglect the great incentives that it is in our power to derive from the foremost intellects of allTheincen- epochs, incentives which taken as a whole are more rived from fruitful than the greatest men of the present day are with the able to offer, there is no grander, no more intellectually lects of the elevating spectacle than that of the utterances of the fundamental investigators in their gigantic power. Possessed as yet of no methods, for these were first created by their labors, and are only rendered compre- hensible to us by their performances, they grapple with and subjugate the object of their inquiry, and imprint upon it the forms of conceptual thought. They that know the entire course of the development of science, will, as a matter of course, judge more freely and And the in- i r i r r j. crease of more correctly of the significance of any present scien- power - , , . . . , . , . which such tific movement than they, who limited in their views a contact to the age in which their own lives have been spent, contemplate merely the momentary trend that the course of intellectual events takes at the present moment. CHAPTER I. THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. i, THE PRINCIPLE OF THE LEVER. The earliest i. The earliest investigations concerning mechan- mechanical . r 1 . , * . , -, researches ics of which we have any account, the investigations stadcs. of the ancient Greeks, related to statics, or to the doc- trine of equilibrium. Likewise, when after the taking of Constantinople by the Turks in 1453 a fresh impulse was imparted to the thought of the Occident by the an- cient writings that the fugitive Greeks brought with them, it was investigations in statics, principally evoked by the works of Archimedes, that occupied the fore- most investigators of the period. (See p. 510.) Archimedes 2. ARCHIMEDES of Syracuse (287-212 B. C.) left (287-212 E. behind him a number of writings, of which several have come down to us in complete form. We will first employ ourselves a moment with his treatise DC, j$Lquiponderantibus, which contains propositions re- specting the lever and the centre of gravity. In this treatise Archimedes starts from the follow- ing assumptions, which he regards as self-evident : Axiomatic a. Magnitudes of equal weight acting at equal assump- . x dons of Ar- distances (from their point of support) are in equi- chimedes. r rr J l librmm. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. g b. Magnitudes of equal weight acting at une- Axiomatic i j* ff assump- qual distances (from their point of support") aretions of Ar- V. - .-,-,- - , . ; , chimedes. not in equilibrium, but the one acting at the greater distance sinks. From these assumptions he deduces the following proposition : c. Commensurable magnitudes are in equilib- rium when they are inversely proportional to their distances (from the point of support). It would seem as if analysis could hardly go be- hind these assumptions. This Is, however, when we carefully look Into the matter, not the case. Imagine (Fig. 2) a bar, the weight of which is neglected. The bar rests on a fulcrum. At equal dis- tances from the fulcrum we ap- pend two equal weights. That jr r the two weights, thus circum- rh r-U stanced, are in equilibrium, is . the assumption from which Archi- medes starts. We might suppose that this was self- Analysis f of evident entirely apart from any experience, agreeably to medean as- the so-called principle of sufficient reason ; that in view sumplons< of the symmetry of the entire arrangement there is no reason why rotation should occur In the one direction rather than in the other. But we forget, in this, that a great multitude of negative and positive experiences Is implicitly contained in our assumption ; the negative, for instance, that dissimilar colors of the lever-arms, the position of the spectator, an occurrence in the vi- cinity, and the like, exercise no influence ; the positive, on the other hand, (as it appears in the second as- sumption,) that not only the weights but also their dis- tances from the supporting point are decisive factors in the disturbance of equilibrium, that they also are cir- io THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. cumstances determinative of motion. By the aid of these experiences we do indeed perceive that rest (no motion) is the only motion which can be uniquely* de- termined, or defined, by the determinative conditions of the case.f :haracter Now we are entitled to regard our knowledge of he Irchi- the decisive conditions of any phenomenon as sufficient .uits. only in the event that such conditions determine the phenomenon precisely and uniquely. Assuming the fact of experience referred to, that the weights and their distances alone are decisive, the first proposition of Archimedes really possesses a high degree of evi- dence and is eminently qualified to be made the foun- dation of further investigations. If the spectator place himself in the plane of symmetry of the arrangement in question, the first proposition manifests itself, more- over, as a highly imperative instinctive perception, a result determined by the symmetry of our own body. The pursuit of propositions of this character is, fur- thermore, an excellent means of accustoming ourselves in thought to the precision that nature reveals in her processes, rhegenerai 3. We will now reproduce in general outlines the proposition , . . - , , - . , . .. . . . f the lever tram ot thought by which Archimedes endeavors to re- educed to , , . . . . . t he simple uuce the general proposition of the lever to the par- ifarcase? ticular and apparently self-evident case. The two equal weights i suspended at a and b (Fig. 3) are, if the bar ab be free to rotate about its middle point c 9 in equilibrium. If the whole be suspended by a cord at c, the cord, leaving out of account the weight of the * So as to leave only a single possibility open. tlf, for example, we were to assume that the weight at the right de- scended, then rotation in the opposite direction also would be determined by the spectator, whose person exerts no influence on the phenomenon, taking up his position on the opposite side. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. n bar, will have to support the weight 2. The equal The general weights at the extremities of the bar supply accor- of the lever TII i r -. i , -, . -, , reduced to dmgly the place of the double weight at the centre. the simple and partic- ular case. m '[I] LLJ Fig. 3. Fig. 4. On a lever (Fig. 4), the arms of which are in the proportion of i to 2, weights are suspended in the pro- portion of 2 to i. The weight 2 we imagine replaced by two weights i, attached on either side at a distance i from the point of suspension. Now again we have complete symmetry about the point of suspension, and consequently equilibrium. On the lever-arms 3 and 4 (Fig. 5) are suspended the weights 4 and 3.. The lever-arm 3 is prolonged the distance 4, the arm 4 is prolonged the distance 3, and the weights 4 and 3 are replaced respectively by [i] d LJ t ] r^T i" 1 "! r I fi r i c LJ j J LJ LJ 4 Ill Fig- 5 4 and 3 pairs of symmetrically attached weights ^, in the manner indicated in the figure. Now again we have perfect symmetry. The preceding reasoning, The gener- which we have here developed with specific figures, is easily generalised. 4. It will be of interest to look at the manner in which Archimedes's mode of view, after the precedent of Stevinus, was modified by GALILEO. THE SCIENCE OF. MECHANICS. Galileo's Galileo imagines (Fig. 6) a heavy horizontal prism, mode of . . . j a i treatment, homogeneous in material composition, suspended by its extremities from a homogeneous bar of the same length. The bar is provided at its middle point with asuspensory attach- ment. In this case equi- librium will obtain ; this we perceive at once. But in this case is contained every other case, which Galileo shows in the Fig. 6. following manner. Let us suppose the whole length of the bar or the prism to be z(m -}- ;/). Cut the prism in two, in such a manner that one portion shall have the length zm and the other the length 2//. We can effect this without disturbing the equilibrium by previously fastening to the bar by threads, close to the point of proposed section, the inside extremities of the two portions. We may then remove all the threads, if the two portions of the prism be antecedently at- tached to the bar by their centres. Since the whole length of the bar is 2,(m + #), the length of each half is m + n. The distance of the point of suspension of the right-hand portion of the prism from the point of suspension of the bar is therefore m, and that of the left-hand portion n. The experience that we have here to deal with the weight, and not with the form, of the bodies, is easily made. It is thus manifest, that equilibrium will still subsist if any weight of the mag- nitude 2m be suspended at the distance n on the one side and any weight of the magnitude zn be suspended at the distance m on the other. The instinctive elements of our perception of this phenomenon are even more THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 13 prominently displayed in this form of the deduction than in that of Archimedes. We may discover, moreover, in this beautiful pre- sentation, a remnant of the ponderousness which was particularly characteristic of the investigators of an- tiquity. How a modern physicist conceived the same prob- Lagrange's lem, may be learned from the following presentation of t*ion S . enta LAGRANGE. Lagrange says : Imagine a horizontal ho- mogeneous prism suspended at its centre. Let this prism (Fig. 7) be conceived divided into two prisms of the lengths 2m and 2^. If now we consider the centres of gravity of these two parts, at which we may imagine weights to act proportional to im and 272, the 2m 2n Fig. 7. two centres thus considered will have the distances n and m from the point of support. This concise dis- posal of the problem is only possible to the practised mathematical perception. 5. The object that Archimedes and his successors object of sought to accomplish in the considerations we have here and his suc- presented, consists in the endeavor to reduce the more complicated case of the lever to the simpler and ap- parently self-evident case, to discern the simpler in the more complicated, or vice versa. In fact, we regard a phenomenon as explained, when we discover in it known simpler phenomena. But surprising as the achievement of Archimedes and his successors may at the first glance appear to us, doubts as to the correctness of it, on further reflec- i 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Critique of tion, nevertheless spring up. From the mere assump- ods! r me "tion of the equilibrium of equal weights at equal dis- tances is derived the inverse proportionality of weight and lever-arm ! How is that possible ? If we were unable philosophically and a priori to excogitate the simple fact of the dependence of equilibrium on weight and distance, but were obliged to go for that result to experience, in how much less a degree shall we be able, by speculative methods, to discover the form of this dependence, the proportionality ! Thestaticai As a matter of fact, the assumption that the equi- voivedin librium- disturbing effect of a weight P at the distance all their de- . e . . ... . auctions. L from the axis of rotation is measured by the product P.L (the so-called statical moment), is more or less covertly or tacitly introduced by Archimedes and all his successors. For when Archimedes substitutes for a Targe weight a series of symmetrically arranged pairs of small weights, which weights extend beyond the point of support, he employs in this very act the doctrine of the centre of gravity in its more general form, which is itself nothing else than the doctrine of the lever in its more general form. (See Appendix, III., p. 512.) without it Without the assumption above mentioned of the im- tiSniffm*" port of the product P.L, no one can prove (Fig. 8) possible. - . , . , . that a bar, placed in any way on the ful- crum S, is supported, with the help of a I string attached to its > centre of gravity and carried over a pulley, by a weight equal to its own weight. But this is con- tained in the deductions of Archimedes, Stevinus, Galileo, and also in that of Lagrange. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS, 6. HUYGENS, indeed, reprehends this method, and Huygens's i rr T-I - * i .,-,,,. n criticism. gives a different deduction, m which he believes he has avoided the error. If in the presentation of La- grange we imagine the two portions into which the prism is divided turned ninety degrees about two vertical axes passing through the cen- tres of gravity s,s' of the prism-portions (see Fig. go), and it be shown that under these circum- stances . equilibrium still D continues to subsist, we Fig. 9. shall obtain the Huygenian deduction. Abridged and simplified, it is as follows. In a rigid weightless Fig. ga. Fig. ga. plane (Fig. 9) through the point S we draw a straight line, on which we cut off on the one side the length i i6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. HIS own de- and on the other the length 2, at A and B respectively. On the extremities, at right angles to this straight line, we place, with the centres as points of contact, the heavy, thin, homogeneous prisms CD and EF, of the lengths and weights 4 and 2. Drawing the straight line HSG (where AG = %AC) and, parallel to it, the line CF, and translating the prism-portion CG by par- allel displacement to FH, everything about the axis GH is symmetrical and equilibrium obtains. But equilibrium also obtains for the axis AB ; obtains con- sequently for every axis through S, and therefore also for that at right angles to AB : wherewith the new case of the lever is given. Apparently Apparently, nothing else is assumed here than that unimpeach- , , i 1 -i able. equal weights /,/ (Fig. 10) m the same plane and at equal distances /,/ from an axis A A' (in this plane) equilibrate one another. If we place ourselves in the plane passing through A A perpendicularly to /,/, say y M Fig. 10. Fig, ii. at the point M, and look now towards A and now towards A r , we shall accord to this proposition the same evidentness as to the first Archimedean proposi- tion. The relation of things is, moreover, not altered if we institute with the weights parallel displacements with respect to the axis, as Huygens in fact does. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 17 The error first arises in the inference : if equilib- Yet invoiv- rium obtains for two axes of the plane, it also obtains final infer- for every other axis passing through the point of inter- ror. section of the first two. This inference (if it is not to be regarded as a purely instinctive one) can be drawn only upon the condition that disturbant effects are as- cribed to the weights proportional to their distances from the axis. But in this is contained the very kernel of the doctrine of the lever and the centre of gravity. Let the heavy points of a plane be referred to a system of rectangular coordinates (Fig. u). The co- ordinates of the centre of gravity of a system of masses m m m" . . . having the coordinates x x' x" . . . y y' y" . . . are, as we know, M a them at- ,, ~2.mx lEmy ic- 1 discus- C, -- ,----. 77 rrr: - . sion of 2m 2m Huygens's Inference. If we turn the system through the angle a, the new co- ordinates of the masses will be x^ = x cosa y sina, y\ =y cosa -\- x sin/r and consequently the coordinates of the centre of gravity ^ 2m (x cosa rsintf") 2mx . "2 my = 5" cosa 77 sina and, similarly, 7^ = 77 cosa + <? sina. We accordingly obtain the coordinates of the new centre of gravity, by simply transforming the coordi- nates of the first centre to the new axes. The centre of gravity remains therefore the self-sa7?ie point. If we select the centre of .gravity itself as origin, then 2mx = 2my=Q. On turning the system of axes, this relation continues to subsist. If, accordingly, equi- 20 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. eatment the lever modern .ysicists. In the direction here Indicated the Archimedean view certainly remained a serviceable one even after no one longer entertained any doubt of the significance of the product P.L, and after opinion on this point had been established historically and by abundant verifica- tion. (See Appendix, IV., p. 514.) 7'. The manner in which the laws of the lever, as handed down to us from Archimedes in their original simple form, were further generalised and treated by modern physicists, is very interesting and instructive. LEONARDO DA VINCI (1452-1519), the famous painter and investigator, appears to have been the first to rec- ognise the importance of the general notion of the so- B D onardo Vinci c Fig. 13. called statical moments. In the manuscripts he has 52-1519). left us, several passages are found from which this clearly appears. He says, for example : We have a bar AD (Fig. 13) free to rotate about A> and suspended from the bar a weight P, and suspended from a string which passes over a pulley a second weight Q. What must be the ratio of the forces that equilibrium may ob- tain? The lever- arm for the weight P is not AD, but the "potential" lever AB. The lever-arm for the weight <2 is not AD, but the "potential" lever AC, The method by which Leonardo arrived at this view is difficult to discover. But it is clear that he recog- THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS, 21 nised the essential circumstances by which the effect of the weight is determined. Considerations similar to those of Leonardo da Guido UbaldJ Vinci are also found in the writings of GUIDO UBALDI. 8. We will now endeavor to obtain some idea of the way in which the notion of statical moment, by which as we know is understood the product of a force into the perpendicular let fall from the axis of rotation upon the line of direction of the force, could have been arrived at, although the way that really led to this idea is not now fully ascertainable. That equilibrium exists (Fig. 14) if we lay a ^ cord, subjected at both sides to equal tensions, over a pulley, is perceived without difficulty. We shall always find a plane of symmetry for the apparatus the plane which stands at'right angles to the plane of the cord and bisects (EE] the angle made by its two parts. The motion that might be supposed A method 11 i - i -11 -. by which possible cannot in this case be precisely determined or the notion defined by any rule whatsoever : no motion will there- icai mo- ment might fore take place. If we note, now, further, that the mate- have been . 777 arrived at. rial of which the pulley is made is essential only to the extent of determining the form of motion of the points of application of the strings, we shall likewise readily perceive that almost any portion of the pulley may be removed without disturbing the equilibrium of the machine. The rigid radii that lead out to the tan- gential points of the string, are alone essential. We see, thus, that the rigid radii, (or the perpendiculars on the linear directions of the strings) play here a part similar to the lever-arms in the lever of Archimedes. THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. This notion derived from the considera- tion of a. wheel and axle. Let us examine a so-called wheel and axle (Fig. 15) of wheel-radius 2 and axle-radius i, provided re- spectively with the cord-hung loads i and 2 ; an appa- ratus which corresponds in every respect to the lever of Archimedes. If now we place about the axle, in any manner we may choose, a second cord, which we subject at each side to the tension of a weight 2, the second cord will not disturb the equilibrium. It is plain, however, that we are also permitted to regard Fig. 15. ^ Fig. 16. the two pulls marked in Fig. 16 as being in equilib- rium, by leaving the two others, as mutually destruc- tive, out of account. But we arrive in so doing, dis- missing from consideration all unessential features, at the perception that not only the pulls exerted by the weights but also the perpendiculars let fall from the axis on the lines of the pulls, are conditions deter- minative of motion. The decisive factors are, then, the products of the weights into the respective per- pendiculars let fall from the axis on the directions of the pulls ; in other words, the so-called statical mo- ments. The princi- 9. What we have so far considered, is the devel- FeverVn- 6 opment of our knowledge of the principle of the lever, explain" the Quite independently of this was developed the knowl- chines, a edge- of the principle of the inclined plane. It is not necessary, however, for the comprehension of the ma- THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS, chines, to search after a new principle beyond that of the lever ; for the latter is sufficient by itself. Galileo, for example, explains the inclined plane from the lever in the following manner. We have before us (Fig. 17) an inclined plane, on which rests the weight Q, held in equilibrium by the weight P. Gali- leo, now, points out the Fi s- J 7 fact, that it is not requisite that Q should lie directly upon the inclined plane, but that the essential point is rather the form, or character, of the motion of Q. We may, consequently, conceive the weight attached to the bar AC, perpendicular to the inclined plane, and rotatable about C. If then we institute a Galileo's . . explanation very slight rotation about the point C, the weight will of the in- move in the element of an arc coincident with the in-i clined plane. That the path assumes a curve on the motion being continued is of no consequence here, since this further movement does not in the case of equilibrium take place, and the movement of the in- stant alone is decisive. Reverting, however, to the observation before mentioned of Leonardo da Vinci, we readily perceive the validity of the theorem Q. CB = P.CA or Q/P CA/C = ca/&, and thus reach the law of equilibrium on the inclined plane. Once we have reached the principle of the lever, we may, then, easily apply that principle to the comprehension of the other machines. the lever. THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. THE PRINCIPLE OF THE INCLINED PLANE. stevinus i. STEViNUS, or STEViN, (1548-1620) was the first (1548-1620) . . , , . \ , - r -LI first investi- who investigated the mechanical properties of the m- mechanics clined plane , and he did so in an eminently original of the in- _. ._,._. clined manner. If a weight lie (Fig. pane ' 1 8) on a horizontal table, we perceive at once, since the pressure is directly perpendic- ular to the plane of the table, by the principle of symmetry, - l8 - that equilibrium subsists. On a vertical wall, on the other hand, a weight is not at all obstructed in its motion of descent. The inclined plane accordingly will present an intermediate case between these two limiting suppositions. Equilibrium will not exist of itself, as it does on the horizontal support, but it will be maintained by a less weight than that neces- sary to preserve it on the vertical wall. The ascertain- ment of the statical law that obtains in this case, caused the earlier inquirers considerable difficulty. Hismodeof Stevinus's manner of procedure is in substance as reaching its r .- TT . , . , . -^ i law. follows. .He imagines a triangular prism with horizon- tally placed edges, a cross-section of which AJ3C is represented in Fig. 19. For the sake of illustration we will say that AB ' = iBC ; also that AC is, horizon- tal. Over this prism Stevinus lays an endless string on which 14 balls of equal weight are strung and tied at equal distances apart. We can advantageously re- place this string by an endless uniform chain or cord. The chain will either be in equilibrium or it will not. If we assume the latter to be the case, the chain, since THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. the conditions of the event are not altered by its mo- tion, must, when once actually in motion, continue to move for ever, that is, it must present a perpetual mo- tion, which Stevinus deems absurd. Consequently only the first case is conceivable. The chain remains in equi- librium. The symmetrical portion ADC may, there- fore, without disturbing the equilibrium, be removed. The portion AB of the chain consequently balances the portion BC. Hence : on inclined planes of equal heights equal weights act in the inverse proportion of the lengths of the planes. Stevinus's deduction of the law of the in- clined plane. B A Fig. 19. Fig. 20. In the cross-section of the prism in Fig. 20 let us Imagine AC horizontal, BC vertical, and AB = 2.BC; furthermore, the chain-weights Q and P on AB and BC proportional to the lengths ; it will follow then that 26 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. = 2. The generalisation is self-evi- dent. The as- 2. Unquestionably in the assumption from which ofst p eii- ns Stevinus starts, that the endless chain does not move. dScticmT there is contained primarily only a purely instinctive cognition. He feels at once, and we with him, that we have never observed anything like a motion of the kind referred to, that a thing of such a character does not exist. This conviction has so much logical cogency that we accept the conclusion drawn from it respecting the law of equilibrium on the inclined plane without the thought of an objection, although the law if presented as the simple result of experiment, or otherwise put, Their in- would appear dubious. We cannot be surprised at this character, when we reflect that all results of experiment are ob- scured by adventitious circumstances (as friction, etc.), and that every conjecture as to the conditions which are determinative in a given case is liable to error. That Stevinus ascribes to instinctive knowledge of this sort a higher authority than to simple, manifest, direct ob- servation might excite in us astonishment if \ve did not ourselves possess the same inclination. The question accordingly forces itself upon us : Whence does this higher authority come ? If we remember that scientific demonstration, and scientific criticism generally can only have sprung from the consciousness of the individ- ual fallibility of investigators, the explanation is not far Their cog- to seek. We feel clearly, that we ourselves have con- tributed nothing to the creation of instinctive knowl- edge, that we have added to it nothing arbitrarily, but that it exists in absolute independence of our partici- pation. Our mistrust of our own subjective interpre- tation of the facts observed, is thus dissipated. Stevinus's deduction is one of the rarest fossil in- THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 27 dications that we possess in the primitive history of Highhistor- . ical value of mechanics, and throws a wonderful light on the pro- stevinus's r ^ r r ,, . . deduction. cess 01 the formation of science generally, on its rise from instinctive knowledge. We will recall to mind that Archimedes pursued exactly the same tendency as Stevinus, only with much less good fortune. In later times, also, instinctive knowledge is very fre- quently taken as the starting-point of investigations. Every experimenter can daily observe in his own per- son the guidance that instinctive knowledge furnishes him. If he succeeds in abstractly formulating what is contained in it, he will as a rule have made an im- portant advance in science. Stevinus's procedure is no error. If an error were The trust- ,.. T -_....,. . _-... worthiness contained in it, we should all share it. Indeed, it isofinstinc- r , . . tive knowl perfectly certain, that the union of the strongest in- edge, stinct with the greatest power of abstract formulation alone constitutes the great natural inquirer. This by no means compels us, however, to create a new mysti- cism out of the instinctive in science and to regard this factor as infallible. That it is not infallible, we very easily discover. Even instinctive knowledge of so great logical force as the principle of symmetry em- ployed by Archimedes, may lead us astray. Many of my readers will recall to mind, perhaps, the intellectual shock they experienced when they heard for the first time that a magnetic needle lying in the magnetic meridian is deflected in a definite direction away from the meridian by a wire conducting a current being car- ried along in a parallel direction above it. The instinc- tive is just as fallible as the distinctly conscious. Its only value is in provinces with which we are very familiar. Let us rather put to ourselves, in preference to pursuing mystical speculations on this subject, the 28 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The origin question: How does instinctive knowledge originate of instinc- . . tiveknowi- and what are its contents? Everything which we ob- serve in nature imprints itself un 'comprehended and itn- analysed in our percepts and ideas, which, then, in their turn, mimic the processes of nature in their most gen- eral and most striking features. In these accumulated experiences we possess a treasure-store which is ever close at hand and of which only the smallest portion is embodied in clear articulate thought. The circum- stance that it is far easier to resort to these experi- ences than it is to nature herself, and that they are, notwithstanding this, free, in the sense indicated, from all subjectivity, invests them with a high value. It is a peculiar property of instinctive knowledge that it is predominantly of a negative nature. We cannot so well say what must happen as we can what cannot hap- pen, since the latter alone stands in glaring contrast to the obscure mass of experience in us in which single characters are not distinguished. instinctive Still, great as the importance of instinctive knowl- knowledge , . n . and extern- edge may be, lor discovery, we must not, from our mutually point of view, rest content with the recognition of its condition , *,,. . . each other, authority. We must inquire, on the contrary : Under what conditions could the instinctive knowledge in question have originated? We then ordinarily find that the v.ery principle to establish which we had recourse to instinctive knowledge, constitutes in its turn the fun- damental condition of the origin of that knowledge, And this is quite obvious and natural. Our instinctive knowledge leads us to the principle which explains that knowledge itself, and which is in its turn also corrobo- rated by the existence of that knowledge, which is a separate fact by itself. This we will find on close ex- amination is the state of things in Stevinus's case. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 29 3. The reasoning of Stevlnus impresses us as soThemgen- 1-11- i i i i - -, -, uityofSte- nignly ingenious because the result at which he arrives vinus's rea- , . -, . soning. apparently contains more than the assumption from which he starts. While on the one hand, to avoid con- tradictions, we are constrained to let the result pass, on the other an incentive remains which impels us to seek further insight. If Stevinus had distinctly set forth the entire fact in all its aspects, as Galileo subsequently did, his reasoning would no longer strike us as Ingen- ious ; but we should have obtained a much more satis- factory and clear insight Into the matter. In the endless chain which does not glide upon the prism, is contained, in fact, everything. We might say, the chain does not glide because no sinking of heavy bodies takes place here. This would not be accurate, how- ever, for when the chain moves many of its links really do descend, while others rise in their place. We must say, therefore, more accurately, the chain does not glide because for everybody that could possibly de- critique uf & J J J Stevmus's scend an equally heavy body would have to ascend deduction, equally high, or a body of double the weight half the height, and so on. This fact was familiar to Stevinus, who presented it, indeed, in his theory of pulleys ; but he was plainly too distrustful of himself to lay down the law, without additional support, as also valid for the inclined plane. But if such a law did not exist universally, our instinctive knowledge respecting the endless chain could never have originated. With this our minds are completely enlightened. The fact that Stevinus did not go as far as this in his reasoning and rested content with bringing his (indirectly discovered) ideas into agreement with his instinctive thought, need not further disturb us. (See p. 515.) The service which Stevinus renders himself and his 30 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The merit readers, consists, therefore, in the contrast and com- Su?s e proce- parison of knowledge that is instinctive with knowledge dure ' that is clear, in the bringing the two into connection and accord with one another, and in the supporting Fig. 21. the one upon the other. The strengthening of mental view which Stevinus acquired by this procedure, we learn from the fact that a picture of the endless chain and the prism graces as vignette, with the inscription "Wonder en is gheen wonder," the title-page of his THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 31 work Hypomnemata Mathematica (Leyden, 1605).* As Eniighten- r , . , . ment in a fact, every enlightening progress made In science is science ai- accompanied with a certain feeling of disillusionment, compamed TT _ -. . withdisillu We discover that that which appeared wonderful to sionment. us is no more wonderful than other things which we know instinctively and regard as self-evident ; nay, that the contrary would be much more wonderful ; that everywhere the same fact expresses itself. Our puzzle turns out then to be a puzzle no more ; It vanishes into nothingness, and takes its place, among the shadows of history. 4. After he had arrived at the principle of the in-Expiana- ,. , ^ tion of the clmed plane, it was easy for Stevmus to apply that other ma- . , . . , . chines by principle to the other machines and to explain by it stevinus's principle. their action. He makes, for example, the following application. We have, let us suppose, an inclined plane (Fig. 22) and on it a load Q. We pass a string over the pulley A at the summit and imagine the load Q held in equilibrium by the load P. Stevinus, now, proceeds by a method similar to that later taken by Galileo. He remarks that It is not ne- cessary that the load Q should lie directly on the inclined plane. Provided Fig. 22 only the form of the machine's motion be preserved, the proportion between force and load will in all cases re- main the same. We may therefore equally well conceive the load Q to be attached to a properly weighted string passing over a pulley D: which string is normal to the *The title given is that of Willebrord Snell's Latin translation (1608) of Simon Stevin's Wisconstige Gedachtenissen^ Leyden, 1605. Trans. THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The funic li- ter-machine And the special case of the paral- lelogram of forces. The general form of the last-men- tioned prin- ciple also employed. inclined plane. If we carry out this alteration, we shall have a so-called funicular machine. We now perceive that we can ascertain very easily the portion of weight with which the body on the inclined plane tends downwards. We have only to draw a vertical line and to cut off on it a portion ab corresponding to the load Q. Then drawing on aA the perpendicular be, we have P/Q = AC JAB = ac/ab. Therefore ac represents the tension of the string aA. Nothing pre- vents us, now, from making the two strings change functions and from imagining the load Q to lie on the dotted inclined plane EDF. Similarly, here, we ob- tain ad for the tension of the second string. In this manner, accordingly, Stevinus indirectly arrives at a knowledge of the statical relations of the funicular machine and of the so-called parallelogram of forces ; at first, of course, only for the particular case of strings (or forces) ac, ad at right angles to one another. Subsequently, indeed, Stevinus employs the prin- ciple of the composition and resolution of forces in a more general form ; yet the method by which he X Fig. 23. Fig. 24. reached the principle, is not very clear, or at least is not obvious. He remarks, for example, that if we have three strings AB y AC, AD, stretched at any THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 33 given angles, and the weight P is suspended from the first, the tensions may be determined in the following manner. We produce (Fig. 23) AB to X and cut off on it a portion AE. Drawing from the point E, EF parallel to AD and EG paral- lel to A C, the tensions of AB, AC, AD are respectively pro- portional to AE, AJF, A G. With the assistance of this principle of construction Ste- vinus solves highly compli- o o Fig. 25- O pr ems< cated problems. He determines, for instance, the solution of tensions of a system of ramifying strings like that pH C illustrated in Fig. 24; in doing which of course he starts from the given tension of the vertical string. The relations of the tensions of a funicular polygon are likewise ascertained by construction, in the man- ner indicated in Fig. 25. We may therefore, by means of the principle of the General re- inclined plane, seek to elucidate the conditions of op- eration of the other simple machines, in a manner sim- ilar to that which we employed in the case of the prin- ciple of the lever. THE PRINCIPLE OF THE COMPOSITION OF FORCES. i. The principle of the parallelogram of forces, at The which STEVINUS arrived and employed, (yet without ex- pressly formulating it,) consists, as we know, of the following truth. If a body A (Fig. 26") is acted upon by two forces whose directions coincide with the lines AB and A C, and whose magnitudes are proportional to the lengths AB and AC, these two forces produce the ;ram of forces. 34 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Flg< same effect as a single force, which acts In the direction of the diagonal AD of the parallelogram A BCD and is proportional to that diagonal. For instance, if on the strings AB, AC weights exactly proportional to the lengths AB, AC be sup- posed to act, a single weight acting on the string ^Z>exactlyproportional to the length AD will produce the same effect as the first two. The forces AB and AC are called the compo- nents, the force AD the resultant. It is furthermore obvious, that conversely, a single force is replaceable by two or several other forces. Method by 2. We shall now endeavor, in connection with the which the . . . general no- investigations of Stevmus, to give ourselves some idea tion of the . . ..... of the manner in which the general proposition of the parallelogram of forces might have been arrived at. The relation, dis- covered by Stevinus, that exists between two mutually perpendicular forces and a third force that equilibrates them, we shall assume as (indi- rectly) given. We sup- pose now (Fig. 27) that there act on three strings Fig ' 27 ' OX, OY, O2, pulls which balance each other. Let us endeavor to determine the nature of these pulls. Each pull holds the two remain- ing ones in equilibrium. The pull OYwe will replace parallelo- gram of forces might have been ar- rived at. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 35 (following Stevinus's principle") by two new rectangular The deduc- . ,. . ' don of the pulls, one in the direction Ou (the prolongation of general OX}, and one at right angles thereto in the direction from the Ov, And let us similarly resolve the pull OZ in theofstevinus. directions Ou and Ow. The sum of the pulls in the di- rection Ou, then, must balance the pull OX, and the two pulls in the directions Ov and Ow must mutually destroy each other. Taking the two latter as equal and opposite, and representing them by Om and On, we determine coincidently with the operation the com- ponents Op and Oq parallel to Ott, as well also as the pulls Or, Os. Now the sum Op + Oq is equal and op- posite to the pull in the direction of OX; and if we draw sf parallel to O Y, or rt parallel to OZ, either line will cut off the portion Ot = Op + Oq : with which re- sult the general principle of the parallelogram of forces is reached. The general case of composition may be deduced A different .,, . .. , . . . . .mode of the in still another way from the special composition of same de- rectangular forces. Let OA and OB be the two forces acting at O. For OB substitute a force OC acting parallel to OA and a force OD acting at right angles to OA. There then act for OA and OB the two forces OE = OA + OC and OD, the resultant of which forces OF is at the same time the diagonal of the parallelogram OAFB con- structed on OA and OB as sides. 3. The principle of the parallelogram of forces, The prin- ^ JT JT j. ^ ^ ciple here when reached by the method of Stevinus, presents it- presents it- ... self as an self as an indirect discovery. It is exhibited as a con- indirect discovery* sequence and as the condition of known facts. We perceive, however, merely that it does exist, not, as yet Fig> 28< THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. And is first why it exists ; that is, we cannot reduce it (as in dy- en 6 ifnciated namics} to still simpler propositions. In statics, in- by Newton and Vang- deed, the principle was not fully admitted until the time of Varignon, when dynamics, which leads directly to the principle, was already so far advanced that its adoption therefrom presented no difficulties. The prin- ciple of the parallelogram of forces was first clearly enunciated by NEWTON in his Principles of Natural Phi- losophy. In the same year, VARIGNON, independently of Newton, also enunciated the principle, in a work sub- mitted to the Paris Academy (but not published un- til after its author's death), and made, by the aid of a geometrical theorem, extended practical application of it.* The geometrical theorem referred to is this. If we consider (Fig. 29) a parallelogram the sides of which are/ and q, and the diagonal is r, and from any point m in the plane of the par- allelogram w r e draw per- pendiculars on these three straight lines, which perpendiculars we will designate as ?/, 7;, w, then p . u -\- q . v = r . w. This is easity proved by draw- ing straight lines from ;// The geo- metrical theorem employed by Varig- non. Fig. 29. Fig, 30. to the extremities of the diagonal and of the sides of the parallelogram, and considering the areas of the triangles thus formed, which are equal to the halves of the products specified. If the point m be taken within the parallelogram and perpendiculars then be to his * In the same year, 1687, Father Bernard Lami published, a little appendix lis TraztS de mechanigue> developing the same principle. Trans. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS, 37 drawn, the theorem passes into the form f ,u q . v = r . w. Finally, if m be taken on the diagonal and perpendiculars again be drawn, we shall get, since the perpendicular let fall on the diagonal is now zero, p. u q . v = or p . u = q . v. With the assistance of the observation that forces The deduc- are proportional to the motions produced by them in equal intervals of time, Varignon easily advances from the composition of motions to the composition of forces. Forces, which acting at a point are represented in magnitude and direction by the sides of a parallelo- gram, are replaceable by a single iorce, similarly rep- resented by the diagonal of that parallelogram. If now, in the parallelogram considered,/ and ^Moments of represent the concurrent forces (the components) and r forces - the force competent to take their place (the resultant), then the products pu, qv, rw are called the moments of these forces with respect to the point m. If the point m lie in the direction of the resultant, the two moments pu and qv are with respect to it equal to each other. 4. With the assistance of this principle Varignon is varig now in a position to treat the machines in 'a much simpler manner than were his predecessors. Let us consider, for example, (Fig. 31) a rigid body capable of rotation about an axis passing through O. Perpendicular to the axis we conceive a plane, and select therein two Flg ' 3I " points A 9 B, on which two forces P and Q in the plane are supposed to act. We recognise with Varignon 38 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The deduc- that the effect of the forces is not altered if their points law of the of application be displaced along their line of action, lever from . ,, . , i- ji the parai- since all points in the same direction are rigidly con- principle, nected with one another and each one presses and pulls the other. We may, accordingly, suppose P applied at any point in the direction A X, and Q at any point in the direction BY, consequently also at their point of intersection M. With the forces as displaced to Jlf, then, we construct a parallelogram, and replace the forces by their resultant. We have now to do only with the effect of the latter. If it act only on movable points, equilibrium will not obtain. If, however, the direction of its action pass through the axis, through the point (9, which is not movable, no motion can take place and equilibrium will obtain. In the latter case O is a point on the resultant, and if we drop the per- pendiculars u and v from O on the directions of the forces p) q, we shall have, in conformity with the the- orem before mentioned, / - ?/ = q v. With this we have deduced the law of the lever from the principle of the parallelogram of forces. The statics Varignon explains in like manner a number of other adyn a amicai cases of equilibrium by the equilibration of the result- ant force by some obstacle or restraint. On the in- clined plane, for example, equilibrium exists if the re- sultant is found to be at right angles to the plane. In fact, Varignon rests statics in its entirety on a dynamic foundation ; to his mind, it is but a special case of dy- namics. The more general dynamical case constantly hovers before him and he restricts himself in his inves- tigation voluntarily to the case of equilibrium. We are confronted here with a dynamical statics, such as was possible only after the researches of Galileo. Incidentally, it may be remarked, that from Varignon THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS, 39 is derived the majority of the theorems and methods of presentation which make up the statics of modern elementary text-books. 5. As we have already seen, purely statical consid- Special 11-, i - - , , 11 i statical con- erations also lead to the proposition of the parallel- siderations r r . . . . also lead to ogram of forces. In special cases, in fact, the principle the pnn- admits of being very easily verified. We recognise at once, for instance, that any number whatsoever of equal forces acting (by pull or pressure) in the same plane at a point, around which their suc- cessive lines make equal angles, are in equilibrium. If, for exam- ple, (Fig. 32) the three equal forces OA, OB, OC act on the point O at angles of 120, each two of the forces holds the third in equilibrium. We see imme- diately that the resultant of OA and OB is equal and opposite to OC. It is represented by OD and is at the same time the diagonal of the parallelogram OAJDB, which readily follows from the fact that the radius of a circle is also the side of the hexagon included by it. 6. If the concurrent forces act in the same or in The case of opposite directions, the resultant is equal to the sum forces en or the difference of the mere y a components. We rec- ognise both cases with- out any difficulty as particular cases of the principle of the paral- lelogram of forces. If in the two drawings of Fig. 33 we imagine the angle A OB to be gradually reduced to the value o, and the angle A' O r B' increased to the Fig. 32. particular caste of the general principle. 0' Fig. 33- 40 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. . value 1 80, we shall perceive that O C passes into OA -j- AC = OA + OB and O' C" into O' A' A f C = O f A f O' B'. The principle of the parallelogram of forces includes, accordingly, propositions which are generally made to precede it as independent theorems. The princi- j. The principle of the parallelogram of forces, in shionde- the form in which it was set forth by Newton and rived from . . experience. Vangnon, clearly discloses itself as a proposition de- rived from experience. A point acted on by two forces describes with accelerations proportional to the forces two mutually independent motions. On this fact the parallelogram construction is based. DANIEL BER- NOULLI, however, was of opinion that the proposition of the parallelogram of forces was a geometrical truth, in- dependent of physical experience. And he attempted to furnish for it a geometrical demonstration, the chief' features of which we shall here take into consideration, as the Bernoullian view has not, even at the present day, entirely disappeared. Daniel Ber- If two equal forces, at right angles to each other tempted f (Fig. 34), act on a point, there can be no doubt, ac- demonstra-' n cording to Bernoulli, that the line tion of the n+ *& <7 . . . . - , , truth. ' /\\\ * bisection of the angle (con- formably to the principle of sym- metry) is the direction of the re- sultant r. To determine geomet- rically also the magnitude of the resultant, each of the forces p is Flg 34> decomposed into two equal forces q, parallel and perpendicular to r. The relation in respect of magnitude thus produced between / and q is consequently the same as that between r and /. We have, accordingly : p = j2 . q and r = ^ . p\ whence r = ^q. THE PRINCIPLES OF STA TICS. 41 Since, however, the forces q acting at right angles to r destroy each other, while those parallel to r con- stitute the resultant, it further follows that r = Zq\ hence jj. T/2, and r = ]/2~. p. The resultant, therefore, is represented also in re- spect of magnitude by the diagonal of the square con- structed on p as side. Similarly, the magnitude maybe determined of the The case of resultant of unequal rectangular components. Here, rectangular i , -i , IP components however, nothing is known before- * hand concerning the direction of the resultant r. If we decompose ^ ' ^ ' the components p, q (Fig. 35), parallel and perpendicular to the yet undetermined direction r, into the forces u 9 s and v, /, the new forces will form with the compo- V nents p, q the same angles that p, Flg> 35 ' q form with r. From which fact the following relations in respect of magnitude are determined : r p r q r p r q - and = , ="- and = , p u q v q s p t from which two latter equations follows s = t =pqjr. On the other hand, however, z> 2 <? 2 r = u + V = + - or r* =p* -f g*. The diagonal of the rectangle constructed on p and q represents accordingly the magnitude of the result- ant. Therefore, for all rhombs, the direction of the re- General re sultant is determined ; for all rectangles, the magni- tude; and for squares both magnitude and direction. Bernoulli then solves the problem of substituting for 42 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. two equal forces acting at one given angle, other equal, equivalent forces acting at a different angle ; and finally arrives by circumstantial considerations, not wholly exempt from mathematical objections, but amended later by Poisson, at the general principle. Critique of 8. Let us now examine the physical aspect of this Bernoulli's . . . . . . method. question. As a proposition derived irom experience, the principle of the parallelogram of forces was already known to Bernoulli. What Bernoulli really does, there- fore, is to simulate towards himself a complete ignorance of the proposition and then attempt to philosophise it abstractly out of the fewest possible assumptions. Such work is by no means devoid of meaning and pur- pose. On the contrary, we discover by such proce- dures, how few and how imperceptible the experiences are that suffice to supply a principle. Only we must not deceive ourselves, as Bernoulli did ; we must keep before our minds all the assumptions, and should over- look no experience which we involuntarily employ. What are the assumptions, then, contained in Bernoul- li's deduction? The as- 9. Statics, primarily, is acquainted with force only of w^de 1 - 8 as a pull or a pressure, that from whatever source it rivedfrom e ?rnay come always admits of being replaced by the pull experience, or ^ p ressure of a weight. All forces thus may be re- garded as quantities of the same kind &s\& be measured by weights. Experience further instructs us, that the particular factor of a force which is determinative of equilibrium or determinative of motion, is contained not only in the magnitude of the force but also in its direction, which is made known by the direction of the resulting motion, by the direction of a stretched cord, or in some like manner. We may ascribe magnitude indeed to other things given in physical experience, THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 43 such as temperature, potential function, but not direc- tion. The fact that both magnitude and direction are determinative in the efficiency of a force impressed on a point is an important though it may be an unob- trusive experience. Granting, then, that the magnitude and direction Magnitude c f , . ,...., and direc- oi forces impressed on a point alone are decisive, it will tion the sole be perceived that two equal and opposite forces, as they factors. cannot uniquely and precisely determine any motion, are in equilibrium. So, also, at right angles to its direction, a force/ is unable uniquely to de- termine a motional effect. But - if a force p is inclined at an an- gle to another direction ss' (Fig. 36), it is able to determine a mo- _ tion in that direction. Yet ex- s> perience alone can inform us, lg> 3 ' that the motion is determined in the direction of s's and not in that of ss' ; that is to say, in the direction of the side of the acute angle or in the direction of the projection of/ on s's. Now this latter experience is made use of by noulli at the very start. The sense, namely, of the re- derivable sultant of two equal forces acting at right angles to one experience. another is obtainable only on the ground of this expe- rience. From the principle of symmetry follows only, that the resultant falls in the plane of the forces and coincides with the line of bisection of the angle, not however that it falls in the acute angle. But if we sur- render this latter determination, our whole proof is ex- ploded before it is begun. 10. If, now, we have reached the conviction that our knowledge of the effect of the direction of a force is 44 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. So also solely obtainable from experience, still less then shall must the . . . form of the we believe it in our power to ascertain by any other way thusde- the/0r/# of this effect. It is utterly out of our power, to divine, that a force p acts in a direction s that makes with its own direction the angle a, exactly as a force / cos a in the direction s ; a statement equivalent to the proposition of the parallelogram of forces. Nor was it in Bernoulli's power to do this. Nevertheless, he makes use, scarcely perceptible it is true, of expe- riences that involve by implication this very mathe- matical fact. The man- A person already familiar with the composition which the and resolution of forces is well aware that several forces assump- tions men- acting at a point are. as regards their effect, replaceable, tionedenter to r ' ,. ... into Ber- m every respect and in every direction, by a single force. noulli's de- J J > J ^ auction. This knowledge, in Bernoulli's mode of proof, is ex- pressed in the fact that the forces p, q are regarded as absolutely qualified to replace in all respects the forces s, u and /, v, as well in the direction of r as in every other direction. Similarly r is regarded as the equiv- alent of / and q. It is further assumed as wholly in- different, whether we estimate s, u, /, v first in the directions of/, q, and then/, q in the direction of r, or s, u, t, v be estimated directly and from the outset in the direction of r. But this is something that a person only can know who has antecedently acquired a very extensive experience concerning the composition and resolution of forces. We reach most simply the knowl- edge of the fact referred to, by starting from the knowl- edge of another fact, namely that a force / acts in a direction making with its own an angle a, with an effect equivalent to p cos a. As a fact, this is the way the perception of the truth was reached. Let the coplanar forces P 9 P' } P". . . be applied to THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 45 one and the same point at the angles a, a', a" . . . with Mathemat- .!_. & icalanaly- a given direction A. These forces, let us suppose, are sis of the ; results of replaceable by a single force 77, which makes with X the true and an angle /r. By the familiar principle we have then assumption. If U is still to remain the substitute of this system of forces, whatever direction X may take on the system being turned through any angle d, we shall further have 2P cos (a+ d-)=n cos O + tf), or (ISPcosa 77cos//) cosd (2Psmtx 77 sin/*) sin# = 0. If we put cosar IJcosju = ^f, 71 sin//) = ^, it follows that ^ cosd + B sind = VA* + B* sin (<? + r) = 0, which equation can subsist for <?z/^ (5 1 only on the con- dition that A = ^Pcos^ 77 cos/* = and J? = (2-P sin 71 sinyu) = whence results TTcos/j = From these equations follow for 71 and /* the deter- minate values _ and ~P sma 46 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The actual Granting, therefore, that the effect of a force In every results not . 11- deducibie direction can be measured by its projection on that di- on any . other sup- rection, then truly every system of forces acting at a position. . ' , , r i point is replaceable by a single force, determinate in magnitude and direction. This reasoning does not hold, however, if we put in the place of cos a any general func- tion of an angle, cp (a). Yet if this be done, and we still regard the resultant as determinate, we shall obtain for <p(pt), as may be seen, for example, from Poisson's deduction, the form cosar. The experience that several forces acting at a point are always, in every respect, replaceable by a single force, is therefore mathemat- ically equivalent to the principle of the parallelogram of forces or to the principle of projection. The prin- ciple of the parallelogram or of projection is, how- ever, much easier reached by observation than the General re- more general experience above mentioned by statical mar s ' observations. And as a fact, the principle of the par- allelogram was reached earlier. It would require in- deed an almost superhuman power of 'perception to deduce mathematically, without the guidance of any further knowledge of the actual conditions of the ques- tion, the principle of the parallelogram from the gen- eral principle of the equivalence of several forces to a single one. We criticise accordingly in the deduction of Bernoulli this, that that which is easier to observe is reduced to that which is more difficult to observe. This is a violation of the economy of science. Bernoulli is also deceived in imagining that he does not proceed from any fact whatever of observation. AH addi- We must further remark that the fact that the forces tional as- ... - . - ,.....,. sumption of are independent of one another, which is involved in the law of their composition, is another experience which Bernoulli throughout tacitly employs. As long THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 47 as we have to do with uniform or symmetrical systems of forces, all equal in magnitude, each can be affected by the others, even if they are not independent, only to the same extent and in the same way. Given but three forces, however, of which two are symmetrical to the third, and even then the reasoning, provided we admit that the forces may not be independent, pre- sents considerable difficulties. 11. Once we have been led, directly or indirectly, Discussion to the principle of the parallelogram of forces, once weacterof the have perceived it, the principle is just as much an ob- prm lpe ' servation as any other. If the observation is recent, it of course is not accepted with the same confidence as old and frequently verified observations. We then seek to support the new observation by the old, to demon- strate their agreement. By and by the new observa- tion acquires equal standing with the old. It is then no longer necessary constantly to reduce it to the lat- ter. Deduction of this character is expedient only in cases in which observations that are difficult directly to obtain can be reduced to simpler ones more easily obtained, as is done with the principle of the parallel- ogram of forces in dynamics. 12. The proposition of the parallelogram of forces Experimen- has also been illustrated by experiments especially tion of the , ^ j. j * -LI A . 11 principle by instituted for the purpose. An apparatus very wellacontriv- adapted to this end was contrived by Cauchy. The Cauchy. centre of a horizontal divided circle (Fig. 37) is marked by a pin. Three threads /,/',/", tied together at a point, are passed over grooved wheels r, /, r" 9 which can be fixed at any point in the circumference of the circle, and are loaded by the weights /, /', p" . If three equal weights be attached, for instance, and the wheels placed at the marks of division o, 120, 240, the point at THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Experimen- which the strings are knotted will assume a position tfonofVhe" just above the centre of the circle. Three equal forces pnncip e. ac ^ n g at an g} es o f j2o, accordingly, are in equilib- rium. Fig. 37. If we wish to represent another and different case, we may proceed as follows. We imagine any two forces p, q acting at any angle a, represent (Fig. 38) them by lines, and construct on them as sides a paral- lelogram. We supply, further, a force equal and opposite to the resultant ;-. The three forces /, q, r hold each other in equilibrium, at the angles vis- ible from the construction. We now place the wheels of the divided circle on the points of division o, a, a -f- /I, and load the appropriate strings with the weights/, q, r. . The point at which the strings are knotted will come to a position exactly above the middle point of the circle. Fig. 38. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. THE PRINCIPLE OF VIRTUAL VELOCITIES. i. We now pass to the discussion of the principle The truth of virtual (possible) displacements.* The truth of cipie first . _ remarked this principle was first remarked by STEVINUS at the by stevinus close of the sixteenth century in his investigations on the equilibrium of pulleys and combinations of pulleys. Stevinus treats combinations of pulleys in the same way they are treated at the present day. In the case * Termed in English the principle of "virtual velocities," this being the original phrase (vitesse virtuelle) introduced by John Bernoulli. See the text, page 56. The word virtualis seems to have been the fabrication of Duns Scotus (see the Century Dictionary, under virtual'] ; but virtualiter was used by Aquinas, and virtus had been employed for centuries to translate 6'vvajLU t and therefore as a synonym for potentia. Along with many other scholastic terms, virtual passed into the ordinary vocabulary of the English language. Everybody remembers the passage in the third book of Paradise Lost, " Love not the heav'nly Spirits, and how thir Love Express they, by looks oncly, or do they mix Irradiance, virtual or immediate touch ? " Milton, So, we all remember how it was claimed before our revolution that America had " virtual representation " in parliament. In these passages, as in Latin, virtual means : existing in effect, but not actually. In the same sense, the word passed into French ; and was made pretty common among philosophers by Leibnitz. Thus, he calls innate ideas in the mind of a child, not yet brought to consciousness, " des connoissances vtrtuelles." The principle in question was an extension to the case of more than two forces of the old rule that "what a machine gains in power, it loses in -velocity. ,' Bernoulli's modification reads that the sum of the products of the forces into their virtual velocities must vanish to give equilibrium. He says, in effect : give the system any possible and infinitesimal motion you please, and then the simultaneous displacements of the points of application of the forces, resolved in the directions of those forces, though they are not exactly velocities, since they are only displacements in one time, are, nevertheless, virtually velocities, for the purpose of applying the rule that what a machine gains in power, it loses in velocity. Thomson and Tait say : " If the point of application of a force be dis- placed through a small space, the resolved part of the displacement in the di- rection of the force has been called its Virtual Velocity, This is positive or negative according as the virtual velocity is in the same, or in the opposite, direction to that of the force." This agrees with Bernoulli's definition which may be found in Varignon's Nouvelle mecanique. Vol. II, Chap. is. Trans. THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. stevinus's a (Fig. 39) equilibrium obtains, when an equal weight P tions on^the is suspended at each side, for reasons already familiar, of puiieys. m In &, the weight P is suspended by two parallel cords, d d p P Fig- 39- each of which accordingly supports the weight P/2, with which weight in the case of equilibrium the free end of the cord must also be loaded. In c, P is sus- pended by six cords, and the weighting of the free ex- tremity with P/6 will accordingly produce equilibrium. In d, the so-called Archimedean or potential pulley,* P in the first instance is suspended by two cords, each of which supports P/2 ; one of these two cords in turn is suspended by two others, and so on to the end, so that the free extremity will be held in equilibrium by the weight P/S. If we impart to these assemblages of pulleys displacements corresponding to a descent of the weight P through the distance k, we shall observe that as a result of the arrangement of the cords the counterweight P ' P/2 P/6 " " P/8 will ascend a distance h in a 6/1 8/1 c d * These terms are not in use in English. Trans. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 51 In a system of pulleys in equilibrium, therefore, His conciu- ,, , - , . , - sions the the products of the weights into the displacements germ of the they sustain are respectively equal. (" Ut spatium P " agentis ad spatium patientis, sic potentia patientis ad potentiam agentis." Stevini, Hypomnemata, T. IV, lib. 3, p. 172.) In this remark is contained the germ of the principle of virtual displacements. 2. GALILEO recognised the truth of the principle in Galileo's recognition another case, and that a somewhat more general one ; of the pnn- . .. . cipleinthe namely, in its application to the inclined plane. On case of the . .. j _. inclined an inclined plane (Fig. 40), plane, the length of which AB is double the height BC, a load Q placed on AB is held in equilibrium by the load P act- ing along the height BC> if P = <2/2. If the machine be Fig> 4 ' set in motion, P = Q/2 will descend, say, the vertical distance 7z, and Q will ascend the same distance h along the incline AB. Galileo, now, allowing the phenom- enon to exercise its full effect on his mind, perceives, that equilibrium is determined not by the weights alone but also by their possible approach to and reces- sion from the centre of the earth. Thus, while Q/2 de- scends along the vertical height the distance h, Q as- cends h along the inclined length, vertically, however, only h/2 j the result being that the products Q(/i/2) and (<2/2)/z corae out equal on both sides. The eluci- dation that Galileo's observation affords and the light character . -... i ji i_ i j , i i of Galileo's it diffuses, can hardly be emphasised strongly enough, observation The observation is so natural and unforced, moreover, that we admit it at once. What can appear simpler than that no motion takes place in a system of heavy 52 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. bodies when on the whole no heavy mass can descend. Such a fact appears instinctively acceptable. Comparison Galileo's conception of the inclined plane strikes of it with . . thatofste- us as much less ingenious than that of Stevmus, but vinus. . 1 we recognise it as more natural and more profound. It is in this fact that Galileo discloses such scientific great- ness : that he had the intellectual audacity to see, in a subject long before investigated, more than his prede- cessors had seen, and to trust to his own perceptions. With the frankness that was characteristic of him he unreservedly places before the reader his own view, together with the considerations that led him to it. The Tom- 3. ToRRiCELLi, by the employment of the notion of form of the "centre of gravity." has put Galileo's principle in a principle. form in which it appeals still more to our instincts, but in which it is also incidentally applied by Galileo him- self. According to Torricelli equilibrium exists in a machine when, on a displacement being imparted to it, the centre of gravity of the weights attached thereto cannot descend. On the supposition of a displacement in the inclined plane last dealt with, P, let us say, de- scends the distance h, in compensation wherefor Q vertically ascends h . sin a. Assuming that the centre of gravity does not descend, we shall have P./iQ./isma . - __^_ - o, or P. h Q. h sin a = 0, or If the weights bear to one another some different pro- portion, then the centre of gravity can descend when a displacement is made, and equilibrium will not obtain. We expect the state of equilibrium instinctively* when the centre of gravity of a system of heavy bodies can- THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS, 53 not descend. The Torricellian form of expression, how- ever, contains in no respect more than the Galilean. 4. As with systems of pulleys and with the inclined The appii- plane, so also the validity of the principle of virtual the princi- displacements is easily demonstrable for the other ma- other ma- chines : for the lever, the wheel and axle, and the rest. In a wheel and axle, for instance, with the radii R, r and the respective weights P, Q, equilibrium exists, as we know, when PR~ Qr. If we turn the wheel and axle through the angle a, P will descend Ra, and Q will ascend ra. According to the conception of Stevinus and Galileo, when equilibrium exists, P. Ra = Q . ra, which equation expresses the same thing as the preceding one. 5. When we compare a system of heavy bodies inxhecrite- , . , . , , . , . , ., rion of the which motion is taking place, with a similar system state of - . , . . .,., . , . - . equilibrium which is in equilibrium, the question forces itself upon us : What constitutes the difference of the two cases? What is the factor operative here that determines mo- tion, the factor that disturbs equilibrium, the factor that is present in the one case and absent in the other? Having put this question to himself, Galileo discovers that not only the weights, but also the distances of their vertical descents (the amounts of their vertical displacements) are the factors that determine motion. Let us call P, P ', P" . . . the weights of a system of heavy bodies, and //, ti, h" . . . their respective, simul- taneously possible vertical displacements, where dis- placements downwards are reckoned as positive, and displacements upwards as negative. Galileo finds then, that the criterion or test of the state of equilib- rium is contained in the fulfilment of the condition Ph + P ti + P" h" + . . . = 0. The sum Ph -f P'h' _^_ /> ? '//'_|_ ... is the factor that destroys equilibrium, 54 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. the factor that determines motion. Owing to its im- portance this sum has in recent times been character- ised by the special designation work. There is no 6. Whereas the earlier investigators, in the compari- our choice son of cases of equilibrium and cases of motion, directed of the cri- . . . .,. teria. their attention to the weights and their distances trom the axis of rotation and recognised the statical mo- ments as the decisive factors involved, Galileo fixes his attention on the weights and their distances of de- scent and discerns work as the decisive factor involved. It cannot of course be prescribed to the inquirer what mark or criterion of the condition of equilibrium he shall take account of, when several are present to choose from. The result alone can determine whether his choice is the right one. But if we cannot, for rea- Andaiiare sons already stated, regard the significance of the stat- from the ical moments as given independently of experience, as source. something self-evident, no more can we entertain this view with respect to the import of work. Pascal errs, and many modern inquirers share this error with him, when he says, on the occasion of applying the principle of virtual displacements to fluids : ' ' Etant clair que c'est la meme chose de faire faire un pouce de chemin a cent livres d'eau, que de faire faire cent ponces de chemin a une livre d'eau." This is correct only on the suppo- sition that we have already come to recognise work as the decisive factor ; and that it is so is a fact which experience alone can disclose, illustration If we have an equal- armed, equally- weigh ted lever ofthepre- 1 . .... . Ceding re- betore us, we recognise the equilibrium of the lever as the only effect that is uniquely determined, whether we regard the weights and the distances or the weights and the vertical displacements as the conditions that determine motion. Experimental knowledge of this THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 55 or a similar character must, however, in the necessity of the case precede any judgment of ours with regard to the phenomenon in question. The particular way in which the disturbance of equilibrium depends on the conditions mentioned, that is to say, the significance of the statical moment (-PZ) or of the work (P/i), is even less capable of being philosophically excogitated than the general fact of the dependence. 7. When two equal weights with equal and op- Reduction posite possible displacements are opposed to each erai case of , . , - -...., theprinci- other, we recognise at once the subsistence of equilib- pie to the . - simpler and num. We might now be tempted to reduce the more special case general case of the weights P, P' with the capacities of displacement^,^', where Ph = P'k' ', to the sim- pler case. Suppose we have, for example, (Fig. 41) the weights 3 P and 4 P on a wheel and axle with the radii 4 and 3. We divide the weights into equal portions of the definite magnitude P 9 which we designate by a, I, c, d> e > f> We then transport a, b, c to the level -f- 3, and d, e, f to the level 3. The weights will, of themselves, neither enter on this displacement nor will they resist it. We then take simultaneously the weight g at the level and the weight a at the level -(- 3, push the first upwards to i and the second downwards to -f- 4, then again, and in the same way, g to 2 and b to -\- 4, g to - 3 and c to + 4- To all these displacements the weights offer no resistance, nor do they produce them of themselves. Ultimately, however, a, b, c (or 3/>) appear at the level + 4 and a b Q. mw/m r-3 <> t I tsfy>/ ^ _ fe tffiy. %&'< ^ W%^/fffiM^,w2!f(A ( ) 1 * / g + 2 a + 3 J + 4. 56 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The gen- d, <f, f, g (or 4^) at the level 3. Consequently, ' with respect also to the last-mentioned total displace- ment, the weights neither produce it of themselves ,nor do they resist it ; that is to say, given the ratio of displacement here specified, and the weights will be in equilibrium. The equation 4 . $P 3 . ^P = is, therefore, characteristic of equilibrium in the case as- sumed. The generalisation (Ph P'h' = 0) is ob- vious. Thecondi- If we carefully examine the reasoning of this case, character we shall quite readily perceive that the inference in- ence. em er ~ volved cannot be drawn unless we take for granted that the order of the operations performed and the path by which the transferences are effected, are indifferent, that is unless we have previously discerned that work is determinative. We should commit, if we accepted this inference, the same error that Archimedes com- mitted in his deduction of the law of the lever ; as has been set forth at length in a preceding section and need not in the present case be so exhaustively dis- cussed. Nevertheless, the reasoning we have pre- sented is useful, in the respect that it brings palpably home to the mind the relationship of the simple and the complicated cases. Theuniyer- 8. The universal applicability of the principle of bfiifjPot The virtual displacements to all cases of equilibrium, was firmer- 6 perceived by JOHN BERNOULLI ; who communicated his jolmBe* discovery to Varignon in a letter written in 1717. We will now enunciate the principle In its most general form. At the points A, J3, C . . . (Fig. 42) the forces P, P'j P" . . . are applied. Impart to the points any Infinitely small displacements v, ?', r" . . . compatible with the character of the connections of the points (so- called virtual displacements), and construct the pro- THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 57 jections /, /', p" of these displacements on the direc- General p j_i r /- i enunciati tions ot the iorces. These projections we consider of the pri positive when they fall in the direction of the force, ^ ^ - and negative when they fall in the opposite direction. The products Pp, P'/, P"/', . . . are called virtual moments, and in the two cases just mentioned have Fig. 42. contrary signs. Now, the principle asserts, that for the case of equilibrium Pp + P' p' + P" p" -)-... 0, or more briefly ^Pp = 0. g. Let us now examine a few points more in detail. Detailed T> . XT r 1 ,1 exarnina- Previous to Newton a force was almost universally tion of the conceived simply as the pull or the pressure of a heavy pnncip e ' body. The mechanical researches of this period dealt almost exclusively with heavy bodies. When, now, in the Newtonian epoch, the generalisation of the idea of force was effected, all mechanical principles known to be applicable to heavy bodies could be transferred at once to any forces whatsoever. It was possible to replace every force by the pull of a heavy body on a string. In this sense we may also apply the principle of virtual displacements, at first discovered only for heavy bodies, to any forces whatsoever. Virtual displacements are displacements consistent Definition . of virtual with the character of the connections oi a system and dispiace- with one another. If, for example, the two points of a system, A and B } at which forces act, are connected (Fig. 43, i) by a rectangularly bent lever, free to re- volve about C, then, if C = zCA, all virtual dis- placements of B and A are elements of the arcs of cir- cles having C as centre ; the displacements of B are 58 THE SCIENCE' OF MECHANICS. always double the displacements of A, and both are in every case at right angles to each other. If the points A, B (Fig. 43, 2) be connected by a thread of the length n /, adjusted to slip through to r stationary rings at C and Z>, 1 / \ then all those displacements (^ 2 t ^ an< 3 -& 2- re virtual in Fig. 43. which the points referred to move upon or within two spherical surfaces described with the radii r^ and r 2 about C and D as centres, where r 1 + r 2 + CD = L The reason The use of infinitely small displacements instead of for the use /..,,., T ^ ,, j of m&mteiyjimfe displacements, such as Galileo assumed, is justi- piacements. fied by the following consideration. If two weights are in equilibrium on an inclined plane (Fig. 44), the equilibrium will not be disturbed if the inclined plane, at points at which it is not in immediate contact with the bodies considered, passes into a surface of a different form. The essential condition is, therefore, the momentary possibility of dis- Fig. 44. placement in the momentary con- figuration of the system. To judge of equilibrium we must assume displacements vanishingly small and such only ; as otherwise the system might be carried over into an entirely different adjacent configuration, for which perhaps equilibrium would not exist. A Hraita- That the displacements themselves are not decisive but only the extent to which they occur in the direc- tions of the forces, that is only their projections on the lines of the forces, was, in the case of the inclined plane, perceived clearly enough by Galileo himself. With respect to the expression of the principle, it will be observed, that no problem whatever is presented THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 59 If all the material points of the system on which forces General re- act, are independent of each other. Each point thus conditioned can be in equilibrium only in the event that it is not movable in the direction in which the force acts. The virtual moment of each such point vanishes separately. If some of the points be independent of each other, while others in their displacements are de- pendent on each other, the remark just made holds good for the former ; and for the latter the fundamental proposition discovered by Galileo holds, that the sum of their virtual moments is equal to zero. Hence, the sum-total of the virtual moments of all jointly is equal to zero. 10. Let us now endeavor to get some idea of the Examples. significance of the principle, by the consideration of a few simple examples that cannot be dealt with by the ordinary method of the lever, the inclined plane, and the like. The differential pulley of Wes- ton (Fig. 45) consists of two coax- ial rigidly connected cylinders of slightly different radii r^ and r 2 <r 1 . A cord or chain is passed round the cylinders in the manner indicated in the figure. If we pull in the direction of the arrow with the force P 9 and rotation takes place Fi g- 45- through the angle cp, the weight Q attached below will be raised. In the case of equilibrium there will exist between the two virtual moments involved the equa- tion Q lL or P= 6o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. A suspend- A wheel and axle of weight Q (Fig. 46), which on and axle, the unrolling of a cord to which the weight P is at- tached rolls itself up on a second cord wound round the axle and rises, gives for the virtual moments in the case of equilibrium the equation In the particular case R r = 0, we must also put, for equilibrium, Qr = 0, or, for finite values of r, Q = 0. In reality the string behaves in this case like a loop in which the weight Q Is placed. The lat- ter can, if it be different from zero, continue to roll itself downwards on the string without moving the weight P. If, however, when R^=r, we also put Q = 0, the re- sult will be P=$, an indeterminate value. As a mat- ter of fact, every weight P holds the apparatus in equi- librium, since when R = r none can possibly descend. A double A double cylinder (Fig. 47) of the radii ;*, R lies with a y horizon- n friction on a horizontal surface, and a force Q is brought to bear on the string at- tached to it. Calling the re- sistance due to friction P 9 equilibrium exists when 2 P = (R r!R } Q. If />> Fig ' 47 - (^" r/V?)<2, the cylinder, on the application of the force, will roll itself up on the string. Roberval's Balance (Fig. 48) consists of a paral- lelogram with variable angles, two opposite sides of which, the upper and lower, are capable of rotation about their middle points A, B. To the two remaining sides, which are always vertical, horizontal rods are tal surface. Roberval's balance. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 61 fastened. If from these rods we suspend two equal weights P, equilibrium will subsist independently of the position of the points of suspension, because on displacement the descent of the one weight is always equal to the ascent of the other. At three fixed points A, B, C (Fig. 49) let pulleys be placed, over which three strings are passed loaded with equal weights and knotted at O. In what posi- tion of the strings will equilibrium exist? We will call the lengths of the three strings A0 = $ A Fi s- 48- Discussion of the case of equilib- rium of three knot- ted strings Fig. 49. Fig. 50. CO = ^ 3 . To obtain the equation of equilibrium, let us displace the point O in the directions s 2 and s 3 the infinitely small distances ds^ and <5V 3 , and note that by so doing every direction of displacement in the plane ABC (Fig. 50) can be produced. The sum of the vir- tual moments is P6s 2 P6s 2 cos a + Pds 2 cos (a -f ft) s cos cos (a or + cos (a + /?)] &r s = 0. But since each of the displacements COS/? s ar- 62 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. bitrary, and each independent of the other, and may by themselves be taken = 0, it follows that 1 cos a -\- cos (a -f- /?) = 1 __ cos/3 + cos (a + /f) = 0. Therefore cos a = cos /?, and each of the two equations may be replaced by 1 cos a. + cos 2tx = 0; or cos a = -|-, wherefore ;* + /?= 120. Remarks on Accordingly, in the case of equilibrium, each of the the preced- . , .-,-. -, i r ni-i- ing case, strings makes with the others angles of 120 ; which is, moreover, directly obvious, since three equal forces can be in equilibrium only when such an arrangement ex- ists. This once known, we may find the position of the point O with respect to ABC in a number of dif- ferent ways. We may proceed for instance as follows. 'We construct on AB, BC, CA, severally, as sides, equilateral triangles. If we describe circles about these triangles, their common point of intersection will be the point O sought ; a result which easily follows from the well-known relation of the angles at the centre and circumference of circles. The case of A bar OA (Fig. 51) is revolvable about O in the voivabie plane of the paper and makes with a fixed straight line about one , -IT i of its ex- >./ OX the variable angle tremities. </ . . pa. At A there is ap- plied a force P which makes with OX the angle y, and at B, on Fig- 51. a ring displaceable along the length of the bar, a force <2, making with OX the angle ft. We impart to the bar an infinitely THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 63 small rotation, in consequence of which B and A move The case of forward the distances ds and &s l at right angles to OA 9 voivabfe and we also displace the ring the distance 6r along the of its e bar. The variable distance OB we will call r, and we will let OA = a. For the case of equilibrium we have then Qdr cos (j3a') + Q$s sin (/? #) + JP&SI sin (<a? y} = 0. As the displacement dr has no effect whatever on the other displacements, the virtual moment therein involved must, by itself, = 0, and since dr may be of any magnitude we please, the coefficient of this virtual moment must also = 0. We have, therefore, Q cos (J5 ex) = 0, or when Q is different from zero, Further, in view of the fact that ds^ = (afr) ds, we also have rQ sin (J3 a) + a P sin (a y} = 0, or since sin (/? a*) = i, rQ -f- aP sin (a y) = ; wherewith the relation of the two forces is obtained. ii. An advantage, not to be overlooked, which Every gen- every general principle, and therefore also the prin- cipie P in? i r , i i i r volves an ciple of virtual displacements, fur- | 1 ^ /x economy of nishes, consists in the fact that it saves us to a great extent the ne- cessity of considering every new par- ^ 4 ticular case presented. In the posses- sion of this principle we need not, for Fig. 52. example, trouble ourselves about the details of a ma- chine. If a new machine say were so enclosed in a A economy \k thought. \ 64 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. box (Fig. 52), that only two levers projected as points of application for the force P and the weight P', and we should find the simultaneous displacements of these levers to be h and //, we should know immediately that in the case of equilibrium P/i = P'fi f , whatever the construction of the machine might be. Every principle of this character possesses therefore a distinct econom- ical value. Further re- 12. We return to the general expression of the prin- marks on the general ciple of virtual displacements, in order to add a few expression oftheprin- further remarks. If Ciple> ^ C - at the points A, B, C . . . . the forces P, P',P" . . . . act, and-/, /, /'. . . . are the projections of infinitely small mutually compatible displacements, we shall have for the case of equilibrium . . .=0. If we replace the forces by strings which pass over pulleys in the directions of the forces and attach thereto the appropriate weights, this expression simply as- serts that the centre of gravity of the system of weights as a whole cannot descend. If, however, in certain dis- placements it were possible for the centre of gravit} r to rise, the system would still be in equilibrium, as the heavy bodies would not, of themselves, enter on any Modifica- such motion. Ill this case the sum above given would tion of the , , , rr , 1 . previous be negative, or less than zero. The general expression condition. of the condition of equilibrium is, therefore, [_ pf 4. . . . r; o. When for every virtual displacement there exists THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 65 another equal and opposite to it, as is the case for ex- ample in the simple machines, we may restrict ourselves to the upper sign,, to the equation. For if it were pos- sible for the centre of gravity to ascend in certain displacements, it would also have to be possible, in consequence of the assumed reversibility of all the vir- tual displacements, for it to descend. Consequently, in the present case, a possible rise of the centre of gravity is incompatible with equilibrium. The question assumes a different aspect, however, The condi- i 11-1 11 'i i m tion is > that when the displacements are not all reversible. Two the sum of bodies connected together by strings can approach moments each other but cannot recede from each other beyond equal to or the length of the strings. A body is able to slide or zero, roll on the surface of another body ; it can move away from the surface of the second body, but it cannot penetrate it. In these cases, therefore, there are dis- placements that cannot be reversed. Consequently, for certain displacements a rise of the centre of gravity may take place, while the contrary displacements, to which the descent of the centre of gravity corresponds, are impossible. We must therefore hold fast to the more general condition of equilibrium, and say, the sum of the virtual moments is equal to or less than zero. 13. LAGRANGE in his Analytical Mechanics attempted The La- . grangian a deduction of the principle of virtual displacements, deduction - . oftheprin- which we will now consider. At the points A, B, cipie. C . . . . (Fig, 54) the forces P,P',P". . . . act. We imagine rings placed at the points in question, and other rings A', J3' , C' . . . . fastened to points lying in the directions of the forces. We seek some common measure Q/2 of the forces P, P' ', P" . . . . that enables us to put : THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Effected by Q means of a ?l -~- setofpul- leys and a _ Sin - g1 ^ 9*/ ^ weight. 472 . ~ where , n', n" . . . . are whole numbers. Further, we make fast to the ring A' a string, carry this string back &oA forth n times between A' and A, then through B' , Fig. 54- n' times back and forth between B* and 2?, then through C' 9 n" times back and forth between C' and C, and, finally, let it drop at C', attaching to it there the weight Q/2. As the string has, now, in all its parts the ten- sion <2/2, we replace by these ideal pulleys all the forces present in the system by the single force Q/2. If then the virtual (possible) displacements in any given configuration of the system are such that, these dis- placements occurring, a descent of the weight Q/2 can take place, the weight will actually descend and pro- duce those displacements, and equilibrium therefore will not obtain. But on the other hand, no motion will ensue, if the displacements leave the weight Q/2 in its original position, or raise it. The expression of this condition, reckoning the projections of the virtual displacements in the directions of the forces positive, THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 67 and having regard for the number of the turns of the string in each single pulley, is 2np + 2'/ + 2"/' + . . . < 0. Equivalent to this condition, however, is the ex- pression 2 |-j + 2' / + 2" |-/' + . . . < 0, or 14. The deduction of Lagrange, If stripped of the The con- rather odd fiction of the pulleys, really possesses con- tures of La vincing features, due to the fact that the action of a deduction. single weight is much more immediate to our expe- rience and is more easily followed than the action of several weights. Yet it is not proved by the Lagrangian deduction that work is the factor determinative of the disturbance of equilibrium, but is, by the employment of the pulleys, rather assumed by it. As a matter of fact every pulley involves the fact enunciated and rec- ognised by the principle of virtual displacements. The replacement of all the forces by a single weight that does the same work, presupposes a knowledge of the import of work, and can be proceeded with on this as- sumption alone. The fact that some certain cases are it is not, _ ... , . , . , however, a more familiar to us and more immediate to our expe- proof. rience has as a necessary result that we accept them without analysis and make them the foundation of our deductions without clearly instructing ourselves as to their real character. It often happens in the course of the development of science that a new principle perceived by some in- quirer in connection with a fact, is not immediately recognised and rendered familiar in its entire generality. 68 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The expe- Then, every expedient calculated to promote these dients em- 1 ...... ployed to ends, is, as is proper and natural, called into service. support all . ., r , . , . , , . ,, , , , newprin- All manner of facts, in which the principle, although ciples. . - . contained in them, has not yet been recognised by in- quirers, but which from other points of view are more familiar, are called in to furnish a support for the new conception. It does not, however, beseem mature science to allow itself to be deceived by procedures of this sort. If, throughout all facts, we clearly sec and dis- cern a principle which, though not admitting" of proof, can yet be known to prevail, we have advanced much farther in the consistent conception of nature than if we suffered ourselves to be overawed by a specious Value of the demonstration. If we have reached this point of view, pro of angian we shall, it is true, regard the Lagrangian deduction with quite different eyes ; yet it will engage neverthe- less our attention and interest, and excite our satis- faction from the fact that it makes palpable the simi- larity of the simple and complicated cases. 15. MAUPERTUIS discovered an interesting proposi- tion relating to equilibrium, which he communicated to the Paris Academy in 1740 under the name of the "Loi de repos." This principle was more fully dis- cussed by EULER in 1751 in the Proceedings of the Berlin Academy. If we cause infinitely small displace- TheLoide ments in any system, we produce a sum of virtual mo- repos ' ments Pp + P'j>' + P"J>" + . . . ., which only reduces to zero in the case of equilibrium. This sum is the work corresponding to the displacements, or since for infinitely small displacements it is itself infinitely small, the corresponding element of work. If the displace- ments are continuously increased till a finite displace- ment is produced, the elements of the work will, by summation, produce a finite amount of work. So, if we THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS, 69 start from any given initial configuration of the system statement . r i r - * oftheprin- and pass to any given final configuration, a certain cipie. amount of work will have to be done. Now Maupertuis observed that the work done when a final configura- tion is reached which is a configuration of equilibrium, is generally a maximum or a minimum ; that is, if we carry the system through the configuration of equilib- rium the work done is previously and subsequently less or previously and subsequently greater than at the configuration of equilibrium itself. For the configura- tion of equilibrium that is, the element of the work or the differential (more correctly the variation) of the work is equal to zero. If the differential of a function can be put equal to zero, the function has generally a maximum or mini- mum value. 1 6. We can produce a very clear representation to Graphical ,1 r ,1 ^ P TVT , , i illustration the eye of the import of Maupertuis s principle. oftheim- TTT i r r 111 port of the We imagine the forces of a system replaced by principle. Lagrange's pulleys with the weight Q/2. We suppose that each point of the system is restricted to movement on a certain curve and that the motion is such that when one point occupies a definite position on its curve all the other points assume uniquely determined po- sitions on their respective curves. The simple ma- chines are as a rule systems of this kind. Now, while imparting displacements to the system, we may carry a vertical sheet of white paper horizontally over the weight (?/2, while this is ascending and descending on a vertical line, so that a pencil which it carries shall describe a curve upon the paper (Fig. 55). When the pencil stands at the points a, t, d of the curve, there are, 70 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. :a- we see, adjacent positions in the system of points at diagram, which the weight Q/2, will stand higher or lower than in the configuration given. The weight will then, if the system be left to itself, pass into this lower position and Fig. 55. displace the system with it. Accordingly, under condi- tions of this kind, equilibrium does not subsist. If the pencil stands at e, then there exist only adjacent configurations for which the weight Q/2 stands higher. But of itself the system will not pass into the last- named configurations. On the contrary, every dis- placement in such a direction, will, by virtue of the tendency of the weight to move downwards, be re- versed. Stable equilibrium, therefore,, is the condition, corresponds to the lowest position of the weight or to a maximum of work done in the system. If the pencil stands at b, we see that every appreciable displace- ment brings the weight Q/2, lower, and that the weight therefore will continue the displacement begun. But, assuming infinitely small displacements, the pencil moves in the horizontal tangent at $, in which event the weight cannot descend. Therefore, unstable equi- Unstabie librium is the state that corresponds to the highest position equilibrium / , 7 . , _. , . \ 7 * of the weight Q/2, or to a minimum of work done in the system. It will be noted, however, that conversely i1brium equi " THE PRINCIPLES OF STA TICS. 71 every case of equilibrium is not the correspondent of a maximum or a minimum of work performed. If the pencil is at/, at a point of horizontal contrary flexure, the weight in the case of infinitely small displace- ments neither rises nor falls. Equilibrium exists, al- though the work done is neither a maximum nor a minimum. The equilibrium of this case is the so- called mixed equilibrium * : for some disturbances it is Mixed equ' stable, for others unstable. Nothing prevents us from regarding mixed equilibrium as belonging to the un- stable class. When the pencil stands at g, where the curve runs along 'horizontally a finite distance, equi- librium likewise exists. Any small displacement, in the configuration in question, is neither continued nor reversed. This kind of equilibrium, to which likewise neither a maximum nor a minimum corresponds, is termed" [72<?w/r#/ or] indifferent. If the curve described Neutral by Q/2 has a cusp pointing upwards, this indicates a e( * ulhbriuc minimum of work done but no equilibrium (not even unstable equilibrium). To a cusp pointing downwards a maximum and stable equilibrium correspond. In the last named case of equilibrium the sum of the virtual moments is not equal to zero, but is negative. 17. In the reasoning just presented, we have as-jhepreced sumed that the motion of a point of a system on one tufnappiTe! curve determines the motion of all the other points of ^ mo?edi y f the system on their respective curves. The movability cultcases of the system becomes multiplex, however, when each point is displaceable on a surface, in a manner such that the position of one point on its surface determines *This term is not used In English, because our writers hold that no equilibrium is conceivable which is not stable or neutral for some possible displacements. Hence what is called mixed equilibrium in the text is called unstable equilibrium by English writers, who deny the existence of equilibrium unstable in every respect. Trans. 72 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. uniquely the position of all the other points on their surfaces. In this case, we are not permitted to consider the curve described by Q/2, but are obliged to picture to ourselves a surface described by Q/2. If, to go a step further, each point is movable throughout a space, we can no longer represent to ourselves in a purely geo- metrical manner the circumstances of the motion, by means of the locus of Q/2. In a correspondingly higher degree is this the case when the position of one of the points of the system does not determine conjointly all the other positions, but the character of the system's motion is more multiplex still. In all these cases, how- ever, the curve described by Q/2 (Fig. 55) can serve us as a symbol of the phenomena to be considered. In these cases also we rediscover the Maupertuisian pro- positions. urtherex- We have also supposed, in our considerations up to ie S same this point, that constant forces, forces independent of the position of the points of the system, are the forces that act in the system. If we assume that the forces do depend on the position of the points of the system (but not on the time), we are no longer able to conduct our operations with simple pulleys, but must devise apparatus the force active in which, still exerted by Q/2, varies with the displacement : the ideas we have reached, however, still obtain. The depth of the descent of the weight Q/2 is in every case the measure of the work performed, which is always the same in the same configura- s- 56. tion of the system and is independent of the path of transference. A contrivance which would develop by means of a constant weight a force varying with the displacement, would be, for example, a wheel THE PRI.\ 7 CIPLES OF STATICS. 73 and axle (Fig. 56) with a non-circular wheel. It would not repay the trouble, however, to enter into the de- tails of the reasoning indicated in this case, since we perceive at a glance its feasibility. 18. If we know the relation that subsists between The prin- the work done and the so-called vis viva of a sys- Courtivron. tern, a relation established in dynamics, we arrive easily at the principle communicated by COURTIVRON in 1749 to the Paris Academy, which is this: For the configuration of ,, equilibrium, at which the i j maximum ,-, . r , , work done is a . - , the vis viva of the system, minimum J ' , . i maximum ., . ., ,-, -, in motion, is also a - . in its transit through minimum G these configurations. 19. A heavy, homogeneous triaxial ellipsoid resting illustration . on a horizontal plane is admirably adapted to illustrate ous kinds of equilibrium the various classes of equilibrium. When the ellip- soid rests on the extremity of its smallest axis, it is in stable equilibrium, for any displacement it may suffer elevates its centre of gravity. If it rest on its longest axis, it is in unstable equilib- rium. If the ellipsoid stand on its mean axis, its equilibrium is mixed. A homogeneous sphere or a homogeneous right cylin- der on a horizontal plane illus- Fi &- 57. trates the case of indifferent equilibrium. In Fig, 57 we have represented the paths of the centre of gravity of a cube rolling on a horizontal plane about one of its edges. The position a of the centre of gravity is the position of stable equilibrium, the position b, the posi- tion of unstable equilibrium. 74 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The eaten- 2o. We will now consider an example which at ary first sight appears very complicated but is elucidated at once by the principle of virtual displacements. John and James Bernoulli, on the occasion of a conversa- tion on mathematical topics during a walk in Basel, lighted on the question of what form a chain would take that was freely suspended and fastened at both ends. They soon and easily agreed in the view that the chain would assume that form of equilibrium at which its centre of gravity lay in the lowest possible position. As a matter of fact we really do perceive that equilibrium subsists when all the links of the chain have sunk as low as possible, when none can sink lower without raising in consequence of the connections of the system an equivalent mass equally high or higher. When the centre of gravity has sunk as low as it pos- sibly can sink, when all has happened that can happen, stable equilibrium exists. The physical part of the problem is disposed of by this consideration. The de- termination of the curve that has the lowest centre of gravity for a given length between the two points A, B, is simply a mathematical problem. (See Fig. 58.) Theprinci- 21. Collecting all that has been presented, we see, pie is sim- , . . ...... . . piytherec- that there is contained in the principle of virtual dis- ognition of . . . a fact. placements simply the recognition of a fact that was instinctively familiar to us long previcnisly, only that we had not apprehended it so precisely and clearly. This fact consists in the circumstance that heavy bodies, of themselves, move only downwards. If sev- eral such bodies be joined together so that they can suffer no displacement independently of each other, they will then move only in the event that some heavy mass is on the whole able to descend, or as the prin- ciple, with a more perfect adaptation of our ideas to OF STATICS. 75 Fig. 58. 76 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. what this the facts, more exactly expresses it, only In the event that work can be performed. If, extending the notion of force, we transfer the principle to forces other than those due to gravity, the recognition is again con- tained therein of the fact that the natural occurrences in question take place, of themselves, only in a definite sense and not in the opposite sense. Just as heavy bodies descend downwards, so differences of tempera- ture and electrical potential cannot increase of their own accord but only diminish, and so on. If occur- rences of this kind be so connected that they can take place only in the contrary sense, the principle then es- tablishes, more precisely than our instinctive appre- hension could do this, the factor work as determinative and decisive of the direction of the occurrences. The equilibrium equation of the principle may be reduced In every case to the trivial statement, that when noth- ing can happen not/ling does happen. Theprin- 22. It is important to obtain clearly the perception, fight o?* e that we hav to deal, in the case of all principles, vilw SSS merely wi^-i the ascertainment and establishment of a fact. If we neglect this, we shall always be sensible of some deficiency and will seek a verification of the principle, that is not to be found. Jacobi states in his Lectures on Dynamics that Gauss once remarked that Lagrange's equations of motion had not been proved, but only historically enunciated. And this view really seems to us to be the correct one in regard to the prin- ciple of virtual displacements. The differ- The task of the early inquirers, who lay the foun- ent tasks of , . , . . ... . early and of dations of any department 01 investigation, is entirely fnqufrershi different from that of those who follow. It is the busi- ment. cpar ness of the former to seek out and to establish the facts of most cardinal importance only; and, as history THE PRINCIPLES OF STA TICS. 77 teaches, more brains are required for this than is gen- erally supposed. When the most important facts are once furnished ; we are then placed in a position to work them out deductively and logically by the meth- ods of mathematical physics; we can then organise the department of inquiry In question, and show that In the acceptance of some one fact a whole series of others Is included which were not to be immediately discerned in the first. The one task is as important as the other. We should not however confound the one with the other. We cannot prove by mathematics that nature must be exactly what it is. But we can prove, that one set of observed properties determines conjointly another set which often are not directly manifest. Let it be remarked in conclusion, that the princi- Every ? en- i r j i i- i 1-1 , eral princi- ple of virtual displacements, like every general prin- pie brings . ., -.. *,i ,, i i i i-i-r .-i with it dis- ciple, brings with it, by the insight which it furnishes, niusion- disillusionment as well as elucidation. It brings with well as eiu- it disillusionment to the extent that we recognise In it C1 facts which were long before known anu^ven instinct- ively perceived, our present recognition bhing simply more distinct and more definite ; and elucidation, in that it enables us to see everywhere throughout the most complicated relations the same simple facts. v. RETROSPECT OF THE DEVELOPMENT OF STATICS. i. Having passed successively in review the prin- Review of ciples of statics, we are now in a position to take a whole 3 . brief supplementary survey of the development of the principles of the science as a whole. This development, falling as it does in the earliest period of mechanics, the period which begins in Grecian antiquity and 78 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. reaches its close at the time when Galileo and his younger contemporaries were inaugurating modern me- chanics, illustrates in an excellent manner the pro- cess of the formation of science generally. All con- ceptions, all methods are here found in their simplest form, and as it were in their infancy. These beginnings The origin point unmistakably to their origin in the experiences of the manual arts. To the necessity of putting these ex- periences into communicable form and of disseminating them beyond the confines of class and craft, science owes its origin. The collector of experiences of this kind, who seeks to preserve them in written form, finds before him many different, or at least supposably differ- ent, experiences. His position is one that enables him to review these experiences more frequently, more vari- ously, and more impartially than the individual work- ingman, who is always limited to a narrow province. The facts and their dependent rules are brought into closer temporal and spatial proximity in his mind and writings, and thus acquire the opportunity of revealing The econo- their relationship, their connection, and their gradual municaSon. transition the one into the other. The desire to sim- plify and abridge the labor of communication supplies a further impulse in the same direction. Thus, from economical reasons, in such circumstances, great num- bers of facts and the rules that spring from them are condensed into a system and comprehended in a single expression. The gene- 2. A collector of this character has, moreover, op- ralcharac- . . r ter of prin- portunity to take note of some new aspect of the facts before him of some aspect which former observers had not considered. A rule, reached by the observation of facts, cannot possibly embrace the entire fact, in all its infinite wealth, in all its inexhaustible manifoldness ; THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS, 79 on the contrary, it can furnish only a rough outline of the fact, one-sidedly emphasising the feature that is of importance for the given technical (or scientific) aim in view. What aspects of a fact are taken notice of, will consequently depend upon circumstances, or even on Their form T r i i TT 1-1 in many as- the caprice of the observer. Hence there is always op- pects, acci- ....... i dental. portunity lor the discovery of new aspects of the fact, which will lead to the establishment of new rules of equal validity with, or superior to, the old. So, for in- stance, the weights and the lengths of the lever-arms were regarded at first, by Archimedes, as the conditions that determined equilibrium. Afterwards, by Da Vinci and Ubaldi the weights,and the perpendicular distances from the axis of the lines of force were recognised as the determinative conditions. Still later, by Galileo, the weights and the amounts of their displacements, and finally by Varignon the weights and the directions of the pulls with respect to the axis were taken as the elements of equilibrium, and -the enunciation of the rules modified accordingly. 3. Whoever makes a new observation of this kind, puriiabii- and establishes such a new rule, knows, of course, ourin y th e e m en- liability to error in attempting mentally to represent struction of the fact, whether by concrete images or in abstract con- ceptions, which we must do in order to have the mental model we have constructed always at hand as a substi- tute for the fact when the latter is partly or wholly in- accessible. The circumstances, indeed, to which we have to attend, are accompanied by so many other, collateral circumstances, that it is frequently difficult to single out and consider those that are essential to the purpose in view. Just think how the facts of friction, the rigidity of ropes and cords, 'and like conditions in machines, obscure and obliterate the pure outlines of So THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Thisiiabii- the main facts. No wonder, therefore, that the discov- us toseek erer or verifier of a new rule, urged by mistrust of him- ofaiinew S self, seeks after a proof of the rule whose validity he believes he has discerned. The discoverer or verifier does not at the outset fully trust in the rule ; or, It may be, he is confident only of a part of it. So, Archimedes, for example, doubted whether the effect of the action of weights on a lever was proportional to the lengths of the lever-arms, but he accepted without hesitation the fact of their influence in some way, Daniel Bernoulli does not question the influence of the direction of a force generally, but only the form of its influence. As a matter of fact, it is far easier to observe that a circum- stance has influence in a given case, than to determine what influence it has. In the latter inquiry we are in much greater degree liable to error. The attitude of the investigators is therefore perfectly natural and defens- ible. The natural The proof of the correctness of a new rule can be proof. attained by the repeated application of it, the frequent comparison of it with experience, the putting of it to the test under the most diverse circumstances. This process would, in the natural course of events, get car- ried out in time. The 1 discoverer, however, hastens to reach his goal more quickly. He compares the -results that flow from his rule with all the experiences with which he is familiar, with all older rules, repeatedly tested in times gone by, and watches to see if he do not light on contradictions. In this procedure, the greatest credit is, as it should be, conceded to the oldest and most familiar experiences, the most thoroughly tested rules. Our instinctive experiences, those gen- eralisations that are made involuntarily, by the irresist- ible force of the innumerable facts that press in upon THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. ST us, enjoy a peculiar authority; and this is perfectly warranted by the consideration that it is precisely the elimination of subjective caprice and of individual er- ror that is the object aimed at. In this manner Archimedes proves his law of the illustration lever, Stevinus his law of inclined pressure, Daniel ceding re- Bernoulli the parallelogram of forces, Lagrange the principle of virtual displacements. Galileo alone is perfectly aware, with respect to the last-mentioned principle, that his new observation and perception are of equal rank with every former one that it is derived from the same source of experience. He attempts no demonstration. Archimedes, in his proof of the prin- ciple of the lever, uses facts concerning the centre of gravity, which he had probably proved by means of the very principle now in question ; yet we may suppose that these facts were otherwise so familiar, as to be un- questioned, so familiar indeed, that it may be doubted whether he remarked that he had employed them in demonstrating the principle of the lever. The instinc- tive elements embraced in the views of Archimedes and Stevinus have been discussed at length in the proper place. 4. It is quite in order, on the making of a new dis- The posi- . tionthatad- covery, to resort to all proper means to bring the new vanced sci- TTTI i i ence should rule to the test. When, however, after the lapse of a occupy, reasonable period of time, it has been sufficiently often subjected to direct testing, it becomes science to recog- nise that any other proof than that has become quite needless ; that there is no sense in considering a rule as the better established for being founded on others that have been reached by the very same method of observation, only earlier ; that one well-considered and tested observation is as good as another. To-day, we 82 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. should regard the principles of the lever, of statical moments, of the inclined plane, of virtual displace- ments, and of the parallelogram of forces as discovered by equivalent observations. It is of no importance now, that some of these discoveries were made directly, while others were reached by roundabout ways and as de- pendent upon other observations. It is more in keep- ing, furthermore, with the economy of thought and with insight bet- the aesthetics of science, directly to recognise a principle tificiaidem- (say that of the statical moments) as the key to the un- derstanding of all the facts of a department, and really see how it pervades all those facts, rather than to hold ourselves obliged first to make a clumsy and lame de- duction of it from unobvious propositions that involve the same principle but that happen to have become earlier familiar to us. This process science and the in- dividual (in historical study) may go through once for all. But having done so both are free to adopt a more convenient point of view. Themis- 5. In fact, this mania for demonstration in science mania for 6 results in a rigor that is false and mistaken. Some pro- dernonstra- . ,. iij.v j r , . tion. positions are held to be possessed of more certainty than others and even regarded as their necessary and incontestable foundation ; whereas actually no higher, or perhaps not even so high, a degree of certainty at- taches to them. Even the rendering clear of the de- gree of certainty which exact science aims at, is not at- tained here. Examples of such mistaken rigor are to be found in almost every text-book. The deductions of Archimedes, not considering their historical value, are infected with this erroneous rigor. But the most conspicuous example of all Is furnished by Daniel Ber- noulli's deduction of the parallelogram of forces (Com- ment. A cad. Petrop. T. I.). THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 83 6. As already seen, instinctive knowledge enjoys The char- our exceptional confidence. No longer knowing how stinctive i j -j. ,-11-1 knowledge. we have acquired it, we cannot criticise the logic by which it was inferred. We have personally contributed nothing to its production. It confronts us with a force and irresistibleness foreign to the products of volun- tary reflective experience. It appears to us as some- thing free from subjectivity, and extraneous to us, al- though we have it constantly at hand so that it is more ours than afe the Individual facts of nature. All this has often led men to attribute knowledge of its author- this kind to an entirely different source, namely, to view imeKsV " it as existing a priori m us (previous to all experience). P That this opinion is untenable was fully explained in our discussion of the achievements of Stevinus. Yet even the authority of instinctive knowledge, however important it may be for actual processes of develop- ment, must ultimately give place to that of a clearly and deliberately observed principle. Instinctive knowledge is, after all, only experimental knowledge, and as such is liable, we have seen, to prove itself utterly insuffi- cient and powerless, when some new region of expe- rience is suddenly opened up. 7. The true relation and connection of the different The true re- principles is the historical one. The one extends farther principles in this domain, the other farther in that. Notwith- cai one. standing that some one principle, say the principle of virtual displacements, may control with facility a greater number of cases than other principles, still no assurance can be given that it will always maintain its supremacy and will not be outstripped by some new principle. All principles single out, more or less arbi- trarily, now this aspect now that aspect of the same facts, and contain an abstract summarised rule for the 84 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. refigurement of the facts in thought. We can never assert that this process has been definitively completed. Whosoever holds to this opinion, will not stand in the way of the advancement of science. Conception 8. Let us, in conclusion, direct our attention for a of force in . . statics. moment to the conception of force in statics. Force is any circumstance of which the consequence is motion. Several circumstances of this kind, however, each single one of which determines motion, may be so conjoined that in the result there shall be no motion." Now stat- ics investigates what this mode of conjunction, in gen- eral terms, is. Statics does not further concern itself about the particular character of the motion condi- tioned by the forces. The circumstances determinative of motion that are best known to us, are our own vo- The origin litional acts our innervations. In the motions which of the no- . . . tion of we ourselves determine, as well as in those to which we are forced by external circumstances, we are always sensible of a pressure. Thence arises our habit of rep- resenting all circumstances determinative of motion as something akin to volitional acts as pressures. The attempts we make to set aside this conception, as sub- jective, animistic, and unscientific, fail invariably. It cannot profit us, surely, to do violence to our own nat- ural-born thoughts and to doom ourselves, in that re- gard, to voluntary mental penury. We shall subse- quently have occasion to observe, that the conception referred to also plays a part in the foundation of dy- namics. We are able, in a great many cases, to replace the circumstances determinative of motion, which occur in nature, by our innervations, and thus to reach the idea of a gradation of the intensity of forces. But in the esti- mation of this intensity we are thrown entirely on the THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 85 resources of our memory, and are also unable to com- The com- . .... mon char- municate our' sensations. Since it is possible, now- acter of ail ever, to represent every condition that determines motion by a weight, we arrive at the perception that all circumstances determinative of motion (all forces) are alike in character and may be replaced and meas- ured by quantities that stand for weight. The meas- urable weight serves us, as a certain, convenient, and communicable index, in mechanical researches, just as the thermometer in thermal researches is an exacter substitute for our perceptions of heat. As has pre- The idea of ,, 11 , i 1 1 i - i r motion an viously been remarked, statics cannot wholly rid itself auxiliary of all knowledge of phenomena of motion. This par- stat?2! m ticularly appears in the determination of the direction of a force by the direction of the motion which it would produce if it acted alone. By the point of application of a force we mean that point of a body whose motion is still determined by the force when the point is freed from its connections with the other parts of the body. Force accordingly is any circumstance that de-Thegene- termines motion; and its attributes may be stated astmtesof" follows. The direction of the force is the direction of motion which is determined by that force, alone. The point of application is that point whose motion is de- termined independently of its connections with the system. The magnitude of the force is that weight which, acting (say, on a string) in the direction deter- mined, and applied at the point in question, determines the same motion or maintains the same equilibrium. The other circumstances that modify the determination of a motion, but by themselves alone are unable to pro- duce it, such as virtual displacements, the arms of levers, and so forth, may be termed collateral condi- tions determinative of motion and equilibrium. 85 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS IN THEIR APPLICATION TO FLUIDS. NO essen- i. The consideration of fluids has not supplied s-tat- points^r ics with many essentially new points of view, yet nu- voiveJnn merous applications and confirmations of the principles hlssubj ' ect ' already known have resulted therefrom, and physical experience has been greatly enriched by the investiga- tions of this domain. We shall devote, therefore, a few pages to this subject. 2. To ARCHIMEDES also belongs the honor of found- ing the domain of the statics of liquids. To him we owe the well-known proposition concerning the buoy- ancy, or loss of weight, of bodies immersed in liquids, of the discovery of which Vitruvius, De Architectures, Lib. IX, gives the following account : vitruvius's "Though Archimedes discovered many curious Arcbime? "matters that evince great intelligence, that which I am cov e S ry. 1S " "about to mention is the most extraordinary. Hiero, "when he obtained the regal power in Syracuse, hav- "ing, on the fortunate turn of his affairs, decreed a "votive crown of gold to be placed in a certain temple "to the immortal gods, commanded it to be made of "great value, and assigned for this purpose an appro- "priate weight of the metal to the manufacturer. The "latter, in due time, presented the work to the king, "beautifully wrought ; and the weight appeared to cor- " respond with that of the gold which had been as- " signed for it. "But a report having been circulated, that some of "the gold had been abstracted, and that the deficiency THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 87 "thus caused had been supplied by silver, HIero was The ac- ,.- iri . ..,.,_ count, ofVi- "indignant at the rraud, and, unacquainted with the truvius. "method by which the theft might be detected, re- " quested Archimedes would undertake to give it his "attention. Charged with this commission, he by "chance went to a bath, and on jumping into the tub, "perceived that, just in the proportion that his body "became immersed, in the same proportion the water "ran out of the vessel. Whence, catching at the "method to be adopted for the solution of the proposi- tion, he immediately followed it up, leapt out of the "vessel in joy, and returning home naked, cried out "with a loud voice that he had found that of which he "was in search, for he continued exclaiming, In Greek, "evpijKa, evprjKQt, (I have found it, I have found It !)" 3. The observation which led Archimedes to his Statement . . - . , . , . . of the Ar- proposition, was accordingly this, that a body im- chimedean - . . . proposition mersed in water must raise an equivalent quantity oi water exactly as if the body lay on one pan of a balance and the water on the other. This conception, which at the present day is still the most natural and the most direct, also appears In Archimedes's treatises On Floating Bodies, which unfortunately have not been completely preserved but have in part been restored by F. Commandinus. The assumption from which Archimedes starts reads thus : "It is assumed as the essential property of a liquid The Archi- - , . .. , , medean as- that in all uniform and continuous positions of its parts sumption, the portion that suffers the lesser pressure is forced upwards by that which suffers the greater pressure. But each part of the liquid suffers pressure from the portion perpendicularly above It if the latter be sinking or suffer pressure from another portion." THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Analysis of Archimedes now, to present the matter briefly, P ie. prmci conceives the entire spherical earth as fluid in consti- tution, and cuts out of it pyramids the vertices of which lie at the centre (Fig. 59). All these pyramids must, in the case of equilib- rium, have the same weight, and the similarly situated parts of the same must all suffer the same pressure. If we plunge a body a of the same specific gravity as water into one of the pyra- mids, the body will com- pletely submerge, and, in Fig. 59- the case of equilibrium, will supply by its weight the pressure of the displaced water. The body ^, of less specific gravity, can sink, without disturbance of equi- librium, only to the point at which the water beneath it suffers the same pressure from the weight of the body as it would if the body were taken out and the submerged portion replaced by water. The body c, of a greater specific gravity, sinks as deep as it possibly can. That its weight is lessened in the water by an amount equal to the weight of the water displaced, will be manifest if we imagine the body joined to another of less specific gravity so that a third body is formed having the same specific gravity as water, which just completely submerges. rhe state of 4. When in the sixteenth century the study of the m the six- works of Archimedes was again taken up, scarcely the teenth cen- . - . , . . , , _, tury. principles of his researches were understood. The complete comprehension of his deductions was at that time impossible. STEVINUS rediscovered by a method of his own the THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 89 most important principles of hydrostatics and the de- The discov- . ir T "'11 i r eriesofSte- ductions tnereirom. It was principally two ideas from vinus. which Stevinus derived his fruitful conclusions. The one is quite similar to that relating to the endless chain. The other consists in the assumption that the solidification of a fluid in equilibrium does not disturb its equilibrium. Stevinus first lays down this principle. Any given The first /-^ . . fundamen- mass of water A (rig. 60), immersed in water, is mtaiprind- equilibrium in all its parts. If A were not supported by the sur- rounding water but should, let us say, descend, then the portion of water taking the place of A and placed thus in the same circum- stances, would, on the same as- sumption, also have to descend. Fig. 60. This assumption leads, therefore, to the establishment of a perpetual motion, which is contrary to our ex- perience and to our instinctive knowledge of things. Water immersed In water loses accordingly its The second fundamen- whole weight. If, now, we imagine the surface of the tai princi- submerged w r ater solidified, the vessel formed by this surface, the was super ficiarium as Stevinus calls it, will still be subjected to the same circumstances of pres- sure. If empty, the vessel so formed will surfer an upward pressure In the liquid equal to the weight of the water displaced. If we fill the solidified surface with some other substance of any specific gravity we may choose, it will be plain that the diminution of the weight of the body will be equal to the weight of the fluid displaced on immersion. In a rectangular, vertically placed parallelepipedal vessel filled with a liquid, the pressure on the horizontal THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. stevinus's base Is equal to the weight of the liquid. The pressure deductions. . 1n . . , is equal, also, for all parts of the bottom of the same area. When now Stevimis imagines portions of the liquid to be cut out and replaced by rigid immersed bodies of the same specific gravity, or, what is the same thing, imagines parts of the liquid to become so- lidified, the relations of pressure in the vessel will not be altered by the procedure. But we easily obtain in this way a clear view of the law that the pressure on the base of a vessel is independent of its form, as well as of the laws of pressure in communicating vessels, and so forth. Galileo, in 5. GALILEO treats the equilibrium of liquids in com- the treat- . 1,11 -. -, mentof thismumcating vessels and the problems connected there- subject, em- . p with by the help of the principle of virtual displace- ments. NN (Fig. 61) being the common level of a liquid in equilib- rium in two communicating vessels, Galileo explains the equilibrium here presented by observing that in the case of any disturbance the dis- placements of the columns are to each other in the inverse proportion of the areas of the transverse sec- principle of virtual dis- placements j B = c I A S 'T 3 JV A/ i-"' ~i"=. - ~ Fig. 61. tions and of the weights of the columns that is, as with machines in equilibrium. But this is not quite cor- rect. The case does not exactly correspond to the cases of equilibrium investigated by Galileo in ma- chines, which present indifferent equilibrium. With liquids in communicating tubes every disturbance of the common level of the liquids produces an elevation of the centre of gravity. In the case represented in Fig. 61, the centre of gravity S of the liquid displaced from the shaded space in A is elevated to S', and we may THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. regard the rest of the liquid as not having been moved. Accordingly, in the case of equilibrium, the centre of gravity of the liquid lies at its lowest possible point. 6. PASCAL likewise employs the principle of virtual The same 1 . principle displacements, but in a more correct manner, leaving made use of ..,.,.... by Pascal. the weight of the liquid out of account and considering only the pressure at the surface. If we imagine two communicating vessels to be closed by pistons (Fig. 62), and these pistons loaded with weights proportional to their surface- areas, equilibrium will obtain, because in consequence of the invariability of the volume of the liquid the displace- ments in every disturbance are in- versely proportional to the weights. Fig. 62. For Pascal, accordingly, it follows, as a necessary con- sequence, from the principle of virtual displacements, that in the case of equilibrium every pressure on a su- perficial portion of a liquid is propagated with undi- minished effect to every other superficial portion, how- ever and in whatever position it be placed. No objec- tion is to be made to discovering the principle in this way. Yet we shall see later on that the more natural and satisfactory conception is to regard the principle as immediate^ given. 7. We shall now, after this historical sketch, again Detailed n , -,. . , -1-1 considera- exammethe most important cases oi liquid equilibrium, tionof the and from such different points of view as may be con- su Jec * venient. The fundamental property of liquids given us by experience consists in the flexure of their parts on the slightest application of pressure. Let us picture to our- selves an element of volume of a liquid, the gravity of which we disregardsay a tiny cube. If the slightest 92 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The funda- excess of pressure be exerted on one of the surfaces of property of this cube, (which we now conceive, for the moment, mobility of as a. fixed geometrical locus, containing the fluid but eir par s. ^^ ^ .^ su ] 3s t aric e) the liquid (supposed to have pre- viously been in equilibrium and at rest) will yield and pass out in all directions through the other five surfaces of the cube. A solid cube can stand a pressure on its upper and lower surfaces different in magnitude from that on its lateral surfaces ; or vice versa. A fluid cube, on the other hand, can retain its shape only if the same perpendicular pressure be exerted on all its sides. A similar train of reasoning is applicable to all polyhe- drons. In this conception, as thus geometrically eluci- dated, is contained nothing but the crude experience that the particles of a liquid yield to the slightest pres- sure, and that they retain this property also in the in- terior of the liquid when under a high pressure ; it being observable, for example, that under the condi- tions cited minute heavy bodies sink in fluids, and so on. A second With the mobility of their parts liquids combine Fhe P conv-_ still another property, which we will now consider. Li- of thek'voi- quids suffer through pressure a diminution of volume which is proportional to the pressure exerted on unit of surface. Every alteration of pressure carries along with it a proportional alteration of volume and density. If the pressure diminish, the volume becomes greater, the density less. The volume of a liquid continues to diminish therefore on the pressure being increased, till the point is reached at which the elasticity generated within it equilibrates the increase of the pressure. 8. The earlier inquirers, as for instance those of the Florentine Academy, were of the opinion that liquids were incompressible. In 1761, however, JOHN CANTON performed an experiment by which the compressibility THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 93 of water was demonstrated. A thermometer glass is The first filled with water, boiled, and then sealed. (Fig. 63.) tionof tte The liquid reaches to a. But since the space above a is biiity of airless, the liquid supports no atmospheric pres- sure. If the sealed end be broken off, the liquid will sink to b* Only a portion, however, of this displacement is to be placed to the credit of the c "\h compression of the liquid by atmospheric pres- sure. For if we place the glass before breaking |p^ off the top under an air-pump and exhaust the ^^ chamber, the liquid will sink to c. This last phe- nomenon is due to the fact that the pressure that bears down on the exterior of the glass and diminishes its capacity, is now removed. On breaking off the top, this exterior pressure of the atmosphere is compensated for by the interior pressure then introduced, and an enlargement of the capacity of the glass again sets in. The portion cb, therefore, answers to the actual com- pression of the liquid by the pressure of the atmos- phere. The first to institute exact experiments on the com- The experi- ments of pressibility of water, was OERSTED, who employed to oersted on r J , r J this subject. this end a very ingenious method. A thermometer glass A (Fig. 64) is filled with boiled water and is inverted, with open mouth, into a vessel of mercury. Near it stands a manometer tube B filled with air and likewise inverted with open mouth in the mercury. The whole ap- ( paratus is then placed in a vessel filled with water, which is compressed by the aid of a pump. By this means the water in A is also compressed, and the filament of quicksilver which rises in the capillary tube of the thermometer- B Fig. 64. 94 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. glass Indicates this compression. The alteration of capacity which the glass A suffers in the present in- stance, is merely that arising from the pressing to- gether of its walls by forces which are equal on all sides. The esperi- The most delicate experiments on this subject have Grassi. been conducted by GRASSI with an apparatus con- structed by Regnault, and computed with the assist- ance of Lame's correction-formulae. To give a tan- gible idea of the compressibility of water, we will remark that Grassi observed for boiled water at under an Increase of one atmospheric pressure a diminution of the original volume amounting to 5 in 100,000 parts. If we imagine, accordingly, the vessel A to have the capacity of one litre (1000 ccm.), and affix to it a cap- illary tube of i sq. mm. cross-section, the quicksilver filament will ascend in it 5 cm. under a pressure of one atmosphere. Surface- 9. Surface-pressure, accordingly, induces a physical pressure in- . . . . . - . . , . .. . <iuces m alteration in a liquid (an alteration in density), which liquids an - - . rr . 1 - 1 . alteration can be detected by sumciently delicate means even ensi y. are a j wa y s a liberty to think that por- tions of a liquid under a higher pressure are more dense, though it may be very slightly so, than parts under a less pressure. The impii- Let us imagine now, we have in a liquid (in the in- this fact, terior of which no forces act and the gravity of which we accordingly neglect) two portions subjected to un- equal pressures and contiguous to one another. The portion under the greater pressure, being denser, will expand, and" press against the portion under the less pressure, until the forces of elasticity as lessened on the one side and increased on the other establish equilib- rium at the bounding surface and both portions are equally compressed. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 95 If we endeavor, now, quantitatively to elucidate our The state- mental conception of these two facts, the easy mobility these impii- and the compressibility of the parts of a liquid, so that they will fit the most diverse classes of experience, we shall arrive at the following proposition : When equilibrium subsists in a liquid, in the interior of which no forces act and the gravity of which we neglect, the same equal pressure is exerted on each and every equal surface-element of that liquid however and wherever situated. The pressure, therefore, is the same at all points and is independent of direction. Special experiments in demonstration of this prin- ciple have, perhaps, never been instituted with the re- quisite degree of exactitude. But the proposition has by our experience of liquids been made very familiar, and readily explains it. 10. If a liquid be enclosed in a vessel (Fig. 65) Preiimi- which is supplied with a piston ^4, the cross- section marks to -,... .. -.. . _^ . . , the discuss- of which is unit in area, and with a piston J3 which ion of Pas- , T . cal's deduo for the time being is made station- E| _; m ^ tion. ary, and on the piston A a load p be placed, then the same pressure p, gravity neglected, will prevail throughout all the parts of the vessel. The piston will penetrate inward and the walls of the vessel will continue to be deform ed till the point is reached at which the elastic forces of the rigid and fluid bodies perfectly equilibrate one another. If then we imagine the piston B, which has the cross-section/, to be mov- able, a force f. p alone will keep it in equilibrium. Concerning Pascal's deduction of the proposition before discussed from the principle of virtual displace- ments, it is to be remarked that the conditions of dis- g6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, Criticism of placement w r hich he perceived hinge wholly upon the auction. fact of the ready mobility of the parts and on the equality of the pressure throughout every portion of the liquid. If it were possible for a greater compression to take place in one part of a liquid than in another, the ratio of the displacements would be disturbed and Pascal's deduction would no longer be admissible. That the property of the equality of the pressure is a property given in experience, is a fact that cannot be escaped ; as we shall readily admit if we recall to mind that the same law that Pascal deduced for liquids also holds good for gases, where even approximately there can be no question of a constant volume. This latter fact does not afford any difficulty to our view ; but to that of Pascal it does. In the case of the lever also, be it incidentally remarked, the ratios of the virtual dis- placements are assured by the elastic forces of the lever-body, which do not permit of any great devia- tion from these relations. Thebehav- u. VVe shall now consider the action of liquids un- lourol'li- * quids under der the influence of gravity. The upper surface of a the action & J . . of gravity. liquid in equilibrium is horizontal, jAW(Fig. 66). This fact is at once JV rendered intelligible when we re- flect that every alteration of the sur- face in question elevates the centre of gravity of the liquid, and pushes Fig. ee. t j ie liquid rnass resting in the shaded space beneath NN and having the centre of gravity S into the shaded space above NN having the centre of gravity -S". Which alteration, of course, is at once re- versed by gravity. Let there be in equilibrium in a vessel a heavy liquid with a horizontal upper surface. We consider S' THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 97 (Fig. 67) a small rectangular parallelepipedon in the The con- interior. The area of its horizontal base, we will say, is equilibrium a, and the length of its vertical edges dh. The weight subjected of this parallelepipedon is therefore adhs, where s is uon of g'rav- its specific gravity. If the paral- lelepipedon do not sink, this is possible only on the condition that a greater pressure is exerted on the lower surface by the fluid than on the upper. The pressures on the upper and lower surfaces we will Flg- 6?> respectively designate as ap and a (p + df}. Equi- librium obtains when adh.s = otdp or dp/dh = s, where h in the downward direction is reckoned as posi- tive. We see from this that for equal increments of h vertically downwards the pressure/ must, correspond- ingly, also receive equal increments. So that p = As + q\ and if <7, the pressure at the upper surface, which is usually the pressure of the atmosphere, be- comes 0, we have, more simply, p = h s, that is, the pressure is proportional to the depth beneath the sur- face. If we imagine the liquid to be pouring into a ves- sel, and this condition of affairs not vet attained, every liquid particle will then sink until the compressed par- ticle beneath balances by the elasticity developed in it the weight of the particle above. From the view we have here presented it will be fur- Different ther apparent, that the increase of pressure in a liquid t?of exist takes place solely in the direction in which gravity finJof the 6 acts. Only at the lower surface, at the base, of the gravity parallelepipedon, is an excess of elastic pressure on the part of the liquid beneath required to balance the weight of the parallelepipedon. Along the two sides of the vertical containing surfaces of the parallelepipedon, 9 8 THE SCIENCE Of MECHANICS. the liquid is in a state of equal compression, since no force acts in the vertical containing surfaces that would determine a greater compression on the one side than on the other. Level sur- If we picture to ourselves the totality of all the points of the liquid at which the same pressure p acts, we shall obtain a surface a so-called level surface. If we displace a particle in the direction of the action of gravity, it undergoes a change of pressure. If we dis- place it at right angles to the direction of the action of gravity, no alteration of pressure takes place. In the latter case it remains on the same level surface, and the element of the level surface, accordingly, stands at right angles to the direction of the force of gravity. Imagining the earth to be fluid and spherical, the level surfaces are concentric spheres, and the directions of the forces of gravity (the radii) stand at right angles to the elements of the spherical surfaces. Similar ob- servations are admissible if the liquid particles be acted on by other forces than gravity, magnetic forces, for example. Their func- The level surfaces afford, in a certain sense, a dia- thought. gram of the force-relations to which a fluid is subjected; a view further elaborated by analytical hydrostatics. 12. The increase of the pressure with the depth be- low the surface of a heavy liquid may be illustrated by a series of experiments which we chiefly owe to Pas- cal. These experiments also well illustrate the fact, that the pressure is independent of the direction. In Fig. 68, i, is an empty glass tube g ground off at the bottom and closed by a metal disc //, to which a string is attached, and the whole plunged into a vessel of water. When immersed to a sufficient depth we may let the string go, without the metal disc, which is THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 99 supported by the pressure of the liquid, falling. In 2, Pascal's ex- i ..,.., , *i > o penments the metal disc is replaced by a tiny column of mer- on the cury. If (3) we dip an open siphon tube filled with liquids. mercury into the water, we shall see the mercury, in consequence of the pressure at a, rise into the longer arm. In 4, we see a tube, at the lower extremity of which a leather bag filled with mercury is tied : continued im- mersion forces the mercury higher and higher into the tube. In 5, a piece of wood h is driven by the pressure of the water into the small arm of an empty siphon tube. In 6, a piece of wood H immersed in mercury adheres to the bottom of the vessel, and is pressed firmly against it for as long a time as the mercury is kept from working its way un- derneath it. 13. Once we have made quite clear to ourselves that the pres- sure in the interior of a heavy liquid increases proportionally to the depth below the surface, the law that the pressure at the base of a vessel is independent of its form will be readily perceived. The pressure increases as we de- scend at an equal rate, whether the vessel (Fig. 69) has the form abed or ebcf. In both cases the walls of the vessel where they meet the liquid, go on deforming THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Elucida- tion of this fact. till the point is reached at which they equilibrate by the elasticity developed in them the pressure exerted by the fluid, that is, take the place as regards pressure of the fluid adjoining. This fact is a direct justification of Ste- vinus's fiction of the solidi- fied fluid supplying the place of the walls of the vessel. The pressure on the base always remains P = Ahs, where A denotes the area of the base, h the depth of the horizontal plane base below the level, and s the specific gravity of the liquid. The fact that, the walls of the vessel being neg- lected, the vessels i, 2, 3 of Fig. 70 of equal base- area and equal pressure-height weigh differently in the balance, of course in no wise con- tradicts the laws of pressure men- tioned. If we take into account the lateral pressure, we shall see that in the case of i we have left an extra component downwards, and in the case of 3 an extra component upwards, so that on the whole the resultant superficial pressure is always equal to the weight. The princi- 14. The principle of virtual displacements is ad- tuaidis- r " mirably adapted to the acquisition of clearness and placements , . L ,-, . -i , -, applied to comprehensiveness in cases of this character, and we eration S of ~ shall accordingly make use of it. To begin with, how- fhis b dSl ever, let the following be noted. If the weight q (Fig. 71) descend from position i to position 2, and a weight of exactly the same size move at the same time from THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 2 to 3, the work performed in this operation is qh^ + Prel i- gh 2 = g (h^ -\- /2 2 ), the same, that is, as if the weight marks - q passed directly from i to 3 and the weight at 2 re- mained in its original position. The observation is easily generalised. u/ Fig 71. Fig- 72. Let us consider a heavy homogeneous rectangular parallelepipedon, with vertical edges of the length h, base A, and the specific gravity ^ (Fig. 72). Let this parallelepipedon (or, what is the same thing, Its centre of gravity) descend a distance dh^ The work done is then A /is.d/i, or, also, A dhsJi. In the first expres- sion we conceive the whole weight Ahs displaced the vertical distance dh in the second we conceive the weight Adhs as having descended from the upper shaded space to the lower shaded space the distance h, and leave out of account the rest of the body. Both methods of concep- tion are admissible and equivalent. 15. With the aid of this observation we shall obtain a clear insight into the paradox of Pascal, which consists of the following. The vessel g (Fig. 73), fixed to a separate support and consisting of a narrow upper and a very broad lower cylinder, is closed at the bottom by a movable piston, Fig. 73. 102 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. which, by means of a string passing through the axis of the cylinders, is independently suspended from the extremity of one arm of a balance. If g be filled with water, then, despite the smallness of the quantity of water used, there will have to be placed on the other scale-pan, to balance it, several weights of consider- able size, the sum of which will be A /is, where A is the piston-area, h the height of the liquid, and ^ its specific gravity. But if the liquid be frozen and the mass loosened from the walls of the vessel, a very small weight will be sufficient to preserve equilibrium. Theexpia- Let us look to the virtual displacements of the two the parados cases (Fig. 74). In the first case, supposing the pis- ton to be lifted a distance dh, the virtual moment is Adhs.h or Ahs.dh. It thus comes to the same thing, -_dk whether we consider the mass that the motion of the piston displaces to be lifted to the upper surface of the fluid Flg< 74- through the entire pressure- height, or consider the entire weight A/is lifted the distance of the piston-displacement dh. In the second case, the mass that the piston displaces is not lifted to the upper surface of the fluid, but surfers a displace- ment which is much smaller the displacement, namely, of the piston. If A, a are the sectional areas respect- ively of the greater and the less cylinder, and k and / their respective heights, then the virtual moment of the present case is Adh s . k -f- adh s. / = (A k + a /) s . dh ; which is equivalent to the lifting of a much smaller weight (Ak -f- /)$', the distance dh. 1 6. The laws relating to the lateral pressure of liquids are but slight modifications of the laws of basal THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 103 Fig 75- pressure. If we have, for example, a cubical vessel The laws of of i decimetre on the side, which is a vessel of litre pressure, capacity, the pressure on any one of the vertical lateral walls A BCD, when the vessel is filled with water, is easily determinable. The deeper the migratory element considered descends beneath the surface, the greater the pressure will be to which it is subjected. We easily perceive, thus, that the pressure on a lateral wall is rep- resented by a wedge of water A BCD HI resting upon the wall horizontally placed, where ID is at right angles to BD and ID = HC=AC. The lateral pressure accor- dingly is equal to half a kilogramme. To determine the point of application of the resultant pressure, conceive ABCD again horizontal with the water-wedge resting upon it. We cut off AX BL = $AC, draw the straight line KL and bisect it at M; Mis the point of application sought, for through this point the vertical line cutting the centre of gravity of the wedge passes. A plane inclined figure forming the base of a vessel The pres- filled with a liquid, is divided into the elements a, a', p?ae?n- 11 11 i r dined base. a" . . . with the depths k, h , h . . . below the level of the liquid. The pressure on the base is (ah _|- a 9 Ji + a" h" + . . .) s. If we call the total base-area A, and the depth of its centre of gravity below the surface H, then ah + a'h' + a"h" + . . . _ ah + cth' + _ jy a + a' + a" + ...."" A whence the pressure on the base is AHs. io 4 T -H& SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, The deduc- ij. The principle of Archimedes can be deduced in principle of various ways. After the manner of Stevinus, let us desmaybe conceive in the interior of the liquid a portion of it various m solidified. This portion now, as before, will be sup- Way ported by the circumnatant liquid. The resultant of the forces of pressure acting on the surfaces is accor- dingly applied at the centre of gravity of the liquid dis- placed by the solidified body, and is equal and opposite to its weight. If now we put in the place of the solid- ified liquid another different body of the same form, but of a different specific gravity, the forces of pressure at the surfaces will remain the same. Accordingly, there now act on the body two forces, the weight of the body, applied at the centre of gravity of the body, and the up- ward buoyancy, the resultant of the surface-pressures, applied at the centre of gravity of the displaced liquid. The two centres of gravity in question coincide only in the case of homogeneous solid bodies. onemeth- If we immerse a rectangular parallelepipedon of al- titude h and base a, with edges vertically placed, in a liquid of specific gravity s, then the pressure on the upper basal surface, when at a depth k below the level of the liquid is aks, while the pressure on the lower surface is a (k + Ji) s. As the lateral pressures destroy each other, an excess of pressure a/is upwards re- mains ; or, where v denotes the volume of the paral- lelepipedon, an excess v . s. Another We shall approach nearest the fundamental con- method in- volving the ception from which Archimedes started, by recourse to principle of . virtual dis- the principle of virtual displacements. Let a paral- placements. . r lelepipedon (Fig. 76) of the specific gravity a, base a, and height h sink the distance dh. The virtual mo- ment of the transference frofn the upper into the lower shaded space of the figure will be a dh . oh. But while THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS 105 this is done, the liquid rises from the lower into the up- per space, and its moment is adhsh. The total vir- tual moment is therefore ah (G s) dh = (p q) dh, where/ denotes the weight of the body and q the weight of the displaced liquid. B Fig. 76. Fig. 77- 1 8. The question might occur to us, whether the is the buoy- , . ancy of a upward pressure of a body in a liquid is affected by the body in a r r . liquid af- immersion of the latter in another liquid. As a fact, fecttd by the nmaer- this very question has been proposed. Let therefore sion ot that J - 1 AX liquid in a (Fig. 77) a body K be submerged in a liquid A and the second liquid with the containing vessel in turn submerged in another liquid B. If in the determination of the loss of weight in A it were proper to take account of the loss of weight of A in B, then K's loss of weight would necessarily vanish when the fluid B became identical with A. Therefore, K immersed in A would suffer a loss of weight and it would suffer none. Such a rule would be nonsensical. With the aid of the principle of virtual displace- The eiuci- fK dation of ments, we easily comprehend the more complicated more corn- cases of this character. If a body be first gradually cases of this immersed in B, then partly* in B and partly in A, finally in A wholly ; then, in the second case, consider- ing the virtual moments, both liquids are to be taken into account in the proportion of the volume of the body immersed in them. But as soon as the body is wholly immersed in A, the level of A on further dis- io6 THE SCIENCE CF MECHANICS. The coun- ter-experi- ment. placement no longer rises, and therefore B is no longer of consequence. TheArchi- 19, Archimedes's principle maybe illustrated by a princfpie ii- pretty experiment. From the one extremity of a scale- arfexpen- ^ beam (Fig. 78) we hang a hollow cube H, and beneath it a solid cube M, which exactly fits into the first cube. We put weights into the opposite pan, until the scales are in equilibrium. If now M be submerged in water by lifting a vessel which stands beneath it, the equilibrium will be dis- turbed ; but it will be immediately re- stored if H, the hollow cube, be filled with water. A counter-experiment is the follow- ing. H is left suspended alone at the one extremity of the balance, and into the opposite pan is placed a vessel of water, above which on an independent support ^fhangs by a thin wire. The scales are brought to equilibrium. If now M be lowered until it is im- mersed in the water, the equilibrium of the scales will be disturbed ; but on filling H with water, it will be restored. Remarks on At first glance this experiment appears a little para- mentf pen ~ doxical. We feel, however, instinctively, that M can- not be immersed in the water without exerting a pres- sure that affects the scales. When we reflect, that the level of the water in the vessel rises, and that the solid body M equilibrates the surface-pressure of the water surrounding it, that is to say represents and takes the place of an equal volume of water, it will be found that the paradoxical character of the experiment van- ishes. / Fig. 78. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 107 20. The most important statical principles have The gene- been reached in the investigation of solid bodies. This ptes P of n stat- course is accidentally the historical one, but it is by no h^bUn means the only possible and necessary one. The dif- the^nvesti- ferent methods that Archimedes, Stevinus, Galileo, and embodies the rest, pursued, place this idea clearly enough before the mind. As a matter of fact, general statical princi- ples, might, with the assistance of some very simple propositions from the statics of rigid bodies, have been reached in the investigation of liquids. Stevinus cer- tainly came very near such a discovery. We shall stop a moment to discuss the question. Let us imagine a liquid, the weight of which we neg- The dis- lect. Let this liquid be enclosed in a vessel and sub- illustration jected to a definite pressure. A portion of the liquid, statement. let us suppose, solidifies. On the closed surface nor- mal forces act proportional to the elements of the area, and we see without difficulty that their resultant will always be = 0. If we mark off by a closed curve a portion of the closed surface, we obtain, on either side of it, a non- closed surface. All surfaces which are bounded by the same curve (of double curvature) -and on which forces act normally (in the same sense) pro- \ \ 4 portional to the elements of the area, have lines coincident in position for the resultants of these forces. Let us suppose, now, that a fluid cylinder, determined by any closed plane curve as the perimeter of its base, solidifies. We may neglect the two basal sur- faces, perpendicular to the axis. And instead of the cylindrical surface the closed curve simply may be con- sidered. From this method follow quite analogous loS THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS Thedis- propositions for normal forces proportional to the ele- cussion and - , illustration ments of a plane curve. statement If the closed curve pass into a triangle, the con- sideration will shape itself thus. The resultant normal forces applied at the middle points of the sides of the triangle, we represent in direction, sense, and magni- tude by straight lines (Fig. 80). The lines mentioned intersect at a point the centre of the circle described about I the triangle. It will further be noted, Fig. so. t j lat ky t | ie s i m pi e parallel displace- ment of the lines representing the forces a triangle is constructible which is similar and congruent to the original triangle. Thededuc- Thence follows this proposition : tion of the . , r n . , . , . l triangle of Any three forces, which, acting at a point, are pro- this method portional and parallel in direction to the sides of a tri- angle, and which on meeting by parallel displacement form a congruent triangle, are in equilibrium. We see at once that this proposition is simply a different form of the principle of the parallelogram of forces. If instead of a triangle we imagine a polygon, we shall arrive at the familiar proposition of the polygon of forces. We conceive now in a heavy liquid of specific gravity yt a portion solidified. On the element a of the closed encompassing surface there acts a normal force a n z, where z is the distance of the element from the level of the liquid. We know from the outset the result. similar de- If normal forces which are determined by <xxz, another im- where a: denotes an element of area and z it's perpen- portant pro- _.,.,. r . position, dicular distance from a given plane E, act on a closed surface inwards, the resultant will be V. x, in which ex- pression V represents the enclosed volume. The THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 109 resultant acts at the centre of gravity of the volume, is perpendicular to the plane mentioned, and is directed towards this plane. Under the same conditions let a rigid curved surface The propo- be bounded by a plane curve, which encloses on the deduced, a plane the area A. The resultant of the forces acting of Greens n , . . _ . Theorem. on the curved surface is K, where R* = (AZny + ( J/V)2 AZVK* cos v, in which expression Z denotes the distance of the centre of gravity of the surface A from E, and v the normal angle of E and A. In the proposition of the last paragraph mathe- matically practised readers will have recognised a par- ticular case of Green's Theorem, which consists in the reduction of surface-integrations to volume-integra- tions or vice versa. We may, accordingly, see into the force-system of n . , . ..,., . f , f . cations of fluid in equilibrium, or, if you please, see out of it, sys- the view terns of forces of greater or less complexity, and thus reach by a short path propositions a posteriori. It is a mere accident that Stevinus did not light on these propositions. The method here pursued corresponds exactly to his. In this manner new discoveries can still be made. 21. The paradoxical results that were reached in Fruitful re- ,. .. ,...., 1-1 -i r sults of the the investigation of liquids, supplied a stimulus to fur- investiga- _ . _ i Y i i i 1 iir tionsof this ther reflection and research. It should also not be left domain. unnoticed, that the conception of a physico-mechanical continuum was first formed on the occasion of the in- vestigation of liquids. A much freer and much more fruitful mathematical mode of view was developed thereby, than was possible through the study even of no THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. systems of several solid bodies. The origin, in fact, of important modern mechanical ideas, as for instance that of the potential, is traceable to this source. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS IN THEIR APPLICATION TO GASEOUS BODIES. character i. The same views that subserve the ends of science partmentof in the investigation of liquids are applicable with but inquiry. slight modifications to the investigation of gaseous bodies. To this extent, therefore, the investigation of gases does not afford mechanics any very rich returns. Nevertheless, the first steps that were taken in this province possess considerable significance from the point of view of the progress of civilisation and so have a high import for science generally. The eius- Although the ordinary man has abundant oppor- its e subject- tunity, by his experience of the resistance of the air, by the action of the wind, and the confinement of air in bladders, to perceive that air is of the nature of a body, yet this fact manifests itself infrequently, and never in the obvious and unmistakable way that it does in the case of solid bodies and fluids. It is known, to be sure, but is not sufficiently familiar to be prominent in popu- lar thought. In ordinary life the presence of the air is scarcely ever thought of. (See p. 517.) The effect Although the ancients, as we may learn from the of the first r TT . . . . . disclosures accounts of Vitruvius, possessed instruments which, ince, 1Spr v like the so-called hydraulic organs, were based on the condensation of air, although the invention of the air- gun is traced back to Ctesibius, and this instrument was also known to Guericke, the notions which people held with regard to the nature of the air as late even THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. OTTO BC GUERICKE ifs:^ Potentifs: Elector^ Branded Conlia.rius H2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. as the seventeenth century were exceedingly curious and loose. We must not be surprised, therefore, at the intellectual commotion Which the first more important experiments in this direction evoked. The enthusiastic description which Pascal gives of Boyle's air-pump ex- periments is readily comprehended, if we transport our- selves back into the epoch of these discoveries. What indeed could be more wonderful than the sudden dis- covery that a thing which we do not see, hardly feel, and take .scarcely any notice of, constantly envelopes us on all sides, penetrates all things ; that it is the most important condition of life, of combustion, and of gi- gantic mechanical phenomena. It was on this occa- sion, perhaps, first made manifest by a great and strik- ing disclosure, that physical science is not restricted to the investigation of palpable and grossly sensible processes. The views 2. In Galileo's time philosophers explained the on this sub- phenomenon of suction, the action of syringes and . 1 " pumps by the so-called horror vacui nature's abhor- rence of a vacuum. Nature was thought to possess the power of preventing the formation of a vacuum by laying hold of the first adjacent thing, whatsoever it was, and immediately filling up with it any empty space that arose. Apart from the ungrounded speculative element which this view contains, it must be conceded, that to a certain extent it really represents the phe- nomenon. The person competent to enunciate it must actually have discerned some principle in the phenom- enon. This principle, however, does not fit all cases. Galileo is said to have been greatly surprised at hearing of a newly constructed pump accidentally supplied with a very long suction-pipe which was not able to raise water to a height of more than eighteen Italian THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 113 ells. His first thought was that the horror vacui (or the resistenza del vacua) possessed a measurable power. The greatest height to which water could be raised by suc- tion he called altezza limit atissima. He sought, more- over, to determine directly the weight able to draw out of a closed pump-barrel a tightly fitting piston resting on the bottom. 3. TORRICELLI hit upon the idea of measuring theTorriceiirs resistance to a vacuum by a column of mercury instead espenment of a column of water, and he expected to obtain a col- umn of about ^ of the length of the water column. His expectation was confirmed by the experiment per- formed in 1643 by Viviani in the well-known manner, and which bears to-day the name of the Torricellian experiment. A glass tube somewhat over a metre in length; sealed at one end and filled with mercury, is stopped at the open end with the finger, inverted in a dish of mercury, and placed in a vertical position. Re- moving the finger, the column of mercury falls and re- mains stationary at a height of about 76 cm. By this experiment it was rendered quite probable, that some very definite pressure forced the fluids into the vacuum. What pressure this was, Torricelli very soon divined. Galileo had endeavored, some time before this, to Galileo's determine the weight of the air, by first weighing a we?gh P air? glass bottle containing nothing but air and then again weighing the bottle after the air had been partly ex- pelled by heat. It was known, accordingly, that the air was heavy. But to the majority of men the horror vacui and the weight of the air were very distantly connected notions. It is possible that in Torricelli's case the two ideas came into sufficient proximity to lead him to the conviction that all phenomena ascribed to the horror vacui were explicable in a simple and n 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Atmospher- logical manner by the pressure exerted by the weight discovered of a fluid column a column of air. Torricelli discov- ceiii. ered, therefore, the pressure of the atmosphere ; he also first observed by means of his column of mercury the variations of the pressure of the atmosphere. 4. The news of Torricelli's experiment was circu- lated in France by Mersenne, and came to the knowl- edge of Pascal in the year 1644. The accounts of the theory of the experiment were presumably so imper- fect that PASCAL found it necessary to reflect indepen- dently thereon. {Pesanteur de I' air. Paris, 1663.) Pascal's ex- He repeated the experiment with mercury and with periments. ... , a tube of water, or rather of red wine, 40 feet in length. He soon convinced himself by inclining the tube that the space above the column of fluid was really empty ; and he found himself obliged to defend this view against the violent attacks of his countrymen. Pascal pointed out an easy way of producing the vacuum which they regarded as impossible, by the use of a glass syringe, the nozzle of which was closed with the finger under water and the piston then drawn back without much difficulty. Pascal showed, in addition, that a curved siphon 40 feet high filled with water does not flow, but can be made to do so by a sufficient inclination to the perpendicular. The same experiment was made on a smaller scale with mercury. The same siphon flows or does not flow according as it is placed in an inclined or a vertical position. In a later performance, Pascal refers expressly to the fact of the weight of the atmosphere and to the pressure due to this weight. He shows, that minute animals, like flies, are able, without injury to them- selves, to stand a high pressure in fluids, provided only the pressure is equal on all sides ; and he applies this THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 115 at once to the case of fishes and of animals that live InTheanai- the air. Pascal's chief merit, indeed, is to have estab- HqnteTn lished a complete analogy between the phenomena con- fc^re^sur ditioned by liquid pressure (water-pressure) and those conditioned by atmospheric pressure. 5. By a series of experiments Pascal shows that mercury in consequence of atmospheric pressure rises into a space containing no air in the same way that, in consequence of water-pressure, it rises into a space containing no water. If into a deep ves- sel filled with water (Fig. 81) a tube be sunk at the lower end of which a bag of mercury is tied, but so inserted that the upper end of the tube projects out of the water and thus contains only air, then the deeper the tube is sunk into the water the higher will the mercury, subjected Fig. si. to the constantly increasing pressure of the water, as- cend into the tube. The experiment can also be made, with a siphon-tube, or with a tube open at its lower end. Undoubtedly it was the attentive consideration of The height this very phenomenon that led Pascal to the idea that tains deter- , , ,-,-, mined by the barometer-column must necessarily stand lower at the barom- eter. the summit of a mountain than at its base, and that it could accordingly be employed to determine the height of mountains. He communicated this idea to his brother-in-law, Perier, who forthwith successfully performed the experiment on the summit of the Puy de Dome. (Sept. 19, 1648.) Pascal referred the phenomena connected with ad- Adhesion hesion-plates to the pressure of the atmosphere, and gave as an illustration of the principle involved the re- sistance experienced when a large hat lying flat on a table is suddenly lifted. The cleaving of wood to the n6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. A siphon which acts by water- pressure. Pascal's modifica- tion of the Torricelli- an experi- ment. bottom of a vessel of quicksilver is a phenomenon of the same kind. Pascal imitated the flow produced in a siphon by atmospheric pressure, by the use of water-pressure. The two open unequal arms a and /; of a three-armed tube a b c (Fig. 82) are dipped into the vessels of mercury e and d. If the whole arrangement then be immersed in a deep vessel of water, yet so that the long open branch shall always project above the upper surface, the mercury will gradually rise in the branches a and d, the columns finally unite, and a stream begin to flow from the vessel d to the vessel e through the siphon-tube open above to the air. The Torricellian experiment was modi- fied by Pascal in a very ingenious manner. A tube of the form abed (Fig. 83), of double the length of an ordinary barom- eter-tube, is filled with mercury. The openings a and b are closed with the fin- gers and the tube placed in a dish of mercury with the end a downwards. If now a be opened, the mercury in cd will all fall into the expanded portion at c 9 and the mercury in ab will sink to the height of the ordinary barometer-column. A vac- uum is produced at b which presses the finger closing the hole painfully inwards. If b also be opened the column in a b will sink completely, while the mercury in the expanded portion c, being now exposed to the pressure of the - 83. THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 117 atmosphere, will rise in c d to the height of the barom- eter-column. Without an air-pump it was hardly pos- sible to combine the experiment and the counter- experiment in a simpler and more ingenious manner than Pascal thus did. 6. With regard to Pascal's mountain-experiment, Suppie- we shall add the following brief supplementary remarks, marks on Let be the height of the barometer at the level of mountafn- i i r 11 i r experiment the sea, and let it tall, say, at an elevation of m metres, to kb ^ where k is a proper fraction. At a further eleva- tion of m metres, we must expect to obtain the barom- eter-height k.kb^ since we here pass through a stratum of air the density of which bears to that of the first the proportion of k : 1. If we pass upwards to the altitude h = n . m metres, the barometer-height corresponding thereto will be The principle of the method is, we see, a very simple one ; its difficulty arises solely from the multifarious collateral conditions and corrections that have to be looked to. 7. The most original and fruitful achievements in The expe * i . f /-\ j^ rnents of the domain of aerostatics we owe to OTTO VON GUE- otto yon TT . . T , , i Guericke. RICKE. His experiments appear to have been suggested in the main by philosophical speculations. He pro- ceeded entirely in his own way ; for he first heard of the Torricellian experiment from Valerianus Magnus at the Imperial Diet of Ratisbon in 1654, where he dem- onstrated the experimental discoveries made by him about 1650. This statement is confirmed by his method i iS THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. of constructing a water-barometer which was entirely different from that of Torricelli. Thehistori- Guericke's book (Experimenta nova, ut vocantur* cal value of . Guencke's Mapdeburpica. Amsterdam. 1672) makes us realise book. oo / the narrow views men took in his time. The fact that he was able gradually to abandon these views and to acquire broader ones by his individual endeavor speaks favorably for his intellectual powers. We perceive with astonishment how short a space of time separates us from the era of scientific barbarism, and can no lon- ger marvel that the barbarism of the social order still so oppresses us. its specula- In the introduction to this book and in various other tive charac- ., _,.,... ... . . . . . ter. places, Guencke, m the midst of his experimental in- vestigations, speaks of the various objections to the Copernican system which had been drawn from the Bible, (objections which he seeks to invalidate,) and discusses such subjects as the locality of heaven, the locality of hell, and the day of judgment. Disquisi- tions on empty space occupy a considerable portion of the work. Guericke's Guericke regards the air as the exhalation or odor the air. of bodies, which we do not perceive because we have been accustomed to it from childhood. Air, to him, is not an element He knows that through the effects of heat and cold it changes its volume, and that it is compressible in Hero's Ball, or Pila Heronis ; on the basis of his own experiments he gives its pressure at 20 ells of water, and expressly speaks of its weight, by which flames are forced upwards. 8. To produce a vacuum, Guericke first employed a wooden cask filled with water. The pump of a fire- engine was fastened to its lower end. The water, it was thought, in following the piston and the action of THE PRINCIPLES OF STA TICS, 119 Guericke's First Experiments, (Exfertm. Magded.) 120 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. His at- gravity, would fall and be pumped out. Guericke ex- tempts to , . nni . produce a pected that empty space would remain. The fastenings vacuum. . , 1 1 -,, . . . of the pump repeatedly proved to be too weak, since m consequence of the atmospheric pressure that weighed on the piston considerable force had to be applied to move it. On strengthening the fastenings three power- ful men finally accomplished the exhaustion. But, meantime the air poured in through the joints of the cask with a loud blast, and no vacuum was obtained. In a subsequent experiment the small cask from which the water was to be exhausted was immersed in a larger one, likewise filled with water. But in this case, too, the water gradually forced its way into the smaller cask. His final Wood having proved in this way to be an unsuit- able material for the purpose, and Guericke having re- marked in the last experiment indications of success, the philosopher now took a large hollow sphere of copper and ventured to exhaust the air directly. At the start the exhaustion was successfully and easily conducted. But after a few strokes of the piston, the pumping became so difficult that four stalwart men (viri quadrati), putting forth their utmost efforts, could hardly budge the piston. And when the exhaustion had gone still further, the sphere suddenly collapsed, with a violent report. Finally by the aid of a copper vessel of perfect spherical form, the production of the vacuum was successfully accomplished. Guericke de- scribes the great force with which the air rushed in on the opening of the cock. 9. After these experiments Guericke constructed an independent air-pump. A great glass globular re- ceiver was mounted and closed by a large detachable tap in which was a stop-cock. Through this opening the objects to be subjected to experiment were placed THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 121 in the receiver. To secure more perfect closure the Guerick receiver was made to stand, with its stop-cock under water, on a tripod, beneath which the pump proper was Guericke's Air-pump. (Exj>erzm, Magdeb!) placed. Subsequently, separate receivers, connected with the exhausted sphere, were also employed in the experiments. 122 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The curious The phenomena which Guericke observed with this phenomena r 1 i nm i i observed by apparatus are manifold and various. The noise which means of . . . . . the air- water in a vacuum makes on striking the sides oi the glass receiver, the violent rush of air and water into exhausted vessels suddenly opened, the escape on ex- haustion of gases absorbed in liquids, the liberation of their fragrance, as Guericke expresses it, were imme- diately remarked. A lighted candle is extinguished on exhaustion, because, as Guericke conjectures, it derives its nourishment from the air. Combustion, as his striking remark is, is not an annihilation, but a transformation of the air. A bell does not ring in a vacuum. Birds die in it. Many fishes swell up, and finally burst. A grape is kept fresh in vaciw for over half a year. By connecting with an exhausted cylinder a long tube dipped in water, a water-barometer is constructed. The column raised is 19-20 ells high; and Von Guericke explained all the effects that had been ascribed to the horror vacui by the principle of atmospheric pressure. An important experiment consisted in the weighing of a receiver, first when filled with air and then when exhausted. The weight of the air was found to" vary with the circumstances ; namely, with the temperature and the height of the barometer. According to Gue- ricke a definite ratio of weight between air and water does not exist. The experi- But the deepest impression on the contemporary mentsrelat- .... . ing to at- world was made by the experiments relating to atmos- mospheric . A i i i r -. r pressure, pheric pressure. An exhausted sphere formed of two hemispheres tightly adjusted to one another was rent asunder with a violent report only by the traction of sixteen horses. The same sphere was suspended from THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 123 a beam, and a heavily laden scale-pan was attached to the lower half. The cylinder of a large pump is closed by a piston. To the piston a rope is tied which leads over a pulley and is divided into numerous branches on which a great number of men pull. The moment the cylinder is connected with an exhausted receiver, the men at the ropes are thrown to the ground. In a similar manner a huge weight is lifted. Guericke mentions the compressed-air gun as some- Guericke's thing already known, and constructs independently an instrument that might appropriately be called a rari- fied-air gun. A bullet is driven b}^ the external atmos- pheric pressure through a suddenly exhausted tube, forces aside at the end of the tube a leather valve which closes it, and then continues its flight with a consider- able velocity. Closed vessels carried to the summit of a mountain and opened, blow out air ; carried down again in the same manner, they suck in air. From these and other experiments Guericke discovers that the air is elastic. 10. The investigations of Guericke were continued The investi- by an Englishman, ROBERT BOYLE.* The new experi- Robert ments which Boyle had to supply were few. He ob- serves the propagation of light in a vacuum and the action of a magnet through it ; lights tinder by means of a burning glass ; brings the barometer under the re- ceiver of the air-pump, and was the first to construct a balance-manometer ["the statical manometer"]. The ebullition of heated fluids and the freezing of water on exhaustion were first observed by him. Of the air-pump experiments common at the present day may also be mentioned that with falling bodies, * And published by him In 1660, before the work of Von Guericke. Trans. I2 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Quantita- tive data. The fail of which confirms in a simple manner the view of Galileo bodies in a, , , . ri-i-. i -. vacuum, that when the resistance of the air has been eliminated light and heavy bodies both fall with the same velo- city. In an exhausted glass tube a leaden bullet and a piece of paper are placed. Putting the tube in a ver- tical position and quickly turning it about a horizontal axis through an angle of 180, both bodies will be seen to arrive simultaneously at the bottom of the tube. Of the quantitative data we will mention the fol- lowing. The atmospheric pressure that supports a column of mercury of 76 cm. is easily calculated from the specific gravity 13-60 of mercury to be 1*0336 kg. to i sq.cm. The weight of 1000 cu.cm. of pure, dry air at C. and 760 mm. of pressure at Paris at an ele- vation of 6 metres will be found to be 1-293 grams, and the corresponding specific gravity, referred to water, to be 0-001293. Thediscov- ii. Guericke knew of only one kind of air. We ery of other . . . . gaseous may imagine therefore the excitement it created when substances. . j u -j /-rj-s in 1755 BLACK discovered carbonic acid gas (fixed air) and CAVENDISH in 1766 hydrogen (inflammable air), discoveries which were soon followed by other similar ones. The dissimilar physical properties of gases are very strik- ing. Faraday has il- lustrated their great inequality of weight by a beautiful lecture- experiment. If from a balance in equilib- rium, we suspend (Fig. 84) two beakers A, B, the one in an upright position and the other with its opening downwards, we may pour heavy carbonic acid gas from THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 125 above into the one and light hydrogen from beneath into the other. In both instances the balance turns in the direction of the arrow. To-day, as we know, the decanting of gases can be made directly visible by the optical method of Foucault and Toeppler. 12. Soon after Torricelli's discovery, attempts were The mercu- . . rial air- made to employ practically the vacuum thus produced, pump. The so-called mercurial air-pumps were tried. But no such instrument was successful until the present cen- tury. The mercurial air-pumps now in common use are really barometers of which the extremities are sup- plied with large expansions and so connected that their difference of level may be easily varied. The mercury takes the place of the piston of the ordinary air-pump. 13. The expansive force of the air, a property ob- Boyle's law. served by Guericke, was more accurately investigated by BOYLE, and, later, by MARIOTTE. The law which both found is as follows. If F"be called the volume of a given quantity of air and P its pressure on unit area of the containing vessel, then the product V. P is always = a constant quantity. If the volume of the enclosed air be reduced one-half, the air will exert double the pressure on unit of area ; if the volume of the enclosed quantity be doubled, the pressure will sink to one-half ; and so on. It is quite correct as a number of English writers have maintained in recent times that Boyle and not Mariotte is to be regarded as the discoverer of the law that usually goes by Mariotte's name. Not only is this true, but it must also be added that Boyle knew that the law did not hold exactly, whereas this fact appears to have escaped Mariotte. The method pursued by Mariotte in the ascertain- ment of the law was very simple. He partially filled 126 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Mariotte's experi- ments. Fig. 85. His appa- ratus. Torricellian tubes with mercury, measured the volume of the air remaining, and then performed the Torricel- lian experiment. The new volume of air was thus obtained, and by subtract- ing the height of the column of mer- cury from the barometer-height, also the new pressure to which the same quantity of air was now subjected. To condense the air Mariotte em- ployed a siphon-tube with vertical arms. The smaller arm in which the air was contained was sealed at the upper end ; the longer, into which the mercury was poured, was open at the upper end. The volume of the air was read off on the graduated tube, and to the difference of level of the mercury in the two arms the barometer- height was added. At the present day both sets of experiments are performed in the simplest manner by fastening a cylindrical glass tube (Fig. 86) rr, closed at the top, to a vertical scale and connecting it by a caoutchouc tube kk with a second open glass tube r' r', which is movable up and down the scale. If the tubes be partly filled with mercury, any difference of level whatsoever of the two surfaces of mer- Fig. se. cury may be produced by displacing r' ;-', and the corresponding variations of volume of the air enclosed in r r observed. It struck Mariotte on the occasion of his investiga- tions that any small quantity of air cut off completely THE PRINCIPLES OF STATICS. 127 from the rest of the atmosphere and therefore notTheexpan i rr 1111 -. s ' ve f r ce of directly anected by the latter s weight, also supported isolated . , . . portions of the barometer- column j as where, to give an instance, theatmos- the open arm of a barometer-tube is closed. The simple explanation of this phenomenon, which, of course, Mariotte immediately found, is this, that the air before enclosure must have been compressed to a point at which its tension balanced the gravitational pressure of the atmosphere ; that is to say, to a point at which it exertqd an equivalent elastic pressure. We shall not enter here into the details of the ar- rangement and use of air-pumps, which are readily understood from the law of Boyle and Mariotte. 14. It simply remains for us to remark, that the dis- coveries of aerostatics furnished so much that was new and wonderful that a valuable intellectual stimulus pro- ceeded from the science. CHAPTER II. THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. i. GALILEO'S ACHIEVEMENTS. Dynamics i. We now pass to the discussion of the funda- m9defn a mental principles of dynamics. This is entirely a mod- ern science. The mechanical speculations of the an- cients, particularly of the Greeks, related wholly to statics. Dynamics was founded by GALILEO. We shall readily recognise the correctness of this assertion if we but consider a moment a few propositions held by the Aristotelians of Galileo's time. To explain the descent of heavy bodies and the rising of light bodies, (in li- quids for instance,) it was assumed that every thing and object sought its place : the place of heavy bodies was below, the place of light bodies was above. Motions were divided into natural motions, as that of descent, and violent motions, as, for example, that of a pro- jectile. From some few superficial experiments and observations, philosophers had concluded that heavy bodies fall more quickly and lighter bodies more slowly, or, more precisely, that bodies of greater weight fall more quickly and those of less weight more slowly. It is sufficiently obvious from this that the dynamical knowledge of the ancients, particularly of the Greeks, was very insignificant, and that it was left to modern THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 129 times to lay the true foundations of this department of inquiry. (See Appendix, VII., p. 520.) 2. '1 he treatise D is cor si e dimostrazwni matematiche, in which Galileo communicated to the world the first 130 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Galileo's dynamical Investigation of the laws of falling bodies, tionofthe appeared in 1638. The modern spirit that Galileo dis- lawsoffall- rr . , , - , , , . ing bodies, covers is evidenced here, at the very outset, by the tact that he does not ask why heavy bodies fall, but pro- pounds the question, How do heavy bodies fall ? in agreement with what law do freely falling bodies move? The method he employs to ascertain this law is this. He makes certain assumptions. He does not, however, like Aristotle, rest there, but endeavors to ascertain by trial whether they are correct or not. His first, The first theory on which he lights is the following, theory. It seems In his eyes plausible that a freely falling body, Inasmuch as it is plain that its velocity is constantly on the increase, so moves that its velocity is double after traversing double the distance, and triple after traversing triple the distance ; in short, that the veloci- ties acquired in the descent increase proportionally to the distances descended through. Before he pro- ceeds to test experimentally this hypothesis, he reasons on it logically, Implicates himself, however, in so doing, in a fallacy. He says, if a body has acquired a certain velocity in the first distance descended through, double the velocity in double such distance descended through, and so on ; that is to say, if the velocity In the second instance is double what it is in the first, then the double distance will be traversed in the same time as the origi- nal simple distance. If, accordingly, In the case of the double distance we conceive the first half trav- ersed, no time will, it would seem, fall to the account of the second half. The motion of a falling body ap- pears, therefore, to take place instantaneously ; which not only contradicts the hypothesis but also ocular evi- dence. We shall revert to this peculiar fallacy of Galileo's later on. THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 131 3. After Galileo fancied he had discovered this as- HIS second, j. u i_i i i i correct, as- sumption to be untenable, he made a second one, ac- sumption. cording to which the velocity acquired is proportional to the time of the descent. That Is, if a body fall once, and then fall again during twice as long an Interval of time as it first fell, it will attain in the second Instance double the velocity it acquired in the first He found no self-contradiction in this theory, and he accordingly proceeded to investigate by experiment whether the assumption accorded with observed facts. It was dif- ficult to prove by any direct means that the velocity acquired was proportional to the time of descent. It was easier, however, to investigate by what law the distance increased with the time ; and he consequently deduced from his assumption the relation that obtained between the distance and the time, and tested this by experiment. The deduction r> Discussion , - . . . -^P and eluci- is simple, distinct, and per- fectly correct. He draws (Fig. 87) a straight line, and on it cuts off successive por- O dation of the true theory. tions that represent to him Fig- 87. the times elapsed. At the extremities of these por- tions he erects perpendiculars (ordinates), and these represent the velocities acquired. Any portion OG of the line OA denotes, therefore, the time of descent elapsed, and the corresponding perpendicular GH* the velocity acquired in such time. If, now, we fix our attention on the progress of the velocities, we shall observe with Galileo the following fact : namely, that at the instant C } at which one-half O C of the time of descent OA has elapsed, the velocity CD is also one-half of the final velocity AS. If now we examine two instants of time, E and G, 1 32 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Uniformly equally distant in opposite directions from the instant motion, C, we shall observe that the velocity HG exceeds the mean velocity CD by the same amount that EF falls short of it. For every instant antecedent to C there exists a corresponding one equally distant from it sub- sequent to C. Whatever loss, therefore, as compared with uniform motion with half the final velocity, is suf- fered in the first half of the motion, such loss is made up in the second half. The distance fallen through we may consequently regard as having been uniformly de- scribed with half the final velocity. If, accordingly, W 7 e make the final velocity v proportional to the time of descent /, we shall obtain v=gt 9 where g denotes the final velocity acquired in unit of time the so-called acceleration. The space s descended through is there- fore given by the equation s = ("//2) / or s = gt* /z. Motion of this sort, in which, agreeably to the assump- tion, equal velocities constantly accrue in equal inter- vals of time, we call uniformly accelerated motion. Tabieofthe If we collect the times of descent, the final veloci- lochies.and ties, and the distances traversed, we shall obtain the distances of n . u , descent, following table : /. v. s. i. V- i x i . f 2. 2g. 2 X 2 . |- 0* ^ 3<r Q V Q <b o* o x a 2~ <r 4. 4r. 4X4. 4- tg. t X / . - THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 133 4. The relation obtaining between / and s admits Expenmen- of experimental proof; and this Galileo accomplished tion of the in the manner which we shall now describe. We must first remark that no part of the knowledge and ideas on this subject with which we are now so familiar, existed in Galileo's time, but that Galileo had to create these ideas and means for us. Accordingly, it was impossible for him to proceed as we should do to-day, and he was obliged, therefore, to pursue a dif- ferent method. He first sought to retard the motion of descent, that it might be more accurately observed. He made observations on balls, which he caused to roll down inclined planes (grooves); assuming that only the velocity of the motion would be lessened here, but that the form of the law of descent would remain un- modified. If, beginning from the upper extremity, theThearti- fices em- distances i, 4, 9, 1 6 ... be notched off on the groove, ployed. the respective times of descent will be representable, it w r as assumed, by the numbers i, 2, 3, 4 . . . ; a result which was, be it added, confirmed. The observation of the times involved, Galileo accomplished in a very in- genious manner. There were no clocks of the modern kind in his day : such were first rendered possible by the dynamical knowledge of which Galileo laid the foundations. The mechanical clocks w T hich were used were very inaccurate, and were available only for the measurement of great spaces of time. Moreover, it was chiefly water-clocks and sand-glasses that were in use in the form in which they had been handed down from the ancients. Galileo, now, constructed a very simple clock of this kind, which he especially adjusted to the measurement of small spaces of time ; a thing not customary in those days. It consisted of a vessel of water of very large transverse dimensions, having in 134 TffE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Galileo's the bottom a minute orifice which was closed with the finger. As soon as the ball began to roll down the in- clined plane Galileo removed his finger and allowed the water to flow out on a balance ; when the ball had ar- rived at the terminus of- its path he closed the orifice. As the pressure-height of the fluid did not, owing to the great transverse dimensions of the vessel, percept- ibly change, the weights of the water discharged from the orifice were proportional to the times. It was in this way actually shown that the times increased simply, while the spaces fallen through increased quadratically. The inference from Galileo's assumption was thus con- firmed by experiment, and with it the assumption itself. Thereia- c. To form some notion of the relation which sub- tion of mo- ., . . . . - - "JT tion^on an sists between motion on an inclined plane and that of plane to free descent, Galileo made the assumption, that a body descent, which falls through the height of an inclined plane attains the same final velocity as a body which falls through its length. This is an assumption that will strike us as rather a bold one ; but in the manner in which it was enunciated and employed by Galileo, it is quite natural. We shall endeavor to explain the way by which he was led to it. He says : If a body fall freely downwards, its velocity increases proportionally to the time. When, then, the body has arrived at a point be- low, let us imagine its velocity reversed and directed upwards ; the body then, it is clear, will rise. We make the observation that its motion in this case is a reflection, so to speak, of its motion in the first case. As then its velocity increased proportionally to the time of descent, it will now, conversely, diminish in that proportion. When the body has continued to rise for as long a time as it descended, and has reached the height from which it originally fell, its velocity will be reduced to THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 135 zero. We perceive, therefore, that a body will rise, justifica- in virtue of the velocity acquired in its descent, just as assumption high as it has fallen. If, accordingly, a body falling final veioc- down an inclined plane could acquire a velocity which motions are would enable it, when placed on a differently inclined plane, to rise higher than the point from which it had fallen, we should be able to effect the elevation of bodies by gravity alone. There is contained, accord- ingly, in this assumption, that the velocity acquired by a body in descent depends solely on the vertical height fallen through and is independent of the inclination of the path, nothing more 'than the uncontradictory ap- prehension and recognition of the fact that heavy bodies do not possess the tendency to rise, but only the ten- dency to fall. If we should assume that a body fall- ing down the length of an inclined plane in some way or other attained a greater velocity than a body that fell through its height, we should only have to let the body pass with the acquired velocity to another in- clined or vertical plane to make it rise to a greater ver- tical height than it had fallen from. And if the velo- city attained on the inclined plane were less, we should only have to reverse the process to obtain the same re- sult. In both instances a heavy body could, by an ap- propriate arrangement of inclined planes, be forced continually upwards solely by its own weight a state of things which wholly contradicts our instinctive knowledge of the nature of heavy bodies. (Seep. 522.) 6. Galileo, in this case, again, did not stop with the mere philosophical and logical discussion of his assumption, but tested it by comparison with expe- rience. He took a simple filar pendulum (Fig. 88) with a heavy ball attached. Lifting the pendulum, while i 3 6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Galileo's elongated its full length, to the level of a given altitude, experimen- _, ,...,,. , -, -, 11 tai venfica- and then letting it fall, it ascended to the same level assumption on the opposite side. If it does not do so exactly, Galileo said, the resistance of the air must be .the cause of the deficit. This is inferrible from the fact that the deficiency is greater in the case of a cork ball than it is Effected by in the case of a heavy metal one. However, this neg- Fmp'eding lected, the body ascends to the same altitude on the ofa^endu- opposite side. Now it is permissible to regard the mo- um smng. ^.^ ^ ^ pendulum in the arc of a circle as a motion of descent along a series of inclined planes of different inclinations. This seen, we can, with Galileo, easily cause the body to rise on a different arc on a different series of inclined planes. This we accomplish by driv- ing in at one side of the thread, as it vertically hangs, a nail/ or g, which will prevent any given portion of the thread from taking part in the second half of the motion. The moment the thread arrives at the line of equilibrium and strikes the nail, the ball, which has fallen through ba, will begin to ascend by a different series of inclined planes, and describe the arc am or an. Now if the inclination of the planes had any influence THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 137 on the velocity of descent, the body could not rise to the same horizontal level from which it had fallen. But it does. By driving the nail sufficiently low dow r n, we may shorten the pendulum for half of an oscillation as much as we please ; the phenomenon, however, al- ways remains the same. If the nail h be driven so low down that the remainder of the string cannot reach to the plane E, the ball will turn completely over and wind the thread round the nail ; because when it has attained the greatest height it can reach it still has a residual velocity left. 7. If we assume thus, that the same final velocity is The as- sumption attained on an inclined plane whether the body fall leads to the r . law of rela- through the height or the length of the plane, in which tive accei- assumption nothing more is contained than that a body sought, rises by virtue of the velocity it has acquired in falling just as high as it has fallen, we shall easily arrive, with Galileo, at the perception that the times of the de- scent along the height and the length of an inclined plane are in the simple proportion of the height and the length ; or, what is the same, that the accelerations are inversely proportional to the times of descent. The acceleration along the height will consequently bear to the acceleration along the length the proportion of the length to the height. Let AB (Fig. 89) be the height and A C ^- the length of the inclined plane. Fig. 89. Both will be descended through in uniformly accel- erated motion in the times t and / x with the final ve- locity v. Therefore, -~ V txn& -/ and 1 3 8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. If the accelerations along the height and the length be called respectively g and g^ we also have v = gt and v = 1 whence = -- = g ^i AC In this way we are able to deduce from the accel- eration on an inclined plane the acceleration of free descent. A corollary From this proposition Galileo deduces several cor- ceding law. ollaries, some of which have passed into our elementary text-books. The accelerations along the height and length are in the inverse proportion of the height and length. If now we cause one body to fall along the length of an inclined plane and simultaneously another to fall freely along its height, and ask what the dis- tances are that are traversed by the two in equal inter- vals of time, the solution of the problem will be readily found (Fig, 90) by simply letting fall from B a perpen- dicular on the length. The part AD, thus cut off, will be the distance traversed by the one body on the in- clined plane, while the second body is freely falling through the height of the plane. A D B Fig. 90. Fig. 91. Relative If we describe (Fig. 91) a circle on AB as diame- icription of ter, the circle will pass through D, because D is a inddiame- right angle. It will be seen thus, that we can imagine lel. ir " any number of inclined planes, AE, AF, of any degree of inclination, passing through A, and that in every THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 139 circles - case the chords AG, A IT drawn In this circle from the upper extremity of the diameter will be traversed in the same time by a falling body as the vertical diame- ter itself. Since, obviously, only the lengths and In- clinations are essential here, we may also draw the chords in question from the lower extremity of the diameter, and say generally : The vertical diameter of a circle is described by a falling particle in the same time that any chord through either extremity is so described. We shall present another corollary, which, in the The figure pretty form in which Galileo gave it, is usually no bodies fZn longer incorporated in elementary expositions. We chords o! Imagine gutters radiating in a vertical plane from a c common point A at a number of different degrees of inclination to the horizon (Fig. 92). We place at their common extremity A a like number of heavy bodies and cause them to begin simultaneous- ly their motion of des- cent. The bodies will always form at any one instant of time a circle. After the lapse of a longer time they will be found in a circle of larger radius, and the radii increase proportionally to the squares of the times. If we imagine the gutters to radiate in a space instead of a plane, the falling bodies will always form a sphere, and the radii of the spheres will increase pro- portionally to the squares of the times. This will be 140 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. perceived by imagining the figure revolved about the vertical A l r . character 8. We see thus, as deserves again to be briefly inquiries, noticed, that Galileo did not supply us with a theory of the falling of bodies, but investigated and estab- lished, wholly without preformed opinions, the actual facts of falling. Gradually adapting, on this occasion, his thoughts to the facts, and everywhere logically abiding by the ideas he had reached, he hit on a conception, which to himself, perhaps less than to his successors, appeared in trie light of a new law. In all his reasonings, Galileo f followed, to the greatest advantage of science, a prin- "T ciple which might appropriately be called the principle The print | of contimiity. Once we have reached a theory that ap- ciple of ; J \ * continuity plies to a particular case, we proceed gradually to ; modify in thought the conditions of that case, as far j as it is at all possible, and endeavor in so doing to :. adhere throughout as closely as we can to the concep- tion originally reached. There is no method of pro- cedure more surely calculated to lead to that compre- : hension of all natural phenomena which is the simplest and also attainable with the least expenditure of men- tality and feeling. (Compare Appendix, IX., p. 523.) A particular instance will show more clearly than any general remarks what we mean. Galileo con- A C D F B H Fig. 93- siders (Fig. 93) a body which is falling down the in- clined plane AB, and which, being placed with the THE PRINCIPLES OF D YXAMICS. 141 velocity thus acquired on a second plane B C, for ex- Galileo's ample, ascends this second plane. On all planes J3C y ofVneso- ,5 ' r 1 i - i i called law BD, and so forth, it ascends to the horizontal plane of mertia. that passes through A. But, just as it falls on BD with less acceleration than it does on BC, so similar!}* it will ascend on BD with less retardation than it will on BC. The nearer the planes BC, BD, BE, BP^- proach to the horizontal plane BH, the less will the retardation of the body on those planes be, and the longer and further will it move on them. On the hori- zontal plane BH the retardation vanishes entirely (that ' is, of course, neglecting friction and the resistance of the air), and the body will continue to move infinitely long and infinitely far with constant velocity. Thus ad- vancing to the limiting case of the problem presented, Galileo discovers the so-called law of inertia, according to which a body not under the influence of forces, i. e. of special circumstances that change motion, will re- tain forever its velocity (and direction). We shall presently revert to this subject. Q. The motion of falling that Galileo found actually The deduc- ,. , . . , . , , , tion of the to exist, is, accordingly, a motion of which the velocity idea of um- increases proportionally to the time a so-called uni- ceierated P , . , . motion. formly accelerated motion. It would be an anachronism and utterly unhistorical to attempt, as is sometimes done, to derive the uniformly accelerated motion of falling bodies from the constant action of the force of gravity. " Gravity is a constant force consequently it generates in equal elements of time equal increments of velocity ; thus, the motion produced is uniformly accelerated." Any exposition such as this would be unhistorical, and would put the whole discovery in a false light, for the reason that the notion of force as we hold it to-day was first created 142 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Forces and by Galileo. Before Galileo force was known solely as accelera- - - tions. pressure. Now, no one can know, who has not learned it from experience, that generally pressure produces motion, much less /;/ what manner pressure passes into motion ; that not position, nor velocity, but accelera- tion, is determined by it. This cannot be philosophi- cally deduced from the conception, itself. Conjectures may be set up concerning it. But experience alone can definitively inform us with regard to it. 10. It is not by any means self-evident, therefore, * that the circumstances which determine motion, that is, forces, immediately produce accelerations. A glance at other departments of physics will at once make this clear. The differences of temperature of bodies also determine alterations. However, by differences of tem- perature not compensatory accelerations are deter- mined, but compensatory velocities. The fact That it is accelerations which are the immediate ef- that forces , , , , , determine fects of the circumstances that determine motion, that Sonstslm is, of the forces, is a fact which Galileo fere eived in the tai P lac? en natural phenomena. Others before him had also per- ceived many things. The assertion that everything seeks its place also involves a correct observation. The ob- servation, however, does not hold good in all cases, and it is not exhaustive. If we cast a stone into the air, for example, it no longer seeks its place ; since its place is b.elow. But the acceleration towards the earth, the retardation of the upward motion, the fact that Ga- lileo perceived, is still present. His observation always remains correct; it holds true more generally; it em- braces in one mental effort much more. ii. We have already remarked that Galileo dis- covered the so-called law of inertia quite incidentally. A body on which, as we are wont to say, no force acts, THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 143 preserves its direction and velocity unaltered. The History of fortunes of this law of inertia have been strange. It called law , . , . . of inertia. appears never to have played a prominent part in Gali- leo's thought. But Galileo's successors, particularly Huygens and Newton, formulated it as an independent law. Nay, some have even made of inertia a general property of matter. We shall readily perceive, how- ever, that the law of inertia is not at all an indepen- dent law, but is contained implicitly in Galileo's per- ception that all circumstances determinative of motion, or forces, produce accelerations. In fact, if a force determine, not position, not velo-Theiawa . r i simple in- City, but acceleration, change of velocity, it stands to ference i . . . . , ... from Gali- reason that where there is no force there will be no leo's fund*. change of velocity. It is not necessary to enunciate servation. this in independent form. The embarrassment of the neophyte, which also overcame the great investigators in the face of the great mass of new material presented, alone could have led them to conceive the same fact as two different facts and to formulate it twice. In any event, to represent inertia as self-evident, or Erroneous to derive it from the general proposition that "the ef- deducing it. feet of a cause persists, " is totally wrong. Only a mistaken straining after rigid logic can lead us so out of the way. Nothing is to be accomplished in the pres- ent domain with scholastic propositions like the one just cited. We may easily convince ourselves that the contrary proposition, "cessante causa cessat effectus," is as well supported by reason. If we call the acquired velocity "the effect," then the first proposition is cor- rect ; if we call the acceleration "effect," then the sec- ond proposition holds. 12. We shall now examine Galileo's researches from another side. He began his investigations with the 144 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, Notion of notions familiar to his time notions developed mainly it e exjsted a ?n in the practical arts. One notion of this kind was that time. of velocity, which is very readily obtained from the con- sideration of a uniform motion. If a body traverse in every second of time the same distance c, the distance traversed at the end of t seconds will be s = ct. The distance c traversed in a second of time we call the ve- locity, and obtain it from the examination of any por- tion of the distance and the corresponding time by the help of the equation c s/t t that is, by dividing the number which is the measure of the distance traversed by the number which is the measure of the time elapsed. Now, Galileo could not complete his investigations without tacitly modifying and extending the traditional idea of velocity. Let us represent for distinctness sake Fig- 94- in i (Fig. 94) a uniform motion, In 2 a variable motion, by laying off as abscissae in the direction OA the elapsed times, and erecting as ordinates in the direction AB the distances traversed. Now, In i, whatever increment of the distance we may divide by the corresponding In- crement of the time, in all cases we obtain for the ve- locity c the same value. But If we were thus to proceed In 2, we should obtain widely differing values, and therefore the word "velocity " as ordinarily understood, ceases In this case to be unequivocal. If, however, we consider the increase of the distance In a sufficiently THE PRINCIPLES OF D YXAmCS. 145 small element of time, where the element of the curve Galileo's , , , . , modifaca- in 2 approaches to a straight line, we may regard thetionoftMs Increase as uniform. The velocity in this element of n lcm " the motion we may then define as the quotient, A s/A /, of the element of the time into the corresponding ele- ment of the distance. Still more precisely, the velocity at any instant is defined as the limiting value which the ratio A s/A t assumes as the elements become in- finitely small a value designated by ds'dt. This new notion includes the old one as a particular case, and Is, moreover, immediately applicable to uniform motion. Although the express formulation of this idea, as thus extended, did not take place till long after Galileo, we see none the less that he made use of It in his reason- ings. 13. An entirely new notion to which Galileo was The notion i T i T r 7 T ' T i i of accelera- ted is the idea of acceleration. In uniformly acceler- tion. ated motion the velocities increase with the time agreeably to the same law as in uniform motion the spaces increase with the times. If w T e call r the velo- city acquired in time /, then v = gt. Here g denotes the increment of the velocity in unit of time or the ac- celeration, which we also obtain from the equation g = v/t. When the Investigation of variably accel- erated motions was begun, this notion of accelera- tion had to experience an extension similar to that of the notion of velocity. If in i and 2 the times be again drawn as abscissae, but now the velocities as ordinates, we may go through anew the whole train of the pre- ceding reasoning and define the acceleration as dv/dt, where dv denotes an infinitely small increment of the velocity and dt the corresponding increment of the time. In the notation of the differential calculus we 146 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. have for the acceleration of a rectilinear motion, cp = Graphic The ideas here developed are susceptible, moreover, tion of of graphic representation. If we lay off the times as- these ideas. D r , ,. .. , ,, abscissae and the distances as ordmates, we shall per- ceive, that the velocity at each instant is measured by the slope of the curve of the distance. If in a similar manner we put times and velocities together, we shall see that the acceleration of the instant is measured by the slope of the curve of the velocity. The course of the latter slope is, indeed, also capable of being traced in the curve of distances, as will be perceived from the following considerations. Let us imagine, in the E D F B Fig. 95. c d e Fig. 96. The curve usual manner (Fig. 95), a uniform motion represented by a straight line OCD. Let us compare with this a motion OCE the velocity of which in the second half of the time is greater, and another motion OCF of which the velocity is in the same proportion smaller. In the first case, accordingly, we shall have to erect for the time OB = 2 OA, an ordinate greater than BD = 2 AC, in the second case, an ordinate less than BD. We see thus, without difficulty, that a curve of dis- tance convex to the axis of the time-abscissae corre- sponds to accelerated motion, and a curve concave thereto to retarded motion. If we imagine a lead-pen- cil to perform a vertical motion of any kind and in THE PRINCIPLES OP DYNAMICS. 147 front of it during its motion a piece of paper to be uni- formly drawn along from right to left and the pencil to thus execute the drawing in Fig. 96, we shall be able to read off from the drawing the peculiarities of the mo- tion. At a the velocity of the pencil was directed up- wards, at b it was greater, at c it was = 0, at d it was directed downwards, at e it was again = 0. At a, fi, d, e, the acceleration was directed upwards, at c down- wards ; at c and e it was greatest. 14. The summary representation of what Galileo Tabular discovered is best made by a table of times, acquired mem of Ga J ^ lileo's dis- t . V . S . covery. 1 g if 2 2^ 4f- 3 3^ 9-f- velocities, and traversed distances. But the numbers The table follow so simple a law, one immediately recognisable, placed by . . rules for its that there is nothing to prevent our replacing the cpnstmc- table by a rule for its construction. If we examine the relation that connects the first and second columns, we shall find that it is expressed by the equation v = gf y which, in its last analysis, is nothing but an abbrevi- ated direction for constructing the first two columns of the table. The relation connecting the first and third columns is given by the equation s =g / 2 /2. The con- nection of the second and third columns is represented by s = 5 148 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. rhe rules. Of the three relations S ~ - -p: strictly, the first two only were employed by Galileo. Huygens was the first who evinced a higher apprecia- tion of the third, and laid, in thus doing, the founda- tions of important advances. A remark 15. We may add a remark in connection with on the rela- -.,,.,. .,,_.,, tionofthe this table that is very valuable. It has been stated previously that a body, by virtue of the velocity it has acquired in its fall, is able to rise again to its origi- nal height, in doing which its velocity diminishes in the same way (with respect to time and space) as it increased in falling. Now a freely falling body ac- quires in double time of descent double velocity, but falls in this double time through four times the simple distance. A body, therefore, to which we impart a ver- tically upward double velocity will ascend twice as long a time, butfaitr times as high as a body to which the simple velocity has been imparted. The dispute It was remarked, very soon after Galileo, that there of the Car- . . , . ' / . , , ' , . tesians and is inherent in the velocity of a body a something that Leibnitz- , . J - . . . . b , . , iansonthe corresponds to a force a something, that is, by which measure of , .-.,,,., force. a force can be overcome, a certain "efficacy," as it has been aptly termed. The only point that was debated was, whether this efficacy was to be reckoned propor- tional to the velocity or to the square of the velocity. The Cartesians held the former, the Leibnitzians the latter. But it will be perceived that the question in- volves no dispute whatever. The body with the double velocity overcomes a given force through double the THE PRINCIPLES OP DYNAMICS. 149 time, but through four times the distance. With re- spect to time, therefore, its efficacy Is proportional to the velocity ; with respect to distance, to the square of the velocity. D'Alembert drew attention to this mis- understanding, although in not very distinct terms. It Is to be especially remarked, however, that Huygens's thoughts on this question were perfect!} 7 clear. 1 6. The experimental procedure by which, at the The present present day, the laws of falling bodies are verified, lstaime_ansof somewhat different from that of Galileo. Two methods the jaws of may be employed. Either the motion of falling, which ies. from its rapidity is difficult to observe directly, is so retarded, without altering the law, as to be easily ob- served ; or the motion of falling is not altered at all, but our means of observation are improved In deli- cacy. On the first principle Galileo's inclined gutter and Atwood's machine rest. Atwood's machine consists (Fig. 97) of an easily run- ning pulley, over which is thrown a thread, to whose extremities two equal weights P are attached. If upon one of the weights P we lay a third small weight p, a uniformly accel- erated motion will be set up by the added Fi g- 97- weight, having the acceleration (//2 jP-j-/) g a result that will be readily obtained when we shall have dis- cussed the notion of "mass." Now by means of a graduated vertical standard connected with the pulley it may easily be shown that in the times i, 2, 3, 4 .... the distances i, 4, 9, 16 , . . . are traversed. The final velocity corresponding to any given time of descent Is investigated by catching the small additional weight,/, which is shaped so as to project beyond the outline of P, in a ring through which the falling body passes, after which the motion continues without acceleration. P+p 150 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The appa- The apparatus of Morin is based on a different prin- Morin, La- ciple. A body to which a writing pencil is attached borde, Lip- , .. . . , r 1-1-1 pich, and describes on a vertical sheet of paper, which is drawn Von Babo, . 11- i -i uniformly across it by a clock-work, a horizontal straight line. If the body fall while the paper is not in motion, it will describe a vertical straight line. If the two motions are combined, a parabola will be produced, of which the horizontal abscissae correspond to the elapsed times and the vertical ordinates to the dis- tances of descent described. For the abscissae i, 2, 3, 4 .... we obtain the ordinates i, 4, g, 16 . . . . By an unessential modification, Morin employed instead of a plane sheet of paper, a rapidly rotating cylindrical drum with vertical axis, by the side of which the body fell down a guiding wire. A different apparatus, based on the same principle, was invented, independently, by Laborde, Lippich, and Von Babo. A lampblacked sheet of glass (Fig. 98^) falls freely, while a horizon- tally vibrating vertical rod, which in its first transit through the position of equilibrium starts the motion of descent, traces, by means of a quill, a curve on the lampblacked surface. Owing to the constancy of the period of vibration of the rod combined with the in- creasing velocity of the descent, the undulations traced by the rod become longer and longer. Thus (Fig. 98) be = $ab, cd$ab, de = *jab, and so forth. The law of falling bodies is clearly exhibited by this, since ab -\- cb 4#, ab-\-bc-\-cd ^ab> and so forth. The law of the velocity is confirmed by the inclinations of the tangents at the points a, b, c 9 d, and so forth. If the time of oscillation of the rod be known, the value of g is determinable from an experiment of this kind with considerable exactness. Wheatstone employed for the measurement of mi- THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 151 nute portions of time a rapidly operating clock-work The de- 1111 i i vices of called a cnronoscope, which is set m motion at the be- \vheat- r , -, , , , , stone and ginning of the time to be measured and stopped at the Hipp, termination of it. Hipp has advantageously modified Fig. g8a. this method by simply causing a light index-hand to be thrown by means of a clutch in and out of gear with a rapidly moving wheel-work regulated by a vibrating reed of steel tuned to a high note ; and acting as an es- 152 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Galileo's minor in- vestiga- tions. capement. The throwing in and out of gear is effected by an electric current. Now if, as soon as the body be- gins to fall, the current be interrupted, that is the hand thrown into gear, and as soon as the body strikes the platform below the current is closed, that is the hand thrown out of gear, we can read by the distance the index-hand has travelled the time of descent. 17. Among the further achievements of Galileo we have yet to mention his ideas concerning the motion of the pendulum, and his refutation of the view that bodies of greater weight fall faster than bodies of less weight. We shall revert to both of these points on an- other occasion. It may be stated here, however, that Galileo, on discovering the constancy of the period of pendulum-oscillations, at once applied the pendulum to pulse-measurements at the sick-bed, as well as pro- posed its use in astronomical observations and to a cer- tain extent employed it therein himself. The motion 1 8. Of still greater importance are his investiga- of projec- . . .....,.-,., tiles. tions concerning the motion of projectiles. A free body, according to Galileo's view, constantly experiences a vertical acceleration g towards the earth. If at the beginning of its motion it is affected with a vertical velocity c 9 its velocity at the end of the time / will be v = c + gt. An initial velocity up- wards would have to be reck- oned negative here. The dis- tance described at the end of time t is represented by the 2 , where ct and \gt* are the X Fig 99. equation s = a -(- c t -[- portions of the traversed distance that correspond re- spectively to the uniform and the uniformly accelerated motion. The constant a is to be put = when we reckon THE PRINCIPLES OF DYXAM/CS. 153 the distance from the point that the body passes at time / = 0. When Galileo had once reached his fundamental conception of dynamics, he easily recognised the case of horizontal projection as a combination of two inde- pendent motions, a horizontal uniform motion, and a vertical uniformly accelerated motion. He thus intro- duced into use the principle of the parallelogram of mo- tions. Even oblique projection no longer presented the slightest difficulty. If a body receives a horizontal velocity c, it de- The curve scribes in the horizontal direction in time t the distance SonTpar- y = ct, while simultaneously it falls in a vertical direc- tion the distance oc =gt 2 /2. Different motion-deter- minative circumstances exercise no mutual effect on one another, and the motions determined by them take place independently of each other. Galileo was led to this assumption by the attentive observation of the phenomena ; and the assumption proved itself true. For the curve which a body describes when the two motions in question are compounded, we find, by em- ploying the two equations above given, the expression y = i/ (2 c 2 /g) oc. It is the parabola of Apollonius hav- ing its parameter equal to c 2 /Bandits axis vertical, as Galileo knew. We readily perceive with Galileo, that oblique pro- oblique rr^-i * projection jection involves nothing new. The velocity c imparted to a body at the angle a with the horizon is resolvable into the horizontal component c . cos a and the vertical component c . sin a. With the latter velocity the body ascends during the same interval of time / which it would take to acquire this velocity in falling vertically downwards. Therefore, c.sma=gt. When it has reached its greatest height the vertical component of its initial velocity has vanished, and from the point S i 5 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. onward (Fig. 100) it continues its motion as a. horizon- tal projection. If we examine any two epochs equally distant in time, before and after the transit through S, c we shall see that the body at O J these two epochs is equally distant from the perpendicu- lar through S and situated the same distance below the hori- zontal line through . The Fi s- 10 - curve is therefore symmet- rical with respect to the vertical line through S. It is a parabola with vertical axis and the parameter -'L The range To find the so-called range of projection, we have ojDrojec- s j m p} v to consider the horizontal motion during the time of the rising and falling of the body. For the ascent this time is, according to the equations above given, t = c sin cx/g 9 and the same for the descent. With the horizontal velocity c . cosar, therefore, the distance is traversed _ ^ sin or C* . c 2 . w = c cos a . 2 2 sm a cos a = sin 2 a. The range of projection is greatest accordingly when a = 45, and equally great for any two angles The mutual jo. The recognition of the mutual independence of indepen- ..... dence of the forces, or motion-determinative circumstances oc- forces. . . curring in nature, which was v reached and found expression in the investigations relating to projection, is important. A body Flg ' 10I< may move (Fig. 101) in the di- rection AB, while the space in which this motion oc- curs is displaced in the direction A C. The body then THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 155 goes from A to D. Now, this also happens If the two circumstances that simultaneously determine the mo- tions AB and AC, have no influence on one another. It is easy to see that we may compound by the paral- lelogram not only displacements that have taken place but also velocities and accelerations that simultane- ously take place. (See Appendix, X., p. 525.) ii. THE ACHIEVEMENTS OF HUYGENS. i. The next in succession of the great mechanical in- Huygens's quirers is HUYGENS, who in every respect must beas S an r S ranked as Galileo's peer. If, perhaps, his philosophical qmrer * endowments were less splendid than those of Galileo, this deficiency was compensated for by the superiority of his geometrical powers. Huygens not only continued the researches which Galileo had begun, but he also solved the first problems in the dynamics of several masses, whereas Galileo had throughout restricted him- self to the dynamics of a single body. The plenitude of Huygens's achievements is bestEnumera- seen in his HorologiumOscillatorium, which appeared in genss 1673. The most important subjects there treated of ferments, the first time, are : the theory of the centre of oscilla- tion, the invention and construction of the pendulum- clock, the invention of the escapement, the determina- tion of the acceleration of gravity, g, by pendulum- observations, a proposition regarding the employment of the length of the seconds pendulum as the unit of length, the theorems respecting centrifugal force, the mechanical and geometrical properties of cycloids, the doctrine of evolutes, and the theory of the circle of curvature. 156 SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. 2. With respect to the form of presentation of his work,, it is to be remarked that Huygens shares with CHRIS TIANUS HUG-ENIUS 14. Aprilis deiiatus 8 Junii 16*05 . Galileo, in all its perfection, the latter's exalted and inimitable candor. He is frank without reserve in the presentment of the methods that led him to his dis- THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. coveries, and thus always conducts his reader into the full comprehension of his performances. Nor had he cause to conceal these methods. If, a thousand years from now, it shall be found that he was a man, it will likewise be seen what manner of man he was. In our discussion of the achievements of Huygens, however, we shall have to proceed in a somewhat dif- ferent manner from that which we pursued in the case of Galileo. Galileo's views, in their classical sim- plicity, could be given in an almost unmodified form. With Huygens this is not possible. The latter deals with more complicated problems; his mathematical methods and notations be- come inadequate and cum- brous. For reasons of brev- ity, therefore, we shall re- produce all the conceptions of which we treat, in mod- ern form, retaining, how- ever, Huygens's essential and characteristic ideas. Huygens's Pendulum Clock. 158 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Centrifugal 3. We begin with the investigations concerning petal force, centrifugal force. When once we have recognised with Galileo that force determines acceleration, we are im- pelled, unavoidably, to ascribe every change of velocity and consequently also every change in the direction of a motion (since the direction is determined by three velocity-components perpendicular to one another) to a force. If, therefore, any body attached to a string, say a stone, is swung uniformly round in a circle, the curvilinear motion which it performs is intelligible only on the supposition of a constant force that deflects the body from the rectilinear path. The tension of the string is this force ; by it the body is constantly deflected from the rectilinear path and made to move towards the centre of the circle. This tension, accordingly, rep- resents a centripetal force. On the other hand, the axis also, or the fixed centre, is acted on by the tension of the string, and in this aspect the tension of the string appears as a centrifugal force. G f !^^v G Fig. 102. Fig. 103. Let us suppose that we have a body to which a ve- locity has been imparted and which is maintained in uniform motion in a circle by an acceleration constantly directed towards the centre. The conditions on which this acceleration depends, it is our purpose to investi- gate. We imagine (Fig. 102) two equal circles uni- THE PRINCIPLES OF D YNAMICS. 159 formly travelled round by two bodies ; the velocities in Uniform the circles I and II bear to each other the proportion ecjuai i : 2. If in the two circles we consider any same arc- element corresponding to some very small angle a, then the corresponding element s of the distance that the bodies in consequence of the centripetal acceleration have departed from the rectilinear path (the tangent), will also be the same. If we call (p l and (p 2 the re- spective accelerations, and r and r/2 the time-elements for the angle a, we find by Galileo's law 2s 2s cp^ , <p 2 = 4 ---, that is to say cp^ = 4^> 1 . Therefore, by generalisation, in equal circles 'the centripetal acceleration is proportional to the square of the velocity of the motion. Let us now consider the motion in the circles I and Uniform II (Fig. 103), the radii of which are to each other as unequal , . circles. i : 2, and let us take for the ratio of the velocities of the motions also 1:2, so that like arc-elements are travelled through in equal times. <p 1? <? 2 , s, is denote the accelerations and the elements of the distance trav- ersed ; r is the element of the time, equal for both cases. Then 2s 4s . V-L = ^><P* = ^ that is to sa y <p 3 = 2 ^i- If now we reduce the velocity of the motion in II one-half, so that the velocities in I and II become equal, <p 2 will thereby be reduced one-fourth, that is to say to <^!/2. Generalising, we get this rule: when the velocity of the circular motion is the same, the cen- tripetal acceleration is inversely proportional to the radius of the circle described. 4. The early investigators, owing to their following i6o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Deduction the conceptions of the ancients, generally obtained their of the gen- .... . f r eraiiawof propositions in the cumbersome form of proportions. motion. We shall pursue a different method. On a movable object having the velocity v let a force act during the element of time r which imparts to the object perpen- dicularly to the direction of its motion the acceleration cp. The new velocity-component thus becomes cpr, and its composition with the first velocity produces a new direction of the motion, making the angle a with the original direction. From this results, by conceiving the motion to take place in a circle of radius r, and on account of the smallness of the angular element putting The para- doxical character of this problem. Fig. 104. Fig. 105. tan of = a, the following, as the complete expression for the centripetal acceleration of a uniform motion in a circle, cpr vr r> 2 --- = tan a = a = or <p . v r ^ r The idea of uniform motion in a circle conditioned by a constant centripetal acceleration is a little para- doxical. The paradox lies in the assumption of a con- stant acceleration towards the centre without actual approach thereto and without increase of velocity. This is lessened when we reflect that without this centripetal acceleration the body would be continually moving away from the centre ; that the direction of the accel- THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 161 eratlon Is constantly changing ; and that a change of velocity (as will appear in the discussion of the prin- ciple of vis vrrd) is connected with an approach of the bodies that accelerate each other, which does not take place here. The more complex case of elliptical cen- tral motion is elucidative in this direction. (See p. 5 27.) 5. The expression for the centripetal or centrifugal A different . ... '" expression acceleration, cp = ?> 2 //-, can easily be put in a somewhat of the law. different form. If T denote the periodic time of the circular motion, the time occupied in describing the circumference, then vT= 2 r TT, and consequently cp = ^r7T 2 /T 2 , in which form we shall employ the expres- sion later on. If several bodies moving in circles have the same periodic times, the respective centripetal ac- celerations by which they are held in their paths, as is apparent from the last expression, are proportional to the radii. 6. We shall take it for granted that the reader is some phe- familiar with the phenomena that illustrate the con- which the siderations here presented : as the rupture of strings of plains. * insufficient strength on which bodies are whirled about, the flattening of soft rotating spheres, and so on. Huy- gens was able, by the aid of his conception, to explain at once whole series of phenomena. When a pendulum- clock, for example, which had been taken from Paris to Cayenne by Richer (1671-1673), showed a retarda- tion of its motion, Huygens deduced the apparent diminution of the acceleration of gravity g thus estab- lished, from the greater centrifugal acceleration of the rotating earth at the equator ; an explanation that at once rendered the observation intelligible. An experiment instituted by Huygens may here be noticed, on account of Its historical interest. When Newton brought out his theory of universal gravitation, 162 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. ing experi' ment of Huygens. An interest- Huygens belonged to the great number of those who were unable to reconcile themselves to the idea of action at a distance. He was of the opinion that gravitation could be explained by a vortical medium. If we enclose in a vessel filled with a liquid a number of lighter bod- ies, say wooden balls in water, and set the vessel ro- tating about its axis, the balls will at once rapidly move towards the axis. If for instance (Fig. 106), we place the glass cylinders RR containing the wooden balls KK by means of a pivot Z on a rotatory apparatus, and ro- tate the latter about its ver- tical axis, the balls will im- mediately run up the cyl- inders in the direction away from the axis. But if the tubes be filled with water, each rotation will force the balls floating at the extremities EE towards the axis. The phenomenon is easily explicable by analogy with the principle of Archimedes. The wooden balls receive a centripetal impulsion, comparable to buoyancy, which is equal and opposite to the centrifugal force acting on the displaced liquid. (See p. 528.) 7. Before we proceed to Huygens's investigations on the centre of oscillation, we shall present to the reader a few considerations concerning pendulous and oscillatory motion generally, which will make up in ob- viousness for what they lack in rigor. Many of the properties of pendulum motion were known to GALILEO. That he had formed the concep- tion which we shall new give, or that at least he was on the verge of so doing, may be inferred from many scattered allusions to the subject in his Dialogues. The bob of a simple pendulum of length / moves in a circle Oscillatory motion. THE PRINCIPLES OF DYXAMICS. 163 (Fig. 107) of radius /. If we give the pendulum a very Galileo's small excursion, it will travel in Its oscillations over ationoflhe 11 1-1 - * aw ^ t * ie very small arc which coincides approximately with the pendulum. chord belonging to it. But this chord is described by a falling particle, moving on it as on an inclined plane (see Sect i of this Chapter, 7), in the same time as the vertical diameter BD = 2 /. ' If the time of descent be called /, we shall have 2/ \gt*> that is /= 21/7/57 But since the continued movement from B up the line BC' occupies an equal Interval of time, we have to put for the time T of an oscillation from Cto C'j T= \\/ Ijg. It will be seen that even from so crude a conception as this the correct form of the pendulum-laws is obtainable. The exact expression for the time of very "small oscillations Is, as we know, Fig. 107. Again, the motion of a pendulum bob may be viewed pendulum as a motion of descent on a succession of inclined viewed as a planes. If the string of the pendulum makes the angle downfn- a with the perpendicular, the pendulum bob receives planes. in the direction of the position of equilibrium the accel- eration g. sin a. When a Is small, g. a Is the expres- sion of this acceleration ; in other words, -the accelera- tion is always proportional and oppositely directed to the excursion. When the excursions are small the curvature of the path may be neglected. 8. From these preliminaries, we may proceed to the study of oscillatory motion in a simpler manner. A body is free to move on a straight line OA (Fig. 108), and constantly receives in the direction towards the 164 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. A simpler point O an acceleration proportional to its distance from and modern -,.,, -, i T view of os- O. We will represent these accelerations by ordinates motion. erected at the positions considered. Ordinates upwards denote accelerations towards the left ; ordinates down- wards represent accel- erations towards the D'C A', II Fig. 108. right. The body, left to itself at A, will move towards with varied acceleration, pass through OtoA^ where OA^ OA, come back to } and so again continue its motion. It is in the The period first place easily demonstrable that the period of os- tioninde- dilation (the time of the motion through AOA^) is in- the amph- dependent of the amplitude of the oscillation (the dis- tance OA). To show this, let us imagine in I and II the same oscillation performed, with single and double amplitudes of oscillation. As the acceleration varies from point to point, we must divide OA and O'A' = 2 OA into a very large equal number of ele- ments. Each element A' B' of O'A 1 is then twice as large as the corresponding element AB of OA. The initial accelerations cp and cp stand in the relation qj = 2 (p. Accordingly, the elements AB and A' B' = 2 AB are described with their respective accelerations cp and 2cp im the same time r. The final velocities v and v' in I and II, for the first element, will be v = cpr and v' = 2 cpr, that is v' = 2 v. The accelerations and the initial velocities at B and B' are therefore again as 1:2. Accordingly, the corresponding elements that next succeed will be described in the same time. And THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 165 of every succeeding pair of elements the same asser- tion also holds true. Therefore, generalising, it will be readily perceived that the, period of oscillation is independent of its amplitude or breadth. Next, let us conceive two oscillatory motions, I and The time of ** . oscillation II, that have equal excursions (Fig. TOO); but in II let inverst-i> '' , ,. proportiun- a fourfold acceleration correspond to the same distance alto tnc from O. We divide the amplitudes of I BA / II Fig. 109. the oscillations AO and O'A' = OA into a very large equal number of parts. These parts are then equal in I and II. The initial accelerations at A and A' are cp and 4 <p ; the ele- ments of the distance described are AB = A'B' = s-y and the times are respectively rand r'. We obtain, then, r = }/2s/(p, r' = 1/2 j/4 <p = r/2. The element A'B' is accordingly trav- elled through in one-half the time the element AB is. The final velocities r and v' at B and B 1 are found by the equations v = cpr and v r = 4 (>(r/2) = 2 v. Since, therefore, the initial velo- cities at B and B' are to one another as i : 2, and the accelerations are again as 1:4, the element of II suc- ceeding the first will again be traversed in half the time of the corresponding one in I. Generalising, we get : For equal excursions the time of oscillation is in- versely proportional to the square root of the accelera- tions. 9. The considerations last presented may be put in a very much abbreviated and very obvious form by a method of conception first employed by Newton. New- ton calls those material systems similar that have geo- metrically similar configurations and whose homolo- of the ac- celeration. 166 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The princi- gous masses bear to one another the same ratio. He pleofsimil- ....... itude. says further that systems of this kind execute similar movements when the homologous points describe simi- lar paths in proportional times. Conformably to the geometrical terminology of the present day we should not be permitted to call mechanical structures of this kind (of five dimensions) similar unless their homolo- gous linear dimensions as well as the times and the masses bore to one another the same ratio. The struc- tures might more appropriately be termed affined to one another. We shall retain, however, the name phoronomically similar structures, and in the consideration that is to follow leave entirely out of account the masses. In two such similar motions, then, let the homologous paths be s and as, the homologous times be t and /?/; whence the homologous velo- tx v = -- ana yv = the homologous accel- cities are v = -- and yv = -& , 2s , a 2s erations ( ? = ~fi and 8( P = 7j2~j2' Thededuc- Now all oscillations which a body performs under laws of os- the conditions above set forth with any two different this a meSiod amplitudes i and or, will be readily recognised as sim- ilar motions. Noting that the ratio of the homologous accelerations in this case is e= a, we have a = a /ft 2 . Wherefore the ratio of the homologous times, that is to say of the times of oscillation, is ft = d= i. We ob- tain thus the law, that the period of oscillation is inde- pendent of the amplitude. If in two oscillatory motions we put for the ratio between the amplitudes i : a, and for the ratio between the accelerations i : a fa we shall obtain for this case THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 167 e= aju = a/fi 2 , and therefore ft = i ''zb \/ / ; where- with the second law of oscillating motion is obtained. Two uniform circular motions are always phoronom- ically similar. Let the ratio of their radii be i : a and the ratio of their velocities i : y. The ratio of their accelerations Is then = or/^ 2 , and since y=a/fi, also=^ 2 /flr; whence the theorems relative to cen- tripetal acceleration are obtained. It is a pity that Investigations of this kind respect- ing mechanical and phoronomical affinity are not more extensively cultivated, since they promise the most beautiful and most elucidative extensions of Insight imaginable. 10. Between uniform motion In a circle and oscil- The con- .... . . nection be- latory motion of the kind just discussed an important tweenoscii- relation exists which we shall now consider. We as- tion of this kind and sume a system of rectangular co- x y uniform_ I motion in a ordmates, having its origin at the X x ""~s"X circle. centre, <9, of the circle of Fig. no, about the circumference of which . we conceive a body to move uni- formly. The centripetal accelera- tion cp which conditions this mo- tion, we resolve In the directions of X and F; and observe that the ^-components of the motion are affected only by the X- components of the acceleration. We may regard both the motions and both the accelerations as Independent of each other. Now, the two components of the motion are os-Theiden- cillatory motions to and fro about O. To the excur- two. sion x the acceleration-component cp (x/r) or (cpfr) x In the direction O, corresponds. The acceleration Is proportional, therefore, to the excursion. And accord- ingly the motion is of the kind just investigated. The i68 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. time T of a complete to and fro movement Is also the periodic time of the circular motion. With respect to the latter, however, we know that <p= 4.r?r 2 /T 2 , or, what is the same, that T= 'Z-rtVr/cp. Now cp/r is the acceleration for x=. i, the acceleration that corre- sponds to unit of excursion, which we shall briefly designate by f. For the oscillatory motion we may put, therefore, T= 2?r ]/i//". For a single movement to, or a single movement fro, the common method of reckoning the time of oscillation, we get, then, T= TheappH- 1 1- Now this result is directly applicable to pen- the^asfre- dulum vibrations of very small excursions, where, ne- duiumvi- n ~glectmg the curvature of the path, it is possible to ad- brations. k ere { o t j ie conception developed. For the angle of elongation a we obtain as the distance of the pendulum bob from the position of equilibrium, la; and as the corresponding acceleration, ga\ whence J la This formula tells us, that the time of vibration is directly proportional to the square root of the length of the pendulum, and inversely proportional to the square root of the acceleration of gravity. A pendulum that is four times as long as the seconds pendulum, therefore, will perform its oscillation in two seconds. A seconds pendulum removed a distance equal to the earth's radius from the surface of the earth, and sub- jected therefore to the acceleration g/^, will likewise perform its oscillation in two seconds. 12. The dependence of the time of oscillation on the length of the pendulum is very easily verifiable by experiment. If (Fig. in) the pendulums a, b, c, THE PRINCIPLES OF DYXAMICS. 169 which to maintain the plane of oscillation invariable Experimen- are suspended by double threads, have the lengths i , ti a on of the , ... .' ' laws of the 4, 9, then a will execute two oscillations to one oscil- pendulum, lation of fr, and three to one of c. Fig. in. The verification of the dependence of the time of oscillation on the acceleration of gravity g is some- what more difficult ; since the latter cannot be arbi- trarily altered. But the demonstration can be effected by allowing one component only of g to act on the pendulum. If we imagine the axis of oscillation of 170 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Experimen- the pendulum A A fixed in the vertically placed plane tion of the of the paper. will be the intersection of the plane laws of the r - - i , , r i pendulum. ^^E * oscillation with the plane ot the paper and likewise the position of equilibrium of the pendulum. The axis makes with the horizontal plane, and the plane of os- cillation makes with the vertical plane, the angle /?; wherefore the acceleration -. cos/5 Fig. 112. ^ the acceleration which acts in this plane. If the pendulum receive in the plane of its oscillation the small elongation a, the corresponding acceleration Fig. 113. will be (g cos /?) a whence the time of oscillation is T= n Vllz cos"A" THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 171 . pendulum. We see from this result, that as ft Is increased the acceleration g cos ft diminishes, and consequently the time of oscillation increases. The experiment may be easily made with the apparatus represented in Fig. 113. The frame JRR is free to turn about a hinge at C; it can be inclined and placed on its side. The angle of in- clination is fixed by a graduated arc G held by a set- screw. Every increase of ft increases the time of oscil- lation. If the plane of oscillation be made horizontal, in which position R rests on the foot F, the time of oscillation becomes infinitely great. The pendulum in this case no longer returns to any definite position but describes several complete revolutions in the same direction until its entire velocity has been destroyed by friction. 13. If the movement of the pendulum do not take Theconicai place in a plane, but be performed In space, the thread of the pendulum will describe the surface of a cone. The motion of the conical pen- dulum was also investigated by Huygens. We shall examine a simple case of this motion. We imagine (Fig. 114) a pen- dulum of length / removed from the ver- tical by the angle a, a velocity v imparted to the bob of the pendulum at right angles to the plane of elongation, and the pendulum re- leased. The bob of the pendulum will move in a hori- zontal circle if the centrifugal acceleration q> developed exactly equilibrates the acceleration of gravity g; that is, if the resultant acceleration falls in the direction of the pendulum thread. But in that case <pjg=. tan or. If T stands for the time taken to describe one revolu- tion, the periodic time, then (p = ^r7T 2 /T 2 or T = 2 TC ~\/r/<p. Introducing, now, in the place of rj<p the "4- i 7 2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. value / sin a/g tan a = t cos a/g , we get for the periodic time of the pendulum, T= 2 TT ]/ / cos a/g. For the ve- locity v of the revolution we find v = I/ rep, and since cp = gta.na it follows that v= \/gl sin a tana. For very small elongations of the conical pendulum we may put T==27t ]///, which coincides with the regular formula for the pendulum, when we reflect that a single revolution of the conical pendulum corresponds to two vibrations of the common pendulum. The deter- 14. Huygens was the first to undertake the exact the accei- determination of the acceleration of gravity g by means gravity by of pendulum observations. From the formula T= iumf en u it I/ T/g for a simple pendulum with small bob we ob- tain directly g= 7T 2 l/T%. -For latitude 45 we obtain as the value of g, in metres and seconds, 9 . 806. For provisional mental calculations it is sufficient to re- member that the acceleration of gravity amounts in round numbers to 10 metres a second, A remark 15. Every thinking beginner puts to himself the uia express- question how it is that the duration of an oscillation, mg e aw. ^^ .^ ^ jj me> can foe found by dividing a number that is the measure of a length by a number that is the measure of an acceleration and extracting the square root of the quotient. But the fact is here to be borne in mind that g= 2s/t 2 , that is a length divided by the square of a time. In reality therefore the formula we have is T= 7t ]/(//2/) / 2 . And since l/2s is the ratio of two lengths, and therefore a number, what we have under the radical sign is consequently the square of a time. It stands to reason that we shall find Tin sec- onds only when, in determining g, we also take the sec- ond as unit of time. In the formula g 7t 2 l/T* we see directly that g is THE PRINCIPLES OP DYNAMICS. 173 a length divided by the square of a time, according to the nature of an acceleration. 1 6. The most important achievement of Huveens Theprob- 1 1 r i i 1 i ! lem f the is his solution of the problem to determine the centre centre of . oscillation. of oscillation. So long as we have to deal with the dy- namics of a single body, the Galilean principles amply suffice. But in the problem just mentioned we have to determine the motion of several bodies that mutually influence each other. This cannot be done without resorting to a new principle. Such a ore Huygens actually discovered. We know that loner pendulums perform their oscil- statement . ill! T - oftheprob- lations more slowly than snort ones. Let us imagine a lem. heavy body, free to rotate about an axis, the centre of gravity of which lies outside of the axis; such JTTT"' a body will represent a compound pendulum. Every material particle of a pendulum of this kind would, if it were situated alone at the same distance from the axis, have its own pe- riod of oscillation. But owing to the connec- Fig. tions of the parts the whole body can vibrate with only a single, determinate period of oscillation. If we pic- ture to ourselves several pendulums of unequal lengths, the shorter ones will swing quicker, the longer ones slower. If all be joined together so as to form a single pendulum, it is to be presumed that the longer ones will be accelerated, the shorter ones retarded, and that a sort of mean time of oscillation will result There must exist therefore a simple pendulum, intermediate in length between the shortest and the longest, that has the same time of oscillation as the compound pen- dulum. If we lay off the length of this pendulum on the compound pendulum, we shall find a point that pre- serves the same period of oscillation in its connection o o 174 THE SCIEXCE OF MECHANICS. with the other points as it would have if detached and left to itself. This point is the centre of oscillation. MERSEXXE was the first to propound the problem of determining the centre of oscillation. The solution of DESCARTES, who attempted it, was, however, precipi- tate and insufficient. Huygens's 17. Huvgens was the first who gave a general solu- solution. . r , , , , - tion. Besides Huygens nearly all the great inquirers of that time employed themselves on the problem, and we may say that the most important principles of mod- ern mechanics were developed in connection with it. The new idea from which Huygens set out, and which is more important by far than the whole prob- lem, is this. In whatsoever manner the material par- ticles of a pendulum may by mutual interaction modify each other's motions, in every case the velocities ac- quired in the descent of the pendulum can be such only that by virtue of them the centre of gravity of the par- ticles, whether still in connection or with their connec- tions dissolved, is able to rise just as high as the point The new from which it fell. Hu}7gens found himself compelled, whfch P H e uy- by the doubts of his contemporaries as to the correct- duced nr " ness of this principle, to remark, that the only assump- tion implied in the principle is, that heavy bodies of themselves do not move upwards. If it were possible for the centre of gravity of a connected system of falling material particles to rise higher after the dissolution of its connections than the point from which it had fallen, then by repeating the process heavy bodies could, by virtue of their own weights, be made to rise to any height we wished. If after the dissolution of the connections the centre of gravity should rise to a height less than that from which it had fallen, we should only have to reverse the motion to produce the THE PRINCIPLES OF DYXAMICS. 175 same result. What Huygens asserted, therefore, no one had ever really doubted ; on the contrary, every one had instinctively perceived it. Huygens, however, gave this instinctive perception an abstract, conceptual form. He does not omit, moreover, to point out, on the ground of this view, the fruitlessness of endeavors to establish a perpetual motion. The principle just devel- oped will be recognised as a generalisation of one of Ga- lileo's ideas. 1 8. Let us now see what the principle accomplishes Huygens's principle in the determination of the centre of oscillation. Let applied. OA (Fig. 116), for simplicity's sake, be a linear pendulum, made up of a large number of masses indicated in the diagram by points. Set free at OA> it will swing through B to OA', where AB = BA' . Its centre of gravity S will ascend just as high on the second side as it fell on the Fig ' IlS< first. From this, so far, nothing would follow. But also, if we should suddenly, at the position OJB, re- lease the individual masses from their connections, the masses could, by virtue of the velocities impressed on them by their connections, only attain the same height with respect to centre of gravity. If we arrest the free outward-swinging masses at the greatest heights they severally attain, the shorter pendulums will be found below the line OA', the longer ones will have passed beyond it, but the centre of gravity of the system will be found on OA' in its former position. Now let us note that the enforced velocities are proportional to the distances from the axis ; therefore, one being given, all are determined, and the height of ascent of the centre of gravity given. Conversely, 176 THE SCIEXCE OF therefore, the velocity of any material particle also is determined by the known height of the centre of grav- ity. B:it if we know in a pendulum the velocity cor- responding to a given distance of descent, we know its whole motion. Thede- IQ. Premising 1 these remarks, we proceed to the tailed reso- , . iution of the problem itself. On a compound linear pendulum (Fig. problem. r . 117) w r e cut off, measuring from the axis, the portion = i. If the pendulum move from its position of greatest excursion to the position of equilibrium, the point at the distance = i from the axis will fall through the height k. The masses ?//, ;;/', m" ... at the distances /-, /, /' . . . will fall in this case the dis- tances rk, r' k, r" k . . ., and the distance of the descent of the centre of gravity will be : ?nrk -\- m'rk -\- m"r"k -)- 7 2mr m ~-\- m' -j- in" -(-.... 2m Let the point at the distance i from the axis ac- quire, on passing through the position of equilibrium, the velocity, as yet unascertained, v. The height of its ascent, after the dissolution of its connections, will be z' 2 /2". The corresponding heights of ascent of the other material particles will then be (rz/) 2 /2^, (/ r) 2 / 2 ^ (>'" ?OV 2 " * The height of ascent of the centre of gravity of the liberated masses will be , m ~t~- + m ^ --- \- m - - 9 z/ 2 ^ m r 2 m ~\- m' -f- m" -)-... 2g~ By Huygens's fundamental principle, THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS, 177 From this a relation is deducible between the distance of descent k and the velocity v. Since, however, all pen- dulum motions of the same excursion are phoronomi- cally similar, the motion here under consideration is, In this result, completely determined. To find the length of the simple pendulum that has The length . , 7 M1 . , , ofthesira- the same period oi oscillation as the compound pen- pie isoch- ronous dulum considered, be it noted that the same relation pendulum. must obtain between the distance of its descent and its velocity, as in the case of its unimpeded fall. If y is the length of this pendulum, ky is the distance of its descent, and vy its velocity ; wherefore >=* .......... w- Multiplying equation (a) by equation (&) we obtain Employing the principle of phoronomic similitude, solution of we may also proceed in this way. From (a) we get Lm^the principle of 2mr similitude. 2 mr 2 ' A simple pendulum of length i, under corresponding circumstances, has the velocity Calling the time of oscillation of the compound pendu- lum T, that of the simple pendulum of length i T 1 = TtV'i/g, we obtain, adhering to the supposition of equal excursions, T v -=-= -; wherefore T= 7t < 7\ v 178 THE SCIENCE OP MECHANICS. Huygens's 2o, We see without difficulty in the Huygenian principle .... .. r , -,.. :ioit:cai principle the recognition of work as the condition de- prindpieof terminative of velocity, or, more exactly, the condition determinative of the so-called vis viva. By the vis rira or living force of a system of masses m, m n m, , affected with the velocities v, v,, v n . . . ., we understand the sum * _v< 2 + ^^+ o ' o n^ The fundamental principle of Huygens is identical with the principle of vis viva. The additions of later in- quirers were made not so much to the idea as to the form of its expression. If we picture to ourselves generally any system of weights/,/,,/,, . . . ., which fall connected or uncon- nected through the heights h, h r , h n . . . ., and attain thereby the velocities v, v l9 v tt . . . ., then, by the Huy- genian conception, a relation of equality exists between, the distance of descent and the distance of ascent of the centre of gravity of the system, and, consequently, the equation holds v* X 2 , f ,v" 2 , "+... ^ + ^27 +/ "27+ If we have reached the concept of "mass," which Huygens did not yet possess in his investigations, we may substitute for//^ the mass m and thus obtain the form 2ph= ^^E ?nv 2 , which is very easily generalised for non-constant forces. * This is not the usual definition of English writers, who follow the older authorities in making the vis viva twice this quantity. Trans. THE PRINCIPLES OF D YXAMICS, 179 21. With the aid of the principle of living forces General . . r - , method of we can determine the duration of the infinitely small determin- . , ing the pe- oscillations of any pendulum whatso- /"~~"~-\_ nod of pen- ever. We let fall from the centre of f \ dilations. gravity s (Fig. 1 18) a perpendicular on the axis ; the length of the perpendic- ular is, say, a. We lay off on this, measuring from the axis, the length = i. Let the distance of descent of the point in question to the position of F:g - IlS - equilibrium be k, and v the velocity acquired. Since the work done in the descent is determined by the motion of the centre of gravity, we have work done in descent = vis viva : M here we call the total mass of the pendulum and anticipate the expression vis viva. By an inference similar to that in the preceding case, we obtain T= 22. We see that the duration of infinitely small The two aeierimna- oscillations of any pendulum is determined by two fac- tiv ^ factors, tors by the value of the expression 2mr 2 , which Euler called the moment of inertia and which Huygens had employed without any particular designation, and by the value of agM. The latter expression, which we shall briefly term the statical moment^ is the product a P of the weight of the pendulum into the distance of its centre of gravity from the axis. If these two values be given, the length of the simple pendulum of the same period of oscillation (the isochronous pendulum) and the position of the centre of oscillation are deter- mined. i8o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Huygens' nfetSad^o solution. For the determination of the lengths of the pendu- lums referred to, Huygens, in the lack of the analytical methods later discovered, employed a very ingenious geometrical procedure, which we shall illustrate by one or two examples. Let the prob- lem be to determine the time of oscillation of a homogene- ous, material, and heavy rec- tangle A BCD, which swings on the axis AB (Fig. 119). Dividing the rectangle into minute elements of area//, /,.... having the distances r, r fi r n . . . . from the axis, the expression for the length of the isochronous simple pendulum, or the dis- tance of the centre of oscillation from the axis, is given by the equation /r*+/,r,+f,,r, + . .- Fig. 119. Let us erect on A BCD at C and D the perpendiculars CJ5, = DF = A C = BD and picture to ourselves a homogeneous wedge ABCDEF. Now find the distance of the centre of gravity of this wedge from the plane through AB parallel to CDEF. We have to consider, in so doing, the tiny columns /r,/ r f ,f tf r fl . . . . and their distances r, r n r lf . . . . from the plane referred to. Thus proceeding, we obtain for the required dis- tance of the centre of gravity the expression fr . r + /, r, . r, -f / r t , . r tf + . . . . that is, the same expression as before. The centre of oscillation of the rectangle and the centre of gravity of THE PRINCIPLES OF D YNAMICS. 181 the wedge are consequently at the same distance from the axis, \A C. Following out this idea, we readily perceive the Analogous correctness of the following assertions. For a homo- tions of the i r n i , -r " i .preceding geneous rectangle of height / swinging about one of methods, its sides, the distance of the centre of gravity from the axis is /z/2, the distance of the centre of oscillation \h. For a homogeneous triangle of height h, the axis of which passes through the vertex parallel to the base, the distance of the centre of gravity from the axis is |7z, the distance of the centre of oscillation |7z. Call- ing the moments of inertia of the rectangle and of the triangle A^ A^ and their respective masses M^ 9 M 2 , we get 2J&__^!_ a i - ^2 2k r . . h*Mi . Consequently A x = ^-^-> A 2 = . O ^j By this pretty geometrical conception many prob- lems can be solved that are to-day treated more con- veniently it is true by routine forms. Fig. 120. Fig. 121. 23. We shall now discuss a proposition relating to moments of inertia, that Huygens made use of in a somewhat different form. Let O (Fig. 121) be the centre of gravity of any given body. Make this the i82 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Thereia- origin of a system of rectangular coordinates, and sup- tion of mo- , _ . . . , r , . , ~ mentsof in-pose the moment of inertia with reierence to the Z-B.XIS ferredto determined. If m is the element of mass and r its dis- axes. e tance from the Z-axis, then this moment of inertia is 4 = 2mr 2 . We now displace the axis of rotation parallel to itself to O r , the distance a in the ^-direction. The distance r is transformed, by this displacement, into the new distance p, and the new moment of inertia is 9 = 2a2mx + a*2m, or, since 2 calling the total mass M= 2m, and remembering the property of the centre of gravity 2 MX = 0, = A + a*M. From the moment of inertia for one axis through the centre of gravity, therefore, that for any other axis parallel to the first is easily derivable. An appii- 24. An additional observation presents itself here. ca.ti.on of thispropo- The distance of the centre of oscillation is given by sition. _ - ___ - the equation 1= A + a 2 M/aJlf, where A, M, and a have their previous significance. The quantities A and M are invariable for any one given body. So long therefore as a retains the same value, / will also remain Invariable. For all parallel axes situated at the same distance from the centre of gravity, the same body as pendulum has the same period of oscillation. If we put d/M= K, then '-T + - Now since / denotes the distance of the centre of oscillation, and a the distance of the centre of gravity from the axis, therefore the centre of oscillation is always farther away from the axis than the centre of THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 183 gravity by the distance K/a. Therefore K/a is the dis- tance of the centre of oscillation from the centre of gravity. If through the centre of oscillation we place a second axis parallel to the original axis, a passes thereby into H/a, and we obtain the new pendulum length 7' H I K I H 7 /' -- -- a j -- /. K a a a The time of oscillation remains the same therefore for the second parallel axis through the centre of oscil- lation, and consequently the same also for every par- allel axis that is at the same distance K/a from the centre of gravity as the centre of oscillation. The totality of all parallel axes corresponding to the same period of oscillation and having the distances a and K/a from the centre of gravity, is consequently re- alised in two coaxial cylinders. Each generating line is interchangeable as axis with every other generating line without affecting the period of oscillation. 25. To obtain a clear view of the relations subsist- The axial ing between the two axial cylinders, as we shall briefly call them, let us institute the following considerations. We put A = k 2 M, and then If we seek the a that corresponds to a given /, and therefore to a given time of oscillation, we obtain Generally therefore to one value of / there correspond two values of a. Only where l/7 2 /4 ~k* = 0, that is in cases in which /= 2/, do both values coincide in a=k. 184 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, If we designate the two values of a that correspond to every /, by a and /?, then or k* = a. ft. The deter- If, therefore, in any pendulous body we know two par- mination of ...... the prece^allel axes that have the same time of oscillation and byageo- different distances a and ft from the centre of gravity, metrical . . . method. as is the case for instance where we are able to give the centre of oscillation for any point of suspension, we can construct k. We lay off (Fig. 122) a: and ft con- secutively on a straight line, describe a semicircle on a -f- ft as diameter, and erect a perpendicular at the point of junction of the two divisions a and ft. On this perpendicular the semicircle cuts off k. If on the other hand we know k, then for every value of a', say A, a value yu is obtainable that will give the same period of oscillation as A. We construct (Fig. 123) with A and k as sides a right angle, join their extremities by a straight line on which we erect at the extremity of k a perpendicular which cuts off on A produced the por- tion }JL. Now let us imagine any body whatsoever (Fig. 124) with the centre of gravity 0. We place it in the plane THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 185 of the drawing, and make it swing about all possible An niusm parallel axes at right angles to the plane of the paper. ide^. All the axes that pass through the circle a are, we find, with respect to period of oscillation, interchange- able with each other and also with those that pass through the circle /3. If instead of a we take a smaller circle A, then in the place of /3 we shall get a larger Fig. 124. circle ju. Continuing in this manner, both circles ul- timately meet in one with the radius k. 26. We have dwelt at such length on the foregoing ^ a matters for good reasons. In the first place, they have served our purpose of displaying in a clear light the splendid results of the investigations of Huygens. For all that we have given is virtually contained, though in somewhat different form, in the writings of Huygens, i86 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. or is at least so approximately presented in them that it can be supplied without the slightest difficulty. Only a very small portion of it has found its way into our modern elementary text-books. One of the proposi- tions that has thus been incorporated in our elemen- tary treatises is that referring to the convertibility of the point of suspension and the centre of oscillation. The usual presentation, however, is not exhaustive. Captain KATER, as we know, employed this principle for determining the exact length of the seconds pen- dulum. Function of The points raised in the preceding paragraphs have of inertia, also rendered us the service of supplying enlighten- ment as to the nature of the conception " moment of inertia." This notion affords us no insight, in point of principle, that we could not have obtained without it. But since we save by its aid the individual con- sideration of the particles that make up a system, or dispose of them once for all, we arrive by a shorter and easier way at our goal. This idea, therefore, has a high import in the economy of mechanics. Poinsot, after Euler and Segner had attempted a similar object with less success, further developed the ideas that be- long to this subject, and by his ellipsoid of inertia and central ellipsoid introduced further simplifications. The lesser 27. The investigations of Huygens concerning the Sons of a ~ geometrical and mechanical properties of cycloids are uygens. ^ j ess importance. The cycloidal pendulum, a contriv- ance in which Huygens realised, not an approximate, but an exact independence of the time and amplitude of oscillation, has been dropt from the practice of mod- ern horology as unnecessary. We shall not, therefore, enter into these investigations here, however much of the geometrically beautiful they may present. THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 187 Great as the merits of Huygens are with respect to Huygens's the most different physical theories, the art of horology, achieve- practical dioptrics, and mechanics in particular, his chief performance, the one that demanded the greatest intellectual courage, and that was also accompanied with the greatest results, remains his enunciation of the principle by which he solved the problem of the centre of oscillation. This very principle, however, was the only one he enunciated that was not adequately appre- ciated by his contemporaries ; nor was it for a long period thereafter. We hope to have placed this prin- ciple here in its right light as identical with the prin- ciple of vis viva. (See Appendix, XIII., p. 530.) in. THE ACHIEVEMENTS OF NEWTON. 1. The merits of NEWTON with respect to our sub- Newton's n _ . merits. ject were twofold. First, he greatly extended the range of mechanical physics by his discovery of universal gravitation. Second, he completed the formal enunciation of the mechanical principles now generally accepted. Since his time no essentially new principle has been stated. All that has been accomplished in mechanics since his day, has been a deductive, formal, and mathematical development of mechanics on the basis of Newton's laws. 2. Let us first cast a glance at Newton's achieved Hj s * ment in the domain of physics. Kepler had deduced discovery, from the observations of Tycho Brahe and his own, three empirical laws for the motion of the planets about the sun, which Newton by his new view rendered intelligible. The laws of KEPLER are as follows : i) The planets move about the sun in ellipses, in one focus of which the sun is situated. 1 88 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Kepler's 2~] The radius vector joining each planet with the laws. Their } J . , . part in the sun describes equal areas in equal times. iscovery. cubes of the mean distances of the planets from the sun are proportional to the squares of their times of revolution. He who clearly understands the doctrine of Galileo and Huygens, must see that a curvilinear motion im- plies deflective acceleration. Hence, to explain the phe- nomena of planetary motion, an acceleration must be supposed constantly directed towards the concave side of the planetary orbits. Central ac- Now Kepler's second law, the law of areas, is ex- expiams plained at once by the assumption of a constant plane- Kepler's ^ J , . . . second law. tary acceleration towards the sun ; or rather, this ac- celeration is another form of expression for the same fact. If a radius vector describes in an element of time the area ABS (Fig. 125), then in the next equal element of time, assuming no acceleration, the area BCS will be described, where BC = AB and lies in the prolongation Fig. 125. of AB. But if the central accel- eration during the first element of time produces a velocity by virtue of which the distance BD will be traversed in the same interval, the next-succeeding area swept out is not BCS, but BES, where CE is par- allel and equal to BD. But it is evident that BES = BCS~ ABS. Consequently, the law of the areas con- stitutes, in another aspect, a central acceleration. Having thus ascertained the fact of a central accel- eration, the third law leads us to the discovery of its character. Since the planets move in ellipses slightly different from circles, we may assume, for the sake of THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 189 simplicity, that their orbits actually are circles. If R^ The formal R 2 , R z are the radii and T 19 T 2 , T^ the respective of this Be- times of revolution of the planets, Kepler's third law dlludbie i -J.J. r 11 from Kep- may be written as follows : ler's third law. o = -^ == "^ = = a constant. But we know that the expression for the central accel- eration of motion in a circle is <p= ^.R TC 2 /T 2 , or T 2 = 4 7t 2 R/q>. Substituting this value we get cp^R^ = <p 2 2 2 = > 3 ^ 3 2 = constant ; or cp == constant /R* ; that is to say, on the assumption of a central accelera- tion inversely proportional to the square of the distance, we get, from the known laws of central motion, Kep- ler's third law ; and vice versa. Moreover, though the demonstration is not easily put in an elementary form, when the idea of a central acceleration inversely proportional to the square of the distance has been reached, the demonstration that this acceleration is another expression for the motion in conic sections, of which the planetary motion in ellipses is a particular case, is a mere affair of mathematical analysis. 3. But in addition to the intellectual performancexheques- ,. , - , . , r n 11 tionof the just discussed, the way to which was fully prepared by physical Kepler, Galileo, and Huygens, still another achieve- tfcisaccei- eration. ment of Newton remains to be estimated which in no respect should be underrated. This is an achievement of the imagination. We have, indeed, no hesitation in saying that this last is the most important of all. Of what nature is the acceleration that conditions the curvilinear motion of the planets about the sun, of the satellites aboutjhe planets ?,- igo THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The steps Newton perceived, with great audacity of thought, Sally ied g " and first in the instance of the moon, that this accel- the1deaof eration differed in no substantial respect from the ac- universal . .. . T , gravitation, celeration of gravity so familiar to us. It was prob- ably the principle of continuity, which accomplished so much in Galileo's case, that led him to his dis- covery. He was wont and this habit appears to be common to all truly great investigators to adhere as closely as possible, even in cases presenting altered conditions, to a conception once formed, to preserve the same uniformity in his conceptions that nature teaches us to see in her processes. That which is a property of nature at any one time and in any one place, constantly and everywhere recurs, though it may not be with the same prominence. If the attrac- tion of gravity is observed to prevail, not only on the surface of the earth, but also on high mountains and in deep mines, the physical inquirer, accustomed to con- tinuity in his beliefs, conceives this attraction as also operative at greater heights and depths than those ac- cessible to us. He asks himself, Where lies the limit of this action of terrestrial gravity ? Should its action not extend to the moon ? With this question the great flight of fancy was taken, of which, with Newton's in- tellectual genius, the great scientific achievement was but a necessary consequence. (See p. 531.) The appii-' Newton discovered first in the case of the moon that this idea to the same acceleration that controls the descent of a of the moon, stone also prevented this heavenly body from moving away in a rectilinear path from the earth, and that, on the other hand, its tangential velocity prevented it from falling towards the earth. The motion of the moon thus suddenly appeared to him in an entirely new light, but withal under quite familiar points of view. The . THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 191 new conception was attractive in that it embraced ob- jects that previously were very remote, and it was con- vincing in that it involved the most familiar elements. This explains its prompt application in other fields and the sweeping character of its results. Newton not only solved by his new conception the its univer- . i i i r T i sa -l applica- thousand years puzzle ot the planetary system, buttiontoaii also furnished by it the key to the explanation of a ma en number of other important phenomena. In the same way that the acceleration due to terrestrial gravity ex- tends to the moon and to all other parts of space, so do the accelerations that are due to the other heavenly bodies, to which we must, by the principle of contin- uity, ascribe the same properties, extend to all parts of space, including also the earth. But if gravitation is not peculiar to the earth, its seat is not exclusively in the centre of the earth. Every portion of the earth, how- ever small, shares it, Every part of the earth attracts, or determines an acceleration of, every other part. Thus an amplitude and freedom of physical view were reached of which men had no conception previously to Newton's time. A long series of propositions respecting the action The sweep 1 . - . Ing charac- of spheres on other bodies situated beyond, upon, or ter of its re- within the spheres ; inquiries as to the shape of the earth, especially concerning its flattening by rotation, sprang, as it were, spontaneously from this view. The riddle of the tides, the connection of which with the moon had long before been guessed, was suddenly ex- plained as due to the acceleration of the mobile masses of terrestrial water by the moon. (See p. 533.) 4. The reaction of the, new ideas on mechanics was a result which speedily followed. The greatly varying accelerations which by the new view the same body be- 192 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. the effect came affected with according to its position in space, ideas on suggested at once the idea of variable weight, yet also mechanics. . , .. CIT I-T pointed to one characteristic property of bodies which was constant. The notions of mass and weight were thus first clearly distinguished. The recognised vari- ability of acceleration led Newton to determine by spe- cial experiments the fact that the acceleration of gravity is independent of the chemical constitution of bodies ; whereby new positions of vantage were gained for the elucidation of the relation of mass and weight, as will presently be shown more in detail. Finally, the uni- versal applicability of Galileo's idea of force was more palpably impressed on the mind by Newton's perform- ances than it ever had been before. People could no longer believe that this idea was alone applicable to the phenomenon of falling bodies and the processes most immediately connected therewith. The generalisation was effected as of itself, and without attracting partic- ular attention. Newton's 5, Let us now discuss, more in detail, the achieve- ments in ments of Newton as they bear upon the principles of the domain 7 . _ _ . , , t f -, , of mechan- mechanics. In so doing, we shall first devote ourselves exclusively to Newton's ideas, seek to bring them for- cibly home to the reader's mind, and restrict our criti- cisms wholly to preparatory remarks, reserving the criticism of details for a subsequent section. On pe- rusing Newton's work (Philosophic Naiuralis Principia Mathematica. London, 1687), the following things strike us at once as the chief advances beyond Galileo and Huygens : 1) The generalisation of the idea of force. . 2) The introduction of the concept of mass. 3) The distinct and general formulation of the prin- ciple of the parallelogram of forces. THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS'. 193 4) The statement of the law of action and reaction. 6. With respect to the first point little is to be His attitude added to what has already been said. Newton -con- tothJflel ceives all circumstances determinative of motion, whether terrestrial gravity or attractions of planets, or the action of magnets, and so forth, as circumstances determinative of acceleration. He expressly remarks on this point that by the words attraction and the like he does not mean to put forward any theory concern- ing the cause or character of the mutual action referred to, but simply wishes to express (as modern' writers say, in a differential form) what is otherwise expressed (that is ? in an integrateiform) in, the description of the motion. "^Newton's reiterated and emphatic protesta- tions that he is not concerned with hypotheses as to the causes of phenomena, but has simply to do with the investigation and transformed statement of actual facts, a direction of thought that is distinctly and tersely uttered in his words "hypotheses non fingo," "I do not frame hypotheses," stamps him as a philosopher of the highest rank. He is not desirous to astound and The Regu- . , , .... laePhiloso- startle, or to impress the imagination by the originality phandi. of his ideas : his aim is to know Natiire. * * This is conspicuously shown in the rules that Newton formed for the conduct of natural inquiry (the Regulce Philosofhdndi') : " Rule I. No more causes of natural things are to be admitted than such as truly exist and are sufficient to explain the phenomena of these things, " Rule II. Therefore, to natural effects of the same kind we must, as far as possible, assign the same causes ; e. g., to respiration in man and animals ; to the descent of stones in Europe and in America ; to the light of our kitchen fire and of the sun ; to the reflection of light on the earth and on the planets. "Rule III. Those qualities of bodies that can be neither increased nor diminished, and which are found to belong to all bodies within the reach of our experiments, are to be regarded as the universal qualities of all bodies. [Here follows the enumeration of the properties of bodies which has been in- corporated in all text-books.] " If it universally appear, by experiments and astronomical observations, that all bodies in the vicinity of the earth are heavy with respect to the earth, and this in proportion to the quantity of matter which they severally contain ; 194 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The New- 7. With regard to the concept of " mass/' it is to cept a of on be observed that the formulation of Newton, which de- fines mass to be the quantity of matter of a body as measured by the product of its volume and density, is unfortunate. As we can only define density as the mass of unit of volume, the circle is manifest. Newton felt distinctly that in every body there was inherent a prop- erty whereby the amount of its motion was determined and perceived that this must be different from weight. He called it, as we still do, mass ; but he did not suc- ceed in correctly stating this perception. We shall re- vert later on to this point, and shall stop here only to make the following preliminary remarks. The expe- 8. Numerous experiences, of which a sufficient num- which point ber stood at Newton's disposal, point clearly to the ex- to the exist- . . . . enceofsucbistence of a property distinct from weight, whereby the a physical . . property. -////, '#/% 'fflfa quantity ot motion of the body to which it belongs is determined. If (Fig. 126) we tie a fly-wheel to a rope and attempt to lift it by means of a pulley, we feel the weight of the fly-wheel. If the wheel be placed on a perfectly cylindrical axle and well balanced, it will no longer assume by virtue of its weight any de- terminate position. Nevertheless, we are sensible of that the moon is heavy with respect to the earth in the proportion of its mass, and our seas with respect to the moon ; and all the planets with respect to one another, and the comets also with respect to the sun ; we must, In conformity with this rule, declare, that all bodies are heavy with respect to one another. " Rule IV. In experimental physics propositions collected by induction from phenomena are to be regarded either as accurately true or very nearly true, notwithstanding any contrary hypotheses, till other phenomena occur, by which they are made more accurate, or are rendered subject to exceptions. "This rule must be adhered to, that the results of induction may not be annulled by hypotheses." JL. f*~ U U I2(5 - THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 195 a powerful resistance the moment we endeavor to set Mas ,111- , , tinct from the wheel in motion or attempt to stop it when in mo- weight, tion. This is the phenomenon that led to the enuncia- tion of a distinct property of matter termed inertia, or " force" of inertia a step which, as we have already seen, and shall further explain below is unnecessary. Two equal loads simultaneously raised, offer resistance by their weight. Tied to the extremities of a cord that passes over a pulley, they offer resistance to any mo- tion, or rather to any change of velocity of the pulley, by their mass. . A large weight hung as a pendulum on a very long string can be held at an angle of slight deviation from the line of equilibrium with very little effort. The weight-component that forces the pendu- lum into the position of equilibrium, is very small. Yet notwithstanding this we shall experience a con- siderable resistance if we suddenly attempt to move or stop the weight. A weight that is just supported by a balloon, although we have no longer to overcome its gravity, opposes a perceptible resistance to motion. Add to this the fact that the same body experiences in different geographical latitudes and in different parts of space very unequal gravitational accelerations and we shall clearly recognise that mass exists as a property wholly distinct from weight determining the amount of acceleration which a given force communicates to the body to which it belongs. (See p. 536.) Q. Important is Newton's demonstration that the Mass meas y r . urable by mass of a body may, nevertheless, under certain con- weight, ditions, be measured by its weight. Let us suppose a body to rest on a support, on which it exerts by its weight a pressure. The obvious inference is that 2 or 3 such bodies, or one-half or one-third of such a body, will pro- duce a corresponding pressure 2, 3, J, or % times as i 9 5 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The_prere- great. If we imagine the acceleration of descent in- t q be S meas- creased, diminished, or wholly removed, we shall ex- mass Ty pect that the pressure also will be increased, dimin- Welght< ished, or wholly removed. We thus see, that the pres- sure attributable to weight increases, decreases, and vanishes along with the " quan- tity of matter" and the magni- tude of the acceleration of de- scent. In the simplest manner Flg ' 127> imaginable we conceive the pres- sure/ as quantitatively representable by the product of the quantity of matter m into the acceleration of descent g by p = mg. Suppose now we have two bodies that exert respectively the weight- pressures /, /', to which we ascribe the " quantities of matter ' ' m, m', and which are subjected to the accelerations of descent g, g'\ then p = mg and /' = m 'g' . If, now, we were able to prove, that, independently of the material (chemical) compo- sition of bodies, g=g' at every same point on the earth's surface, we should obtain m/m' =p/p'\ that is to say, on the same spot of the earth's surface, it would be possible to measure mass by weight. Newton's Now Newton established this fact, that g is inde- ment of pendent of the chemical composition of bodies, by these pre- . requisites, experiments with pendulums of equal lengths but dif- ferent material, which exhibited equal times of oscilla- tion. He carefully allowed, in these experiments, for the disturbances due to the resistance of the air ; this last factor being eliminated by constructing from differ- ent materials spherical pendulum-bobs of exactly the same size, the weights of which were equalised by ap- propriately hollowing the spheres. Accordingly, all bodies maybe regarded as affected with the same g, and THE PRINCIPLES OF D YNAMfCS. 197 their quantity of matter or mass can, as Newton pointed out, be measured by their weight. If we imagine a rigid partition placed between an Suppie- assemblage of bodies and a magnet, the bodies, if the JSSitera- magnet be powerful enough, or at least the majority 10nS * of the bodies, will exert a pressure on the partition. But it would occur to no one to employ this magnetic pressure, in the manner we employed pressure due to weight, as a measure of mass. The strikingly notice- able inequality of the accelerations produced in the different bodies by the magnet excludes any such idea. The reader will furthermore remark that this whole argument possesses an additional dubious feature, in that the concept of mass which up to this point has simply been named and felt as a necessity, but not de- fined, is assumed by it. 10. To Newton we owe the distinct formulation ofxhedoc- the principle of the composition of forces.* If a body composi- is simultaneously acted on by two forces (Fig. 128), forces, of which one would produce the motion AB and the other the ^ motion AC in the same interval of time, the body, since the two forces and the motions produced Flg ' I28 ' by them are independent of each other, will move in that interval of time to AD. This conception is in every respect natural, and distinctly characterises the essen- tial point involved. It contains none of the artificial and forced characters that were afterwards imported into the doctrine of the composition of forces. We may express the proposition in a somewhat * Roberval's (1668) achievements with, respect to the doctrine of the com- position of forces are also to be mentioned here, Varignon and Lami have al- ready been referred to. (See the text, page 36.) I 9 8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Discussion different manner, and thus bring it nearer its modern rine of the form. The accelerations that different forces impart ;omposi- , . ion of to the same body are at the same time the measure of these forces. But the paths described in equal times are proportional to the accelerations. Therefore the latter also may serve as the measure of the forces. We may say accordingly : If two forces, which are propor- tional to the lines AB and AC, act on a body A in the directions AB and A C, a motion will result that could also be produced by a third force acting alone in the direction of the diagonal of the parallelogram con- structed on AB and A C and proportional to that di- agonal. The latter force, therefore, may be substituted for the other two. Thus, if <p and ij> are the two ac- celerations set up in the directions AB and A C, then for any definite interval of time /, AB = Gpf* /2, AC = ^>/ 2 /2. If, now, we imagine AD produced in the same interval of time by a single force determining the accel- eration %, we get AD = X* 2 / 2 > and AB -AC: AD = cp : $ : %. As soon as we have perceived the fact that the forces are independent of each other, the principle of the paral- lelogram of forces is easily reached from Galileo's no- tion of force. Without the assumption of this inde- pendence any effort to arrive abstractly and philosoph- ically at the principle, is in vain. he law of IT. Perhaps the most important achievement ci ction and , _ . . . -action. Newton with respect to the principles is the distinct and general formulation of the law of the equality of action and reaction, of pressure and counter-pressure. Questions respecting the motions of bodies that exert a reciprocal influence on each other, cannot be solved by Galileo's principles alone. A new principle is ne- cessary that will define this mutual action. Such a THE 'PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 199 principle was that resorted to by Huygens in his inves- tigation of the centre of oscillation. Such a principle also is Newton's law of action and reaction. A body that presses or pulls another body is, ac- Newton's i- -VT -. -, . , deduction cording to Newton, pressed or pulled in exactly the of the law same degree by that other body. Pressure and counter- and C reac- pressure, force and counter-force, are always equal to each other. As the measure of force is defined by Newton to be the quantity of motion or momentum (mass X velocity) generated in a unit of time, it conse- quently follows that bodies that act on each other com- municate to each other in equal intervals of time equal and opposite quantities of motion (momenta), or re- ceive contrary velocities reciprocally proportional to their masses. Now, although Newton's law, in the form here ex-Thereia- . tive imme- .pressed, appears much more simple, more immediate, diacyo^ and at first glance more admissible than that of Huy- aad Huy- 11 -i gens's prin- gens, it will be found that it by no means contains less cipies. unanalysed experience or fewer instinctive elements. Unquestionably the original incitation that prompted the enunciation of the principle was of a purely instinc- tive nature. We know that we do not experience any resistance from a body until we seek to set it in motion. The more swiftly we endeavor to hurl a heavy stone from us, the more our body is forced back by it. Pres- sure and counter-pressure go hand in hand. The as- sumption of the equality of pressure and counter-pres- sure is quite immediate if, using Newton's own illus- tration, we imagine a rope stretched between two bod- ies, or a distended or compressed spiral spring between them. There exist in the domain of statics very many in- stinctive perceptions that involve the equality of pres- 200 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Statical ex- sure and counter-pressure. The trivial experience that wh^h point one cannot lift one's self by pulling on one's chair is ence 6 of the" of this character. In a scholium in which he cites the physicists Wren, Huygens, and Wallis as his prede- cessors in the employment of the principle, Newton puts forward similar reflections. He imagines the earth, the single parts of which gravitate towards one another, divided by a plane. If the pressure of the one portion on the other were not equal to the counter- pressure, the earth would be compelled to move in the direction of the greater pressure. But the motion of a body can, so far as our experience goes, only be de- termined by other bodies external to it. Moreover, we might place the plane of division referred to at any point we chose, and the direction of the resulting mo- - tion, therefore, could not be exactly determined. The con- i2. The indistinctness of the concept of mass takes ceptofmass in its con- a very palpable form when we attempt to employ the nection . . . "I , . - . - . with this principle of the equality of action and reaction dynam- ically. Pressure and counter-pressure may be equal. But whence do we know that equal pressures generate velocities in the inverse ratio of the masses ? Newton, indeed, actually felt the necessity of an experimental corroboration of this principle. He cites in a scholium, in support of his proposition, Wren's experiments on Impact, and made independent experiments himself. He enclosed in one sealed vessel a magnet and in an- other a piece of iron, placed both in a tub of water, and left them to their mutual action. The vessels ap- proached each other, collided, clung together, and af- terwards remained at rest. This result is proof of the equality of pressure and counter-pressure and of equal and opposite momenta (as we shall learn later on, when we come to discuss the laws of impact). THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 201 The reader has already felt that the various ermnci- The merits f XT . -, J J , , . and defects ations of Newton with respect to mass and the pnn- of Newton's ciple of reaction, hang consistently together, and that they support one another. The experiences that lie at their foundation are : the instinctive perception of the connection of pressure and counter-pressure ; the dis- cernment that bodies offer resistance to change of ve- locity independently of their weight, but proportion: ately thereto ; and the observation that bodies of greater weight receive under equal pressure smaller velocities. Newton's sense of w/^/ fundamental concepts and prin- ciples were required in mechanics was admirable. The form of his enunciations, however, as we shall later in- dicate in detail, leaves much to be desired. But we have no right to underrate on this account the magnitude of his achievements ; for the difficulties he had to conquer were of a formidable kind, and he shunned them less than any other investigator. IV. DISCUSSION AND ILLUSTRATION OF THE PRINCIPLE OF REACTION. i. We shall now devote ourselves a moment ex- The princi- clusively to the Newtonian ideas, and seek to bring the tion. principle of reaction more clearly home to our mind a v i i - \m\ Fig. 129. Fig. 130. and feeling. If two masses (Fig. 129) J/and m act on one another, they impart to each other, according to Newton, contrary velocities J^and v, which are in- versely proportional to their masses, so that 202 THE SCIENCE OP MECHANICS. General The appearance of greater evidence may be im- elucidation . . , of the pnn- parted to this principle by the following consideration. action. We imagine first (Fig. 130) two absolutely equal bodies a, also absolutely alike in chemical constitution. We set these bodies opposite each other and put them in mutual action ; then, on the supposition that the in- fluences of any third body and of the spectator are ex- cluded, the communication of equal and contrary velo- cities in the direction of the line joining the bodies is the sole uniquely determined interaction. Now let us group together in A (Fig. 131) w such bodies a, and put at B over against them m' such bodies a. We have then before us bodies whose quan- Fig. 131. Fig. 132. tities of matter or masses bear to each other the pro- portion m : m'. The distance between the groups we assume to be so great that we may neglect the exten- sion of the bodies. Let us regard now the accelera- tions a, that every two bodies a impart to each other, as independent of each other. Every part of A, then, will receive in consequence of the action of B the ac- celeration m'a, and every part of B in consequence of the action of A the acceleration m a accelerations which will therefore be inversely proportional to the masses. 2. Let us picture to ourselves now a mass M (Fig. 132) joined by some elastic connection with a mass m, both masses made up of bodies a equal in all respects. Let the mass m receive from some external source an acceleration q>. At once a distortion of the connection is produced, by which on the one hand m is retarded TUE PRINCIPLES OF D YNAMICS. 203 and on the other M accelerated. When both masses The deduc- T , 11 1-11 t* 011 * th e nave begun to move with the same acceleration, all notion of further distortion of the connection ceases. If we call force.' 1 ' a the acceleration of M and ft the diminution of the acceleration of m t then a = <p ft, where agreeably to what precedes a M ==. /3m. From this follows . ^ , aM mcp a -J- ft = a -\ = cp, or a = v- 7 ? ^^ txi TIJT ; * m ^ M+ m If we were to enter more exhaustively into the de- tails of this last occurrence, we should discover that the two masses, in addition to their motion of progres- sion, also generally perform with respect to each other motions of oscillation. If the connection on slight dis- tortion develop a powerful tension, it will be impos- sible for any great amplitude of vibration to be reached, and we may entirely neglect the oscillatory motions, as we actually have done. If the expression <x= m<p/M-\- m, which deter- mines the acceleration of the entire system, be ex- amined, it will be seen that the product m cp plays a decisive part in its determination. Newton therefore invested this product of the mass into the acceleration imparted to it, with the name of "moving force." M -\- m y on the other hand, represents the entire mass of the rigid system. We obtain, accordingly, the accel- eration of any mass m' on which the moving force / acts, from the expres- sion//^', p^j K] p^j 3. To reach this result, it is not at F] . all necessary that the two connected masses should act directly on each other in all their parts. We have, connected together, let us say, the three masses m^ m 2 , m%, where m^ is supposed to act 204 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. A condition only on w , and m^ only on m*. Let the mass ?;/, re- whichdoes . r 3 -X 2 1 not affect ceive from some external source the acceleration q>. vious r re- In the distortion that follows, the suit. masses - m% m 2 m^ receive the accelerations + + ft + <P y a. Here all accelerations to the right are reckoned as positive, those to the left as negative, and it is obvious that the distortion ceases to increase when $ = /3 y, $ = cp a, where dm z = ym 2 , am^ = /3m 2 . The resolution of these equations yields the com- mon acceleration that all the masses receive ; namely, a result of exactly the same form as before. When therefore a magnet acts on a piece of iron which is joined to a piece of wood, we need not trouble our- selves about ascertaining what particles of the wood are distorted directly or indirectly (through other par- ticles of the wood) by the motion of the piece of iron. The considerations advanced will, in some meas- ure, perhaps, have contributed towards clearly impress- ing on us the great importance for mechanics of the Newtonian enunciations. They will also serve, in a I subsequent place, to ren- der more readily obvious the defects of these enun- I ' ciations. \ ) 4. Let us now turn to Fig. 134. a few illustrative physical examples of the principle of reaction. We consider, say, a loatl L on a table T. The table is pressed by THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 205 the load/kr/ so much, and so much only, as it in return Some phys- presses the load, that is prevents the same from falling, pies of a the If/ is the weight, m the mass, and g the acceleration oPreacti^n. of gravity, then by Newton's conception/ = mg. If the table be let fall vertically downwards with the ac- celeration of free descent g, all pressure on it ceases. We discover thus, that the pressure on the table is de- termined by the relative acceleration of the load with respect to the table. If the table fall or rise with the acceleration y, the pressure on it is respectively m (g y) and m (g + 7). Be it noted, however, that no change, of the relation is produced by a constant velocity of ascent or descent. The relative acceleration is de- terminative. Galileo knew this relation of things very well. The The pres- i r 1 A- 1- i IT r SUre f the doctrine of the Aristotelians, that bodies of greater parts of fail- weight fall faster than bodies of less weight, he not only refuted by experiments, but cornered his adversaries by logical arguments. Heavy bodies fall faster than light bodies, the Aristotelians said, because the upper parts weigh down on the under parts and accelerate their descent. In that case, returned Galileo, a small body tied to a larger body must, if it possesses in se the property of less rapid descent, retard the larger. There- fore, a larger body falls more slowly than a smaller body. The entire fundamental assumption is wrong, Galileo says, because one portion of a falling body can- not by its weight under any circumstances press an- other portion. A pendulum with the time of oscillation T= n Vtjg, A failing would acquire, if its axis received the downward accel- pen u um " eration y, the time of oscillation T= nV l/g y~ and if let fall freely would acquire an infinite time of oscillation, that is, would cease to oscillate. 206 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The sensa- tion of fall Poggen- dorff's ap- paratus. We ourselves, when we jump or fall from an eleva- tion, experience a peculiar sensation, which must be due to the discontinuance of the gravitational pressure of the parts of our body on one another the blood, and so forth. A similar sensation, as if the ground were sinking beneath us, we should have on a smaller planet, to which we were suddenly transported. The sensation of constant ascent, like that felt in an earthquake, would be produced on a larger planet. 5. The conditions referred to are very beautifully illustrated by an apparatus (Fig. 135^) constructed by Poggendorff. A string loaded at both extremities Fig. rasa. Fig. issb. by a weight P (Fig. 1350) is passed over a pulley c, attached to the end of a scale-beam. A weight p is laid on one of the weights first mentioned and tied by a fine thread to the axis of the pulley. The pulley now supports the weight 2 P -|- / Burning away the thread that holds the over-weight, a uniformly accel- erated motion begins with the acceleration y, with which P -j- p descends and P rises. The load on the pulley is thus lessened, as the turning of the scales in- dicates. The descending weight P is counterbalanced by the rising weight P, while the added over- weight, instead of weighing/, now weighs (/*/<" )(<" y)* And since y = (//2 P + /) g, we have now to regard the load on the pulley, not as/, but as/( 2 P/2P+^). The THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 207 descending weight, only partially impeded in its motion of descent, exerts only a partial pressure on the pulley. We may vary the experiment, tded at one extremity with the pulleys a, b, d, of the apparatus as indicated in Fig. We pass a thread A variation loaded at one extremity with the weight P over the experiment Fig. 1350. tie the unloaded extremity at m, and equilibrate the balance. If we pull on the string at m, this can- not directly affect the balance since the direction of the string passes exactly through its axis. But the side a immediately falls. The slackening of the string causes a to rise. An unaccelerated motion of the weights would 208 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The suspen- sion of mi- not disturb the equilibrium. But we cannot pass from rest to motion without acceleration. 6. A phenomenon that strikes us at first glance is, nute bodies that minute bodies of greater or less specific gravity different than the liquid in which they are immersed, if suffi- gravhy. ciently small, remain suspended a very long time in the liquid. We perceive at once that particles of this kind have to over- come the friction of the liquid. If the cube of Fig. 136 be divided into 8 parts by the 3 sections indicated, and the parts be placed in a row, their mass and over-weight will re- Fig. 136. main the same, but their cross-sec- tion and superficial area, with which the friction goes hand in hand, will be doubled. DO such Now, the opinion has at times been advanced with suspended ' . particles af- respect to this phenomenon that suspended particles specific of the kind described have no influence on the specific gravities of . _. , . . . , the support- gravity indicated by an areometer immersed in the ' liquid, because these particles are themselves areo- meters. But it will readily be seen that if the sus- pended particles rise or fall with constant velocity, as in the case of very small particles immediately occurs, the effect on the balance and the areometer must be the same. If we imagine the areometer to oscillate about its position of equilibrium, it will be evident that the liquid with all its contents will be moved with it. Applying the principle of virtual displacements, therefore, we can be no longer in doubt that the areo- meter must indicate the mean specific gravity. We may convince ourselves of the untenability of the rule by which the areometer is supposed to indicate only the specific gravity of the liquid and not, that of the sus- THE PRINCIPLES OF D YNAMICS. 209 psnded particles, by the following consideration. In a liquid A a smaller quantity of a heavier liquid B is in- troduced and distributed in fine drops. The areometer, let us assume, indicates only the specific gravity of A. Now, take more and more of the liquid B^ finally just as much of it as we have of A\ we can, then, no longer say which liquid is suspended in the other, and which specific gravity, therefore, the areometer must indicate. 7. A phenomenon of an imposing kind, in which The phe- ... ... . _ , - . ".. nom^non of the relative acceleration of the bodies concerned is the tides, seen to be determinative of their mutual pressure, is that of the tides. We will enter into this subject here only in so far as it may serve to illustrate the point we are considering. The connection of the phenomenon of the tides with the motion of the moon asserts itself in the coincidence of the tidal and lunar periods, in the augmentation of the tides at the full and new moons, in the daily retardation of the tides (by about 50 minutes), corresponding to the retardation of the culmination of the moon, and so forth. As a matter of fact, the connection of the two occurrences was very early thought of. In Newton's time people imagined to themselves a kind of wave of atmospheric pressure, by means of which the moon in its motion was sup- posed to create the tidal wave. The phenomenon of the tides makes, on every one its impos- that sees it for the first time in its full proportions, antef. ara " overpowering impression. We must not be surprised, therefore, that it is a subject that has actively engaged the investigators of all times. The warriors of Alex- ander the Great had, from their Mediterranean homes, scarcely the faintest idea of the phenomenon of the tides, and they were, therefore, not a little taken aback 2io THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. by the sight of the powerful ebb and flow at the mouth of the Indus ; as we learn from the account of Curtius Rufus (De Rebus Gestis Aleocandri Magni}, whose words we here literally quote : Extract "34- Proceeding, now, somewhat more slowly in from Cur- . . . . tins Rufus. " their course, owing to the current of the river being " slackened by its meeting the waters of the sea, they " at last reached a second island in the middle of the "< river. Here they brought the vessels to the shore, " and, landing, dispersed to seek provisions, wholly " unconscious of the great misfortune that awaited "them. Describing " 35. It was about the third hour, when the ocean, the effect . . on the army " m its constant tidal flux and reflux, began to turn derthe " and press back upon the river. The latter, at first Great ofthe f t , i 1 , i 11 i tides at the " merely checked, but then more vehemently repelled, mouth of J \ . . , P the Jn<*u*. f < at last set back in the opposite direction with a force "greater than that 'of a rushing mountain torrent. "The nature of the ocean was unknown to the multi- "tude, and grave portents and evidences of the wrath "of the Gods were seen in what happened. With "ever- increasing vehemence the sea poured in, com- "pletely covering the fields which shortly before were " dry. The vessels were lifted and the entire fleet dis- persed before those who had been set on shore, ter- " rifled and dismayed at this unexpected calamity, " could return. But the more haste, in times of great "disturbance, the less speed. Some pushed the ships " to the shore with poles ; others, not waiting to adjust "their oars, ran aground. Many, in their great haste "to get away, had not waited for their companions, "and were barely able to set in motion the huge, un- "manageable barks; while some of the ships were too "crowded to receive the multitudes that struggled to THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 211 "get aboard. The unequal division impeded all. TheThedisas- ' ' cries of some clamoring to be taken aboard, of others ander-s "crying to put off, and the conflicting commands of Ci men, all desirous of different ends, deprived every one "of the possibility of seeing or hearing. Even the "steersmen were powerless; for neither could their "cries be heard by the struggling masses nor were their "orders noticed by the terrified and distracted crews. "The vessels collided, they broke off each other's oars, " they plunged against one another. One would think " it was not the fleet of one and the same army that "was here in motion, but two hostile fleets in combat. ' < Prow, struck stern ; those that had thrown the f ore- "most in confusion were themselves thrown into con- " fusion by those that followed; and the desperation "of the struggling mass sometimes culminated in "hand-to-hand combats. " 36. Already the tide had overflown the fields sur- " rounding the banks of the river, till only the hillocks "jutted forth from -above the water, like islands. " These were the point towards which all that had given "up hope of being taken on the ships, swam. The "scattered vessels rested in part in deep water, where "there were depressions in the land, and in part lay "aground in shallows, according as the waves had "covered the unequal surface of the country. Then, "suddenly, a new and greater terror took possession "of them. The sea -began to retreat, and its waters "flowed back in great long swells, leaving the land "which shortly before had been immersed by the salt "waves, uncovered and clear. The ships, thus for- "saken by the water, fell, some on their prows, some " on their sides. The fields were strewn with luggage, "arms, and pieces of broken planks and oars. The 212 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The dismay "soldiers dared neither to venture on the land nor to of the army. ....... , , "remain m the ships, for every moment they expected "something new and worse than had yet befallen "them. They could scarcely believe that that which "they saw had really happened a shipwreck on dry "land, an ocean in a river. And of their misfortune "there seemed no end. For wholly ignorant that the "tide would shortly bring back the sea and again set "their vessels afloat, they prophesied hunger and dir- "est distress. On the fields horrible animals crept "about, which the subsiding floods had left behind. The efforts "37. ,The night fell, and even the king was sore and the re- "distressed at the slight hope of rescue. But his so- turn of the . tide. " licitude could not move his unconquerable spirit. He "remained during the whole night on the watch, and " despatched horsemen to the mouth of the river, that, " as soon as they saw the sea turn and flow back, they "might return and announce its coming. He also "commanded that the damaged vessels should be re- " paired and that those that had been overturned by "the tide should be set upright, and ordered all to be "near at hand when the sea should again inundate the "land. After he had thus passed the entire night in "watching and in exhortation, the horsemen came "back at full speed and the tide as quickly followed. "At first, the approaching waters, creeping in light "swells beneath the ships, gently raised them, and, "inundating the fields, soon set the entire fleet in mo- "tion. The shores resounded with the cheers and " clappings of the soldiers and sailors, who celebrated " with immoderate joy their unexpected rescue. ' But "whence/ they asked, in wonderment, 'had the sea "so suddenly given back these great masses of water? "Whither had they, on the day previous, retreated? THE PRINCIPLES OP DYNAMICS. 213 " And what was the nature of this element, which now "opposed and now obeyed the dominion of the hours? ' "As the king concluded from what had happened that "the fixed time for the return of the tide was after "sunrise, he set out. In order to anticipate it, at mid- " night, and proceeding down the river with a few "ships he passed the mouth and, finding himself at "last at the goal of his wishes, sailed out 400 stadia "into the ocean. He then offered a sacrifice to the "divinities of the sea, and returned to his fleet." 8. The essential point to be noted in the explana- The expia- . ration of tion of the tides is, that the earth as a rigid body canthephe- . . 11 nomena of receive but one determinate acceleration towards the the tides. moon, while the mobile particles of water on the sides nearest to and remotest from the moon can acquire various accelerations. Fig. 137. Let us consider (Fig. 137) on the earth E 9 opposite which stands the moon M, three points A, J3, C. The accelerations of the three points in the direction of the moon, if we regard them as free points, are respect- ively cp + d <p, <p> <p - A <p- The earth as a whole, however, has, as a rigid body, the acceleration cp. The acceleration towards the centre of the earth we will call g. Designating now all accelerations to the left as negative, and all to the right as positive, we get the following table : 214 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. ABC (99+^9?), <p, (9~ gAcp, 0, (g where the symbols of the first and second lines repre- sent the accelerations which the free points that head the columns receive, those of the third line the accel- eration of corresponding rigid points of the earth, and those of the fourth line, the difference, or the resultant accelerations of the free points towards the earth. It will be seen from this result that the weight of the water at A and C is diminished by exactly the same amount. The water will rise at A and C (Fig. 137). A tidal wave will be produced at these points twice every day. A variation It is a fact not always sufficiently emphasised, that nomenon, the phenomenon would be an essentially different one if the moon and the earth were not affected with ac- celerated motion towards each other but were relatively fixed and at rest. If -we modify the considerations presented to comprehend this case, we must put for the rigid earth in the foregoing computation, cp = Q simply. We then obtain for the free points .... A C the accelerations. . (<p + A<p\ (<p + g g or (gdcp) cp, (g or g' <P> '(#'+<?), where g' = g A cp. In such case, therefore, the weight of the water at A would be diminished, and the weight at C increased ; the height of the water at A THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 215 would be increased, and the height at C diminished. The water would be elevated only on the side facing the moon. (Fig. 138.) K Fig. 138. 9. It would hardly be worth while to illustrate An niustra- ij -IIIT -11 t' lve experi- propositions best reached deductively, by experiments mem. that can only be performed with difficulty. But such experiments are not beyond the limits of possibility. If we imagine a small iron sphere K to swing as a conical pendulum about the pole of a magnet N (Fig. 139), and cover the sphere with a solution of magnetic sul- phate of iron, the fluid drop should, if the magnet is sufficiently powerful, rep- resent the phenomenon of the tides. But if we imagine the sphere to be fixed and at rest with respect to the pole of the magnet, the fluid drop will certainly not be found tapering to a point both on the side facing and the side opposite to the pole of the magnet, but will remain suspended only on the side of the sphere towards the pole of the magnet. 10. We must not, of course, imagine, that the Some fur- entire tidal wave is produced at once by the action sidemions of the moon. We have rather to conceive the tide as an oscillatory movement maintained by the moon. If, for example, we should sweep a fan uniformly and Fig. 139- 216 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. continuously along over the surface of the water of a circular canal, a wave of considerable magnitude fol- lowing in the wake of the fan would by this gentle and constantly continued impulsion soon be produced. In like manner the tide is produced. But in trie latter case the occurrence is greatly complicated by the irreg- ular formation of the continents, by the periodical variation of the disturbance, and so forth. (See Ap- pendix, XVII., p. 537.) CRITICISM OF THE PRINCIPLE OF REACTION AND OF THE CONCEPT OF MASS. The con- i. Now that the preceding discussions have made mass? us familiar with Newton's ideas, we are sufficiently prepared to enter on, a critical examination of them. We shall restrict ourselves primarily in this, to the consideration of the concept of mass and the principle of reaction. The two cannot, in 'such an examination, be separated ; in them is contained the gist of New- ton's achievement. Theexpres- 2. In the first place we do not find the expression tity^fniat- "quantity of matter" adapted to explain and elucidate the concept of mass, since that expression itself is not possessed of the requisite clearness. And this is so, though we go back, as many authors have done, to an enumeration of the hypothetical atoms. We only com- plicate, in so doing, indefensible conceptions. If we place together a number of equal, chemically homo- geneous bodies, we can, it may be granted, connect some clear idea with "quantity of matter," and we per- ceive, also, that the resistance the bodies offer to mo- tion increases with this quantity. But the moment we suppose chemical heterogeneity, the assumption that THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 217 there Is still something that is measurable by the same Newton's j .... - . . . . formulatioi standard, which something we call quantity of matter, of the con- may be suggested by mechanical experiences, but is an assumption nevertheless that needs to be justified. When therefore, with Newton, we make the assump- tions, respecting pressure due to weight, that/ = mg, p' =in'g, and put in conformity with such assumptions p/p' = m/m' 9 we have made actual use in the operation thus performed of the siipposition, yet to be justified, that different bodies are measurable by the same stand- ard. We might, indeed, arbitrarily posit, that m/m r ///'; that is, might define the ratio of mass to be the ratio of pressure due to weight when g was the same. But we should then have to substantiate the use that is made of this notion of mass in the principle of reaction and in other relations. < n I I Fig, 140 a. Fig. 140 b. 3. When two bodies (Fig. 140 a"), perfectly equal Anew form- ,, i i - 7 -. illation of in all respects, are placed opposite each other, we ex- the con- pect, agreeably to the principle of symmetry, that they will produce in each other in the direction of their line of junction equal and opposite accelerations. But if these bodies exhibit any difference, however slight, of form, of chemical constitution, or are in any other re- spects different, the principle of symmetry forsakes us, unless we assume or know beforehand that sameness of form or sameness of chemical constitution, or whatever else the thing in question may be, is not determina- tive. If, however, mechanical experiences clearly and indubitably point to the existence in bodies of a special and distinct property determinative of accelerations, 2i8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. nothing stands in the way of our arbitrarily establish- ing the following definition : Definition All those bodies are bodies of equal mass, which, mu- masses. tually acting on each other, produce in each other equal and opposite accelerations. We have, in this, simply designated, or named, an actual relation of things. In the general case we pro- ceed similarly. The bodies A and B receive respec- tively as the result of their mutual action (Fig. 140 ft) the accelerations cp and -f <>'? where the senses of the accelerations are indicated by the signs. We say then, B has <p/<p' times the mass of A. If we take A as our unit, we assign to that body the mass m which im- parts to A m times the acceleration that A in the reaction imparts to it. The ratio of the masses is the negative inverse ratio of the counter-accelerations. That these accelerations always have opposite signs, that . there are therefore, by our definition, only positive masses, Is a point that experience teaches, and experience alone character can teach. In our concept of, mass no theory is in- nition. * " volved ; ".quantity of matter" is wholly unnecessary in it ; all it contains is the exact establishment, designa- tion, and denomination of a fact. (Compare Appendix, XVIII., p. 539.) 4. One difficulty should not remain unmentioned in this connection, inasmuch as its removal is absolutely necessary to the formation of a perfectly clear concept of mass. We consider a set of bodies, A, B, C, D . . ., and compare them all with A as unit, A, B, C, D, E, F. 1, m, m', m", ;;/'", in"" We find thus the respective mass- values, 1, m, m f , m". . . ., and so forth. The question now arises, If we THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 219 select B as our standard of comparison (as our unit), Discussion shall we obtain for C the mass-value m' /m, and for D cuity ra- the value m"/m, or will perhaps wholly different values the V preced- i t t i n formu- result? More simply, the question maybe put thus : lation. Will two bodies J3, C, which in mutual action with A have acted as equal masses, also act as equal masses in mutual action with each other? No logical necessity exists whatsoever, that two masses that are equal to a third mass should also be equal to each other. For we are concerned here, not with a mathematical, but with a physical question. This will be rendered quite clear by recourse to an analogous relation. We place by the side of each other the bodies A, B, C in the proportions of weight a, b, c in which they enter into the chemical combinations AB and AC. There exists, now, no logical necessity at all for assuming that the same proportions of weight b, c of the bodies B, C will also enter into the chemical combination BC. Expe- rience, however, informs us that they do. If we place by the side of each other any set of bodies in the pro- portions of weight in which they combine with the body A 9 they will also unite with each other in the same proportions of weight. But no one can know this who has not tried it. And this is precisely the case with the mass-values of bodies. If we were to assume that the order of combination The order r i -i i -i -t'li' t f combi- of the bodies, by which their mass-values are deter- nation not ., i n i 1-1 influential mined, exerted any influence on the mass-values, the consequences of such an assumption would, we should find, lead to conflict with experience. Let us suppose, for instance (Fig. 141), that we have three elastic bodies, A, B, C, movable on an absolutely smooth and rigid ring.. We presuppose that A and B in their mutual relations comport themselves like equal masses 220 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. and that B and C do the same. We are then also obliged to assume, if we wish to avoid conflicts with experience, that C and A in their mutual relations act like equal masses. If we impart to A a, velocity, A will transmit this velocity by impact to B, and B to C. But if C were to act towards A, say, as a greater mass, A on impact would acquire a greater velocity than it originally had while C would still retain a residue of what it had. With every revolution in the direction of the hands of a watch the vis viva of the system would be increased. If C were the Flg * I4I> smaller mass as compared with A, reversing the motion would produce the same result. But a constant increase of vis viva of this kind is at decided variance with our experience. The new 5. The concept of mass when reached in the man- mass e m- ner just developed renders unnecessary the special pficitfy dbe enunciation of the principle of reaction. In the con- reaction 6 cept of mass and the principle of reaction, as we have stated in a preceding page, the same fact is twice iorm- ulated; which is redundant. If two masses i and 2 act on each other, our very definition of mass asserts that they impart to each other contrary accelerations which are to each other respectively as 2:1. 6. The fact that mass can be measured by weight, where the acceleration of gravity is invariable, can also be deduced from our definition of mass. We are sensible at once of any increase or diminution of a pres- sure, but this feeling affords us only a very inexact and indefinite measure of magnitudes of pressure. An exact, serviceable measure of pressure springs from the observation that every pressure is replaceable by THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 221 the pressure of a number of like and commensurable it also in- volves the weights. Every pressure can be counterbalanced by fact that f , . H. mass can be the pressure of weights of this kind. Let two bodies measured m and ;;/ be respectively affected in opposite directions with the accelerations cp and cp', determined by exter- nal circumstances. And let the bodies be joined by a string. If equilibrium prevails, the acceleration cp in m and the acceleration cp' in ;;/' are exactly balanced by interaction. For this case, ac- cordingly, m<p = m'cp'. . When, < 1^| L/'l > therefore, cp = cp', as is the case 9* ^ when the bodies are abandoned to the acceleration of gravity, we have, in the case of equilibrium, also m = m'. It is obviously imma- terial whether we make the bodies act on each other directly by means of a string, or by means of a string passed over a pulley, or by placing them on the two pans of a balance. The fact that mass can be meas- ured by weight is evident from our definition without recourse or reference to lt quantity of matter. " 7, As soon therefore as we, our attention being The general drawn to the fact by experience, have perceived in bod- this view, ies the existence of a special property determinative of accelerations, our task with .egard to it ends with the recognition and unequivocal designation of this fact. Beyond the recognition of this fact we shall not get, and every venture beyond it will only be productive of obscurity. All uneasiness will 1 vanish when once we have made clear to ourselves that in the concept of mass no theory of any kind whatever is contained, but simply a fact of experience. The concept has hitherto held good. It is very improbable', but not impossible, that it will be shaken in the future, just as the concep- 222 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. tion of a constant quantity of heat, which also rested on experience, was modified by new experiences. VI. NEWTON'S VIEWS OF TIME, SPACE, AND MOTION. i. In a scholium which he appends immediately to his definitions, Newton presents his views regarding time and space views which we shall now proceed to examine more in detail. We shall literally cite, to this end, only the passages that are absolutely necessary to the characterisation of Newton's views. Newton's << So far, my object has been to explain the senses views of . .-,.., time, space, m which certain words little known are to be used in and motion. - ... " the sequel. Time, space, place, and motion, being "words well known to everybody, I do not define. Yet 1 "it is to be remarked, that the vulgar conceive these " quantities only in their relation to sensible objects. "And hence certain prejudices with respect to them "have arisen, to remove which it will be convenient to " distinguish them into absolute and relative, true and "apparent, mathematical and common, respectively. Absolute "I. Absolute, true, and mathematical time, of it- and relative . . - , . n time, " self, and by its own nature, flows uniformly on, with- "out regard to anything external. It is also called * ' dilation. "Relative, apparent, and common time, is some " sensible and external measure of absolute time (dura- "tion), estimated by the motions of bodies, whether "accurate or inequable, and is commonly employed "in place of true time; as an hour, a day,, a month, "a year. . . "The natural days, which, commonly, for the pur- "pose of the measurement of time, are held as equal. " are in reality unequal. Astronomers correct this in- THE PRINCIPLES OF D YNAMICS. 223 "equality, in order that they may measure by a truer "time the celestial motions. It may be that there is "no equable motion, by which time can accurately be "measured. All motions can be accelerated and re- " tarded. But the flow of absolute time cannot be "changed. Duration, or the persistent existence of "things, is always the same, whether motions be swift "or slow or null." 2. It would appear as though Newton in the re- Discussion marks here cited still stood under the influence of the view of time. mediaeval philosophy, as though he had grown unfaith- ful to his resolve to investigate only actual facts. When we say a thing A changes with the time, we mean sim- ply that the conditions that determine a thing A depend on the conditions that determine another thing JE>. The vibrations of a pendulum take place in time when its excursion depends on the position of the earth. Since, however, in the observation of the pendulum, we are not under the necessity of taking into account its de- pendence on the position of the earth, but may com- pare it with any other thing (the conditions of which of course also depend on the position of the earth), the illusory notion easily arises that all the things with which we compare it are unessential. Nay, we may, in attending to the motion of a pendulum, neglect en- tirely other external things, and find that for every po- sition of it our thoughts and sensations are different. Time, accordingly, appears to be some particular and independent thing, on the progress of which the posi- tion of the pendulum depends, while the things that we resort to for comparison and choose at random ap- pear to play a wholly collateral part. But we must not forget that all things in the world are connected with one another and depend on one another, and that 224 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. General we ourselves and all our thoughts are also a part of discussion T . 1 t . , . J _, of the con- nature. It is utterly beyond our power to measure the tune changes of things by time. Quite the contrary, time is an abstraction, at which we arrive by means of the changes of things ; made because we are not restricted to any one definite measure, all being interconnected. . A motion is termed uniform in which equal increments of space described correspond to equal increments of space described by some motion with which we form a comparison, as the rotation of the earth, A motion may, with respect to another motion, be uniform. But the question whether a motion is in itself uniform, is senseless. , With just as little justice, also, may we speak of an "absolute time" of a time independent of change. This absolute time can be measured by com- parison with no motion ; it has therefore neither a practical nor a scientific value ; and no one is justified in saying that he knows aught about it. It is an idle metaphysical conception. Further eiu- It would not be difficult to show from the points of cidation of r , - .. . , 1 . . , the idea, view of psychology, history, and the science of lan- guage (by the names of the chronological divisions), that we reach our ideas of time in and through the in- terdependence of things on one another. In these ideas the profoundest and most universal connection of things is expressed. When a motion takes place in time, it depends on the motion of the earth. This is not refuted by the fact that mechanical motions can be reversed. A number of variable quantities may be so related that one set can suffer a change without the others being affected by it. Nature behaves like a machine. The individual parts reciprocally determine one another. But while in a machine the position of one part de- termines the position of all the other parts, in nature THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 225 more complicated relations obtain. These relations are best represented under the conception of a number, n, of quantities that satisfy a lesser number, ri ', of equa- tions. Were n = n', nature would be invariable. Were n' = n 1, then with one quantity all the rest would be controlled. If this latter relation obtained in na- ture, time could be reversed the moment this had been accomplished with any one single motion. But the true state of things is represented by a different rela- tion between n and n'. The quantities in question are partially determined by one another ; but they retain a greater indeterminateness, or freedom, than in the case last cited. We ourselves feel that we are such a partially determined, partially undetermined element of nature. In so far as a portion only of the changes of nature depends on us and can be reversed by us, does time appear to us irreversible, and the time that is past as irrevocably gone. We arrive at the idea of time, to express it briefly somepsy- and popularly, by the connection of that which isconsifera- , . , . r . tions. contained in the province of our memory with that which is contained in the province of our sense-percep- tion. When we say that time flows on in a definite di- rection or sense, we mean that physical events gene- rally (and therefore also physiological events) take place only in a definite sense.* Differences of tem- perature, electrical differences, differences of level gen- erally, if left to themselves, all grow less and not greater. If we contemplate two bodies of different temperatures, put in contact and left wholly to them- selves, we shall find that it is possible only for greater differences of temperature in the field of memory to * Investigations concerning the physiological nature of the sensations of time and space are here excluded from consideration. 226 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. exist with lesser ones in the field of sense-perception, and not the reverse. In all this there is simply ex- pressed a peculiar and profound connection of things. To demand at the present time a full elucidation of this matter, is to anticipate, in the manner of speculative philosophy, the results of all future special investiga- tion, that is a perfect physical science. (Compare Ap- pendix, XIX., p. 541.) Newton's 3. Views similar to those concerning time, are de- views of . space and veloped by Newton with respect to space and motion. motion. We extract here a few passages which characterise his position. "II. Absolute space, in its own nature and with- " out regard to anything external, always remains sim- ilar and immovable. "Relative space is some movable dimension or "measure of absolute space, which our senses deter- "mine by its position with respect to other bodies, " and which is commonly taken for immovable [abso- lute] space .... " IV. Absolute motion is the translation of a body "from one absolute place* to another absolute place ; " and relative motion, the translation from one relative " place to another relative place. . . . Passages " . . . . And thus we use, in common affairs, instead works. "of absolute places and motions, relative ones; and "that without any inconvenience. But in physical "disquisitions, we should abstract from the senses. " For it may be that there is no body really at rest, to "which the places and motions of others can be re- "ferred. . . . " The effects by which absolute and relative motions * The place, or locus of a body, according to Newton, is not its position, but depart of space which it occupies. It is either absolute or relative. Trans THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 227 " are distinguished from one another, are centrifugal " forces, or those forces in circular motion which pro- ' c duce a tendency of recession from the axis. For in "a circular motion which is purely relative no such "forces exist; but in a true and absolute circular mo- "tion they do exist, and are greater or less according "to the quantity of the [absolute] motion. "For instance. If a bucket, suspended by a long The rota- " cord, is so often turned about that finally the cord is "strongly twisted, then is filled with water, and held "at rest together with the water ; and afterwards by " the action of a second force, it is suddenly set whirl- " ing about the contrary way, and continues, while the "cord is untwisting itself, for some time in this mo- "tion ; the surface of the water will at first be level, "just as it was before the vessel began to move ; but, "subsequently, the vessel, by gradually communicat- "ing its motion to the water, will make it begin sens- " ibly to rotate, and the water will recede little by little " from the middle and rise up at the sides of the ves- " sel, its surface assuming a concave form. (This ex- " periment I have made myself.) " .... At first, when the relative motion of the wa- Relative T 1 . . - . and real "ter in the vessel was greatest, that motion produced motion, "no tendency whatever of recession from the axis ; the "water made no endeavor to move towards the cir- "cumference, by rising at the sides of the vessel, but "remained level, and for that reason its true circular "motion had not yet begun. But afterwards, when "the relative motion of the water had decreased, the "rising of the water at the sides of the vessel indicated * ' an endeavor to recede from the axis ; and this en- " deavor revealed the real circular motion of the water, " continually increasing, till it had reached its greatest 228 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. 11 point, when relatively the water was at rest in the " vessel .... li It is indeed a matter of great difficulty to discover "and effectually to distinguish the true from the ap- " parent motions of particular bodies ; for the parts of " that immovable space in which bodies actually move, " do not come under the observation of our senses. Newton's Yet the case is not altogether desperate : for there criteria for . . . - distinguish- exist to guide us certain marks, abstracted partly ing absolute ' , . . . , . ,.... fromreia- from the apparent motions, which are the differences tive motion. . "of the true motions, and partly from the forces that "are the causes and effects of the true motions. If, "for instance, two globes, kept at a fixed distance "from one another by means of a cord that connects "them, be revolved about their common centre of "gravity, one might, from the simple tension of the "cord, discover the tendency of the globes to recede "from the axis of their motion, and on this basis the " quantity of their circular motion might be computed. "And if any equal forces should be simultaneously "impressed on alternate faces of the globes to augment "or diminish their circular motion, we might, from "the increase or decrease of the tension of the cord, "deduce the increment or decrement of their motion; "and it might also be found thence on what faces "forces would have to 'be impressed, in order that the "motion of the globes should be most augmented; "that is, their rear faces, or those which, in the cir- " cular motion, follow. But as soon as we knew which ' ' faces followed, and consequently which preceded, we "should likewise know the direction of the motion. " In this way we might find both the quantity and the "direction of the circular motion, considered even in "an immense vacuum, where there was nothing ex- THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 229 "ternal or sensible with which the globes could be " compared . . . ." 4. It is scarcely necessary to remark that in the re- The predi- n i >.T -i cations of flections here presented Newton has again acted con- Newton , . . . . , . , are not the trary to his expressed intention only to investigate actual expression facts. No one is competent to predicate things about facts. absolute space and absolute motion ; they are pure things of thought, pure mental constructs, that cannot be produced in experience. All our principles of me- chanics are, as we have shown in detail, experimental knowledge concerning the relative positions and mo- tions of bodies. Even in the provinces in which they are now recognised as valid, they could not, and were not, admitted without previously being subjected to experimental tests. No one is warranted in extending these principles beyond the boundaries of experience. In fact, such an extension is meaningless, as no one possesses the requisite knowledge to make use of it. Let us look at the matter in detail. When we say that Detailed a body K alters its direction and velocity solely through matter, the influence of another body J r , we have asserted a conception that it Is impossible to come at unless other bodies A, I>, C . . . . are present with reference to which the motion of the body K has been estimated. In reality, therefore, we are simply cognisant of a re- lation of the body K to A, B, C . . . . If now we sud- denly neglect A, B, C. . . . and attempt to speak of the deportment of the body K in absolute space, we implicate ourselves in a twofold error. In the first place, we cannot know how K would act in the ab- sence of A, J3, C . . . . ; and in the second place, every means would be wanting of forming a judgment of the behaviour of K and of putting to the test what we had 230 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. predicated, which latter therefore would be bereft of all scientific significance. The part Two bodies K and K' , which gravitate toward each which the . . , - . ... bodies of other, impart to each other m the direction of their inthede- line of junction accelerations inversely proportional to termination . ... . of motion, their masses ;;/, ;;/ . In this proposition is contained, not only a relation of the bodies K and K' to one an- other, but also a relation of them to other bodies. For the proposition asserts, not only that X and K' suffer with respect to one another the acceleration designated by K (in -f- ;;//r 2 ), but also that JT experiences the ac- celeration Km jr* and K' the acceleration + Km/r* in the direction of the line of junction ; facts which can be ascertained only by the presence of other bodies. The motion of a body K can only be estimated by reference to other bodies A, I>, C . . . . But since we always have " at our disposal a sufficient number of bodies, that are as respects each other relatively fixed, or only slowly change their positions, we are, in such reference, restricted to no one definite body and can alternately leave out of account now this one and now that one. In this way the conviction arose that these bodies are indifferent generally. The hy- It might be, indeed, that the isolated bodies A, B. pothesis of 7 a medium C . . . . play merely a collateral role in the determina- in space de- terminative tion of the motion of the body K, and that this motion of motion. . J is determined by a medium in which K exists. In such a case we should have to substitute this medium for Newton's absolute space. Newton certainly did not entertain this idea. Moreover, it is easily demonstrable that the atmosphere is not this motion-determinative medium. We should, therefore, have to picture to ourselves some other medium, filling, say, all space, with respect to the constitution of which and its kinetic THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS, 231 relations to the bodies placed in it we have at present no adequate knowledge. In itself such a state of things would not belong to the impossibilities. It is known, from recent hydrodynamical investigations, that a rigid body experiences resistance in a frictionless fluid only when its velocity changes. True, this result is derived theoretically from the notion of inertia ; but it might, conversely, also be regarded as the primitive fact from which we have to start. Although, practically, and at present, nothing is to be accomplished with this con- ception, we might still hope to learn more in the future concerning this hypothetical medium ; and from the point of view of science it would be in every respect a more valuable acquisition than the forlorn idea of absolute space. When we reflect that we cannot abol- ish the isolated bodies A, B, C . . . ., that is, cannot determine by experiment whether the part they play is fundamental or collateral, that hitherto they have been the sole and only competent means of the orientation of motions and of the description of mechanical facts, it will be found expedient provisionally to regard all motions as determined by these bodies. 5. Let us now examine the point on which New- Critical examina- ton, apparently with sound reasons, rests his distinc- tion of ? tion of absolute and relative motion. If the earth is distinction ,. .... of absolute affected with an absolute rotation about its axis, cen- from reia- trifugal forces are set up in the earth : it assumes an oblate form, the acceleration of gravity is diminished at the equator, the plane of Foucault's pendulum ro- tates, and so on. All these phenomena disappear if the earth is at rest and the other heavenly bodies are affected with absolute motion round it, such that the same relative rotation is produced. This is, indeed, the case, if we start ab initio from the idea of absolute space. 232 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. But if we take our stand on the basis of facts, we shall find we have knowledge only of relative spaces and mo- tions. Relatively, not considering the unknown and neglected medium of space, the motions of the uni- verse are the same whether we adopt the Ptolemaic or the Copernican mode of view. Both views are, indeed, equally correct ; only the latter is more simple and more practical. The universe is not twice given, with an earth at rest and an earth in motion ; but only once, with its relative motions, alone determinable. It is, accordingly, not permitted us to say how things would be if the earth did not rotate. We may interpret the one case that is given us, in different ways. If, how- ever, we so interpret it that we come into conflict with experience, our interpretation is simply wrong. The principles of mechanics can, indeed, be so conceived, that even for relative rotations centrifugal forces arise, interprcta- Newton's experiment with the rotating vessel of experiment water simply informs us, that the relative rotation of rotating the water with respect to the sides of the vessel pro- water, duces no noticeable centrifugal forces, but that such forces are produced by its relative rotation with respect to the mass of the earth and the other celestial bodies. No one is competent to say how the experiment would turn out if the sides of the vessel increased in thickness and mass till they were ultimately several leagues thick. The one experiment only lies before us, and our busi- ness is, to bring it into accord with the other facts known to us, and not with the arbitrary fictions of our imagination. 6. We can have no doubts concerning the signifi- cance of the law of inertia if we bear in mind the man- ner in which it was reached. To begin with, Galileo discovered the constancy of the velocity and direction THE PRINCIPLES OP DYNAMICS, 233 of a body referred to terrestrial objects. Most terres- The law oi trial motions are of such brief duration and extent, that the light oj it is wholly unnecessary to take into account the earth's rotation and the changes of its progressive velocity with respect to the celestial bodies. This consideration is found necessary only in the case of projectiles cast great distances, in the case of the vibrations of Fou- cault's pendulum, and in similar instances. When now Newton sought to apply the mechanical principles dis- covered since Galileo's time to the planetary system, he found that, so far as it is possible to form any es- timate at all thereof, the planets, irrespectively of dy- namic effects, appear to preserve their direction and velocity with respect to bodies of the universe that are very remote and as regards each other apparently fixed, the same as bodies moving on the earth do with re- spect to the fixed objects of the earth. The comport- ment of terrestrial bodies with respect to the earth is reducible to the comportment of the earth with respect to the remote heavenly bodies. If we were to assert that we knew more of moving objects than this their last -mentioned, experimentally -given comportment with respect to the celestial bodies, we should render ourselves culpable of a falsity. When, accordingly, we say, that a body preserves unchanged its direction and velocity in space^ our assertion is nothing mor,e or less than- an abbreviated reference to the entire universe. The use of such an abbreviated expression is permit- ted the original author of the principle, because he knows, that as things are no difficulties stand in the way of carrying out its implied directions. But no remedy lies in his power, if difficulties of the kind men- tioned present themselves ; if, for example, the re- quisite, relatively fixed bodies are wanting. 234 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The reia- 7. Instead; now, of referring a moving body K to tion of the , , bodies of space, that is to say to a system of coordinates, let us verse to view directly its relation to the bodies of the universe, each other. . by which alone such a system of coordinates can be determined. Bodies very remote from each other, mov- ing with constant direction and velocity with respect to other distant fixed bodies, change their mutual dis- tances proportionately to the time. We may also say, All very remote bodies all mutual or other forces ne- glected alter their mutual distances proportionately to those distances. Two bodies, which, situated at a short distance from one another, move with constant direction and velocity with respect to other fixed bod- ies, exhibit more complicated relations. If we should regard the two bodies as dependent on one another, and call r the distance, t the time, and a a constant dependent on the directions and velocities, the formula would be obtained: dPr/di* = (1/r) [a* (dr/df)*]. It is manifestly much simpler and clearer to regard the two bodies as independent of each other and to con- sider the constancy of their direction and velocity with respect to other bodies. Instead of saying, the direction and velocity of a mass yw in space remain constant, we may also employ the expression, the mean acceleration of the mass ju with respect to the masses m, m', m". ... at the dis- tances r, /, r". ... is = 0, or d*(2mr/2 m)/dt* = 0. The latter expression is equivalent to the former, as soon as we take into consideration a sufficient number of sufficiently distant and sufficiently large masses. The mutual influence of more proximate small masses, which are apparently not concerned about each other, is eliminated of itself. That the constancy of direction and velocity is given by the condition adduced, will be THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 235 seen at once if we construct through a as vertex cones The expres- ,.,. . . . . sion of the that cut out dinerent portions of space, and set up the law of iner- condition with respect to the masses of these separate of this re? s portions. We may put, indeed, for the entire space encompassing /*, d* (2 mrj 2ni) jdt^ = 0. But the equation in this case asserts nothing with respect to the motion of yu, since it holds good for all species of mo- tion where }JL is uniformly surrounded by an infinite number of masses. If two masses yU 1? // 2 exert on each other a force which is dependent on their distance r, then d^rjdt^ = (/^ + yW 2 )/(r). But, at the same time, the acceleration of the centre of gravity of the two masses or the mean acceleration of the mass-system with respect to the masses of the universe (by the prin- ciple of reaction) remains == ; that is to say, When we reflect that the time-factor that enters The neces- into the acceleration is nothing more than a quantity ence^ofT that is the measure of the distances (or angles of rota- tion of the tion) of the bodies of the universe, we see that even in the simplest case, in which apparently we deal with the mutual action of only two masses, the neglecting of the rest of the world is impossible. Nature does not begin with elements, as we are obliged to begin with them. It is certainly fortunate for us, that we can, from time to time, turn aside our eyes from the over- powering unity of the All, and allow them to rest on individual details. But we should not omit, ultimately to complete and correct our views by a thorough con- sideration of the things which for the time being we y left out of account. 8. The considerations just presented show, that it THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The law of is not necessary to refer the law of inertia to a special not involve absolute space. On the contrary, it is perceived that spa2 e me the masses that in the common phraseology exert forces on each other as well as those that exert none, stand with respect to acceleration in quite similar relations. We may, indeed, regard a// masses as related to each other. That accelerations play a prominent part in the relations of the masses, must be accepted as a fact of experience ; which does not, however, exclude attempts to elucidate this fact by a comparison of it with other facts, involving the discovery of new points of view. In all the processes of nature the differences of certain I quantities u play a de- terminative role. Differ- ences of temperature, of potential function, and so forth, induce the natural *p processes, which consist in the equalisation of The familiar expressions d*it/dx 2 , are determinative of the Fig. 143. Natural these differences. consist in d^u/dy*. d 2 zi/dz 2 , which theequali- ' J ' p J '. sationof character of the equalisation, maybe regarded as the the differ- ences of quantities. measure of the departure of the condition of any point from the mean of the conditions of its environment to which mean the point tends. The accelerations of masses may be analogously conceived. The great dis- tances between masses that stand in no especial force- relation to one another, change proportionately to each other. If we lay off, therefore, a certain distance p as abscissa, and another r as ordinate, we obtain a straight line. (Fig. 143.) Every ;--ordinate corresponding to a definite p-value represents, accordingly, the mean of the adjacent ordinates. If a force-relation exists be- tween the bodies, some value d*r/dt* is determined THE PRINCIPLES OF D YNAMICS. 237 by it which conformably to the remarks above we may replace by an expression of the form d^rjdp 1 *. By the force-relation, therefore, a departure of the r-ordinate from the mean of the adjacent ordinates is produced, which would not exist if the supposed force-relation did not obtain. This intimation will suffice here. g. We have attempted in the foregoing to give the character " law of inertia a different expression from that in ordi- expression nary use. This expression will, so long as a suffi- oHnertia cient number of bodies are apparently fixed in space, accomplish the same as the ordinary one. It is as easily applied, and it encounters the same difficulties. In the one case we are unable to come at an absolute space, in the other a limited number of masses only is within the reach of our knowledge, and the summation indicated can consequently not be fully carried out. It is impossible to say whether the new expression would still represent the true condition of things if the stars were to perform rapid movements among one another. The general experience cannot be constructed from the particular case given us. We must, on the contrary, wait until such an experience presents itself. Perhaps when our physico-astronomical knowledge has been extended, it will be offered somewhere in celestial space, where more violent and complicated motions take place than in our environment. The most impor- The sim- tant result of our reflexions is, however, that precisely cipiesof 1 7 . . 7 T . 7 .. 7 . mechanics the apparently simplest mechanical principles are of a very are of a complicated character, that these principles are founded on pi:catedna- r . tureandare uncompleted experiences, nay on experiences that never can ail derived be fully completed, that practically, indeed, they are suf- rience," pe ficiently sectored, in view of the tolerable stability of our environment, to serve as the foundation { of mathematical deduction, but that they can by no means themselves be re- 238 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. gardcd as mathematically established truths but only as principles that not only admit of constant control by expe- rience but actually require it. This perception is valu- able in that it is propitious to the advancement of science. (Compare Appendix, XX., p. 542.) SYNOPTICAL CRITIQUE OF THE NEWTONIAN ENUNCIATIONS. Newton's i. Now that we have discussed the details with " sufficient particularity, we may pass again under re- view the form and the disposition of the Newtonian enunciations. Newton premises to his work several definitions, following which he gives the laws of mo- tion. We shall take up the former first. Mass. " Definition I. The quantity of any matter is the "measure of it by its density and volume conjointly. " . . . This quantity is what I shall understand by the " term ?nass or body in the discussions to follow. It is " ascertainable from the weight of the bpdy in ques- tion. For I have found, by pendulum -experiments "of high precision, that the mass of a body is propor- " tional to its weight ; as will hereafter be shown. Quantity of "Definition II. Quantity of motion is the measure inertia,' " of it by the velocity and quantity of matter con- force, and . . , accelera- "jointly. < ' Definition III. The resident force \vis insita, i. e. "the inertia] of matter is a power of resisting, by . "which every body, so far as in it lies, perseveres in "its state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight "line. "Definition IV. An impressed force is any action "upon a body which changes, or tends to change, its "state of rest, or of uniform motion in a straight line. THE PRINCIPLES OP D YXAMICS. 239 "Definition V. A centripetal force is any force by 'which bodies are drawn or impelled towards, or tend 6 in any way to reach, some point as centre. "Definition VI. The absolute quantity of a centri- Forces cias- , c . f . . . , - . . sifted as ab- ' petal force is a measure of it increasing and dimin- solute, ac- . , . . , , ,,,, e , , celerative, ' ishing with the efficacy of the cause that propagates and mov- ' it from the centre through the space round about. "Definition VII. The accelerative quantity of a ' centripetal force is the measure of it proportional to 1 the velocity which it generates in a given time. "Definition VIII. The moving quantity of a cen- 1 tripetal force is the measure of it proportional to the 'motion [See Def. n.] which it generates in a given ' time. "The three quantities or measures of force thus dis- The reia- 'tinguished, may, for brevity's sake, be called abso- forces thus - , . , . - . . ,. distin- ' lute, accelerative, and moving forces, being, for dis- guished. ' tinction's sake, respectively referred to the centre of ' force, to the places of the bodies, and to the bodies 1 that tend to the centre : that is to say, I refer moving ' force to the body, as being an endeavor of the whole 'towards the centre, arising from the collective en- ' deavors of the several parts ; accelerative force to the ' place of the body, as being a sort of efficacy originat- ' ing in the centre and diffused throughout all the sev- ' eral places round about, in moving the bodies that ' are at these places ; and absolute force to the centre, ' as invested with some cause, without which moving ' forces would not be propagated through the space ' round about ; whether this latter cause be some cen- ' tral body, (such as is a loadstone in a centre of mag- ' netic force, or the earth in the centre of the force of 'gravity,) or anything else not visible. This, at least, ' is the mathematical conception of forces ; for their 2 4 o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. " physical causes and seats I do not in this place con- " sider. Thedis- "Accelerating force, therefore, is to moving force, tinction . _^ mathemat- " as velocity is to quantity of motion. For quantity icalandnot p . . , , . . , , physical, "of motion arises from the velocity and the quantity "of matter; and moving force arises from the accel- " erating force and the same quantity of matter ; the "sum of the effects of the accelerative force on the sev- " eral particles of the body being the motive force of "the whole. Hence, near the surface of the earth, "where the accelerative gravity or gravitating force is "in all bodies the same, the motive force of gravity or " the weight is as the body [mass]. But if we ascend "to higher regions, where the accelerative force of "gravity is less, the weight will be equally diminished, "always remaining proportional conjointly to the mass "and the accelerative force of gravity. Thus, in those "regions where the accelerative force of gravity is half " as great, the weight of a body will be diminished by " one- half. Further, I apply the terms accelerative and "motive in one and the same sense to attractions and "to impulses. I employ the expressions attraction, im- " pulse, or propensity of any kind towards a centre, ' i promiscuously and indifferently, the one for the other; "considering those forces not in a physical sense, but "mathematically. The reader, therefore, must not "infer from any expressions of this kind that I may "use, that I take upon me to explain the kind or the "mode of an action, or the causes or the physical rea- "son thereof, or that I attribute forces in a true or "physical sense, to centres (which are only mathemat- ical points), when at any time I happen to say that "centres attract or that central forces are in action." TffE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 241 2. Definition i is, as has already been set forth, a Criticism o pseudo-definition. The concept of mass is not made Definitions clearer by describing mass as the product of the volume into the density, as density itself denotes simply the mass of unit of volume. The true definition of mass can be deduced only from the dynamical relations of bodies. To Definition n, which simply enunciates a mode of computation, no objection is to be made. Defini- tion in (inertia), however, is rendered superfluous by Definitions iv-vm of force, inertia being included and given in the fact that forces are accelerative. Definition TV defines force as the cause of the accel- eration, or tendency to acceleration, of a body. The latter part of this is justified by the fact that in the cases also in which accelerations cannot take place, other attractions that answer thereto, as the compres- sion and distension etc. of bodies occur. The cause of an acceleration towards a definite centre is defined in Definition v as centripetal force, and is distinguished in vi, vn, and vm as absolute, accelerative, and mo- tive. It is, we may say, a matter of taste and of form whether we shall embody the explication of the idea of force in one or in several definitions. In point of principle the Newtonian definitions are open to no ob- jections. 3. The Axioms or Laws of Motion then follow, of Newton's . . - .. _, . , Laws of which Newton enunciates three : Motion. " Law I. Every body perseveres in its state of rest "or of uniform motion in a straight line, except in so "far as it is compelled to change that state by im- " pressed forces." < ' Law IL Change of motion [i. e. of momentum] is proportional to the moving force impressed, and takes 242 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. " place in the direction of the straight line In which "such force is impressed." "Law III. Reaction is always equal and opposite "to action; that is to say, the actions of two bodies " upon each other are always equal and directly op- "posite." Newton appends to these three laws a number of Corollaries. The first and second relate to the prin- ciple of the parallelogram of forces ; the third to the quantity of motion generated in the mutual action of bodies ; the fourth to the fact that the motion of the centre of gravity is not changed by the mutual action of bodies ; the fifth and sixth to relative motion. criticism of 4. We readily perceive that Laws i and n are con- laws?? 8 tained in the definitions of force that precede. Ac- cording to the latter, without force there is no accel- eration, consequently only rest or uniform motion in a straight line. Furthermore, it is wholly unnecessary tautology, after having established acceleration as the measure of force, to say again that change of motion is proportional to the force. It would have been enough to say that the definitions premised were not arbitrary mathematical ones, but correspond to properties of bodies experimentally given. The third law apparently contains something new. But we have seen that it is unintelligible without the correct idea of mass, which idea, being itself obtained only from dynamical expe- rience, renders the law unnecessary. The coroi- The first corollary really does contain something these Jaws. new. But it regards the accelerations determined in a body K by different bodies M, N, P as self -evidently independent of eacri other, whereas this is precisely . what should have been explicitly recognised as a fact of experience. Corollary Second is a simple applica- THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 243 tion of the law enunciated in corollary First. The re- maining corollaries, likewise, are simple deductions, that is, mathematical consequences, from the concep- tions and laws that precede. 5. Even if we adhere absolutely to the Newtonian points of view, and disregard the complications and in- definite features mentioned, which are not removed but merely concealed by the abbreviated designations "Time" and " Space," it is possible to replace New- ton's enunciations by much more simple, methodically better arranged, and more satisfactory propositions. Such, in our estimation, would be the following : a. Experimental Proposition. Bodies set opposite Proposed , . , . , , , . . substitu- each other induce in each other, under certain circum- tions for . r , . . , the New- stances to be specified by experimental physics, con- tonian laws ' . , , . . r , . , . 1 . and defini- trary accelerations in the direction of their line of junc- tions. tion. (The principle of inertia is included in this.) b. Definition. The mass-ratio of any two bodies is the negative inverse ratio of the mutually induced ac- celerations of those bodies. c. Experimental Proposition. The mass-ratios of bodies are independent of the character of the physical states (of the bodies) that condition the mutual accel- erations produced, be those states electrical, magnetic, or what not ; and they remain, moreover, the same, whether they are mediately or immediately arrived at. d. Experimental Proposition. The accelerations which any number of bodies A, B, C . . . . induce in a body K, are independent of each other. (The principle of the parallelogram of forces follows immediately from this.) e. Definition. Moving force is the product of the mass-value of a body into the acceleration induced in that body. 244 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Extent and Then the remaining arbitrary definitions of the al- character _ . , . ,,-,,-, of the pro- gebraical expressions "momentum, "vis viva/ and posed sub- . stitutions. the like, might follow. But these are by no means in- dispensable. The propositions above set forth satisfy the requirements of simplicity , and parsimony which, on economico-scientific grounds, must be exacted of them. They are, moreover, obvious and clear ; for no doubt can exist with respect to any one of them either concerning its meaning or its source ; and we always know whether it asserts an experience or an arbitrary convention. The 6. Upon the whole, we may say, that Newton dis- ments of cerned in an admirable manner the concepts and princi- from the pies that were sufficiently assured to allow of being fur- view of his ther built upon. It is possible that to some extent he was forced by the difficulty and novelty of his subject, in the minds of the contemporary world, to great am- plitude, and, therefore, to a certain disconnectedness of presentation, in consequence of which one and the same property of mechanical processes appears several times formulated. To some extent, however, he was, as it is possible to prove, not perfectly clear himself concerning the import and especially concerning the source of his principles. This cannot, however, ob- scure in the slightest his intellectual ' greatness. He that has to acquire a new point of view naturally can- not possess it so securely from the beginning as they that receive it unlaboriously from him. He has done enough if he has discovered truths on which future generations can further build. For every new infer- ence therefrom affords at once a new insight, a new control, an extension of our prospect, and a clarifica- tion of our field of view. Like the commander of an army, a great discoverer cannot stop to institute petty THE PRINCIPLES OF D YNAMICS. 245 inquiries regarding the right by which he holds each The r -11 AT-V-I r- achieve- pOSt of vantage he has won. The magnitude of the ments of 11 ^ 111 r -, - -r-s Newton in problem to be solved leaves no time for this. But at the light of i i ,1 . .... ._ . , subsequent a later period, the case is different. Newton might research, well have expected of the two centuries to follow that they should further examine and confirm the founda- tions of his work, and that, when times of greater scien- tific tranquillity should come, the principles of the sub- ject might acquire an even higher philosophical in- terest than all that is deducible from them. Then prob- lems arise like those just treated of, to the solution of which, perhaps, a small contribution has here been made. We join with the eminent physicists Thomson and Tait, in our reverence and admiration of Newton. But we can only comprehend with difficulty their opin- ion that the Newtonian doctrines still remain the best and most philosophical foundation of the science that can be given. RETROSPECT OF THE DEVELOPMENT OF DYNAMICS. i. If we pass in review the period in which the de- The chief f . . j result, the velopment of dynamics fell, a period inaugurated by discovery Galileo, continued by Huygens, and brought to a close fact, by Newton, its main result will be found to be the perception, that bodies mutually determine in each other accelerations dependent on definite spatial and material circumstances, and that there are masses. The reason the perception of these facts was embodied in so great a number of principles is wholly an historical one ; the perception was not reached at once, but slowly and by degrees. In reality only one great fact was es- tablished. Different pairs of bodies determine, inde- pendently of each other, and mutually, in themselves, 246 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. pairs of accelerations, whose terms exhibit a constant ratio, the criterion and characteristic of each pair. This fact Not even men of the calibre of Galileo, Huygens, even the , . . . . greatest in- and Newton were able to perceive this tact at once. could per- Even they could only discover it piece by piece, as it in frag- ny 'is expressed in the law of falling bodies, -in the special law of inertia, in the principle of the parallelogram of forces, in the concept of mass, and so forth. To-day, no difficulty any longer exists in apprehending the unity of the whole fact. The practical demands of communi- cation alone can justify its piecemeal presentation in several distinct principles, the number of which is really only determined by scientific taste. What is more, a reference to the reflections above set forth respecting the ideas of time, inertia, and the like, will surely con- vince us that, accurately viewed, the entire fact has, in all its aspects, not yet been perfectly apprehended. The results The point of view reached has, as Newton expressly reached ^ , . , , , < f havenoth- states, nothing to do with the " unknown causes 7 of with the so- natural phenomena. That which in the mechanics of called _.,..,... . . "causes" the present day is called force is not a something that of phenom- , . , . - , , , , ena. lies latent in the natural processes, but a measurable, actual circumstance of motion, the product of the mass into the acceleration. Also when we speak of the at- tractions or repulsions of bodies, it is not necessary to think of any hidden causes of the motions produced. We signalise by the term attraction merely an actually existing resemblance between events determined by con- ditions of motion and the results of our volitional im- pulses. In both cases either actual motion occurs or, when the motion is counteracted by some other circum- stance of motion, distortion, compression of bodies, and so forth, are produced. 2. The work which devolved on genius here, was THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 247 the noting of the connection of certain determinative The form of elements of the mechanical processes. The precise es- chaScai tablishmenfof the form of this connection was rather a m^^naln task for plodding research, which created the different ?cai 'origin. concepts and principles of mechanics. We can de- termine the true value and significance of these prin- ciples and concepts only by the investigation of their historical origin. In this it appears unmistakable at times, that accidental circumstances have given to the course of their development a peculiar direction, which under other conditions might have been very different. Of this an example shall be given. Before Galileo assumed the familiar fact of the de-Forexam- pendence of the final velocity on the time, and put it to leo's laws , r - , , of falling the test of experiment, he essayed, as we have already bodies ,.-. n ,. , -,-,,...,. might have seen, a different hypothesis, and made the final velocity taken a dif- ., , , ... - __ . ... ferentform. proportional to thesflace described. He imagined, by a course of fallacious reasoning, likewise already referred to, that this assumption involved a self-contradiction. His reasoning was, that twice any given distance of de- scent must, by virtue of the double final velocity ac- quired, necessarily be traversed in the same time as the simple distance of descent. But since the first half is necessarily traversed first, the remaining half will have to be traversed instantaneously, that is in an interval of time not measurable. Whence, it readily follows, that the descent of bodies generally is instantaneous. The fallacies involved in this reasoning are manifest. Galileo's Galileo was, of course, not versed in mental Integra- and iS mg tions, and having at his command no adequate methods for the solution of problems whose facts were in any degree complicated, he could not but fall into mistakes whenever such cases were presented. If we call s the distance and / the time, the Galilean assumption reads 248 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. in the language of to-day dsjdt = as, from which fol- lows s = A " f , where a is a constant of experience and A a constant of integration. This is an entirely different conclusion from that drawn by Galileo. It does not conform, it is true, to experience, and Galileo would probably have taken exception to a result that, as a condition of motion generally, made s different from when t equalled 0. But in itself the assumption is by no means j-^-contradictory. Thesuppo- Let us suppose that Kepler had put to himself the Kepler had same question. Whereas Galileo always sought after made Gali- , - -, i , r ,1 j leo'sre- the very simplest solutions or things, and at once re- jected hypotheses that did not fit, Kepler's mode of pro- cedure was entirely different. He did not quail before the most complicated assumptions, but worked his way, by the constant gradual modification of his original hypothesis, successfully to his goal, as the history of his discovery of the laws of planetary motion fully shows. Most likely, Kepler, on finding the-assumption dsjdt = as would not work, would have tried a num- ber of others, and among them probably the correct one ds/dt = a Vs. But from this would have resulted an essentially different course of development for the sci- ence of dynamics. in such a It was only gradually and with great difficulty that concept the concept of " work" attained its present position might have of importance ; and in our judgment it is to the above- origina\ e mentioned trifling historical circumstance that the diffi- mcchTnics. culties and obstacles it had to encounter are to be as- cribed. As the interdependence of the velocity and the time was, as it chanced, first ascertained, it could not be otherwise than that the relation y = gt should appear as the original one, the equation s =gt*/z as the next immediate, and gs = v 2 /2 as a remoter inference. In- THE PRINCIPLES OF D YMAMICS. 249 troducing the concepts mass (;//) and force (/), where p = mg, we obtain, by multiplying the three equations by m, the expressions mv=ft, ms=J>t%/2 9 ps = mv 2 /2 the fundamental equations of mechanics. Of necessity, therefore, the concepts force and momentum (in v) appear more primitive than the concepts work (/.$) and vis viva (mv 2 ). It is not to be wondered at, accord- ingly, that, wherever the idea of work made its appear- ance, it was always sought to replace it by the histor- ically older concepts. The entire dispute of the Leib- nitzians and Cartesians, which was first composed in a manner by D'Alembert, finds its complete explana- tion in this fact. From an unbiassed point of view, we have exactly Justifica- - i . . - , . , , , tion of this the same right to inquire after the interdependence of view. the final velocity and the time as after the interde- pendence of the final velocity and the distance, and to answer the question by experiment. The first inquiry leads us to the experiential truth, that given bodies in contraposition impart to each other in given times defi- nite increments of velocity. The second informs us, that given bodies in contraposition impart to each other for given mutual displacements definite increments of velocities. Both propositions are equally justified, and both may be regarded as equally original. The correctness of this view has been substantiated Exempiifi : r cation of it in our own day by the example of J . R. Mayer. Mayer, in modem a modern mind of the Galilean stamp, a mind wholly free from the influences of the schools, of his own in- dependent accord actually pursued the last-named method, and produced by it an extension of science which the schools did not accomplish until later in a much less complete and less simple form. For Mayer, work was the original concept. That which is called 250 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. work in the mechanics of the schools, he calls force. Mayer's error was, that he regarded his method as the only correct one. The results 3. We may, therefore, as it suits us, regard the time Which flow r - i7' r i i r from it. of descent or the distance of descent as the factor de- terminative of velocity. If we fix our attention on the first circumstance, the concept of force appears as the original notion, the concept of work as the derived one. If we investigate the influence of the second fact first, the concept of work is the original notion. In the transference of the ideas reached in the observation of the motion of descent to more complicated relations, force is recognised as dependent on the distance be- tween the bodies that is, as a function of the distance, f(f). The work done through the element of distance dr is then/(r) dr. By the second method of investiga- tion work is also obtained as a function of the distance, F (r) ; but in this case we know force only in the form d. F (f)jdr that is to say, as the limiting value of the ratio : (increment of work)/(increment of distance.) The prefer- Galileo cultivated by preference the first of these different in- two methods. Newton likewise preferred it. Huygens qmrers. p ursuec j the second method, without at all restricting himself to it. Descartes elaborated Galileo's ideas after a fashion of his own. But his performances are in- significant compared with those of Newton and Huy- gens, and their influence was soon totally effaced. After Huygens and Newton, the mingling of the two spheres of thought, the independence and equivalence of which are not always noticed, led to various blunders and confusions, especially in the dispute between the Car- tesians and Leibnitzians, already referred to, concern- ing the measure of force. In recent times, however, in- quirers turn by preference now to the one and now to THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 251 the other. Thus the Galileo- Newtonian ideas are culti- vated with preference by the school of Poinsot, the Galileo-Huygenian by the school of Poncelet. 4. Newton operates almost exclusively with the no- Theimpor- tance and tions of iorce, mass, and momentum. His sense of the history of value of the concept of mass places him above his prede- tonian con- cessors and contemporaries. It did not occur to Galileo mass. that mass and weight were different things. Huygens, too, in all his considerations, puts weights for masses ; as for example in his investigations concerning the centre of oscillation. Even in the treatise De Percus- sione (On Impact), Huygens always says " corpus ma- jus," the larger body, and " corpus minus, " the smaller body, when he means the larger or the smaller mass. Physicists were not led to form the concept mass till they made the discovery that the same body can by the action ,of gravity receive different accelerations. The first occasion of this discovery was the pendulum-ob- servations of Richer (1671-1673), from which Huy- gens at once drew the proper inferences,' and the second was the extension of the dynamical laws to the heavenly bodies. The importance of the first point may be inferred from the fact that Newton, to prove the pro- portionality of mass and weight on the same spot of the earth, personally instituted accurate observations on pendulums of different materials (Prindpia. Lib. II, Sect. VI, De Motu et Resistentia Corporum Funependu- lorum). In the case of John Bernoulli, also, the first distinction between mass and weight (in the Meditatio de Natura Centri Oscillationis. Opera Omnia, Lausanne and Geneva, Vol. II, p. 168) was made on the ground of the fact that the same body can receive different gravitational accelerations. Newton, accordingly, dis- poses of all dynamical questions involving the relations 252 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. of several bodies to each other, by the help of the ideas of force, mass, and momentum. Themeth- 5. Huygens pursued a different method for the so- ods of Huy- . . r . , , _ 1M , - .... gens. lution of these problems. Galileo had previously dis- covered that a body rises by virtue of the velocity ac- quired in its descent to exactly the same height as that from which it fell. Huygens, generalising the principle (in his Horologium Oscillatoriuni) to the effect that the centre of gravity of any .system of bodies will rise by virtue of the velocities acquired in its descent to, ex- actly the same height as that from which it fell, reached the principle of the equivalence of work and vis viva. The names of the formulae which he obtained, were, of course, not supplied until long afterwards. The Huygenian principle of work was received by the contemporary world with almost universal distrust. People contented themselves with making use of its brilliant consequences. It was always their endeavor. to replace its deductions by others. Even after John and Daniel Bernoulli had extended the principle, it was its fruitfulness rather than its evidency that was valued. The meth- We observe, that the Galileo-Newtonian principles odsofNew- r . . , .. . , ton and were, on account of their greater simplicity and ap- d. parently greater evidency, invariably preferred to the Galileo-Huygenian. The employment of the latter is exacted only by necessity in cases in which the em- ployment of the former, owing to the laborious atten- tion to details demanded, is impossible ; as in the case of John and Daniel Bernoulli's investigations of the motion of fluids. If *we look at the matter closely, however, the same simplicity and evidency will be found to belong tO' the Huygenian principles as to the Newtonian proposi- THE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 253 tions. That the velocity of a body is determined by the time of descent or determined by the distance of descent, are assumptions equally natural and equally simple. The form of the law must in both cases be supplied by experience. As a starting-point, therefore, ft = mv and/j- = mv 2 /2 are equally well fitted. 6. When we pass to the investigation of the motion The neces^ of several bodies, we are again compelled, in both cases, universai- to take a second step of an equal degree of certainty, two meth- The Newtonian idea of mass is justified by the fact, that, if relinquished, all rules of action for events would have an end ; that we should forthwith have to expect contradictions of our commonest and crudest" experi- ences y and that the physiognomy of our mechanical environment would become unintelligible. The same thing 'must be said of the Huygenian principle of work. If we surrender the theorem 2ps = 2mv 2 /2, heavy bodies will, by virtue of their own weights, be able to ascend higher ; all known rules of mechanical occur- rences will have an end. The instinctive factors which entered alike into the discovery of the one view and of the other have been already discussed. The two spheres of ideas could, of course, have The points grown up much more independently of each other. But of the two methods. in view of the fact that the two were constantly in con- tact, it is no wonder that they have become partially merged in each other, and that the Huygenian appears the less complete. Newton is all-sufficient with his forces, masses, and momenta. Huygens would like- wise suffice with work, mass, and vis viva. But since he did not in his time completely possess the idea of mass, that idea had in subsequent applications to be borrowed from the other sphere. Yet this also could have been avoided. If with Newton the mass-ratio of 254 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. two bodies can be defined as the inverse ratio of the velocities generated by the same force, with Huygens it would be logically and consistently definable as the inverse ratio of the squares of the velocities generated by the same work. The respec- The two spheres of ideas consider the mutual de- of each. pendence on each other of entirely different factors of the same phenomenon. The Newtonian view is in so far more complete as it gives us information regarding the motion of each mass. But to do this it is obliged to descend greatly into details. The Huygenian view furnishes a rule for the whole system. It is only a con- venience, but it is then a mighty convenience, when the relative velocities of the masses are previously and independently known. The gen- 7. Thus we are led to see, that in the develop- eral devel- ' . ... opment of ment of dynamics, just as in the development of statics, in the light the connection of widely different features of mechanical ceding re- phenomena engrossed at different times the attention of inquirers. We may regard the momentum of a sys- tem as determined by the forces ; or, on the other hand, we may regard its vis -viva as determined by the work. In the selection of the criteria in question the individuality of the inquirers has great scope. It will be conceived possible, from the arguments above pre- sented, that our system of mechanical ideas might, perhaps, have been different, had Kepler instituted the first investigations concerning the motions of fall- ing bodies, or had Galileo not committed an error in his first speculations. We shall recognise also that not only a knowledge of the ideas that have been accepted and cultivated by subsequent teachers is necessary for the historical understanding of a science, but also that the rejected and transient thoughts of the inquirers, TPIE PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS. 255 nay even apparently erroneous notions, may be very important and very instructive. The historical investi- gation of the development of a science is most needful, lest the principles treasured up in it become a system of half-understood prescripts, or worse, a system of prejudices. Historical investigation not only promotes the understanding of that which now is, but also brings new possibilities before us, by showing that which ex- ists to be in great measure conventional and accidental. From the higher point of view at which different paths of thought converge we may look about us with freer powers of vision and discover routes before unknown. / In all the dynamical propositions that we have dis- The substi- -l r . -i AI rr^l tUtion Of cussed, velocity plays a prominent role. The reason "integral" . . . - - , . , -for "Sifter- of this, in our view, is, that, accurately considered, entiai" , ~ laws may every single body of the universe stands in some den- some day . . , . make the nite relation with every other body in the universe ; concept of that any one body, and consequently also any several fluous. bodies, cannot be regarded as wholly isolated. Our inability to take in all things at a glance alone compels us to consider a few bodies and for the time being to neglect in certain aspects the others j a step accom- plished by the introduction of velocity, and therefore of 'time. We cannot regard it as impossible that inte- gral laws, to use an expression of C. Neumann, will some day take the place of the laws of mathematical elements, or differential laws, that now make up the science of mechanics, and that we shall have direct knowledge of the dependence on one another of the positions of bodies. In such an event, the concept of force will have become superfluous. (See Appendix, XXL, p. 548, on Hertz's Mechanics; also Appendix XXII. , p. 555, in answer to criticisms of the views ex- pressed by the author in Chapters I. and II.) CHAPTER III. THE EXTENDED APPLICATION OF THE PRINCIPLES OF MECHANICS AND THE DEDUCTIVE DE- VELOPMENT OF THE SCIENCE. SCOPE OF THE NEWTONIAN PRINCIPLES. Newton's i. The principles of Newton suffice by themselves, afe n um- es without the introduction of any new laws, to explore scope 1 and thoroughly every mechanical phenomenon practically power. occurring, whether it belongs to statics or'to dynamics. If difficulties arise in any such consideration, they are invariably of a mathematical, or formal, character, and in no re- spect concerned with questions of principle. We have given, let us suppose, a number of mas- ses m , m 2 , m^. ... in space, with definite initial velocities 27 x , z/ 2 , v z . . . . We imagine, further, lines of junction drawn between every Fig. 144- two masses. In the directions of these lines of junction are set up the accelerations and counter-accelerations, the dependence of which on the distance it is the business of physics to determine. In a small element of time r the mass m^ for example, will traverse in the direction of its initial velocity the distance 7> 5 r, and in the directions of the lines joining THE EXTENSION OP THE PRINCIPLES. 257 it with the masses m., m^, m~. . . ., being affected in Schematic , ,. . . , 1 ' 2 ' . 3 . ' _ * r , illustration such directions with the accelerations <p*, cp\, cp^. . . ., of thepre- the distances (^f/2)r 2 , (9>|/2)r 2 , (^|/2)r 2 . . . . If statement. we imagine all these motions to be performed indepen- dently of each other, we shall obtain the new position of the mass m 5 after lapse of time r. The composition of the velocities v 5 and cp\r, q>\i, q>\r . . . . gives the new initial velocity at the end of time r. We then allow a second small interval of time r to elapse, and, making allowance for the new spatial relations of the masses, continue in the same way the investigation of the motion. In like manner we may proceed with every other mass. It will be seen, therefore, that, in point of principle, no embarrassment can arise ; the difficulties which occur are solely of a mathematical character, where an exact solution in concise symbols, and not a clear insight into the momentary workings of the phenomenon, is demanded. If the accelerations of the mass m 5 , or of several masses, collectively neu- tralise each other, the mass m^ or the other masses mentioned are in equilibrium and will move uniformly onwards with their initial velocities. If, in addition, the initial velocities in question are 0, both equilib- rium and rest subsist for these masses. Nor, where a number of the masses m,, m . . . . The same ... idea ap- have considerable extension, so that it is impossible to plied to ag- gregEtes of speak of a single line joining every two masses, is the dif- material ficulty, in poin.t of principle, any greater. We divide the masses into portions sufficiently small for our pur- pose, and draw the lines of junction mentioned between every two such portions. We, furthermore, take into account the reciprocal relation of the parts of the same large mass ; which relation, in the case of rigid masses for instance, consists in the parts resisting 258 THE SCIENCE ' OF MECHANICS. every alteration of their distances from one another. On the alteration of the distance between any two parts of such a mass an acceleration is observed proportional to that alteration. Increased distances diminish, and diminished distances increase in consequence of this acceleration. By the displacement of the parts with respect to one another, the familiar forces of elasticity are aroused. When masses meet in impact, their forces of elasticity do not come into play until contact and an incipient alteration of form take place. A practical 2. If we imagine a heavy perpendicular column otthe r scope resting on the earth, any particle m in the interior of principles. 3 the column which we may choose to isolate in thought, is in equilibrium and at rest. A vertical downward ac- celeration g is produced by the earth in the particle, which acceleration the particle obeys. But in so doing it approaches nearer to the particles lying beneath it, and the elastic forces thus awakened generate in m a vertical acceleration upwards, which ultimately, when the particle has approached near enough, becomes equal to g. The particles lying above m likewise approach m with the acceleration g. Here, again, acceleration and counter-acceleration are produced, whereby the particles situated above are brought to rest, but whereby m continues to be forced nearer and nearer to the particles beneath it until the acceleration downwards, which it receives from the particles above it, increased by g, is equal to the acceleration it re- ceives in the upward direction from the particles be- neath it. We may apply the same reasoning to every" portion of the column and the earth beneath it, readily perceiving that the lower portions lie nearer each other and are more violently pressed together than the parts above. Every portion lies between a less closely pressed THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES, 259 upper portion and a more closely pressed lower por- Rest in the - . , , . ,. , ; light of tion ; its downward acceleration g is neutralised by atheseprin- surplus of acceleration upwards, which it experiences pears S as P a r i it T-TT T 11 i-i special case from the parts beneath. We comprehend the equilib- of motion. rium and rest of the parts of the column by imagining all the accelerated motions which the reciprocal rela- tion of the earth and the parts of the column determine, as in fact simultaneously performed. The apparent mathematical sterility of this conception vanishes, and it assumes at once an animate form, when we reflect that in reality no body is completely at rest, but that in all, slight tremors and disturbances are constantly taking place which now give to the accelerations of de- scent and now to the accelerations of elasticity a slight preponderance. Rest, therefore, is a case of motion, very infrequent, and, indeed, never completely realised. The tremors mentioned are by no means an unfamiliar phenomenon. When, however, we occupy ourselves with cases of equilibrium, we are concerned simply with a schematic reproduction in thought of the mechanical facts. We then purposely neglect these disturbances, displacements, bendings, and tremors, as here they have no interest for us. All cases of this class, which have a scientific or practical importance, fall within the province of the so-called theory of elasticity. The whole The unity ^ . and homo- OUtCOme of Newton's achievements is that we every- geneity which these where reach our goal with one and the same idea, and principles i introduce by means of it are able to reproduce and construct be- into the forehand all cases of equilibrium and motion. All phenomena of a mechanical kind now appear to us as uniform throughout and as made up of the same elements. 3. Let us consider another example. Two mas- ses m, m are situated at a distance a from each 260 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. A general other. (Fig. 145.) When displaced with respect to cation of each other, elastic forces proportional to the change the power . . , , oftheprin- x 2 of distance are supposed to be ciples. ' - "^ - \ i i -r i i - B B _ awakened. Let the masses be x* movable in the Jf-direction par- Fi &- ^s- allel to a, and their coordinates be x 13 x 2 . If a force /is applied at the point x 2 , the following equations obtain : where p stands for the force that one mass exerts on the other when their mutual distance is altered by the value i. All the quantitative properties of the me- chanical process are determined by these equations. But we obtain these properties in a more comprehensi- ble form by the integration of the equations. The ordi- nary procedure is, to find by the repeated differentia- tion of the equations before us new equations in suffi- cient number to obtain by elimination equations in x^ alone or x 2 alone, which are afterwards integrated. We shall here pursue a different method. By subtracting the first equation from the second, we get /, or at- - - the equa- rth putting *,-*!=:*, this exam- T O pie. d*U O ,/,[%/ /Y! I -P /Ov m ~-tfJi -~'*fL u dU TV ('">) and by the addition of the first and the second equa- tions . ^ =/ or, putting * 2 + ,r x = ?., rHE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 261 The integrals of (3) and (4) are respectively The integ- __ _ _ rals of these l2rt f develop- - . / + B cos J^ ./+,? + f- and menta - v = . -- -+ C/ + D\ whence To take a particular case, we will assume that the A particu- action of the force /"begins at /== 0, and that at this the exam- time that is, the initial positions are given and the initial velocities are = 0. The constants A, B, C, D being eliminated by these conditions, we get / (5) J , l= ^ (6) . 3 ^_. 2 > (7) J r s _ Jfl =_ 262 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The inform- We see from (<\ and (6) that the two masses, in addi- ation which . . r wy , v y , _ . . . . 1P . the result- tion to a uniformly accelerated motion with half the dons give acceleration that the force f would impart to one of this exam- these masses alone, execute an oscillatory motion sym- metrical with respect to their centre of gravity. The duration of this oscillatory motion, T=2 ft'i/m/ip, is smaller in proportion as the force that is awakened in the same mass-displacement is greater (if our attention is directed to two particles of the same body, in pro- portion as the body is harder). The amplitude of os- cillation of the oscillatory motion //2/ likewise de- creases with the magnitude p of the force of displace- ment generated. Equation (7) exhibits the periodic change of distance of the two masses during their pro- gressive motion. The motion of an elastic body might in such case be characterised as vermicular. With hard bodies, however, the number of the oscillations is so great and their excursions so small that they remain unnoticed, and may be left out of account. The oscil- latory motion, furthermore, vanishes, either gradually through the effect of some resistance, or when the two masses, at the moment the force /begins to act, are a distance a -f-//2/ apart and have equal initial veloci- ties. The distance a + //2/ that the masses are apart after the vanishing of their vibratory motion, is//2/ greater than the distance of equilibrium a. A tension j, namely, is set up by the action of/, by which the acceleration of the foremost mass is reduced to one- half whilst that of the mass following is increased by the same amount. In this, then, agreeably to our as- This in- sumption, py/m //2 m or y =flip. As we see, it is formation . - .. _ ... , is exhaus- in our power to determine the minutest details of a phenomenon of this character by the Newtonian prin- ciples. The investigation becomes (mathematically, THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 263 yet not in point of principle) more complicated when we conceive a body divided up into a great number of small parts that cohere by elasticity. Here also in the case of sufficient hardness the vibrations may be neg- lected. Bodies in which we purposely regard the mu- tual displacement of the parts as evanescent, are called rigid bodies. 4. We will now consider a case that exhibits the The deduc- 7 r 7 T*T - - i *JT tionof the schema of a lever. We imagine the masses M, m,, m laws of the . . lever by arranged in a triangle and joined by elastic connec- Newton's tions. Every alteration of the sides, and consequently prmcip also every alteration of the angles, gives rise to accel- erations, as the result of which the triangle endeavors to assume its previous form and size. By the aid of the Newtonian principles we can deduce from such a schema the laws of the lever, and at the same time feel that the form of the deduction, although it may be more complicated, still remains admissible when we pass from a schematic lever composed of three masses to the case of a real lever. The mass M we assume either to be in itself very large or conceive it joined by powerful elastic forces to other very large masses (the earth for instance). M then represents an immovable fulcrum. Let m^j now, receive from the action of some ex- The ternal force an acceleration /perpendicular to the line deduction of junction Mm 2 = c [- d. Immediately a stretching of the lines m l m^ = b and m^M=a is produced, and in the directions in question there are respectively set up the accelerations, as yet undetermined, s and ff, of which the components s(e/fy and a(e/a) are directed j<5 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECII IN1CS. oppositely to the acceleration/ Here e is the altitude of the triangle ?n^m 2 M. The mass m 2 receives the acceleration s', which resolves itself into the two com- ponents s'(d/&) in the direction of M and s(ejb) par- allel to f. The former of these determines a slight ap- proach of ;// 2 to M. The accelerations produced in M by the reactions of m 1 and m 2 , owing to its great mass, are imperceptible. We purposely neglect, therefore, the motion of M. The deduc- The mass m 19 accordingly, receives the accelera- iSe'dby tion / s(ejb) ff(e/a) 9 whilst the 'mass m 2 suffers ratfono'f ~ the parallel acceleration s'(e/&). Between s and a a ions. era simple relation obtains. If, by supposition, we have a very rigid connection, the triangle is only impercept- ibly distorted. The components of s and a perpendicular to / destroy each other. For if this were at any one moment not the case, the greater component would produce a further distortion, which would immediately counteract its excess. The resultant of s and is therefore directly contrary to/ and consequently, as is readily obvious, & (c/a) = j (<//). Between s and /, further, subsists the familiar relation m i s~m 2 s f or s = s'(m 2 lm^). Altogether m 2 and /;/ 1 receive re- spectively the accelerations s'(c/&) and / ^'(V^) C^ 2 A z i)(^"T" dJ), or, introducing in the place of the variable value s'(e/U) the designation q>, the accelera- tions <p and/ <p(p l %l m \) (c + die). On die pre- At the commencement of the distortion, the accel- ceding sup- . . . ...... positions eration of m J3 owing to the increase of <z?, diminishes, the laws for ... . . Tr , the rotation whilst that of m* increases. If we make the altitude e of the lever .... .. . ... are easily of the triangle very small, our reasoning still remains applicable. In this case, however, a becomes = c = r^ and a-\-b = c-\-d=r 2 . We see, moreover, that the distortion must continue, <p increase, and the accelera- THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 265 tion of m^ diminish until the stage is reached at which the accelerations of m^ and m 2 bear to each other the proportion of r : to r 2 . This is equivalent to a rotation of the whole triangle (without further distortion) about M, which mass by reason of the vanishing accelera- tions is at rest. As soon as rotation sets in, the rea- son for further alterations of <p ceases. In such a case ; consequently, cp = --? J / cp 2. -2 J. or (p = r 2 ^-p 1 --- "o . ; "i I m i r i> * m i r i" ~r M 2 r $~ For the angular acceleration ^ of the lever we get Nothing prevents us from entering still more into Discussion ^ r fe of the char- the details of this case and determining the distortions acter of the preceding and vibrations of the parts with respect to each other, result. With sufficiently rigid connections, however, these de- tails may be neglected. It will be perceived that we have arrived, by the employment of the Newtonian prin- ciples, at the same result to which the Huygenian view also would have led us. This will not appear strange to us if we bear in mind that the two views are in every re- spect equivalent, and merely start from different aspects of the same subject-matter. If we had pursued the Huygenian method, we should have arrived more speedily at our goal but with less insight into the de- tails of the phenomenon. We should have employed the work done in some displacement of m^ to deter- mine the vires viva of m l and m 2 , wherein we should have assumed that the velocities in question # 1? z' 2 maintained the ratio z^/z^ r iAV ^^ e exampl 6 here treated is very well adapted to illustrate what such an equation of condition means. The equation 266 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. simply asserts, that on the slightest deviations of v^/v^ from r : /r 2 powerful forces are set in action which in point of fact prevent all further deviation. The bodies obey of course, not the equations, but the forces. A simple 5. We obtain a very obvious case if we put in the case of the . , - ..--,. same exam- example just treated ^ 1 =w 2 =;w and # #(Fig. P e ' I 47)- The dynamical state of the system ceases to change when cp = 2 (/ 2 < Fig. 147. that is, when the accel- erations of the masses at the base and the ver- tex are given by 2//5 and //5* At the com- mencement of the dis- The equi- librium of the lever deduced from the same con- siderations. tortion (p increases, and simultaneously the accelera- tion of the mass at the vertex is decreased by double that amount, until the proportion subsists between the two of 2 : i. We have yet to consider the case of equilibrium of a schematic lever, consisting (Fig. 148) of three masses ;;z 13 ;;/ 2 , and M 9 of which the last is again supposed to be very large or to be elastically connected with very large masses. We imagine two equal and oppo- site forces s, s applied to m and m^ in the direction m^m^, or, what is the same thing, accelerations im- pressed inversely proportional to the masses m lf m 2 . The stretching of the connection m^ m 2 also generates THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 267 accelerations inversely proportional to the masses ;;; 1? m 2 , which neutralise the first ones and produce equi- librium. Similarly, along m 1 M imagine the equal and contrary forces /, / operative ; and along m 2 M the forces u, u. In this case also equilibrium obtains. If M be elastically connected with masses sufficiently large, u and t need not be applied, inasmuch as the last-named forces are spontaneously evoked the moment the distortion begins, and always balance the forces opposed to them. Equilibrium subsists, accord- ingly, for the two equal and opposite forces s, j as well as for the wholly arbitrary forces t, u. As a matter of fact s, s destroy each other and t, u pass through the fixed mass M, that is, are destroyed on distortion setting in. The condition of equilibrium readily reduces itself The reduc- tion of the to the common form when we reflect that the mo- preceding . -i T, f -, case to the ments of t and u, forces passing through M, are with common respect to M zero, while the moments of s and s are equal and opposite. If we compound / and s to p, and u and s to q> then, by Varignon's geometrical principle of the parallelogram, the moment of/ is equal to the sum of the moments of s and /, and the moment of q is equal to the sum of the moments of u and j. The moments of/ and q are therefore equal and opposite. Consequently, any two forces / and q will be in equi- librium if they produce in the direction m^ m 2 equal and opposite components, by which condition the equal- ity of the moments with respect to M is posited. That then the resultant of / and q also passes through M, is likewise obvious, for s and s destroy each other and t and u pass through M. 6. The Newtonian point of view, as the example just developed shows us, includes that of Varignon. 268 THE SCIENCE OF Newton's We were right, therefore, when we characterised the point of .._... . i i view in- statics of Vangnon as a dynamical statics, which, start- varignon's. ing from the fundamental ideas of modern dynamics, voluntarily restricts itself to the investigation of cases of equilibrium. Only in the statics of Varignon, owing to its abstract form, the significance of many opera- tions, as for example that of the translation of the forces in their own directions, is not so distinctly ex- hibited as in the instance just treated. The econ- The considerations here developed will convince, omy and ii> T 1 wealth of us that we can dispose by the Newtonian principles theNewton- . , . , . 1 , . - , . , ian ideas, of every phenomenon of a mechanical kind which may arise, provided we only take the pains to enter far enough into details. We literally see through the cases of equilibrium and motion which here occur, and be- hold the masses actually impressed with the accelera- tions they determine in one another. It is the same grand fact, which we recognise in the most various phenomena, or at least can recognise there if we make a point of so doing. Thus a unity, homogeneity, and economy of thought were produced, and a new and wide domain of physical conception opened which before Newton's time was unattainable.. The New- Mechanics, however, is not altogether an end in it- toman and .... the modern, self it has also problems to solve that touch the needs methods, of practical life and affect the furtherance of other sci- ences. Those problems are now for the most part ad- vantageously solved by other methods than the New- tonian, methods whose equivalence to that has already been demonstrated. It would, therefore, be mere im- practical pedantry to contemn all other advantages and insist upon always going back to the elementary New- tonian ideas. It is sufficient to have once convinced ourselves that this is always possible. Yet the New- TUE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 269 tonian conceptions are certainly the most satisfactory and the most lucid ; 'and Poinsot shows a noble sense of scientific clearness and simplicity in making these conceptions the sole foundation of the science. rr. THE FORMULAE AND UNITS OF MECHANICS. 1. All the important formulae of modern mechanics History of were- discovered and employed in the period of Galileo i and * . units of - and Newton. The particular designations, which, mechanics. owing to the frequency of their use, it was found con- venient to give them, were for the most part not fixed upon until long afterwards. The systematical mechan- ical units were not introduced until later still. Indeed, the last named improvement, cannot be regarded as having yet reached its completion. 2. Let s denote the distance, / the time, v the in- The orig- stantaneous velocity, and <p the acceleration of a uni- tionso?* formly accelerated motion. From the researches ofnuygens" Galileo and Huygens, we derive the following equa- tions : v = cpt Multiplying throughout by the mass m, these equa- The intro- duction tions give the following : of "mas and k 'mov- m v = m (p t in S force." mv* m<ps=^ r . 270 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS Final form and, denoting the moving force m cp by the letter p, we of the fun- damental obtain equations. mv=.pt pt* ms= <-=-- Equations (i) ail contain the quantity cp ; and each contains in addition two of the quantities s } t, v, as exhibited in the following table : f*,/ q> \ s, t ( s, v Equations (2) contain the quantities m, p, s, ?, v ; each containing ?;/, p and in addition to m, p two of the three quantities s, t, v, according to the following table : s, v The scope Questions concerning motions due to constant forces and appli- .,, ,. >. N . . . , T rr cation of are answered by equations (2) m great variety. If, for ti e ns. equa example, we want to know the velocity v that a mass m acquires in the time / through the action of a force /, the first equation gives v =ft/m. If, on the other hand, the time be sought during which a mass m with the velocity v can move in opposition to a force p, the same equation gives us t = m v/p. Again, if we in- quire after the distance through which m will move with velocity v in opposition to the force p, the third equa- tion gives s = mv 2 /2p. The two last questions illus- trate, also, the futility of the Descartes-Leibnitzian dis- pute concerning the measure of force of a body in mo- tion. The use of these equations greatly contributes THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 271 to confidence in dealing with mechanical ideas. Sup- pose, for instance, we put to ourselves, the question, what force f will impart to a given mass m the velocity v ; we readily see that between ;;/, p, and v alone, no equation exists, so that either s or / must be supplied, and consequently the question is an indeterminate one. We soon learn to recognise and avoid indeterminate cases of this kind. The distance that a mass ;;/ acted on by the force / describes in the time /, if moving with the initial velocity 0, is found by the second equa- tion s =pt* Jim. 3. Several of the formulas in the above-discussed The names equations have received particular names. The force formula? of of a moving body was spoken of by Galileo, who al- tions have ternately calls it "momentum," "impulse," and "en- ergy. " He regards this momentum as proportional to the product of the mass (or rather the weight, for Gali- leo had no clear idea of mass, and for that matter no more had Descartes, nor even Leibnitz) into the velo- city of the body. Descartes accepted this view. He put the force of a moving body = my, called it quantity of motion, and maintained that the sum-total of the quan- tity of motion in the universe remained constant, so that when one body lost momentum the loss was compen- sated for by an increase of momentum in other bodies. Newton also employed the designation "quantity of motion " for m v, and this name has been retained to the Momen- -i t-i tum an< ^ present day. [But momentum is the more usual term.] impulse. For the second member of the first equation, viz. ft, Belanger, proposed, as late as 1847, the name impulse.* The expressions of the second equation have received * See, also, Maxwell, Matter and Motion^ American edition, page 72. But this word is commonly used In a different sense, namely, as " the limit of a force which is infinitely great but acts only during an Infinitely short time." See Routh, Rigid Dynamics, Part I, pages 65-66. Trans. 272 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. f is -awa no particular designations. Leibnitz (1695) called the and work. . . , -, - i . . _ . . expression mv* of the third equation vis viva or living force, and he regarded it, in opposition to Descartes, as the true measure of the force of a body in motion, calling the pressure of a body at rest vis mortua, or dead force. Coriolis found it more appropriate to give the term \mv* the name vis viva. To avoid confusion, Belanger proposed to call mv 2 living force and fynv* living power [now commonly called in English kinetic energy]. For ps Coriolis employed the name work. Poncelet confirmed this usage, and adopted the kilo- gramme-metre (that is, a force equal to the weight of a kilogramme acting through the distance of a metre) as the unit of 'work. The history A. Concerning the historical details of the origin of of the ideas ^ ... . quantity of these notions "quantity of motion" and "vis viva." motion and vis viva, a glance may now be cast at the ideas which led Des- cartes and Leibnitz to their opinions. In his Principia Philosophic, published in 1644, II, 36, DESCARTES ex- pressed himself as follows : " Now that the nature of motion has been examined, "we must consider its cause, which maybe conceived "in two senses : first, as a universal, original cause " the general cause of all the motion in the world ; and "second, as a special cause, from which the individual " parts of matter receive motion which before they did "not have. As to the universal cause, it can rnani- "festly be none other than God, who in the beginning " created matter with its motion and rest, and who now " preserves, by his simple ordinary concurrence, on the "whole, the same amount of motion and rest as he "originally created. For though motion is only a con- "dition of moving matter, there yet exists in matter "a definite quantity of it, which in the world at large THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 273 " never increases or diminishes, although in single por- Passage "tions it changes; namely, in this way, that we must cartes' s ts " " assume, in the case of the motion of apiece of matter rinc * * a "which is moving twice as fast as another piece, but in " quantity is only one half of it, that there is the same " amount of motion in both, and that in the proportion " as the motion of one part grows less, in the same pro- " portion must the motion of another, equally large "part grow greater. We recognise it, moreover, as "a perfection of God, that He is not only in Himself "unchangeable, but that also his modes of operation " are most rigorous and constant ; so that, with the ex- "ception of the changes which indubitable experience " or divine revelation offer, and which happen, as our "faith or judgment show, without any change in the "Creator, we are not permitted to assume any others ' { in his works lest inconstancy be in any way pre- dicated of Him. Therefore, it is wholly rational to "assume that God, since in the creation of matter he- "imparted different motions to its parts, and preserves "all matter in the same way and conditions in which "he created it, so he similar \y preserves in it the same "quantity of motion." (See Appendix, XXIII. , p. 574.) The merit of having first sought after a more uni- ^|^^ versal and more fruitful point of view in mechanics, of Descar- Jr f tes's phys- cannot be denied Descartes. This is the peculiar task ! cal inqmr- of the philosopher, and it is an activity which con- stantly exerts a fruitful and stimulating influence on physical science. Descartes, however, was infected with all the usual errors of the philosopher. He places absolute confi- dence in his own ideas. He never troubles himself to put them to experiential test. On the contrary, a min- imum of experience always suffices him for a maximum 274 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. of inference. Added to this, is the indistinctness of his conceptions. Descartes did not possess a clear idea of mass. It is hardly allowable to say that Des- cartes defined mv as momentum, although Descartes's scientific successors, feeling the need of more definite notions., adopted this conception. Descartes's greatest error, however, and the one that vitiates all his phys- ical inquiries, is this, that many propositions appear to him self-evident a priori concerning the truth of which experience alone can decide. Thus, in the two paragraphs following that cited above (37-39) it is asserted as a self-evident proposition that a body pre- serves unchanged its velocity and direction. The ex- periences cited in 38 should have been employed, not as a confirmation of an a priori law of inertia, but as a foundation on which this law in an empirical sense should be based. Leibnitz Descartes's view was attacked by LEIBNITZ (1686) on quantity . ... of motion, m the Ada Eruditorum, in a little treatise bearing the title : " A short Demonstration of a Remarkable Error of Descartes and Others, Concerning the Natural Law by which they think that the Creator always preserves the same Quantity of Motion ; by which, however, the Science of Mechanics is totally perverted." In machines in equilibrium, Leibnitz remarks, the loads are inversely proportional to the velocities of dis- placement ; and in this way the idea arose that the product of a body (" corpus," " moles ") into its velocity is the measure of force. This product Descartes re- garded as a constant quantity. Leibnitz's opinion, however, is, that this measure of force is only acci- dentally the correct measure, in the case of the ma- chines. The true measure of force is different, and must be determined by the method which Galileo and THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 275 Huygens pursued. Every body rises by virtue of the Leibnitz on 1 , . . , - . - .. the meas- velocity acquired in its descent to a height exactly urc of force equal to that from which it fell. If, therefore, we as- sume, that the same " force 5 ' is requisite to raise a body m a height 4^ as to raise a body 4/0 a height //, we must, since we know that in the first case the ve- locity acquired in descent is but twice as great as in the second, regard the product of a "body" into the s quart of its velocity as the measure of force. In a subsequent treatise (1695), Leibnitz reverts to this subject. He here makes a distinction between simple pressure (vis mortud) and the force of a moving body (pis viva}, which latter is made up of the sum of the pressure-impulses. These impulses produce, in- deed, an " impetus " (mz^ 3 but the impetus produced is not the true measure of force ; this, since the cause must be equivalent to the effect, is (in conformity with the preceding considerations) determined by mv 2 . Leibnitz remarks further that the possibility of per- petual motion is excluded only by the acceptance of his measure of force. Leibnitz, no more than Descartes, possessed a gen- The idea of mass in uine concept of mass. Where the necessity of such Leibnitz's an idea occurs, he speaks of a body (corpus}^ of a load (nwles} 9 of different-sized bodies of the same specific gravity, and so forth. Only in the second treatise, and there only once, does the expression "massa " occur, in all probability borrowed from Newton. Still, to de- rive any definite results from Leibnitz's theory, we must associate with his expressions the notion of mass, as his successors actually did. As to the rest, Leibnitz's procedure is much more in accordance with the meth- ods of science than Descartes's. Two things, however, are confounded : the question of the measure of force 276 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. in a sense, and the question of the constancy of the sums 2m v and and Leib- ~2> tn v~ . The two have in reality nothing to do with each right, each other. With regard to the first question, we now know that both the Cartesian and the Leibnitzian meas- ure of force, or, rather, the measure of the effective- ness of a body in motion, have, each in a different sense, their justification. Neither measure, however, as Leibnitz himself correctly remarked, is to be con- founded with the common, Newtonian, measure of force. Tbedis- With regard to the second question, the later in- suifof^mfs 6 -" vestigations of Newton really proved that tor free ma- standings. terial systems not acted on by external forces the Car- tesian sum 2mv is a constant ; and the investigations of Huygens showed that also the sum Smv 2 is a con- stant, provided work performed by forces does not alter it. The dispute raised by Leibnitz rested, therefore, on various misunderstandings. It lasted fifty-seven years, till the appearance of D'Alembert's Traite de dynamiqiiC) in 1743. To the theological ideas of Des- cartes and Leibnitz, we shall revert in another place. Theappii- 5. The three equations above discussed, though the l funda- they are only applicable to rectilinear motions produced equations by constant forces, may yet be considered thefunda- forces? e mental equations of mechanics. If the motion be recti- linear but the force variable, these equations pass by a slight, almost self-evident, modification into others, which we shall here only briefly indicate, since mathe- matical developments in the present treatise are wholly subsidiary. From the first equation we get for variable forces m v = I p dt -\- C } where / is the variable force, dt the time-element of the action, \pdt the sum of all the THE EXTENSION' OF THE PRINCIPLES. 277 products p . dt from the beginning to the end of the action, and C a constant quantity denoting the value of m v before the force begins to act. The second equa- tion passes in like manner into the forms s= I dt I df -\-Ct-\-D> with two so-called constants of integration, The third equation must be replaced by Curvilinear motion may always be conceived as the product of the simultaneous combination of three rec- tilinear motions, best taken in three mutually perpen- dicular directions. Also for the components of the mo- tion of this very general case, the above-given equa- tions retain their significance. 6. The mathematical processes of addition, sub- The units of . . ... ... . 1 mechanics. traction, and equating possess intelligible meaning only when applied to quantities of the same kind. We can- not add or equate masses and times, or masses and velocities, but only masses and masses, and so on. When, therefore, we have a mechanical equation, the question immediately presents itself whether the mem- bers of the equation are quantities of the same kind., that is, whether they can be measured by the same unit, or whether, as we usually say, the equation is homo- geneous. The units of the quantities of mechanics will form, therefore, the next subject of our investigations. The choice of units, which are, as we know, quan- tities of the same kind as those they serve to measure^ is in many cases arbitrary. Thus, an arbitrary mass is employed as the unit of mass, an arbitrary length is employed as the unit of length, an arbitrary time as the unit of time. The mass and the length employed as units can be preserved ; the time can be reproduced 278 THK SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Aibitrary by pendulum-experiments and astronomical observa- units, and . _. . ,.- f . r derived or tions. But units like a unit of velocity, or a unit of unitL" acceleration, cannot be preserved, and are much more difficult to reproduce. These quantities are conse- quently so connected with the arbitrary fundamental units, mass, length, and time, that they can be easily and at once derived from them. Units of this class are called derived or absolute units. This latter desig- nation is due to GAUSS, who first derived the magnetic units from the mechanical, and thus created the possi- bility of a universal comparison of magnetic measure- ments. The name, therefore, is of historical origin. Thede- As unit of velocity we might choose the velocity rived units ....... ... n ni of velocity, with which, say, q units of length are travelled over in tion, and unit of time. But if we did this, we could not express the relation between the time /, the distance s, and the velocity v by the usual simple formula s = vt, but should have to substitute for it s = q.vt. If, however, we define the unit of velocity as* the velocity with which the unit of length is travelled over in unit of time, we may retain the form $ = vt. Among the de- rived units the simplest possible relations are made to obtain. Thus, as the unit of area and the unit of vol- ume, the square and cube of the unit of length are al- ways employed. According to this, we assume then, that by unit ve- locity unit length is described in unit time, that by unit acceleration unit velocity is gained in unit time, that by unit force unit acceleration is imparted to unit mass, and so on. The derived units depend on the arbitrary funda- mental units ; they are functions of them. The func- tion which corresponds to a given derived unit is called its dimensions. The theory of dimensions was laid down THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 279 by FOURIER, in 1822, in his Theory of Heat. Thus, if /The theory -. ofdiraen- denote a length, / a time, and m a mass, the dimen- sions of a velocity, for instance, are I It or // 1 . After this explanation, the following table will be readily un- derstood : NAMES SYMBOLS DIMENSIONS Velocity ........... v 7/" 1 Acceleration ......... cp lt~* Force ............ / mlt~* Momentum ......... mv Impulse ........... pt Work ............ ps Vis viva Moment of inertia ...... & ml 2 Statical moment ....... D ml*t~ 2 This table shows at once that the above-discussed equa- tions are homogeneous, that is, contain only members of the same kind. Every new expression in mechanics might be investigated in the same manner. 7. The knowledge of the dimensions of a quantity The usefui- is also important for another reason. Namely, if the theory of e value of a quantity is known for one set of fundamental sions?" units and we wish to pass to another set, the value of the quantity in the new units can be easily found from the dimensions. The dimensions of an acceleration, which has, say, the numerical value <p, are //~ 2 . If we pass to a unit of length A. times greater and to a unit of time r times greater, then a number \ times smaller must take the place of / in the expression //~ 2 , and a number r times smaller the place of /. The numerical value of the same acceleration referred to the new units will consequently be (r 2 A) (p. If we 2 8o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, take the metre as our unit of length, and the second as our unit of time, the acceleration of a falling body for example is 9-81, or as it is customary to write it, in- dicating at once the dimensions and the fundamental measures : 9-81 (metre/second 2 ). If we pass now to the kilometre as our unit of length (A. = 1000), and to the minute as our unit of time (r 60), the value of the same acceleration of descent is (60 X 60/1000)9-81, or 35*316 (kilometre/minute 2 ). The inter- [8. The following statement of the mechanical units national L . . . Bureau of at present in use m the United States and ureat Britain and Meas- is substituted for the statement by Professor Mach of the units formerly in use on the continent of Europe. All the civilised governments have united in establish- ing an International Bureau of Weights and Measures in the Pavilion de Breteuil, in the Pare of St. Cloud, at Sevres, near Paris. In some countries, the stan- dards emanating from this office are exclusively legal ; in others, as the United States and Great Britain, they are optional in contracts, and are usual with physi- cists. These standards are a standard of length and a standard of mass (not weight.} The inter- The unit of length is the International Metre, which unitof is defined as the distance at the melting point of ice eng * between the centres of two lines engraved upon the polished surface of a platiniridium bar, of a nearly X-shaped section, called the International Prototype Metre. Copies of this, called National Prototype Me- tres, are distributed to the different governments. The international metre is authoritatively declared to be identical with the former French metre, used until the adoption of the international standard ; and it is im- possible to ascertain a*iy error in this statement, be- EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 281 cause of doubt as to the length of the old metre, owing partly to the imperfections of the standard, and partly to obstacles now intentionally put in the way of such ascertainment. The French metre was defined as the distance, at the melting-point of ice, between the ends of a platinum bar, called the metre des archives. It was against the law to touch the ends, which made it difficult to ascertain the distance between them. Nevertheless, there was a strong suspicion they had been dented. The metre des archives was intended to be one ten-millionth of a quadrant of a terrestrial meridian. In point of fact such a quadrant is, ac- cording to Clarke, 32814820 feet, which is 10002015 metres. The international unit of mass is the kilogramme. Theinter- 1-1 r - 1-1 ,,...,. national which is the mass of a certain cylinder of platimndium unit of mass. called the International Prototype Kilogramme. Each government has copies of it called National Prototype Kilogrammes. This mass was" intended to be identical with the former French kilogramme, which was defined as the mass of a certain platinum cylinder called the kilogramme des archives. The platinum being" somewhat spongy contained a variable amount of occluded gases, and had perhaps suffered some abrasion. The kilo- gramme is 1000 grammes ; and a gramme was intended to be the mass of a cubic centimetre of water at its temperature of maximum density, about 3*93 C. It is not known with a high degree of precision how nearly this is so, owing to the difficulty of the determination. The regular British unit of length is the Imperial The British Yard which is the distance at 62 F. between the cen- length. tres of two lines engraved on gold plugs inserted in a bronze bar usually kept walled up in the Houses of Parliament in Westminster". These lines are cut rela- js.j TUE SCIEXCE OF MECHANICS. 'cn.iitinii, lively deep, and the burr is rubbed off and the surface f ! nct : uif" rendered mat, by rubbing with charcoal. The centre nflf whii of such a line can easily be displaced by rubbing ; which P"? :ncav " is probably not true of the lines on the Prototype me- tres. The temperature is, by law, ascertained by a mercurial thermometer ; but it was not known, at the time of the construction of the standard, that such thermometers may give quite different readings, ac- cording to the mode of their manufacture. The quality of glass makes considerable difference, and the mode of determining the fixed points makes still more. The best way of marking these points is first to expose the thermometer for several hours to wet aqueous vapor at a known pressure, and mark on its stem the height of the column of mercury. The thermometer is then brought down to the temperature of melting ice, as rapidly as possible, and is immersed in pounded ice which is melting and from which the water is not allowed to drain off. The mercury being watched with a magnifying glass is seen to fall, to come to rest, and to commence to rise, owing to the lagging contraction of the glass. Its lowest point is marked on the stem. The interval between the two marks is then divided into equal degrees. When such a ther- mometer is used, it is kept at the temperature to be determined for as long a time as possible, and imme- diately after is cooled as rapidly as it is safe to cool it, and its zero is redetermined. Thermometers, so made and treated, will give very constant indications. But the thermometers made at the Kew observatory, which are used for determining the temperature of the yard, are otherwise constructed. Namely the melting-point is determined first and the boiling-point afterwards ; and the thermometers are exposed to both tempera- THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 283 tures for many hours. The point which upon such a Relative thermometer will appear as 62 will really be consider- thelne'tre ably hotter (perhaps a third of a centigrade degree) than if its melting-point were marked in the other way. If this circumstance is not attended to in making com- parisons, there is danger of getting the yard too short- by perhaps one two-hundred-thousandth part. General Comstock finds the metre equal to 39*36985 inches. Several less trustworthy determinations give nearly the same value. This makes the inch 2 540014 centimetres. At the time the United States separated from Eng- The Ameri- r can unit of land, no precise standard of length was legal*; and length. none has ever been established. We are, therefore, without any precise legal yard ; but the United States office of weights and measures, in the absence of any legal authorisation, refers standards to the British Im- perial Yard. The regular British unit of mass is the Pound, de- The British fined as the mass of a certain platinum weight, called SSss? the Imperial Pound. This was intended to be so con- structed as to be equal to 7000 grains, each the 576oth part of a former Imperial Troy pound. This would be within 3 grains, perhaps closer, of the old avoirdupois pound. The British pound has been determined by Miller to be 0-4535926525 kilogramme ; that is the kilo- gramme is 2-204621249 pounds. At the time the United States separated from Great Britain, there were two incommensurable units of weight, the av air dzipois pound &.-&& the Troy pound. Con- gress has since established a standard Troy pound, which is kept in the Mint in Philadelphia. It was a copy of the old Imperial Troy pound which had been adopted in England after American independence. It * The so-called standard of 1758 had not been legalised. 2 S 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. TheAnvjri- Is a hollow brass weight of unknown volume ; and no ui!lUV* ' accurate comparisons of it with modern standards have ever been published. Its mass is, therefore, unknown. The mint ought by law to use this as the standard of gold and silver. In fact, they use weights furnished by the office of weights and measures, and no doubt derived from the British unit ; though the mint officers profess to compare these with the Troy pound of the United States, as well as they are able to do. The old avoirdupois pound, which is legal for most purposes, differed without much doubt quite appreciably from the British Imperial pound ; but as the Office of Weights and Measures has long been, without warrant of law, standardising pounds according to this latter, the legal avoirdupois pound has nearly disappeared from use of late years. The makers of weights could easily detect the change of practice of the Washington Office. Measures of capacity are not spoken of here, be- cause they are not used in mechanics. It may, how- ever, be well to mention that they are defined by the weight of water at a" given temperature which they measure. The unit of The universal unit of time is the mean solar day or its one 864ooth part, which is called a second. Side- real time is only employed by astronomers for special purposes. Whether the International or the British units are employed, there are two methods of measurement of mechanical quantities, the absolute and the gravitational. The absolute is so called because it is not relative to the acceleration of gravity at any station. This method was introduced by Gauss. The special absolute system, widely used by physi- cists in the United States and Great Britain, is called THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 285 the Centimetre-Gramine-Second system. In this sys- The abso- . . lute system tern, writing C for centimetre, G for gramme mass, of the j o t i United and b ior second, states and Great Brit- the unit of length Is C ; the unit of mass is G ; the unit of time is S ; the unit of velocity is C/S the unit of acceleration (which might be called a "galileo/' because Gali- leo Galilei first measured an accele- ration) is C/S 2 ; the unit of density is G/C 3 ; the unit of momentum is . G C/S ; the unit of force (called a dyne) is . . . G C/S 2 ; the unit of pressure (called one mil- lionth of an absolute atmosphere) is . . G/C S 2 ; the unit of energy (vis viva, or work, called an erg) is ^GC 2 /S 2 ; etc. The gravitational system of measurement of me- The Gravi- chanical quantities, takes the kilogramme or pound, or system, rather the attraction of these towards the earth, com- pounded with the centrifugal force,, which is the ac- celeration called gravity, and denoted by g, and is dif- ferent at different places, as the Unit of force, and the foot-pound or kilogramme-metre, being the amount of gravitational energy transformed in the descent of a pound through a foot or of a kilogramme through a metre, as the unit of energy. Two ways of reconciling these convenient units with the adherence to the usual standard of length naturally suggest themselves, namely, first, to use the pound weight or the kilogramme weight divided by g as the unit of mass, and, second, to adopt srfu THE SCIEXCE OF MECHANICS. such a unit of time as will make the acceleration of g, at an Initial station, unity. Thus, at Washington, the acceleration of gravity is 980 05 galileos. If, then, we take the centimetre as the unit of length, and the 0*031943 second as the unit of time, the acceleration of gravity will be i centimetre for such unit of time squared. The latter system would be for most pur- poses the more convenient ; but the former is the more familiar, oiupari- In either system, the formula p = mg is retained ; sonoi the . , - ,. , , , ,...' absolute but in the former g retains its absolute value, wjiile in tationai the latter it becomes unity for the initial station. In Paris, g is 980-96 galileos ; in Washington it is 980-05 galileos. Adopting the more familiar system, and taking Paris for the initial station, if the unit of force is a kilogramme's weight, the unit of length a centi- metre, and the unit of time a second, then the unit of mass will be 1/981-0 kilogramme, and the unit of energy will be a kilogramme-centimetre, or (1/2)- (1000/981-0) GC 2 /S 2 . Then, at Washington the gravity of a kilogramme will be, not i, as at Paris, but 980 -1/981 -0 = 0-99907 units or Paris kilogramme- weights. Consequently, to produce a force of one Paris kilogramme-weight we must allow Washington gravity to act upon 981 -0/980-1 = i -00092 kilogrammes.]* In mechanics/ as in some other branches of physics closely allied to it, our calculations involve but three fundamental quantities, quantities of space, quantities of time, and quantities of mass. This circumstance is a source of simplification and power in the science which should not be underestimated. * For some critical remarks on the preceding method of exposition, see Nature, in the issue for November 15, 1894. THE EXTENSION OP THE PRINCIPLES. 287 THE LAWS OF THE CONSERVATION OF MOMENTUM, OF THE CONSERVATION OF THE CENTRE OF GRAVITY, AND OF THE CONSERVATION OF AREAS. 1. Although Newton's principles are fully adequate Speciaiisa- . , , . , , , , , tion of the to deal with any mechanical problem that may arise, mechanical it is yet convenient to contrive for cases more frequently occurring, particular rules, which will enable us to treat problems of this kind by routine forms and to dis- pense with the minute discussion of them. Newton and his successors developed several such principles. Our first subject will be NEWTON'S doctrines concern- ing freely movable material systems. 2. If two free masses ;// and m 1 are subjected in Mutual ac- the direction of their line of junction to the action of masses, forces that proceed from other masses, then, in the in- terval of time /, the velocities v, if will be generated, and the equation (/ + /') t = m v + m'v' will subsist. This follows from the equations // = mv and /'/' = rn'if . The sum mv -\- m'v' is called the momentum of the system, and in its computation oppositely directed forces and velocities are regarded as having opposite signs. If, now, the masses m, m' in addition to being subjected to the action of the external forces /, f' are also acted upon by internal forces, that is by such as are mutually exerted by the masses on one another, these forces will, by Newton's third law, be equal and op- posite, ^, q. The sum of the impressed impulses is, then, (/+/' + q f) t = 0> + /') t, the same as before ; and, consequently, also, the total momentum of the system will be the same. The momentum of a 2SS THE SCIEXCE OF MECHANICS. system Is thus determined exclusively by externalioicces, that is, by forces which masses outside of the system exert on its parts. Law of the Imagine a number of free masses m, m', m". . . . tion^Mo- distributed in any manner in space and acted on by mcntum. , . , ,, , 1*1 i external forces /, /, / . . . . whose lines have any di- rections. These forces produce in the masses in the interval of time / the velocities v, v' 9 v". . . . Resolve all the forces in three directions x, }>, z at right angles to each other, and do the same with the velocities. The sum of the Impulses in the ^-direction will be equal to the momentum generated In the ^-direction ; and so with the rest. If we imagine additionally in action between the masses m, m', m". . . ., pairs of equal and opposite internal forces q, q, r, r, s, s, etc. , these forces, resolved, will also give in every direction pairs of equal and opposite components, and will con- sequently have on the sum-total of the impulses no in- fluence. Once more the momentum is exclusively de- termined by external forces. The law which states this fact is called the law of the conservation of momen- tum* Law of the 3. Another form of the same principle, which New- tionofthe ton likewise discovered, is called the law of the conser- Centre of ..... Gravity. vation of the centre of grav- M e in A and B (Fig. 149) two masses, zm Flg " 149 ' and m, in mutual action, say that of electrical repulsion ; their centre of gravity Is situated at S, where J5S 2 AS. The accelerations they impart to each other are oppositely directed and in the inverse proportion of the masses. If, then, in consequence of the mutual action, 2 m describes a dis- tance AD, m will necessarily describe a distance BC = THE EXTEXS10X OF THE PRIXCJPLRS. 289 The point S will still remain the position of the centre of gravity, as CS = zDS. Therefore, two masses cannot, by mutual action, displace their common centre of gravity. If our considerations involve several masses, dis- This law ., i . - i i >ii 1 applied to tributed in any way in space, the same .result will also systems of be found to hold good for this case. For as no two of the masses can displace their centre of gravity by mu- tual action, the centre of gravity of the system as a whole cannot be displaced by the mutual action of its parts. Imagine freely placed in space a system of masses /;/, ;;/', m" . . . . acted on by external forces of any kind. We refer the forces to a system of rectangular coordi- nates and call the coordinates respectively ,Y, y, s, x' 9 y, z', and so forth. The coordinates of the centre of gravity are then IS my '/ -- =%~T in which expressions #, y, z may change either by uni- form motion or by uniform acceleration or by any other law, according as the mass in question is acted on by no external force, by a constant external force, or by a variable external force. The centre of gravity will have in all these cases a different motion, and in the first may even be at rest. If now internal forces, acting be- tween every two masses, m' and /?/", come into play in the system, opposite displacements w', w" will thereby be produced in the direction of the lines of junction of the masses, such that, allowing for signs, m'w' + m r 'w" = 0. Also with respect to the components x^ and cc 2 of these displacements the equation m'x^ + m"x 2 = will hold. The internal forces consequently 290 THE SCJEXCE OF MECHANICS. produce In the expressions <?, 7;, 3 only such additions as mutually destroy each other. Consequently, the motion of the centre of gravity of a system is determined by external forces only. Acceiera- If ive wish to know the acceleration of the centre of centre ct gravity of the system, the accelerations of the system's , .-, , J , , Ti . , ,, , must be similarly treated, it cp, cp , cp . . . , de- note the accelerations of ;//, m', m". ... in any direc- tion, and cp the acceleration of the centre of gravity in the same direction, cp = 2mcp/^m, or putting the total mass 2w = M, cp = 2m <p/M. Accordingly, we obtain the acceleration of the centre of gravity of a system in any direction by taking the sum of all the forces in that direction and dividing the result by the total mass. The centre of gravity of a system moves exactly as if all the masses and all the forces of the system were concentrated at that centre. Just as a single mass can acquire no acceleration without the action of some external force, so the centre of gravity of a system can acquire no acceleration without the action of external forces. 4. A few examples may now be given in illustra- tion of the principle of the conservation of the centre of gravity. Movement Imagine an animal free in space. If the animal maHree in move in one direction a portion m of its mass, the re- space. m ainder of it J/will be moved in the opposite direction, always so that its centre of gravity retains its original position. If the animal draw back the mass m, the motion of M also will be reversed. The animal is un- able, without external supports or forces, to move itself from the spot which it occupies, or to alter motions im- pressed upon it from without. A lightly running vehicle A is placed on rails and THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 291 loaded with stones. A man stationed in the vehicle of a ve- . hicle, from casts out the stones one after another, m the same di- which .. 1-1 - r stones are rection. The vehicle, supposing the friction to be suf- cast. ficiently slight, will at once be set in motion in the op- posite direction. The centre of gravity of the S3 7 stem as a whole (of the vehicle + tne stones) will, so far as its motion is not destroyed by external obstacles, con- tinue to remain in its original spot. If the same man were to pick up the stones from without and place them in the vehicle, the vehicle in this case would also be set in motion ; but not to the same extent as before, as the following example will render evident. A projectile of mass m is thrown with a velocity v Motion of a , cannon and from a cannon of mass Jlf. In the reaction. JkT also re- its projec- 5 tile. ceives a velocity, V, such that, making allowance for the signs, MV -\- mv = 0. This explains the so-called recoil. The relation here is V= (injM^ v ; or, for equal velocities of flight, the recoil is less according as the mass of the cannon is greater than the mass of the projectile. If the work done by the powder be expressed by A, the vires viucz will be determined by the equation J/F" 2 /2 -|- mv*/2 = A ; and, the sum of the momenta being by the first-cited equation = 0, we readily obtain F= \/ Q.A m/M(M~\- m}. Consequently, neglecting the mass of the exploded powder, the recoil vanishes when the mass of the projectile vanishes. If the mass m were not expelled from the cannon but sucked into it, the recoil would take place in the opposite direc- tion. But it would have no time to make itself visible since before any perceptible distance had been trav- ersed, m would have reached the bottom of the bore. As soon, however, as -$/"and m are in rigid connection with each other, as soon, that is, as they are relatively at rest to each other, they must be absolutely at rest, 292 TIIK SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. for the centre of gravity of the system as a whole has no motion. For the same reason no considerable mo- tion can take place when the stones in the preceding example are taken into the vehicle, because on the establishment of rigid connections between the vehicle and the stones the opposite momenta generated are destroyed. A cannon sucking in a projectile would experience a perceptible recoil only if the sucked in projectile could fly through it. osciiia- Imagine a locomotive freely suspended in the air, body of a & or, what will subserve the same purpose, at rest with insufficient friction on the rails. By the law of the conservation of" the centre of gravity, as soon as the heavy masses of iron in connection with the piston- rods begin to oscillate, the body of the locomotive will be set in oscillation in a contrary direction a motion which may greatly disturb its uniform progress. To eliminate this oscillation, the motion of the masses of iron worked by the piston-rods must be so compensated for by the contrary motion of other masses that the centre of gravity of the system as a whole will remain in one position. In this way no motion of the body of the locomotive will take place. This is done by affix- ing masses of iron to the driving-wheels. illustration The facts of this case may be very prettily shown case. by Page's electromotor (Fig. 150). When the iron core in the bobbin AB is projected by the internal forces acting between bobbin and core to the right, the body of the motor, supposing it to rest on lightly movable wheels rr, will move to the left But if to a spoke of the fly-wheel R we affix an appropriate balance-weight a, which always moves in the contrary direction to the iron core, the sideward movement of the body of the motor may be made totally to vanish. THE EXTEXSIO.V OF THE PRINCIPLES, 293 Of the motion of the fragments oE a bursting bomb A bursting we know nothing. But it is plain, by the law of the conservation of the centre of gravity, that, making al- lowance for the resistance of the air and the obstacles the individual parts may meet, the centre of gravity of the system will continue after the bursting to describe the parabolic path of its original projection. 5. A law closely allied to the law of the centre of Law of the i -1 1 ,. , , - . , Conserva- gravity, and similarly applicable to free systems, is thetionof principle of the conservation of areas. Although Newton Fig. 150. had, so to say, this principle within his very grasp, it was nevertheless not enunciated until a long time after- wards by EULER, D'ARCY, and DANIEL BERNOULLI. Euler and Daniel Bernoulli discovered the law almost simultaneously (1746), on the occasion of treating a problem proposed by Euler concerning the motion of balls in rotatable tubes, being led to It by the consider- ation of the action and reaction of the balls and the tubes. D'Arcy (1747) started from Newton's Investiga- tions, and generalised the law of sectors which the latter had employed to explain Kepler's laws. 294 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Deduction of the law. Two masses ;;/, m' (Fig. 151) are in mutual action. jgy v - rtue O f this action the masses describe the dis- tances AJB, CD in the direction of their line of junction. Allowing for the signs, then, m . AB -f ;;/'. CD = 0. Drawing radii vectores to the moving masses from any point O, and regarding the areas described in opposite senses by the radii as having opposite signs, we further obtain m. OAB + m. OCD = 0. Which is to say, if two masses mutually act on each other, and radii vec- tores be drawn to these masses from any point, the sum of the areas described by the radii multiplied by the respec- tive masses Is = 0. If the masses are also acted on by external forces and as the effect of these the areas OAE and OCJF&re described, trie joint action of the internal and external forces, during any very small period of time, will produce the areas OA G and OCH. But it follows from Varignon's theorem that =m OAE + m'OCJ? + mOAB + m'OCD = mOAE + m'OCF; in other words, the sum of the products of the areas so de- scribed into the respective masses which compose a system is unaltered by the action of internal forces. If we have several masses, the same thing may be asserted, for every two masses, of the projection on any given plane of the motion. If we draw radii from THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 295 any point to the several masses, and project on any plane the areas the radii describe, the sum of the products of these areas into the respective masses will be independent of the action of internal forces. This is the law of the conservation of areas. If a single mass not acted on by forces is moving interpreta- i ? - - i , -, -. tionofthe uniformly forward in a straight line and we draw a law. radius vector to the mass from any point O, the area described by the radius increases proportionally to the time. The same law holds for 2m/, in cases in which several masses not acted on by forces are moving, where we signify by the summation the algebraic sum of all the products of the areas (/) into the moving masses a sum which we shall hereafter briefly refer to as the sum of the mass- areas. If internal forces come into play between the masses of the s} r stem, this relation will remain unaltered. It will still subsist, also, if external forces be applied whose lines of action pass through the jf-ar^v/ point O, as we know from the researches of Newton. If the mass be acted on by an external force, the area / described by its radius vector will increase in time by the law/" at* fa -j- bt + c, where a depends on the accelerative force, b on the initial velocity, and c on the initial position. The sum 2mf increases by the same law, where several masses are acted upon by external accelerative forces, provided these may be re- garded as constant, which for sufficiently small inter- vals of time is always the case. The law of areas in this case states that the internal forces of the system have no influence on the increase of the sum of the mass- areas. A free rigid body may be regarded as a system whose parts are maintained in their relative positions 296 THE SCIENCE OP MECHANICS. Uniform r<> by internal forces. The law of areas is applicable there- irelTigid* fore to this case also. A simple instance is afforded b d> * by the uniform rotation of a rigid body about an axis passing through its centre of gravity. If we call m a portion of its mass, r the distance of the portion from the axis, and a its angular velocity, the sum of the mass-areas produced in unit of time will be 2m (r/2) ra = (a/2) 2mr* 9 or, the product of the moment of inertia of the system into half its angular velocity. This product can be altered only by external forces. illustrative 6. A few examples may now be cited in illustration examples. r ,-t i of the law. If two rigid bodies K and K' are connected, and K is brought by the action of internal forces into rotation relatively to K' , immediately K' also will be set in ro- tation, in the opposite direction. The rotation of K generates a sum of mass-areas which, by the law, must be compensated for by the production of an equal, but opposite, sum by K f . Opposite This is very prettily exhibited by the electromotor the a wheei of Fig. 152. The fly- wheel of the motor is placed in a n freee1ec- f a horizon taF plane, and the motor thus attached to a tro-motor. ,-1 - 1-1-- r i ^ ATM vertical axis, on which it can freely turn. The wires conducting the current dip, in order to prevent their interference with the rotation, into two conaxial gutters of mercury fixed on the axis. The body of the motor (jST') is tied by a thread to the stand supporting the axis and the current is turned on. As soon as the fly- wheel (K} 9 viewed from above, begins to rotate in the direction of the hands of a watch, the string is drawn taut and the body of the motor exhibits the tendency to rotate in the opposite direction a rotation which im- mediately takes place when the thread is burnt away. The motor is, with respect to rotation about its THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 297 axis, a free system. The sum of the mass-areas gen- itsexpiana- erated, for the case of rest, is = 0. But the wheel of law. 3 the motor being set in rotation by the action of the in- ternal electro-magnetic forces, a sum of mass-areas is produced which, as the total sum must remain = 0, is compensated for by the rotation in the opposite direc- tion of the body of the motor. If an index be attached to the body of the motor and kept in a fixed position 2 gS THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. by an elastic spring, the rotation of the body of the motor cannot 'take place. Yet every acceleration of the wheel in the direction of the hands of a watch (pro- duced by a deeper immersion of the battery) causes the index to swerve in the opposite direction, and every retardation produces the contrary effect, A variation A beautiful but curious phenomenon presents itself phenome- 16 when the current to the motor is interrupted. Wheel non ' and motor continue at first their 'movements in oppo- site directions. But the effect of the friction of the axes soon becomes apparent and the parts gradually assume with respect to each other relative rest. The motion of the body of the motor is seen to dimmish ; for a moment it ceases ; and, finally, when the state of relative rest is reached, it is reversed and assumes the direction of the original motion of the wheel. The whole motor now rotates in the direction the wheel did at the start. The explanation of the phenomenon is obvious. The motor is not a perfectly free system. It is impeded by the friction of the axes. In a perfectly free system the sum of the mass-areas, the moment the parts re-entered the state of relative rest, would again necessarily be = 0. But in the present instance, an external force is introduced the friction of the axes. The friction on the axis of the wheel diminishes the mass-areas generated by the wheel and body of the motor alike. But the friction on the axis of the body of the motor only diminishes the sum of the mass- areas generated by the body. The wheel retains, thus, an excess of mass-area, which when the parts are rela- tively at rest is rendered apparent in the motion of the entire motor. The phenomenon subsequent to the in- terruption of the current supplies us with a model of what according to the hypothesis of astronomers has THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 299 taken place on the moon. The tidal wave created by its niustra- the earth has reduced to such an extent by friction the case of the velocity of rotation of the moon that the lunar day has grown to a month. The fly-wheel represents the fluid mass moved by the tide. Another example of this law is furnished by reac- Reaction- t ion-wheels. If air or gas be emitted from the wheel (Fig. 1530) in the direction of the short arrows, the whole wheel will be set in rotation in the direction of the large arrow. In Fig. 153^, another simple reac- tion-wheel is represented. A brass tube rr plugged at both ends and appropriately perforated, is placed on a second brass tube R, supplied with a thin steel pivot through which air can be blown ; the air escapes at the apertures O, O r . It might be supposed that sucking on the reaction- variation . . ofthephe- wheels would produce the opposite motion to that re-nomenaof suiting from blowing. Yet this does not usually take wheels, place, and the reason is obvious. The air that is sucked into the spokes of the wheel must take part immediately in the motion of the wheel, must enter the condition of relative rest with respect to the wheel ; and when the system is completely at rest, the sum of its mass-areas must be 0. Generally, no perceptible rotation takes place on the sucking in of the air. The circumstances are similar to those of the recoil of a cannon which sucks in a projectile. If, therefore, an elastic ball, which has but one escape-tube, be attached to the reaction-wheel, in the manner represented in Fig. 1530, and be alternately squeezed so that the same quantity of air is by turns blown out and sucked in,, the wheel will continue rapidly to revolve in the same direction as it did in the case in which we blew into it. This is partly due to the fact that the air 300 TJfK SCUK+VCE OS' MECHANICS. Fig. 153 b. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 301 sucked into the spokes must participate in the motion Expiana- of the latter and therefore can produce no reactional variations, rotation, but it also partly results from the difference of the motion which the air outside the tube assumes in the two cases. In blowing, the air flows out in jets, and performs rotations. In sucking, the air comes in from all sides, and has no distinct rotation. The correctness of this view is easily demonstrated. If we perforate the bottom of a hollow cylinder, a closed band-box for instance, and place the cylinder on the steel pivot of the tube R, after the side has, been slit and bent in the manner indicated in Fig. 154, the box will turn in the direction of the long arrow when blown into and in the Fig. 154. direction of the short arrow when sucked on. The air, here, on entering the cylinder, can continue its rotation unimpeded) and this motion is accordingly compensated for by a rotation in the opposite direction. 7. The following case also exhibits similar condi- Reaction- tions. Imagine a tube (Fig. 155 a) which, running straight from a to b, turns at right angles to itself at the latter point, passes to *r, describes the circle cdef, whose plane is at right angles to ab, and whose cen- tre is at b, then proceeds from f to g, and, finally, continuing the straight line ab, runs from g to h. The entire tube is free to turn on an axis ah. If we pour into this tube, in the manner in- dicated in Fig. 155^, a liquid, which flows in the di- rection cdef, the tube will immediately begin to turn 302 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. In the direction fedc. This impulse, however, ceases, the moment the liquid reaches the point/ and flowing out into the radius/^- is obliged to join in the motion of the latter. By the use of a constant stream of liquid, therefore, the rotation of the tube may soon be stopped. But if the stream be interrupted, the fluid, in flowing off through the radius fg, will impart to the tube a motional impulse in the direction of its own motion, cdef, and the tube will turn in this di- rection. All these phe- nomena are easily ex- plained by the law of areas. The trade-winds, the deviation of the oceanic currents and of rivers, Foucault's pendulum experiment, and the like, may also be treated Fig - I55b - as examples of the law Another pretty illustration is afforded by Let a body with the moment of inertia & rotate with the angular velocity a and, during the motion, let its moment of inertia be transformed by internal forces, say by springs, into &, a will then pass into a', where a = a'Q', that is a' = a (/'). On any considerable dimi- nution of the moment of inertia, a great increase of Additional of areas. tions. ra ~ bodies with variable moments of inertia. THE EXTEXSIO.V OF THE PRINCIPLES. 3C3 angular velocity ensues. The principle might con- ceivably be employed, instead of Foucault's method, to demonstrate the rotation of the earth, [in fact, some attempts at this have been made, with no very marked success]. A phenomenon which substantially embodies the Rotating conditions last suggested is the following. A glass funnel" 1 a funnel, with its axis placed in a vertical position, is rapidly filled with a liquid in such a manner that the stream does not enter in the direction of the axis but strikes the sides. A slow rotatory motion is thereby set up in the liquid which as long as the funnel is full, is not noticed. But when the fluid retreats into the neck of the funnel a its moment of inertia is so diminished and its angular velocity so increased that a violent eddy with considerable axial depression is created. Frequently the entire effluent jet is penetrated by an axial thread of air. 8. If we carefully examine the principles of the Both prin- i- cipiesare centre of gravity and of the areas, we shall discover in simply spe- cial cases of the law of i<P_ -^jP> action and IV v .,/ 2w^ reaction. Fig. 156. . both simply convenient f r J . f modes of expression, for practical purposes, of a well-known property of mechanical phenom- ena. To the accelera- tion cp of one mass m there always corresponds a contrary acceleration (p f of a second mass m', where allowing for the signs m (p + ;;/ cp' = 0. To the force m <p corresponds the equal and opposite force m'<p\ When any masses m and 2 m describe with the contrary accelerations 2 cp and cp the distances vw and w (Fig. 156), the position of their centre of gravity S remains unchanged, and the 3 o 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. sum of their mass-areas with respect to any point O is, allowing for the signs, 2 ///./+ m . 2/ 0. This simple exposition shows us, that the principle of the centre of gravity expresses the same thing with respect to parallel coordinates that the principle of areas ex- presses with respect to polar coordinates. Both contain simply the fact of reaction. But they The principles in question admit of still another construed e simple construction. Just as a single body cannot, sat?ons e S h " without the influence of external forces, that is, without inertfa! the aid of a second body, alter its uniform motion of progression or rotation, so also a system of bodies can- not, without the aid of a second system, on which it can, so to speak, brace and support itself, alter what may properly and briefly be called its mean velocity of progression or rotation. Both principles contain, thus, a generalised statement of the law of inertia, the correct- ness of which in the present form we not only see but fed. importance This feeling is not unscientific ; much less is it stinctive detrimental. Where it does not replace conceptual in- mechanicai sight but exists by the side of it, it is really the funda- facts. , . . n . . _ . , mental requisite and sole evidence of a complete mastery of mechanical facts. We are ourselves a fragment of mechanics, and this fact profoundly modifies our mental life.* No one will convince us that the consideration of mechanico-physiological processes, and of the feel- ings and instincts here involved, must be excluded from scientific mechanics. If we know principles like those - of the centre of gravity and of areas only in their ab- stract mathematical form, without having dealt with the palpable simple facts, which are at once their applica- * For the development of this view, see E. Mach, Grundlinien der Lehre -von den Bewegungsempfindungen, (Leipsic : Engelmann, 1875.) THE EXTEXSIOX OF THE PRIXCIPLES. 305 tion and their source, we only half comprehend them, and shall scarcely recognise actual phenomena as ex- amples of the theory. We are In a position like that of a person who is suddenly placed on a high tower but has not previously travelled in the district round about, and who therefore does not know how to inter- pret the objects he sees. THE LAWS OF IMPACT. i. The laws of Impact were the occasion of the Historical position of enunciation of the most important principles of me- the Laws of chanics, and furnished also the first examples of the application of such principles. As early as 1639, a contemporary of Galileo, the Prague professor, MARCUS MARCI (born in 1595), published In his treatise De Pro- portions Mot us (Prague) a few results of his Investiga- tions on Impact. He knew that a body striking In elastic percussion another of the same size at rest, loses Its own motion and communicates an equal quantity to the other. He also enunciates, though not always with the requisite precision, and frequently mingled with what is false, other propositions which still hold good. Marcus Marci was a remarkable man. He pos- sessed for his time very creditable conceptions regard- Ing the composition of motions and "impulses." In the formation of these ideas he pursued a method sim- ilar to that which Roberval later employed. He speaks of partially equal and opposite motions, and of wholly r opposite motions, gives parallelogram constructions, and the like, but Is unable, although he speaks of an accelerated motion of descent, to reach perfect clear- ness with regard to the idea of force and consequently also with regard to the composition of forces. In spite 306 77//i SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. There- of this, however, he discovers Galileo's theorem re- garding the descent of bodies in the chords of circles, f Marci. IQANNESMARCVS MAR.CI PHIL: O MEDIC: DOCTOR $>r tiatus Laru&frena? fferrmme&irorumxn Bocrma. also a few propositions relating to the motion of the pendulum, and has knowledge of centrifugal force and so on. Although Galileo's Discourses had appeared a THE EXTE^SIOX OF THE PRINCIPLES. 337 year previously, we cannot, in view of the condition of things produced in Central Kurope by the Thirty Years' War, assume that Marci was acquainted with them. Not only would the many errors in Marci's book thus be rendered unintelligible, but it would also have to 3 oS THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Thesourcesbe explained how Marci, as late as 1648, In a continu- knowiedge. atioii of his treatise, could have found it necessary to defend the theorem of the chords of circles against the Jesuit Balthasar Conradus. An imperfect oral com- munication of Galileo's researches is the more reason- able conjecture.* When we add to all this that Marci was on the very verge of anticipating Newton in the discovery of the composition of light, we shall recog- nise in him a man of very considerable parts. His writings are a worthy and as yet but slightly noticed object of research for the historian of physics. Though Galileo, as the clearest-minded and most able of his contemporaries, boie away in this province the palm, we nevertheless see from writings of this class that he was not by any means alone in his thought and ways of thinking. There- 2. GALILEO himself made several experimental at- Galileo. tempts to ascertain the laws of impact ; but he was not in these endeavors wholly successful. He principally busied himself with the force of a body in motion, or with the li force of percussion," as he expressed it, and endeavored to compare this force with the pressure of a weight at rest, hoping thus to measure it. To this end he instituted an extremely ingenious experiment, which we shall now describe. A vessel I (Fig. 157) in whose base is a plugged orifice, is filled with water, and a second vessel II is hung beneath it by strings ; the whole is fastened to the beam of an equilibrated balance. If the plug is removed from the orifice of vessel I, the fluid will fall * I have been convinced, since the publication of the first edition of this work, (see E. Wohlwill's researches, Die Entdeckung des Beharrungsgesetzec, in the Zeitschriftfli*- Volkerpsyckologie, 1884, XV, page 387,) that Marcus Marci derived his information concerning the motion of falling bodies, from Galileo's earlier Dialogues* He may also have known the works of BenedettL THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 309 in a jet into vessel II. A portion of the pressure due Galileo's to the resting weight of the water in I is lost and re- ment. placed by an action of impact on vessel II. Galileo expected a depression of the whole scale, by which he hoped with the assistance of a counter-weight to de- termine the effect of the impact He was to some ex- tent surprised to obtain no depression, and he was un- able, it appears, perfectly to clear up the matter in his mind. 3. To-day, of course, the explanation is not diffi- cult. By the removal of the plug there is produced, 1 I- Fig. 157. first, a diminution of the pressure. This consists of Expiana- two factors : (i) The weight of the jet suspended inexperi- the air is lost ; and (2) A reaction-pressure upwards is exerted by the effluent jet on vessel I (which acts like a Segner's wheel). Then there is an Increase of pres- sure (Factor 3) produced by the action of the jet on the bottom of vessel II. Before the first drop has reached the bottom of II, we have only to deal with a diminu- tion of pressure, which, when the apparatus is in full operation, Is immediately compensated for. This initial 3 io THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Determine- depression was, In fact, all that Galileo could observe. tioii of the _ , . - j j mechanical Let us imagine the apparatus in operation, and denote viUedV 11 " the height the fluid reaches in vessel I by h, the corre- sponding velocity of efflux by v 9 the distance of the bottom of I from the surface of the fluid in II by k, the velocity of the jet at this surface by w, the area of the basal orifice by a, the acceleration of gravity by g, and the specific gravity of the fluid by s. To determine Factor (i) we may observe that v is the velocity ac- quired in descent through the distance k. We have, then, simply to picture to ourselves this motion of de- scent continued through k. The time of descent of the jet from I to II is therefore the time of descent through h -f- k less the time of descent through h. During this time a cylinder of base a is discharged with the velocity v. Factor (i), or the weight of the jet suspended in the air, accordingly amounts to I g ^ g To determine Factor (2) we employ the familiar equation mv = pt. If we put t = i, then m v = p, that is the pressure of reaction upwards on I is equal to the momentum imparted to the fluid jet in unit of time. We will select here the unit of weight as our unit of force, that is, use gravitation measure. We obtain for Factor (2) the expression [av(s/gy]v =#, (where the expression in brackets denotes the mass which flows out in unit of time,) or Similarly we find the pressure on II to be a v . !L } w = q, or factor 3 : S) THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 311 Mathemat- j. _ _ a - \/"lgh VZgUi + k). ica! devel <r d 6 v ' ' The total variation of the pressure Is accordingly opment of the result. as g or, abridged, which three factors completely destroy each other. In the very necessity of the case, therefore, Galileo could only have obtained a negative result. We must supply a brief comment respecting Fac- A comment tor (2). It might be supposed that the pressure on the by the ex- basal orifice which is lost, Is a hs and not 2 a /is. But this statical conception would be totally Inadmissible in the present, dynamical case. The velocity # Is not generated by gravity Instantaneously in the effluent particles, but is the outcome of the mutual pressure between the particles flowing out and the particles left behind ; and pressure can only be determined by the momentum generated. The erroneous introduction of the value a /is would at once betray itself by self-con- tradictions. If Galileo's mode of experimentation had been less elegant, he would have determined without much diffi- culty the pressure which a continuous fluid jet exerts. But he could never, as he soon became convinced, have counteracted by a pressure the effect of an Instan- taneous impact. Take and this is the supposition of 3 i2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Galileo's Galileo a freely falling, heavy body. Its final veloc- reasomng. .^ we ^^ j ncreases proportionately to the time. The very smallest velocity requires a definite portion of time to be produced in (a principle which even Mari- otte contested). If we picture to ourselves a body moving vertically upwards with a definite velocity, the body will, according to the amount of this velocity, ascend a definite time, and consequently also a definite distance. The heaviest imaginable body impressed in the vertical upward direction with the smallest im- aginable velocity will ascend, be it only a little, in opposition to the force of gravity. If, therefore, a heavy body, be it ever so heavy, receive an instan- taneous upward impact from a body in motion, be the mass and velocity of that body ever so small, and such impact impart to the heavier body the smallest imagin- able velocity, that body will, nevertheless, yield and Compan- move somewhat in the upward direction. The slightest son of the . , , ideas im- impact, therefore, is able to overcome the greatest pres- pressure. sure ; or, as Galileo says, the force of percussion com- pared with the force of pressure is infinitely great. This result, which is sometimes attributed to intellectual ob- scurity on Galileo's part, is, on the contrary, a bril- liant proof of his intellectual acumen. . We should say to-day, that the force of percussion, the momentum, the impulse, the quantity of motion m v, is a quantity of different dimensions from the pressure /. The dimen- sions of the former are m!t~ l , those of the latter;?/// 2 . In reality, therefore, pressure is related to momentum of impact as a line is to a surface. Pressure is /, the momentum of impact is/ /. Without employing mathe- matical terminology it is hardly possible to express the fact better than Galileo did. We now also see why it is possible to measure the impact of a continuous fluid THE EXTEXSIOX OF THE PRINCIPLES. 313 jet by a pressure. We compare the momentum de- stroyed per second of time with the pressure acting per second of time, that is, homogeneous quantities of the form //. 4. The first systematic treatment of the laws ofThesyste- impact was evoked in the year 1668 by a request of the mentof the Royal Society of London. Three eminent physicists pact. WALLIS (Nov. 26, 1668), WREN (Dec. 17, 1668), and HUYGENS (Jan. 4, 1669) complied with the invitation of the society, and communicated to it papers in which, independently of each other, they stated, without de- ductions, the laws of impact. Wallis treated only of the impact of inelastic bodies, Wren and Huygens only of the impact of elastic bodies. Wren, previously to publication, had tested by experiments his theorems, which, in the main, agreed with those of Huygens. These are the experiments to which Newton refers in the Principia. The same experiments were, soon after this, also described, in a more developed form, by Ma- riotte, in a special treatise, Sur le Choc des Corps. Ma- riotte also gave the apparatus now known in physical collections as the percussion-machine. According to Wallis, the decisive factor in impact waiiis's re- is moment um > or the product of the mass {pondus} into the velocity (ccleritas). By this momentum the force of percussion is determined. If two inelastic bodies which have equal momenta strike each other, rest will ensue after impact If 'their momenta are unequal, the difference of the momenta will be the momentum after impact. If we divide this momentum by the sum of the masses, we shall obtain the velocity of the mo- tion after the impact. Wallis subsequently presented his theory of impact in another treatise, Me chant ca sive de Mot it, London, 1671. All his theorems may be 314 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, brought together in the formula now in common use, // = (;;/r + in'v')j(t}i + ^')< in which ;;/, m' denote the masses, ?*, v' the velocities before impact, and u the velocity after impact. Huygens's 5. The ideas which led Huygens to his results, are and results, to be found in a posthumous treatise of his, De Motu Corporum ex Percussions^ 1703. We shall examine these in some detail. The assumptions from which Huygens m o m O V V Fig. 158. Fig. 159. An Illustration from De Percussione (Huygens). proceeds are : (i) the law of inertia ; (2) that elastic bodies of equal mass, colliding with equal and oppo- site velocities, separate after impact with the same ve- locities ; (3) that all velocities are relatively estimated ; (4) that a larger body striking a smaller one at rest imparts to the latter velocity, and loses a part of its own ; and finally (5) that when one of the colliding bodies preserves its velocity, this also is the case with the other* THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 315 Huygens, now, imagines two equal elastic masses. First, equal , . , . , IT i AT elastic which meet with equal and opposite velocities v. After masses ex- the impact they rebound from each other with exactly locitiec the same velocities. Huygens is right in assuming and not deducing this. That elastic bodies exist which re- cover their form after impact, that in such a transac- tion no perceptible vis viva is lost, are facts which ex- perience alone can teach us. Huygens, now, conceives the occurrence just described, to take place on a boat which is moving with the velocity v. For the specta- tor in the boat the previous case still subsists ; but for the spectator on the shore the velocities of the spheres before impact are respectively 2 z? and 0, and after im- pact and 2 v. An elastic body, therefore, impinging on another of equal mass at rest, communicates to the latter its entire velocity and remains after the impact itself at rest. If we suppose the boat affected with any imaginable velocity, u, then for the spectator on the shore the velocities before impact will be respectively // + ' and u r, and after impact // v and // -j~ v. But since u -j- v and u v may have any values what- soever, it may be asserted as a principle that equal elastic masses exchange in impact their velocities. A body at rest, however great, is set in motion Second, the , 07 relativeve- by a body which strikes it, however small: as Ga-iocityofap- . proach and lileo pointed out. Huygens, now, recession is shows, that the approach of the * bodies before impact and their- : recession after impact take place with the same relative velocity. A Flg ' I6 " ' body m impinges on a body of mass M at rest, to which it imparts in impact the velocity, as yet undetermined, w. Huygens, in the demonstration of this proposition, supposes that the event takes place on a boat moving 316 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, from M towards m with the velocity w/2. The initial velocities are, then, v w/2 and w/2, ; and the final velocities, x and -f- tu/2. But as M has not altered the value, but only the sign, of its velocity, so m, If a loss of vis viva is not to be sustained in elastic impact, can only alter the sign of its velocity. Hence, the final velocities are (v w/2) and + w/2. As a fact, then, the relative velocity of approach before impact Is equal to the relative velocity of separation after im- pact. Whatever change of velocity a body may suffer, in every case, we can, by the fiction of a boat in mo- tion, and apart from the algebraical signs, keep the value of the velocity the same before and after impact. The proposition holds, therefore, generally. ThircUfthe If two masses M and ;;/ collide, with velocities V of approach and v inversely proportional to the masses, Rafter im- ?y proper- 6 " pact will rebound with the velocity F"and m with the massesso 6 velocity v. Let us suppose that the velocities after focitieVoT impact are F t and v^ ; then by the preceding proposi- tion we must have V -\- v = V^ -f- v v and by the prin- ciple of vis viva MV* mv* _MV^ mv^ _ ] _ _ _____ | _ . Let us assume, now, that ^ 1 =v-{- w, then, neces- sarily, V l = V w ; but on this supposition MV* , mv* MV* , mv* -_- -. _- _. _. And this equality can, in the conditions of the case, only subsist if w = ; wherewith the proposition above stated is established. Huygens demonstrates this by a comparison, con- structively reached, of the possible heights of ascent of the bodies prior and subsequently to impact. If THE EXTENSION- OF THE PRINCIPLES. 317 the velocities of the impinging bodies are not inversely This propo- proportional to the masses, they may be made such by thetiction i r r i rr-^t t Of a moving the fiction ot a boat in motion. The proposition thus boat, made ,,,...-, to apply to includes all imaginable cases. an cases. The conservation of vis viva in impact is asserted by Huygens in one of his last theorems (n), which he subsequently also handed in to the London Society. But the principle is unmistakably at the foundation of the previous theorems. 6. In taking up the study of any event or phenom- Typical . modes of enon A, we may acquire a knowledge of its component natural in- elements by approaching it from the point of view of a different phenomenon 2?, which we already know \ in which case our investigation of A will appear as the application of principles before familiar to us. Or, we may begin our investigation with A itself, and, as na- ture is throughout uniform, reach the same principles originally in the contemplation of A. The investiga- tion of the phenomena of impact was pursued simul- taneously with that of various other mechanical pro- cesses, and both modes of analysis were really pre- sented to the inquirer. To begin with, we may convince ourselves that the impact in the New- problems of impact can be disposed of by the New- toman tonian principles, with the help of only a minimum of view. new experiences. The investigation of the laws of im- pact contributed, it is true, to the discovery of New- ton's laws, but the latter do not rest solely on this foun- dation. The requisite new experiences, not contained in the Newtonian principles, are simply the informa- tion that there are elastic and inelastic bodies. Inelastic bodies subjected to pressure alter their form without recovering it ; elastic bodies possess for all their forms definite systems of pressures, so that every alteration 3 i8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. of form is associated with an alteration of pressure, and vice versa. Elastic bodies recover their form ; and the forces that induce the form -alterations of bodies do not come into play until the bodies are in contact. First, in- Let us consider two inelastic masses M and m mov- nusses. ing respectively with the velocities F"and v. If these masses come in contact while possessed of these un- equal velocities, internal form-altering forces will be set up in the system M, m. These forces do not alter the quantity of motion of the system, neither do they displace its centre of gravity. With the restitution of equal velocities, the form-alterations cease and in in- elastic bodies the forces which produce the alterations vanish. Calling the common velocity of motion after Impact ?/, it follows that Mu -f mu = MV '-j- Mv, or v = (MF+ mv}/(M + m), the rule of Wallis. impact in Now let us assume that we are investigating the iTnt Joint phenomena of impact without a previous knowledge of Newton's principles. We very soon discover, when we so proceed, that velocity is not the sole determina- tive factor of impact; still another physical quality is decisive weight, load, mass, pondus, moles, massa. The moment we have noted this fact, the simplest case is easily dealt with. If two bodies of equal weight or equal mass collide with equal and :Sr *~2: opposite velocities ; if, further, the vv \~J bodies do not separate after impact * m * , \ but retain some common velocity, plainly the sole uniquely deter- mined velocity after the collision is the velocity 0. If, further, we make the observation that only the dif- ference of the velocities, that is only relative velocity, determines the phenomenon of impact, we shall, by imagining the environment to move, (which experience 77IE EXTENSION OF THE PRIXCIPLES. 3*9 tells us has no influence on the occurrence,) also readily perceive additional cases. For equal inelastic masses with velocities v and or v and v' the velocity after impact is #/2 or ( v + '')/ 2 - ^ stan< 3s to reason that we can pursue such a line of reflection only after ex- perience has informed us what the essential and de- cisive features of the phenomena are. If we pass to unequal masses, we must not only The expe- i i r riential know from experience that mass generally is of conse- conditions -.f f ...... of this quence, but also in what manner its influence is effec- method, tive. If, for example, two bodies of masses i and 3 with the velocities v and F collide, we might reason V Fig. 162. Fig. 163. thus. We cut out of the mass 3 the mass i (Fig. 162), and first make the masses i and i collide : the result- ant velocity is (v + ^0/2. There are now left, to equalise the velocities (v + ^")/2 and V 9 the masses i -j- i == 2 and 2, which applying the same principle gives 2 4 """ 1 + 3 * Let us now consider, more generally, the masses m and m' 9 which we represent in Fig. 163 as suitably proportioned horizontal lines. These masses are af- fected with the velocities v and v', which we represent by ordinates erected on the mass-lines. Assuming that 3 2o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. its points of w < ///, we cut off from m' a portion m. The offsetting wffih'e of ;;/ and m gives the mass 2m with the velocity (v -f Newtonian. , dotted line indicates this relation. We proceed similarly with the remainder m m. We cut off from 2m a portion m' m, and obtain the mass 2 m (m m) with the velocity (v + ?'')/ 2 an< ^ tne mass 2 (m' Hi) with the velocity [(# + p')/a + v'~\/2. In this manner we may proceed till we have obtained for the whole mass m + m' the same velocity u. The constructive method indicated in the figure shows very plainly that here the surface equation (m + m'} u = mv -\- mv subsists. We readily perceive, however, that we cannot pursue this line of reasoning except the sum m v + m't>', that is the form of the influence of m and v 9 has through some experience or other been pre- viously suggested to us as the determinative and de- cisive factor. If we renpunce the use of the Newtonian principles, then some other specific experiences con- cerning the import of m v which are equivalent to those principles, are indispensable. Second, the 7. The impact of elastic masses may also be treated impact of . . 1 elastic by the Newtonian principles. The sole observation masses in . . . - , r . ri .,_. Newton's here required is, that a deformation of elastic bodies calls into play forces of restitution, which directly de- pend on the deformation. Furthermore, bodies pos- sess impenetrability; that is to say, when bodies af- fected with unequal velocities meet in impact, forces which equalise these velocities are produced. If two elastic masses M } m with the velocities C, c collide, a deformation will be effected, and this deformation will not cease until the velocities of the two bodies are equalised. At this instant, inasmuch as only internal forces are involved and therefore the momentum and THE EXTEXS10X OF THE PRINCIPLES. 321 the motion of the centre of gravity of the system re- main unchanged, the common equalised velocity will be MC + m c u = . J/-J- m Consequently, up to this time, M's velocity has suf- fered a diminution C // ; and M'S an increase // r. But elastic bodies being bodies that recover their forms, in perfectly elastic bodies the very same forces that produced the deformation, will, only in the in- verse order, again be brought into play, through the very same elements of time and space. Consequently, on the supposition that m is overtaken by M, M will a second time sustain a diminution of velocity C //, and ;;/ will a second time receive an increase of velocity n c. Hence, we obtain for the velocities V, v after impact the expressions V= 2u C and v = 2 u c, or _ If in these formulae we put M=m, it will f ollow T be deduc- c tion by this that V= c and v = C : or, if the impinging masses are x ie T of ali . . . the laws. equal, the velocities which they have will be inter- changed. Again, since in the particular case Jlf/m = c/C or MC+mc = Q also u = 0, it follows that V= 2u C= C and v = Zu c = c; that is, the masses recede from each other in this case with the same velocities (only oppositely directed) with which they approached. The approach of any two masses M" 9 m affected with the velocities C, c 9 estimated as positive when in the same direction, takes place with the velocity C c\ their separation with the velocity V v. But it follows at once from V= 2u C, v = Zuc, that V v = (C-~ c); that is, the rela- tive velocity of approach and recession is the same. 322 THE SCIRXCR OF MECHANICS. By the use of the expressions V=2u C and v = 2 # ^ W e also very readily find the two theorems m i) = MC + m c and + me 2 , which assert that the quantity of motion before and after impact, estimated in the same direction, is the same, and that also the vis viva of the system before and after impact is the same. We have reached, thus, by the use of the Newtonian principles, all of Huy- gens's results. The impii- 8. If we consider the laws of impact from Huygens's H a u% g ens's point of view, the following reflections immediately claim our attention. The height of ascent which the centre of gravity of any system of masses can reach is given by its vis viva, JJSV/2Z/ 2 . In every case in which work is done by forces, and in such cases ihe masses follow the forces, this sum is increased by an amount equal to the work done. On the other hand, in every case in which the system moves in opposition to forces, that is, when work, as we may say, is done ^lpon the system, this sum is diminished by the amount of work done. As long, therefore, as the algebraical sum of the work done on the system and the work done by the system is not changed, whatever other alterations may take place, the sum.20ze' 2 also remains unchanged. Huygens now, observing that this first property of ma- terial systems, discovered by him in his investigations on the pendulum, also obtained in the case of impact, could not help remarking that also the sum of the vires mvce must be the same before and after im- pact. For in the mutually effected alteration of the forms of the colliding bodies the material system con- sidered has the same amount of work done on it as, on THE EXTEXSIQX OF THE PRINCIPLES. 323 the reversal of the alteration, is done by it, provided al- ways the bodies develop forces wholly determined by the shapes they assume, and that they regain their original form by means of the same forces employed to effect its alteration. That the latter process takes place, definite experience alone can inform us. This law obtains, furthermore, only in the case of so-called per- fectly elastic bodies. Contemplated from this point of view, the majority The deduc- _ . . ^ i tion f the of the Huygeman laws of impact follow at once. Equal laws of im- , . , ,1-1 P acr by the masses, which strike each other with equal but oppo- notion of i 1-11 *TM "'^" r 'and site velocities, rebound with the same velocities. The work. velocities are uniquely determined only when they are equal, and they conform to the principle of vis viva only by being the same before and after impact. Fur- ther it is evident, that if one of the unequal masses in impact change only the sign and not the magnitude of its velocity, this must also be the case with the other. On this supposition, however, the relative velocity of separation after impact is the same as the velocity of approach before impact. Every imaginable case can be reduced to this one. Let c and c' be the velocities of the mass ;;/ before and after impact, and let them be of any value and have any sign. We imagine the whole system to receive a velocity // of such magnitude that ti -\- c = (?i + O r = (V O/2- I* will b e seen thus that it is always possible to discover a velocity of transportation for the system such that the velocity of one of the masses will only change its sign. And so the proposition concerning the velocities of approach and recession holds generally good. As Huygens's peculiar group of ideas was not fully perfected, he was compelled, in cases in which the ve- locity-ratios of the impinging masses were not origin- THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. mass. ea Construc- the special and general case of im- pact. ally known, to draw on the Galileo-Newtonian system for certain conceptions, as was pointed out above. Such an appropriation of the concepts mass and mo- mentum, is contained, although not explicitly ex- pressed, in the proposition according to which the ve- locity of each impinging mass simply changes its sign when before impact M/m = c/C. If Huygens had wholly restricted himself to his own point of view, he would scarcely have discovered this proposition, al- though, once discovered, he was able, after his own fashion, to supply its deduction. Here, owing to the fact that the momenta produced are equal and oppo- site, the equalised velocity of the masses on the com- pletion of the change of form will be u == 0. When the alteration of form is reversed, and the same amount of work is performed that the system originally suffered, the same velocities with opposite signs will be restored. If we imagine the entire system affected with a ve- locity of translation, this particular case will simulta- neously present ther#<?r0/case. Let the impinging masses be represented in the figure by MjBC and m = AC (Fig. 164), and their respective velo- cities by C = AD and c = BE. On AB erect the perpendicular CF 9 and through F draw IK """"^J F,---*"""' H K ^-\^ F C R Fig. 164. parallel to AB. Then ID = (m. C c)/(M+ vi) and z )* O n ^ e supposition now KE = (M . C that we make the masses M and m collide with the velocities ID and KE, while we simultaneously impart to the system as a whole the velocity u = AI=KB = C (m . Cc~)/(M + m) = ~~ ) = (MC+ THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 325 the spectator who is moving forwards with the velocity u will see the particular case presented, and the spec- tator who is at rest will see the general case, be the velocities what they may. The general formulae of im- pact, above deduced, follow at once from this concep- tion. We obtain : V=AG=C 2 ^ M + m M + m 1 M -\- m J/4- m Huygen's successful employment of the fictitious signifi- . . . , canceofthe motions is the outcome of the simple perception that fictitious bodies not affected with differences of velocities do not act on one another in impact. All forces of impact are determined by differences of velocity (as all thermal effects are determined by differences of temperature). And since forces generally determine, not velocities, but only changes of velocities, or, again, differences of velocities, consequently, in every aspect of impact the sole decisive factor is differences of velocity. With re- spect to which bodies the velocities are estimated, is indifferent. In fact, many cases of impact which from lack of practice appear to us as different cases, turn out on close examination to be one and the same. Similarly, the capacity of a moving body for work, velocity, a . . . . physical whether we measure it with respect to the time of its level. action by its momentum or with respect to the distance through which it acts by its vis viva, has no signifi- cance referred to' a single body. It is invested with such, only when a second body is Introduced, and, in the first case, then, it is the difference of the veloci- ties, and in the second the square of the difference that is decisive. Velocity is a physical level, like tempera- ture, potential function, and the like. 3 26 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Possible It remains to be remarked, that Huygens could origin 6 ^ have reached, originally, In the investigation of the ideis. enss phenomena of impact, the same results that he pre- viously reached by his Investigations of the pendulum. In every case there is one thing and one thing only to be done, and that Is, to discover in all the facts the same elements^ or, if we will, to rediscover in one fact the elements of another which we already know. From which facts the investigation starts, is, however, a matter of historical accident. Conserva- 9. Let us close our examination of this part of the mentiim 1 ?^ subject with a few general remarks. The sum of the terpreted. - , P i j j momenta of a system of moving bodies is preserved in impact, both In the case of inelastic and elastic bodies. But this preservation does not take place precisely in the sense of Descartes. The momentum of a body is not diminished in proportion as that of another is in- creased ; a fact which Huygens was the first to note. If, for example, two equal Inelastic masses, possessed of equal and opposite velocities, meet in Impact, the two bodies lose in the Cartesian sense their entire mo- mentum. If, however, we reckon all velocities in a given direction as positive, and all in the opposite as negative, the sum of the momenta is preserved. Quan- tity of motion, conceived in this sense, is always pre- served. The vis viva of a system of inelastic masses is al- tered in impact ; that of a system of perfectly elastic masses is preserved. The diminution of vis viva pro- duced in the impact of inelastic masses, or produced generally when the impinging bodies move with a com- mon velocity, after impact, is easily determined. Let M, m be the masses, C, c their respective velocities be- THE EXTENSIO.V OF THE PRINCIPLES. 327 fore Impact, and // their common velocity after impact ; Conserva- . T a.1 1 f tl0n C>f 7"V then the loSS Of VIS Viva IS svr-a in 5m pact inter- mc- - .l-(JJ/-- m\lP ....... fl preted. which in view of the fact that it = (J/C+ /;/ f },'(M+ //:) may be expressed in the form (J/w/J/+l//) (C <r) 2 , Carnot has put this loss in the form ^M(C //) 2 -f ///(// <) * .......... (2) If we select the latter form, the expressions J J/(C // ; 2 and ;;/(// r) 2 will be recognised as the vis viva gen- erated by the work of the internal forces. The loss of vis viva in impact is equivalent, therefore, to the work done by the internal or so-called molecular forces. If we equate the two expressions (i) and (2), remember- ing that (M + ?//) // = MC -j- /// c, we shall obtain an identical equation. Carnot's expression Is Important for the estimation of losses due to the Impact of parts of machines. In all the preceding expositions we have treated oblique . . impact. the impinging masses as points which moved only In the direction of the lines joining them. This simplifica- tion is admissible when the centres of gravity and the point of contact of the Impinging masses He in one straight line, that Is, in the case of so-called direct Im- pact. The investigation of what Is called oblique Im- pact Is somewhat more complicated, but presents no especial Interest In point of principle. A question of a different character was treated by The centre WALLIS. If a body rotate about an axis and Its motion sion ercus be suddenly checked by the retention of one of its points, the force of the percussion will vary with the position (the distance* from, the axis) of the point ar- rested. The point at which the intensity of the impact is greatest is called by Wallis the centre of percussion. 3 28 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. If this point be checked, the axis will sustain no pres- sure. We have no occasion here to enter in detail into these investigations ; they were extended and de- veloped by Wallis's contemporaries and successors in many ways. aiiis- io. We will now briefly examine, before concluding n u tfojg section, an interesting application of the laws of impact ; namely, the determination of the velocities of projectiles by the ballistic pendulum. A mass M is sus- pended by a weightless and massless string (Fig. 165), so as to oscillate as a pendulum. While in the position of equilibrium it suddenly receives the hori- zontal velocity V. It ascends by virtue of this velocity to an altitude h = (/) (1 cos a) = V*/Zg, where /denotes the length of the pendulum, a the angle of elongation, and g the acceleration of gravity. As the relation T-=. Ttv'l/g subsists between the time of oscillation T and the quantities /, g, we easily obtain V= (gT/n) 1/2 (1 cos a), and by the use of a familiar trigonometrical formula, also its formula. If now the velocity V is produced by a projectile of the mass m which being hurled with a velocity v and sinking in M is arrested in its progress, so that whether the impact is elastic or inelastic, in any case the two masses acquire after impact the common velocity V 9 it follows that m?; = (M-{- m) V\ or, if m be sufficiently small compared with M, also v = (Mjm) V\ whence finally 2 M _ . a THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 329 If it Is not permissible to regard the ballistic pen- A different dulum as a simple pendulum, our reasoning, In con- formity with principles before employed,, will take the following shape. The projectile m with the velocity v has the momentum mv, which is diminished by the pressure/ due to impact In a very short interval of time r to mV. Here, then, m (v F) =/r, or, if V compared with v Is very small, mv =ff. With Pon- celet, we reject the assumption of anything like in- stantaneous forces, which generate instanter velocities. There are no instantaneous forces. What has been called such are very great forces that produce per- ceptible velocities In very short intervals of time, but which In other respects do not differ from forces that act continuously. If the force active In impact cannot be regarded as constant during its entire period of ac- tion, we have only to put in the place of the expression ft the expression Cpdt. In other respects the reason- ing is the same. A force equal to that which destroys the momentum The vis viva and of the projectile, acts in reaction on the pendulum. If work of the . pendulum. we take the line of projection of the shot, and conse- quently also the line of the force, perpendicular to the axis of the pendulum and at the distance b from It, the moment of this force will be bp^ the angular accelera- tion generated bpf2mr^^ and the angular velocity pro- duced in time r b . p r bmv The vis viva which the pendulum has at the end of time r is therefore 330 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The result, By virtue of this vis viva the pendulum performs the excursion a, and its weight Mg, (a being the dis- tance of the centre of gravity from the axis,) is lifted the distance a (I cos a). The work performed here isMga(l costf), which is equal to the above-men- tioned vis viva. Equating the two expressions we readily obtain I/ 2 M?a 2m r 2 (1 cos a) v = 7- , mb and remembering that the time of oscillation is \2rnr* T =7t \ \ Mga ' and employing the trigonometrical reduction which was resorted to immediately above, also 2 M a _ .' a v = -.- gT . sm . TC m b 2 interpreta- This formula is in every respect similar to that ob- tion of the J r result. tamed for the simple case. The observations requisite for the determination of z/, are the mass of the pendu- lum and the mass of the projectile, the distances of the centre of gravity and point of percussion from the axis, and the time and extent of oscillation. The form- ula also clearly exhibits the dimensions of a velocity. The expressions 2/?r and sin (or/2) are simple num- bers, as are also Mjm and a/b, where both numerators and denominators are expressed in units of the same kind. But the f actor gT has the dimensions //"*, and Is consequently a velocity. The ballistic pendulum was invented by ROBINS and described by him at length in a treatise entitled New Principles of Gunnery, pub- lished in 1742. TUE EXTENSION Of THE PRINCIPLES. 331 D ALEMBERT'S PRINCIPLE. 1. One of the most important principles for the History of r f r the prin- rapid and convenient solution of the problems of me- cipie. chanics is the principle of D' A I ember t. The researches concerning the centre of oscillation on which almost all prominent contemporaries and successors of Huygens had employed themselves, led directly to a series of simple observations which D' ALEMBERT ultimately gen- eralised and embodied in the principle which goes by his name. We will first cast a glance at these prelim- inary performances. They were almost without excep- tion evoked by the - desire to replace the deduction of Huygens, which did not appear sufficiently obvious, by one that was more convincing. Although this desire was founded, as we have already seen, on a miscompre- hension due to historical circumstances, we have, of course, no occasion to regret the new points of view which were thus reached. 2. The first in importance of the founders of the James Ber- theory of the centre of oscillation, after Huygens, iscomribu- T. , , , rir tionstothe JAMES BERNOULLI, who sought as early as 1686 to ex- theory of plain the compound pendulum by the lever. He ar- of osciiia- rived, however, at results which not only were obscure but also were at variance with the conceptions of Huy- gens. The errors of Bernoulli were animadverted on by the Marquis de L'HOPITAL in the Journal de Rotter- dam, in 1690. The consideration of velocities acquired in infinitely small intervals of time in place of velocities acquired infinite times a consideration which the last- named mathematician suggested led to the removal 332 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. of the main difficulties that beset this problem ; and in 1691, in \hQActaEruditorum, and, later, in 1703, in the Proceedings of the Paris Academy James Bernoulli cor- rected his error and presented his results in a final and complete form. We shall here reproduce the essential points of his final deduction. james Ber- A horizontal, massless bar AB (Fig. 166) is free to duction of rotate about A ; and at the distances r, r' from A the the law of ,..,,, the com- masses ;;/, m 1 are attached. The accelerations with which pound pen- duiumfrom these masses as thus connected ^4 will fall must be different from the accelerations which they T ,. ff would assume if their connec- Fig. 166. tions were severed and they fell freely. There will be one point and one only, at the distance x, as yet unknown, from A which will fall with the same acceleration as it would have if it were free, that is, with the acceleration g. This point is termed the centre of oscillation. If m and ;;/ were to be attracted to the earth, not proportionally to their masses, but m so as to fall when free with the acceleration cp = grjx and m' with the acceleration cp' = gr' /x, that is to say, if the natural accelerations of the masses were proportional to their distances from A, these masses would not interfere with one another when connected. In reality, however, m sustains, in consequence of the connection, an upward component acceleration g cp, and m' receives in virtue of the same fact a downward component acceleration cp' g; that is to say, the former suffers an upward force of m(g cp)=g(x r/x)m and the latter a downward force of m' (cp f g) = g (r' xjx) m'. Since, however, the masses exert what influence they have on each other solely through the medium of THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 333 the lever by which they are joined, the upward force The law of J J J r the distn- upon the one and the downward force upon the other bution of r r the effects must satisfy the law of the lever. If m in conse- of the im- pressed quence of its being connected with the lever is held f ^-^ r back by a force /from the motion which it would take, nouiii's ex- ample. if free, it will also exert the same force /on the lever- arm r by reaction. It is this reaction pull alone that can be transferred to m and be balanced there by a pressure /'== (r/r'}f, and is therefore equivalent to the latter pressure. There subsists, therefore, agreeably to what has been above said, the relation g (r' x /x) m' = r /r' . g (x r/x} m or, (x r) m r = (r r x) m'r', from which we obtain x = (mr 2 + m'r'^/(inr + m'r'^) 9 exactly as Huygens found it. The generalisation of this reasoning, for any number of masses, which need not lie in a single straight line, is obvious. 3. JOHN BERNOULLI (in 1712) attacked in a different The prm- manner the problem of the centre of oscillation. His John Ber- performances are easiest consulted in his Collected lution of Works {Opera, Lausanne and Geneva, 1762, Vols. Iloftnecen- and IV). We shall examine in detail here the main lation. ideas of this physicist. Bernoulli reaches his goal by conceiving the masses and forces separated. First, let us consider two simple pendulums of dif- The first ferent lengths /, /' whose bobs are affected with gravi- Bernoulli's tational accelerations proportional to the lengths of the pendulums, that is, let us put ///' g/g'. As the time of oscillation of a pendulum is T= nV Ijg, it follows that the times of oscillation of these pendulums will be the same. Doubling the length of a pendulum, ac- cordingly, while at the same time doubling the accel- eration of gravity does not alter the period of oscilla- tion. Second, though we cannot directly alter the accel- 334 THE SCIEXCE OF MECHANICS. The second eration of gravity at any one spot on the earth, we 1 can do what amounts virtually to this. Thus, imagine a straight massless bar of length 2a, free to rotate about its middle point; and attach to the one ex- ' tremity of it the mass m and to the other the mass m. Then the total mass is m + m' at j the distance a from the axis. But the force \ a which acts on it is (in ?;/) g, and the ac- ! m celeration, consequently, (m m' /m -\- ;;/) g. Fig. 167. Hence, to find the length of the simple pen- dulum, having the ordinary acceleration of gravity g, which is isochronous with the present pen- dulum of the length a, we put, employing the preced- ing theorem, m m m m The third determina centre of Third, we imagine a simple pendulum of length i with the mass m at its extremity. The weight of m produces, by the principle of the lever, the same ac- celeration as half this force at a distance 2 from the point of suspension. Half the mass m placed at the distance 2, therefore, would surfer by the action of the force impressed at i the same acceleration, and a fourth of the mass m would surfer double the acceleration ; so that a simple pendulum of the length 2 having the orig- inal force at distance i from the point of suspension and one-fourth the original mass at its extremity would be isochronous with the original one. Generalising this reasoning, it is evident that we may transfer any force / acting on a compound pendulum at any dis- tance r, to the distance i by making its value rf 9 and any and every mass placed at the distance r to the distance i by making its value r*m, without changing TJ-1E EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 335 the time of oscillation of the pendulum. If a force / act on a lever- arm a (Fig. 168) while at the distance r from the axis a mass m is attached, f will be equiva- lent to a force af/r impressed on m and will impart to it the linear acceleration af/m r and the angu- lar acceleration af/mr 2 . Hence, to find the angular acceleration r J j i Fi S- l68 - of a compound pendulum, we divide the sum of the statical moments by the sum of the moments of inertia. BROOK TAYLOR, an Englishman,* also developed The re- . . searches of this idea, on substantially the same principles, but Brook Tay- quite independently of John Bernoulli. His solution, however, was not published until some time later, in 1715, in his work, Methodus Incrementorum. The above are the most important attempts to solve the problem of the centre of oscillation. We shall see that they contain the very same ideas that D'Alembert enunciated in a generalised form. 4. On a system of points M, M', M". . . . connected Motion of a with one another in any way,f the forces P, P', P". . . . polntssub- are impressed. (Fig. 169.) These forces would im- straints. n part to the free points of the system certain determinate motions. To the connected points, however, different motions are usually imparted motions which could be produced by the forces W, W, W". . . . These last are the motions which we shall study. Conceive the force P resolved into W and V, the force P' into W and V [ ', and the force P" into W" * Author of Taylor's theorem, and also of a remarkable work on perspec- tive. Trans. t In precise technical language, they are subject to constraints, that is, forces regarded as infinite, which compel a certain relation between their motions, Trans. 33 6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. statement and F", and so on. Since, owing to the connections, of D'Alem- . , rrr rrrf r rru rr berr&prin- only the components 17, W , ///.... are effective, lpe ' therefore, the forces V, V, V" . . . . must be equilib- rated by the connections. We will call the forces P, P', P" the impressed forces, the forces W 9 W, W" , which produce the ac- tual motions, the effective forces, and the forces V, V, V" . . . . the forces gained and lost, or the FI i6 equilibrated forces. We perceive, thus, that if we resolve the impressed forces into the effective forces and the equilibrated forces, the latter form a system balanced by the connections. This is the principle of D'Alembert. We have allowed ourselves, in its expo- sition, only the unessential modification of putting forces for the momenta generated by the forces. In this form the principle was stated by D'ALEMBERT in his Traite de dynamique, published in 1743. Various As the'system V, V , V" . ... is in equilibrium, the which the principle of virtital disp lac erne jits is applicable thereto, may be ex- This gives a second form of D'Alembert's principle. pressed. ... A third form is obtained as follows : The forces P, P'. . . . are the resultants of the components W, W . . . . and F, V. . . . If, therefore, we combine with the forces W, W and F, W the forces P, P' , equilibrium will obtain. The force-system P, W, V is in equilibrium. But the system Vis independently in equilibrium. Therefore, also the system P, Wis in equilibrium, or, what is the same thing, the system P, Wis in equilibrium. Accordingly, if the effective forces with opposite signs be joined to the impressed THE EXTENSION OF TPIE PRINCIPLES. 337 Fig. 170. forces, the two, owing to the connections, will balance. The principle of virtual displacements may also be ap- plied to the system P, W. This LAGRANGE did in his Mccaniqite analytique, 1 788. The fact that equilibrium subsists between the sys- An equiva- tem P and the system W, may be expressed in still pie em- i TTT i ployed by another way. We may say that Hermann ,. . T J . ,,, ^ andEuler. the system W is equivalent to the system P. In this form HER- MANN (Phoronomia, 1716) and EULER {Comment A cad. Petrop. , Old Series, Vol. VII, 1740) employed the principle. It is substantially not different from that of D' Alembert. 5. We will now illustrate D' Alembert' s principle by one or two examples. On a massless wheel and axle with the radii R, r the illustration loads -P and Q are hung, which are not in equilibrium, bert'sprm- ciple by the We resolve the force P into (i) W ' (the force which would produce the actual motion of the mass if this were freej and (2) V, that is, we put P = W+ ^and also Q = W"+ V'\ it being evident that we may here disregard all motions that are not in the vertical. We have, accord- ingly, V= P W and V'= Q W, and, since the forces V, V are in equilibrium, also V. R = V. r. Substituting for V, V in the last equa- tion their values in the former, we get motion of a wheel and axle. Fig. 171. (i) which may also be directly obtained by the employ- ment of the second form of D'Alembert's principle. From the conditions of the problem we readily perceive 33 8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. that we have here to deal with a uniformly accelerated motion, and that all that is therefore necessary is to ascertain the acceleration. Adopting gravitation meas- ure., we have the forces W and W 9 which produce in the masses Pjg and Q/g the accelerations y and y'- 9 wherefore, W=(P/g)y and W=(Q/g)y f . But we also know that y'= y(rjR}. Accordingly, equation (i) passes into the form whence the values of the two accelerations are ob- tained PRQr _ , , PR Or ____ - ____ These last determine the motion. Employ- It will be seen at a glance that the same result can inent of the .-, f , . , ideas stat- be obtained by the employment of the ideas of statical meat and moment and moment of inertia. We get by this method moment of . inertia, to for the angular acceleration obtain this 8 and as y = R cp and y'= r cp we re-obtain the pre- ceding expressions. When the masses and forces are given, the problem of finding the motion of a system is determinate. Sup- pose, however, only the acceleration y is given with which P moves, and that the problem is to find the loads P and Q that produce this acceleration. We obtain easily from equation (2) the result P == Q (JR. g + r y) r /(g y}R z , that is, a relation between P and Q. One of the two loads therefore is arbitrary. The prob- THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 339 lem in this form is an indeterminate one, and may be solved in an infinite number of different ways. The following may serve as a second example. A weight P (Fig. 172") free to move on a vertical A second it . _ lustration straight line AB, is attached to a cord of the prin- passing over a pulley and carrying a ~ weight Q at the other end. The cord makes with the line AB the variable angle a. The motion of the present case cannot be uniformly accelerated. But if we consider only vertical mo- tions we can easily give for every value of a the momentary accelera- tion (y and ;/') of P and Q. Proceeding exactly as we did in the last case, we obtain P= W + V, Q = W + V also y cos a = V, or, since y' = y cos a, Q \ P Q _[_ j C os a y 1 cos a = P y; whence > / & P Qcosa Fig. 172. PQcosa Again the same result may be easily reached by the solution of employment of the ideas of statical moment and mo- also bythe ment of inertia in a more generalised form. The fol- statical mo- lowing reflexion will render this clear. The force, or statical moment, that acts on .-Pis P Q cos a. the weight Q moves cos a times as fast as P; conse- quently its mass is to be taken cos 2 <# times. The ac- celeration which P receives, accordingly is, But eraiised! en ~ 340 TV/A SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. P Qcosa P Q cos a y = Q ^'^-p g- - cos 2 tfH v ~ ^ In like manner the corresponding expression for y' may be found. The foregoing procedure rests on the simple re- mark, that not the circular path of the motion of the masses is of consequence, but only the relative veloci- ties or relative displacements. This extension of the concept moment of inertia may often be employed to advantage. import and 6. Now that the application of D'Alembert's prin- of ETAiem- ciple has been sufficiently illustrated, it will not be diffi- cipie. cult to obtain a clear idea of its significance. Problems relating to the motion of connected points are here dis- posed of by recourse to experiences concerning the mutual actions of connected bodies reached in the in- vestigation of problems of equilibrium. Where the last mentioned experiences do not suffice, D'Alembert's principle also can accomplish nothing, as the examples adduced will amply indicate. We should, therefore, carefully avoid the notion that D'Alembert's principle is a general one which renders special experiences su- perfluous. Its conciseness and apparent simplicity are wholly due to the fact that it refers us to experiences .already in our possession. Detailed knowledge of the subject under consideration founded on exact and mi- nute experience, cannot be dispensed with. This knowl- edge we must obtain either from the case presented, by a direct investigation, or we must previously have obtained it, in the investigation of some other subject, and carry it with us to the problem in -hand. We learn, in fact, from D'Alembert's principle, as our examples show, nothing that we could not also have learned by THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 341 other methods. The principle fulfils in the solution of problems, the office of a routine-form which, to a certain extent, spares us the trouble of thinking out each new case, by supplying directions for the employ- ment of experiences before known and familiar to us. The principle does not so much promote our insight into the processes as it secures us a practical mastery of them. The value of the principle is of an economical character. When we have solved a problem by D'Alembert'sThereia- . . tlon * principle, we may rest satisfied with the experiences D'Aiem-^ r c J bert's pnn- previously made concerning equilibrium, the applica- cipie to .the tion of which the principle implies. But if we wish cipies of r * mechanics. clearly and thoroughly to apprehend the phenomenon, that is, to rediscover In it the simplest mechanical ele- ments with which we are familiar, we are obliged to push our researches further, and to replace our expe- riences concerning equilibrium either by the Newtonian or by the Huygenian conceptions, in some way similar to that pursued on page 266. If we adopt the former alternative, we shall mentally see the accelerated mo- tions enacted which the mutual action of bodies on one another produces ; if we adopt the second, we shall di- rectly contemplate the work done, on which, in the Huygenian conception, the vis viva depends. The latter point of view is particularly convenient if we employ the principle of virtual displacements to express the conditions of equilibrium of the system V or P W~ D'Alembert's principle then asserts, that the sum of the virtual moments of the system V 9 o"r of the system P W, is equal to zero. The elementary work o' ihe equilibrated forces, If we leave out of account the strain- ing of the connections, is equal to zero. The total work done, then, is performed solely by the system P, 342 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. and the work performed by the system ?-F"must, accord- ingly, be equal to the work done by the system P. All the work that can possibly be done is due, neglecting the strains of the connections, 'to the impressed forces. As will be seen, D'Alembert's principle in this form is not essentially different from the principle of vis viva. Form of ap- 7. In practical applications of the principle of D'AJem^ D'Alembert it is convenient to resolve every force P . cfpietand 1 impressed on a mass m of the system into the mutually ingequa- perpendicular components X, Y 9 Z parallel to the axes tions of mo- . , .. - . .... tion. of a system of rectangular coordinates ; every effective force J^into corresponding components m% 9 mrj, m2,, where <?, 77, 5 denote accelerations in the directions of the coordinates ; and every displacement, in a similar manner, into three displacements dx, $y, dz. As the work done by each component force is effective only in displacements parallel to the directions in which the components act, the equilibrium of the system (P, W} is given by the equation 2\ (X m <?) 6x + ( Y mrj) dy + (Zmg) dz\ = $ (1) or 2(Xdx + Ydy + Z8s) = 2m(gdx+riSy + Zdz). . (2) These two equations are the direct expression of the proposition above enunciated respecting the possible work of the impressed forces. If this work be = 0, the particular case of equilibrium results. The principle of virtual displacements flows as a special case from this expression of D'Alembert's principle ; and this is quite in conformity with reason* since in the general as well as in the particular case the experimental per- ception of the import of work is the sole thing of con- sequence. Equation (i) gives the requisite equations of mo- THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 343 tion ' } we have simply to express as many as possible of the displacements 6x, d}', ds by the others in terms of their relations to the latter, and put the coefficients of the remaining arbitrary displacements = 0, as was illustrated in our applications of the principle of vir- tual displacements* The solution of a very few problems by D'Alem- Conve- , ..-...._ . i r ^nienceand bert s principle will suffice to impress us with a full utility of , . . ... f , D'Alem- sense of its convenience. It will also give us the con- bert's prin- viction that it is possible, in every case in which it may be found necessary, to solve directly and with perfect insight the very same problem by a consideration of elementary mechanical processes, and to arrive thereby at exactly the same results. Our conviction of the feasibility of this operation renders the performance of it, In cases in which purely practical ends are In view, unnecessary. THE PRINCIPLE OF VIS VIVA. T. The principle of vis viva, as we know, was first The orig- employed by HUYGENS. JOHN and DANIEL BERNOULLI iSaYfqrm of had simply to provide for a greater generality of ex- C ipie. nn pression ; they added little. If/, p', p". . . . are weights, m, m', m" . . . . their respective masses, k, h' 9 h". . . . the distances of descent of the free or connected masses, and v, v 1 ', v" . . . . the velocities acquired, the relation obtains If the initial velocities are not = 0, but are # , v Q ' 9 ?/ ". . . ., the theorem will refer to the increment of the vis viva by the work and read 344 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. pie appli tc forces i- The principle still remains applicable when p . . . . ed . r of are, not weights, but any constant forces, and h . . . not the vertical spaces fallen through, but any paths in the lines of the forces. If the forces considered are variable, the expressions//;, /'//. . , . must be replaced by the expressions Cpds, Cj>' ds f , . . ., in which J> de- notes the variable forces and ds the elements of dis- tance described in the lines of the forces'. Then or The princi- ple illus- trated by the motion of a wheel and axle. v Q ^ ......... (1) 2. In illustration of the principle of vis viva we shall first consider the simple problem which we treated by the principle of D'Alembert. On a wheel and axle with the radii R, r hang the weights P, Q. When this machine is set in motion, work is per- formed by which the acquired vis viva is fully determined. For a rotation of the machine through the angle a, the work is P. Ra Q. ra a(PR Qr). Calling the angular velocity which corresponds to this angle of rotation, cp, the vis viva generated will be Fig. 173- <rvr = g_ % 2g J Consequently, the equation obtains a (PR Qr) = (1) Now the motion of this case is a uniformly accelerated motion ; consequently, the same relation obtains here between the angle a, the angular velocity cp, and the THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 345 angular acceleration if;, as obtains in free descent be- tween s, ?>, g. If in free descent s = v 2 /2g, then here a = (p 2 /2tfj. Introducing this value of a in equation (i), we get for the angular acceleration of P, ip = (PR Qr/ PR* -f- Qr 2 )g, and, consequently, foruts absolute ac- celeration y = (Pit Qr/P~R 2 ~^~Qr 2 ] Rg, exactly as in the previous treatment of the problem. As a second example let us consider the case of a A roiling cylinder on massless cylinder of radius r. m the surface of which, an inclined plane. diametrically opposite each other, are fixed two equal masses m, and which in consequence of the weight of Fig. 174. - 375- these masses rolls without sliding down an inclined plane of the elevation a. First, we must convince our- selves, that in order to represent the total vis viva of the system we have simply to sum up the vis viva of the motions of rotation and progression. The axis of the cylinder has acquired, we will say, the velocity u ' in the direction of the length of the inclined plane, and we will denote by v the absolute velocity of rotation of the surface of the cylinder. The velocities of rotation v of the two masses m make with the velocity of progres- sion u the angles 6 and Q' (Fig. 175), where 6 -\~ 6' = 180. The compound velocities w and z satisfy therefore the equations w 2 = u 2 -\- v 2 2 uv cos z 2 =u 2 + v 2 34 6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The law of But since cos ft = cos 6', it follows that motion of su f h i l iv* + z* ='2 // 2 4- 2e/ 2 or. cylinder. ' ' ' ' }>mw- -j- \mz- = \m'lu^ + J-/tf2z' 2 =;//// 2 -|- 772 z/ 2 . If the cylinder moves through the angle <?, ;;/ describes in consequence of the rotation the space r cp, and the axis of the cylinder is likewise displaced a distance rep. As the spaces traversed are to each other, so also are the velocities v and ?/, which therefore are equal. The total vis viva may accordingly be expressed by 2m if 2 . If /is the distance the cylinder travels along the length of the inclined plane, the work done is 2?ng. /sin a = 2mu 2 ; whence u = V gl* sin a. If we compare with this result the velocity acquired by a body in sliding down an inclined plane, namely, the velocity j/'a^/sina, it will be observed that the contrivance we are here considering moves with only one-half the ac- celeration of descent that (friction neglected) a sliding body would under the same circumstances. The rea- soning of this case is not altered if the mass be uni- formly distributed over the entire surface of the cylin- der. Similar considerations are applicable to the case of a sphere rolling down an inclined plane. It will be seen, therefore, that Galileo's experiment on falling bodies is in need of a quantitative correction. A modifica- Next, let us distribute the mass ;;/ uniformly over preceding the surface of a cylinder of radius R> which is coaxal with and rigidly joined to a massless cylinder of radius r, and let the latter roll down the inclined plane. Since here v/u = jR./r, the principle of vis viva gives mgl ~f j^ 2 /r 2 ), whence THE EXTENSION OF TFIE PRINCIPLES. 347 For Rjr = i the acceleration of descent assumes its previous value g/z. For very large values of R/r the acceleration of descent is very small. When R/r = oo it will be impossible for the machine to roll down the inclined plane at all. As a third example, we will consider the case of a The motion chain, whose total length is /, and which lies partly on on an in- a horizontal plane and partly on a plane having the plane, angle of elevation a. If we imagine the surface on which the chain rests to be very smooth, any very small portion of the chain left hang- , . Fig. 176. ing over on the in- clined plane will draw the remainder after it. If /* is the mass of unit of length of the chain and a portion x is hanging over, the principle of vis viva will give for the velocity v acquired the equation IJilv^ X . X 2 . ^ 2 - = pxg 2" sm a = ^ Y sm a > or v = x ~\/g sin a /I. In the present case, therefore, the velocity acquired is proportional to the space de- scribed. The very law holds that Galileo first con- jectured was the law of freely falling bodies. The same reflexions, accordingly, are admissible here as at page 248. 3. Equation (i), the equation of vis viva, can always Extension be employed, to solve problems of moving bodies, cipufo?"* when the total distance traversed and the force that vzva ' acts in each element of the distance are known. It was disclosed, however, by the labors of Euler, Daniel Ber- noulli, and Lagrange, that cases occur in which the 34S THE SCIENCE, OF MECHANICS. principle of vis viva can be employed without a knowl- edge of the actual path of the motion. We shall see later on that Clairaut also rendered important services in this field. There- Galileo, even, knew that the velocity of a heavy E e ui r e C r. ieS falling body depended solely on the vertical height de- scended through, and not on the length or form of the path traversed. Similarly, Huygens finds that the vis viva of a heavy material system is dependent on the vertical heights of the masses of the system. Euler was able to make a further step in advance. If a body K (Fig. 177). is at- tracted towards a fixed centre C in obedience to some given law, the increase of the vis viva in the case of rectilinear ap- proach is calculable from the initial and terminal distances ( r o> r i}- But tne increase is the same, if ^"passes at all from the position r to the position r f , independently of the form of its path, KB. For the elements of the work done must be calculated from the projections on the radius of the actual displacements, and are thus ulti- mately the same as before. The re- If K is attracted towards several fixed centres C, searches of . Daniel Ber- C , C . . . ., the increase of its vis viva depends on the noulli and ... Lagrange. initial distances r , r Q , r Q . . , . and on the terminal distances r lt r f ', r t ". . . ., that is on the initial and ter- minal positions of K. Daniel Bernoulli extended this idea, and showed further that where movable bodies are in a state of mutual attraction the change of vis viva is determined solely by their initial and terminal dis- Fig. 177- THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 349 tances from one another. The analytical treatment of these problems was perfected by Lagrange. If we join a point having the coordinates a, &, c with a point hav- ing the coordinates oc, y, z, and denote by r the length of the line of junction and by a, fi, y the angles that line makes with the axes of x, y, z, then, according to Lagrange, because r * = ( x _ fl )3 + (y _ J)2 + ( Z _ ^2, a; # <^r /, v dr - -~ - - - = - - -r, r dy z c dr cos y = - = . 7 r dz Accordingly, if f(r) = ~ is the repulsive force, or The force J dr compo- . . . nents, par- the negative of the attractive force acting between the tiai differ- ential coef- two points, the components will be ficientsof ^ , the same d r dP(r\ function of A' cosrdi- ^-. ~ ir ^ N /? - - Y=f(r) cos/3 == ~~ -T- = ~ , y dr dy dy 7 , //^(r) ^/r dF(f} Z =f(r) cos y = ^-+ = ,-~^ J ^ J y dr dz dz The force-components, therefore, are the partial differential coefficients of one and the same function of r, or of the coordinates of the repelling or attracting points. Similarly, if several points are in mutual ac- tion, the result will be TTOL dx dy' 350 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS* The force- where U is a function of the coordinates of the points. one ion. 'jr^g f unc ti on was subsequently called by Hamilton* the force-function. Transforming, by means of the conceptions here reached, and under the suppositions given, equation (i) into a form applicable to rectangular coordinates, we obtain 2J(Xdx + Ydy + Zdz) = 2%m (v* z> *) or, since the expression to the left is a complete differen- tial, , dU dU . x + _ _ dy + -jdz = dx dy ' dz where U^ is a function of the terminal values and U Q the same function of the initial values of the coordi- nates. This equation has received extensive applica- tions, but it simply expresses the knowledge that under the conditions designated the work done and therefore also the ins viva of a system is dependent on the posi- tions, or the coordinates, of the bodies constituting it. If we imagine all masses fixed and only a single one in motion, the work changes only as U changes. The equation U= constant defines a so-called level surface, or surface of equal work. Movement upon such a surface produces no work. U increases in the direction in which the forces tend to move the bodies. VII. THE PRINCIPLE OF LEAST CONSTRAINT. i. GAUSS enunciated (in Crell&s Journal fur Mathe- matik, Vol. IV, 1829, p. 233) a new law of mechanics, the principle of least constraint. He observes, that, in * On a General Method in Dynamics, Phil. Trans, for 1834. See also C. G. J. Jacobi, Vorlesungen liber Dynimik, edited by Clebsch, 1866. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 351 the form which mechanics has historically assumed, dy- History of namics is founded upon statics, (for example, D'Alem- pieofieas< . . ..,-.,, constraint. bert's principle on the principle of virtual displace- ments,) whereas one naturally would expect that in the highest stage of the science statics would appear - as a particular case of dynamics. Now, the principle which Gauss supplied, and which we shall discuss in this section, includes both dynamical and statical cases. It meets, therefore, the requirements of scientific and logical aesthetics. We have already pointed out that this is also true of D'Alembert's principle in its Lagrangian form and the mode of expression above adopted. No essentially new principle, Gauss remarks, can now be established in mechanics ; but this does not exclude the discovery of new points of view, from which mechan- ical phenomena may be fruitfully contemplated. Such a new point of view is afforded by the principle of Gauss. 2. Let m, m. .... be masses, connected in any man- statement i r c i i i . f the P rin ~ ner with one another. These masses, iijree, would, under cipie. the action of the forces im- pressed on them, describe in a very short element of time the spaces a b, a f & r . . . . ; but in consequence of their connec- tions they describe in the same element of time the spaces a c, a f c f .... Now, Gauss's principle asserts, that the mo- rion of the connected points is such that, for the motion actually taken, the sum of the products of the mass of each material particle into the square of the distance of its deviation from the position it would have reached if free, namely m(bc}* + m, (V/) 2 + -= 2m(6c)*, is a minimum, that is, is smaller for the actual motion 352 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. than for any other conceivable motion in the sa?jie con- nections. If this sum, ^///(Z'r) 2 , is less for rest than for any motion, equilibrium will obtain. The principle includes, thus, both statical and dynamical cases. Definition - The sum 2?Ji(fic') 2 is called the "constraint."* In of "con- ...... . . straim." forming this sum it is plain that the velocities present in the system may be neglected, as the relative posi- tions of a, b, c are not altered by them. 3. The new principle is equivalent to that of D'Alembert ; it may be used in place of the latter ; and, as Gauss has shown, can also be deduced from it. The impressed forces carry the free mass ;;/ in an element of time through the space ab 9 the effective forces carry the same mass in the same time in consequence of the con- nections through the space ac. We resolve ab into ac and cb\ and do the same for all the masses. It is thus evident that forces corresponding to the dis- tances c by c, b f . . . . and propor- tional to mc& 9 m t c f b f ... 9 do not, owing to the connections, become effective, but form with the connections an equilibrat- ing system. If, therefore, we erect at the terminal posi- tions c t c n c,, the virtual displacements cy 9 c, y ,...., forming with cb y c r ,.... the angles 9 0,.... we may apply, since by D'Alembert's principle forces propor- tional to mcb, m, c f b r ... are here in equilibrium, the principle of virtual velocities. Doing so, we shall have * Professor Mach's term is Abweickungssumme. The Abweichung is the declination or departure from free motion, called by Gauss the Ablenkung. (See Duhring, Principien dcr Mechanik, 168, 169 ; Routh, Rigid Dynamics, Part I, 390-394.) The quantity 2 ? (b c Y is called by Gauss the Zwang\ and German mathematicians usually follow this practice. In English, the term constraint is established in this sense, although it is also used with another* hardly quantitative meaning, for the force which restricts a body absolutely to moving in a certain way. Trans. TUE EXTE.VSIOX OF THE PRINCIPLES. 353 . . . (1) The deduc- tiou of the But principle (by)* = (b)* + (cy)*1bc.Cytt*e, constraint. 9, and ycosO (2) Accordingly, since by (i) the second member of the right-hand side of (2) can only be = or negative, that is to say, as the sum 2m(cy)* can never be dimin- ished by the subtraction, but only increased, therefore the left-hand side of (2) must also always be positive and consequently 2m(by)* always greater than 2m (be)*> which is to say, every conceivable constraint from unhindered motion is greater than the constraint for the actual motion. 4. The declination, be, for the very small element various , _ . , , forms in of time r, may, for purposes of practical treatment, be which the designated by s, and following SchefHer (Schlomilch's may be ex- Zeitschrift fur Mathematik und Physik, 1858, Vol. Ill, p. 197), we may remark that s = yr 2 /2, where y de- notes acceleration. Consequently, 2ms 2 may also be expressed in the forms r 2 r 2 r 4 -i 4: where/ denotes the force that produces the declination from free motion. As the constant factor in no wise affects the minimum condition, we may say, the actual motion is always such that 2ms 2 (1) or 2 ps (2) or 2my 2 (3) is a minimum. 354 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The motion 5. We will first employ, m our illustrations, the of a wheel , . , , TT . r r and axle, third form. Here again, as our first example, we se- lect the motion of a wheel and axle by the overweight of one of its parts and shall use the designations above frequently employed. Our problem is, to so determine the actual accel- erations y of P and y, of Q, that GP/O (g rY + (Q/g) (> ri) 2 shall be a minimum, or, since y f = y(r/fy, so that P (g 7)2 -f- = N shall assume its smallest value. Putting, to this end, exactly as in an inclined plane. we get y = (PR Qr/PR* + the previous treatments of the problem. Descent on As our second example, the motion of descent on inclined plane may be taken. In this case we shall employ the first form, 2ms 2 . Since we have here only to deal with one mass, our in- quiry will be directed to find- ing that acceleration of de* scent y for the plane by which the square of the de- clination (V 2 ) is made a minimum. By Fig. 181 we have Fig. 181. and putting d(s *}/dy = 0, we obtain, omitting all constant factors, 2y 2^-sinaf = or y = g. sintf, the familiar result of Galileo's researches. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 355 The following example will show that Gauss's prin- A case of ciple also embraces cases of equilibrium. On the arms rimn. 1 a, a' of a lever (Fig. 182) are hung the heavy masses ;;/,;;/. The principle requires that m(g ^) 2 + m'(g /') 2 shall be a minimum. But y' =. y(a /a). Further, if the masses are in- . , & &' versely proportional to the J~ ZS lengths of the lever-arms, that ?[_] is to say, if mjm' = a' /a, then , , i , N n Fig. 182. y = y{mjm ). Conse- quently, m (^ y) 2 -|- m\g + y - ;////#') 2 = JW must be made a minimum. Putting dNjdy = 0, we get ;// (i + m/m'}y = or y= 0. Accordingly, in this case equilibrium presents the least constraint from free mo- tion. Every new cause of constraint, or restriction upon New causes i r i f - i . - of con- the freedom of motion, increases the quantity of con- straint in- . . crease the straint. but the increase is always the least possible, departure 1 , , . .from free If two or more systems be connected, the motion of motion, least constraint from the motions of the unconnected systems is the actual motion. If, for example, we join together several simple pendulums so as to form a compound linear pendulum, the latter will oscillate with the motion of least constraint from the motion of the single pendulums. The simple pendulum, for any excursion a, receives, in the di- rection of its path, the acceleration g sin a. Denoting, therefore, by y sin a the acceleration corresponding to this excur- sion at the axial distance i on the com- pound pendulum, ISm (g sin a rysin a} 2 or 2m (g r y] 2 will be the quantity to be made a minimum. Conse- quently, 2m(g ry)r= 0, and y = Fig. 183. 356 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The problem Is thus disposed of in the simplest man- ner. But this simple solution is possible only because the experiences that Huygens, the Bernoullis, and oth- ers long before collected, are implicitly contained in Gauss's principle, iiiustra- 6. The increase of the quantity of constraint, or preceding declination, from free motion by new causes of con- statement. . i -i i i i r 11 i stramt may be exhibited by the following examples. Over two stationary pulleys A, B, and beneath a movable pulley C (Fig. 184), a cord is passed, each Fig. 184. Fig. 185. extremity of which is weighted with a load P; and on C a load zP -(-/is placed. The movable pulley will now descend with the acceleration (p/^P + /) g. But if we make the pulley A fast, we impose upon the system a new cause of constraint, and the quantity of constraint, or declination, from free motion will be in- creased. The load suspended from B, since it now moves with double the velocity, must be reckoned as possessing four times its original mass. The mova- ble pulley accordingly sinks with the acceleration A simple calculation will show that the constraint in the latter case is greater than in the former. THE EXTENSION OP THE PRINCIPLES. 357 A number, n, of equal weights, /, lying on a smooth horizontal surface, are attached to n small movable pulleys through which a cord is drawn in the manner Indicated in the figure and loaded at its free extremity with f. According as all the pulleys are movable or all except one axejixed, we obtain for the motive weight/, allowing for the relative velocities of the masses as re- ferred to j>, respectively, the accelerations (4*3/1 + q.n)g and (4/5) g- If all the n + i masses are movable, the deviation assumes the value/ g/^n -f- i, which Increases as n, the number of the movable masses, is decreased. Fig. 186. 7. Imagine a body of weight O, movable on rollers Treatment of a me- on a horizontal surface, and having an inclined plane chanicai problem by face. On this, inclined face a body of weight P is different mechanical placed. W e now perceive instinctively that P will de- principles. scend -with quicker acceleration when Q is movable and can give way, than it will when Q is fixed and P's descent more hindered. To any distance of descent h of P a horizontal velocity v and a vertical velocity u of P and a horizontal velocity w of Q correspond. Owing to the conservation of the quantity of horizontal mo- tion, (for here only internal forces act,) we have Pv = Qw, and for obvious geometrical reasons (Fig. 186) also u = (v -\~ w) tan a The velocities, consequently, are 358 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. First, by the V = * principles P 4- O of the con- servation of jp fno Q KT W=j r --QCOt< X .U. For the work Ph performed, the principle of vis viva gives _. Pu* Pi Q ^ \22 Ph=- + -=--? = cot or -.T- + -^ 2 ^^v^p+e ' 2 ^P \ 2 2/ 2 ; CO H y c Multiplying by -^>, we obtain / A , g ^ - -j- - 2 * To find the vertical acceleration y with which the space h is described, be it noted that h = & 2 /2 y. In- troducing this value in the last equation, we get 7 Q ' 6 ' For Q oo, y = g sin 2 a, the same as on a sta- tionary inclined plane. For Q = 0, ^ = g, as in free descent. For finite values of Q = mP, we get, 1 + * since -T- - -- -- > 1, 2 m -f- ;;/) sin 2 The making of <2 stationary, being a newly imposed cause of constraint, accordingly increases the quantity of constraint, or declination, from free motion. To obtain y, in this case, we have employed the principle of the conservation of momentum and the THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 359 principle of vis viva. Employing Gauss's principle, Second, by we should proceed as follows. To the velocities de- cipie of . Gauss, noted as u, v, w the accelerations y, o, correspond. Remarking that in the free state the only acceleration is the vertical acceleration of P, the others vanishing, the procedure required is, to make a minimum. As the problem possesses significance only when the bodies P and Q touch, that is only when y = (d -f- ) tan a, therefore, also Forming the differential coefficients of this expression with respect to the two remaining independent vari- ables d and , and putting each equal to zero, we ob- tain _ [>_ (tf _j_ e) tan or] Pt&n a + PS = and [f ($ + )tan#] 7>tan<*-i- Qe = 0. From these two equations follows immediately Pd Qs = 0, and, ultimately^ the same value for y that we obtained before. We will now look at this problem from another point of view. The body P describes at an angle ft with the horizon the space s, of which the horizontal and vertical components are v and ?/, while simulta- neously Q describes the horizontal distance w. The force-component that acts in the direction of s is Psm ft, consequently the acceleration in this direction, allow- ing for the relative velocities of P and Q, is P.s'm/3 360 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Third, by Employing the following equations which are di- tended con- rectly deducible, cept of mo- ,_ inent of In- Q W = P V ertia. n = v tan ft. the acceleration in the direction of s becomes and the vertical acceleration corresponding thereto is an expression, which as soon as we introduce by means of the equation u = (v + ?/) tan a:, the angle-func- tions of a for those of ft, again assumes the form above given. By means of our extended conception of mo- ment of inertia we reach, accordingly, the same result as before. Fourth, by Finally we will deal with this problem in a direct cip?es. prm manner. The body P does not descend on the mova- ble inclined plane with the vertical acceleration g, with which it would fall if free, but with a different vertical acceleration, y. It sustains, therefore, a vertical coun- terforce (P/g} (g 7). But as P and Q, friction neglected, can only act on each other by means of a pressure S, normal to the inclined plane, therefore P f NO (g y} = S cos a t = 2 _ From this is obtained THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 361 and by means of the equation y ~ (d -\- e) tana:, ulti- mately, as before, Q * If we put P= O and or = 45, we obtain for this Discussion ^ ^ ^ J of the re- particular case y = %g 9 d = ^, = |-*. For /*/f = suits. Q/g= i we find the "constraint,'* or decimation from free motion, to be g 2/3. If we make the inclined plane stationary, the constraint will be g 2 /2. If /Amoved on a stationary inclined plane of elevation ft, where tan/5? = y/d, 'that is to say, in the same path in which it moves on the movable inclined plane, the constraint would only be g 2 /$. And, in that case it would, in reality, be less impeded than if it attained the same acceleration by the displacement of Q. 8. The examples treated will have convinced us that Gauss's no substantially new insight or perception is afforded by affords no . . . newinsight Gauss's principle. Employing form (3) of the prin- ciple and resolving all the forces and accelerations in the mutually perpendicular coordinate-directions, giv- ing here the letters the same significations as in equa- tion (i) on page 342, we get in place of the declination, or constraint, 2 my 2 , the expression '^ IZ \ 2 1 ---77 +P-5 ( / \ m J J and by virtue of the minimum condition 362 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. ,;// or2[(X ; Gauss's and If no connections exist, the coefficients of the (in D'Alem- ^ T >- T 7 o n i ^ bert's prin- that case arbitrary) dE,, dij, dc severally made = 0, mutabie m give the equations of motion. But if connections do exist, we have the same relations between dg, drj, d2, as above in equation (i), at page 342, between d '#, dy, dz. The equations of motion come out the same ; as the treatment of the same example by D'Alem bert's principle and by Gauss's principle fully demonstrates. The first principle, however, gives the equations of motion directly, the second only after differentiation. If we seek an expression that shall give by differentia- tion D'Alembert's equations, we are led perforce to the principle of Gauss. The principle, therefore, is new only in form and not in matter. Nor does it, further, possess any advantage over the Lagrangian form of D'Alembert's principle in respect of competency to com- prehend both statical and dynamical problems, as has been before pointed out (page 342). Thephys- There is no need of seeking a mystical or metaphys- ical basis p ^ . . , _, . \ J of the prin- /<rtf/reason for Gauss s principle. The expression ' ' least ciple. constraint" may seem to promise something of the sort ; but the name proves nothing. The answer to the question, "In what does this constraint consist ? " can- not be derived from metaphysics, but must be sought in the facts. The expression (2) of page 353, or (4) of page 361, which is made a minimum, represents the work done in an element of time by the deviation of the constrained motion from the free motion. This work, the work due to the constraint, is less for the motion actually performed than for any other possible motion. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 363 / \ Fig. 187. nisable in the sim- plest cases. Once we have recognised work as the factor deter- Role of the factor work. minative of motion, once we have grasped the mean- ing of the principle of virtual displacements to be, that motion can never take place except where work can be performed, the following converse truth also will in- volve no difficulty, namely, that all the work that can be performed in an element of time actually is per- formed. Consequently, the total diminution of work due in an element of time to the connections of the system's parts is restricted to the portion annulled by the counter-work of those parts. It is again merely a new aspect of a familiar fact with which we have here to deal. This relation is displayed in the very simplest cases. The foun- _ * J * * i dationsof Let there be two masses m and m at A, the one im- the princi- ple recog- pressed with a force/, the other with --t-,-.-- the force q. If we connect the two, we . *B shall have the mass 27/2 acted on by a resultant force r. Supposing the spaces described in an element of time by the free masses to be represented by AC, AB, the space described by the con- joint, or double, mass will be AO = ^AD. The deviation, or constraint, is m(OB* + OC*}. It is less than it would be if the mass arrived at the end of the ele- ment of time in M or indeed in any point lying out- side of B C 9 say N, as the simplest geometrical con- siderations will show. The deviation is proportional to the expression / 2 -f ^ 3 + dpq cos 8/2, which in the case of equal and opposite forces becomes 2/ 2 , and in the case of equal and like-directed forces zero. Two forces p and q act on the same mass. The force q we resolve parallel and at right angles to the 364 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Even in the direction of / in r and s. The work done in an element the compo- of time is proportional to the squares of the forces, and forces its if there be no connections is expressible by/ 2 + ^ 2 = are?ound? / 3 ~|- r- + s 2 . If now r act directly counter to the force /, a diminution of work will be effected and the sum mentioned becomes (/ r) 2 -f- s 2 . Even in the principle of the composition of forces, or of the mutual independence of forces, the properties are contained which Gauss's principle makes use of. This will best be perceived by Imagining all the accelerations simul- taneously performed. If we discard the obscure verbal form in which the principle is clothed, the metaphysical impression which it gives also vanishes. We see the simple fact ; we are disillusioned, but also enlightened. The elucidations of Gauss's principle here presented are in great part derived from the p'aper of SchefHer cited above. Some of his opinions which I have been unable to share I have modified.. We cannot, for ex- ample, accept as new the principle which he himself propounds, for both in form and in import it is identical with the D'Alembert-Lagrangian. VIII. THE PRINCIPLE' OF LEAST ACTION. Theorig- i. MAUPERTUIS enunciated, in 1747, a principle scure form which he called * ' le firincife de la moindre quantite d'ac- oftheprin- ,.,,-, ... ,., . __., , , . cipieof tton," the principle of least action. He declared this least action. . . , , - , . , . , i .,..,, principle to be one which eminently accorded with the wisdom of the Creator. He took as the measure of the "action" the product of the mass, the velocity, and the space described, or mvs. Why, it must be confessed, is not clear. By mass and velocity definite quantities may be understood ; not so, however, by THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 365 space, when the time Is not stated in which the space is described. If, however, unit of time be meant, the distinction of space and velocity in the examples treated by Maupertuis is, to say the least, peculiar. It appears that Maupertuis reached this obscure expression by an unclear mingling of his ideas of vis viva and the prin- ciple of virtual velocities. Its indistinctness will be more saliently displayed by the details. 2. Let us see how Maupertuis applies his principle. Determina- r . tion of the If M, m be two inelastic masses, Cand c their velocities laws of im- pact by this before impact, and u their common velocity after im- principle. pact, Maupertuis requires, (putting here velocities for spaces,) that the " action 77 expended in the change of the velocities in Impact shall be a minimum. Hence, M(C #) 2 + m (c ?/) 2 is a minimum ; that is, M(C */) + m (c w) = ; or _ __ M -f- m For the impact of elastic masses, retaining the same designations, only substituting Kand v for the two ve- locities after Impact, the expression M(C F) 2 -f- m(c z>) 2 is a minimum that is to say, M(cr)<tr+ffi(t v)ttv = o ..... (i) In consideration of -the fact that the velocity of ap- proach before impact is equal to the velocity of reces- sion after impact, we have C c = (y ?;) or C + V (,+ p)=0. ........... (2) and d V <tv = Q ................ (3) The combination of equations (i), (2), and (3) readily gives the familiar expressions for V and z>. These two cases may, as we see, be viewed as pro- 366 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. cesses in which the least change of vis viva by reaction takes place, that is, in which the least counter-work is done. They fall, therefore, under the principle of Gauss. Matiper- 3. Peculiar is Maupertuis's deduction of the law of auction of the lever. Two masses M and ;;/ (Fig. 188) rest on a the lever by bar a, which the fulcrum divides into the portions cipie. x and a x. If the bar be set in rotation, the veloci- ties and the spaces described will be proportional to the lengths of the lever-arms, and Mx 2 + m(a ^) 2 is the quantity to be made a minimum, that is MX m (a #) = ; whence x = ma/M + ?# a condition that in the case of equilib- t t rium is actually fulfilled. In llf. m criticism of this, it is to be V lc ' ' ~a^x ' remarked, first, that masses Fig. 188. n t subject to gravity or other forces, as Maupertuis here tacitly assumes, are always in equilibrium, and, secondly, that the inference from Maupertuis's deduc- tion is that the principle of least action is fulfilled only in the case of equilibrium, a conclusion which it was certainly not the author's intention to demonstrate. The correc- If it were sought to bring this treatment into ap- tion of Man- ., i -,i i i- 1111 pertuis's proximate accord with the preceding, we should have deduction. ,, , , 7 * * -\ i to assume that the heavy masses M and m constantly produced in each other during the process the least possible change of vis viva. On that supposition, we should get, designating the arms of the lever briefly by a, b, the velocities acquired in unit of time by u 9 v, and the acceleration of gravity by g, as our minimum ex- pression, M(g u) 2 -f- m(g ^) 2 ; whence M(g u) du -(- m(g v}dv = 0. But in view of the connection of the masses as lever, THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 367 V _, du = T */z; ; # whence these equations correctly follow mb T Ma m b u = a- "Ma* 4- mb*** Ma 2 -\- mb 2 &J and for the case of equilibrium, where u-=v = 0, Thus, this deduction also, when we come to rectify it, leads to Gauss's principle. 4. Following the precedent of Fermat and Leib- Treatment ^ r ofthemo- nitz, Maupertuis also treats by his method the of light. Here again, however, he employs the notion " least ac- tion " in a totally different sense. The expression which for the case of refraction shall be a min- imum, is m . A R -\~ n . RB, where AR and RB denote the paths described by the light in the first and second media re- spectively, and m and n the corresponding velo- cities. True, we really do obtain here, if R be de- termined in conformity with the minimum condition, the result sin ar /sin/? = n/m = const. But before, the * ' action " consisted in the change of the expressions mass X velocity X distance ; now, however, it is con- stituted of the sum of these expressions. Before, the spaces described in unit of time were considered ; in the present case the total spaces traversed are taken. Should not m. AR n. RB or \jn ri)(AR R&) be taken as a minimum, and if not, why not ? But Fig. 189. 3 68 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. even if we accept Maupertuis's conception, the recip- rocal values of the velocities of the light are obtained, and not the actual values. character!- It will thus be seen that Maupertuis really had no sation of . . - . - 1 . Mauper- principle, properly speaking, but only a vague form- tuis's prin- r , . , r i 11 1 cipie. ula, which was forced to do duty as the expression of different familiar phenomena not really brought under one conception. I have found it necessary to enter into some detail in this matter, since Maupertuis's per- formance, though it has been unfavorably criticised by all mathematicians, is, nevertheless, still invested with a sort of historical halo. It would seem almost as if something of the pious faith of the church had crept into mechanics. However, the mere endeavor to gain a more extensive view, although beyond the powers of the author, was not altogether without results. Euler, at least, if not also Gauss, was stimulated by the at- tempt of Maupertuis. Euler'scon- c Euler's view is, that the purposes of the phe- tributions J p ,. , ' f . . r , to this sub- nomena of nature- afford as good a basis of explana- tion as their causes. If this position be taken, it will be presumed a priori that all natural phenomena pre- sent a maximum or minimum. Of what character this maximum or minimum is, can hardly be ascertained by metaphysical speculations. But in the solution of mechanical problems by the ordinary methods, it is possible, if the requisite attention be bestowed on the matter, to find the expression which in all cases is made a maximum or a minimum. Euler is thus not led astray by any metaphysical propensities, and pro- ceeds much more scientifically than Maupertuis. He seeks an expression whose variation put = gives the ordinary equations of mechanics. For a single body moving under the action of forces THE EXTEA"SIO.V OF THE PRINCIPLES. 369 hands. Euler finds the requisite expression in the formula The form /- / i 71 11 PI 11 which the / v as, where ds denotes the element of the path and principle, *J , . . m , . . assumed in v the corresponding velocity. This expression is smaller Eui< for the path actually taken than for any other infinitely adjacent neighboring path between the same initial and terminal points, which the body ma}^ be constrained to take. Conversely, therefore, by seeking the path that makes Cv ds a minimum, we can also determine the path. The problem of minimising Cv ds is, of course, as Euler assumed, a permissible one, only when v de- pends on the position of the elements ds, that is to say, when the principle of vis viva holds for the forces, or a force-function exists, or what is the same thing, when v is a simple function of coordinates. For a mo- tion in a plane the expression would accordingly as- sume the form JVC >/J)\ 1 4--X ,dx In the simplest cases Euier's principle is easily veri- fied. If no forces act, v is constant, and the curve of motion becomes a straight line, for which Cvds^z v C ds is unquestionably shorter than for any other curve between the same terminal points. Also, a body moving on a curved surface without the action of forces or friction, preserves its velocity, and describes on the surface a shortest line. The consideration of the motion of a projectile in a parabola ABC (Fig. 190) will also show that the quantity Cv ds is smaller for the parabola than for any other neighboring curve ; smaller, even, than for the straight line ABC between the same ter- minal points. The velocity, here, depends solely on the Euier's principle applied to /" the motion of a projec- tile. Fig. 190 370 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Mathemat- vertical space described by the body, and is therefore ojnnent'of the same for all curves whose altitude above OC is the same. If we divide the curves by a system of horizontal straight lines into elements which severally correspond, the elements to be multiplied by the same v's, though in the upper portions smaller for the straight line AD than for A JE>, are in the lower portions just the reverse ; and as it is here that the larger z>'s come into play, the sum upon the whole is smaller for ABC than for the straight line. Putting the origin of the coordinates at A 9 reckon- ing the abscissas x vertically downwards as positive, and calling the ordinates perpendicular thereto y 9 we obtain for the expression to be minimised 1 where g denotes the acceleration of gravity and a the distance of descent corresponding to the initial velocity. As the condition of minimum the calculus of variations gives -= Cor dy C ~ ' or y - Cd * J V% and, ultimately, THE EXTENSION OF TPIE PRINCIPLES, 371 where C and ' denote constants of Integration that pass into C= V zga and C'= 0, If for x = 0, dx/dy = and 7 be taken. Therefore, j = 2|/W. By this method, accordingly, the path of a projectile is shown to be of parabolic form. 6. Subsequently. Lagrange drew express attention The addi- ^ J ' b & ^ tions of La- to the fact that Euler's principle is applicable only in grange and cases in which the principle of vis viva holds. Jacobi pointed out that we cannot assert that Cv ds for the ac- tual motion is zmtmrnum, but simply that the variation of this expression, In its passage to an Infinitely adjacent neighboring path, Is 0. Generally, indeed, this con- dition coincides with a maximum or minimum, but it is possible that it should occur without such; and the minimum property in particular Is subject to certain limitations. For example, If a body, constrained to move on a spherical surface, is set in motion by some impulse, it will describe a great circle, generally a shortest line. But If the length of the arc described exceeds 180, It is easily demonstrated that there exist shorter Infinitely adjacent neighboring paths between the terminal points. 7.. So far, then, this fact only has been pointed out, Euler's _ that the ordinary equations of motion are obtained by but one of equating the variation of Cv ds to zero. But since the give y the 1C f + . 4 i i- r T T equations properties of the motion of bodies or of their paths may of motion, always be defined by differential expressions equated to zero, and since furthermore the condition that the variation of an integral expression shall be equal to zero is likewise given by differential expressions equated to zero, unquestionably varioiis other Integral expres- sions may be devised that give by variation the ordi- nary equations of motion, without its following that the 372 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, integral expressions in question must possess on that account any particular physical significance. Yet the ex- 8. The striking fact remains, however, that so simple must pos- an expression as Cv ds does possess the property men- sessaphys- . J ... j . . icai import, tioned, and we will now endeavor to ascertain its phys- ical import. To this end the analogies that exist be- tween the motion of masses and the motion of light, as well as between the motion of masses and the equilib- rium of strings analogies noted by John Bernoulli and by Mobius will stand us in stead. A body on which no forces act, and which there- fore preserves its velocity and direction constant, de- scribes a straight line. A ray of light passing through a homogeneous medium (one having everywhere the same index of refraction) describes a straight line. A string, acted on by forces at its extremities only, as- sumes the shape of a straight line. Elucidation A body that moves in a curved path from a point otthisim- . ... r port by the A to a point B and whose velocity v = (p(x, y, z) is a motion of a . / mass, the function of coordinates, describes between A and B a motion of a . >, . . . ray of Hght, curve for which generally J ?/ </j is a minimum. A ray equilibrium of light passing from A to B describes the same curve, if the refractive index of its medium, n= <p(x, y, z^) } is the same function of coordinates ; and in this case Cnds is a minimum. Finally, a string passing from A to B will assume this curve, if its tension S = <p (x 9 y, z) is the same above-mentioned function of co- ordinates ; and for this case, also, CSds is a minimum. The motion of a mass may be readily deduced from the equilibrium of a string, as follows. On an element ds of a string, at its two extremities, the tensions S, S f act, and supposing the force on unit of length to be jp, in addition a force JP. ds. These three forces, which we shall represent in magnitude and direction by J5A 9 THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 373 BC, BD (Fig. 191), are in equilibrium. If now, a body, The motion with a velocity v represented in magnitude and direc- deduced tion by AB, enter the element of the path ds, and re- equilibrium J of a string. ceive within the same the velocity component J3F = BD, the body will proceed on- ward with the velocity v f = BC. Let Q be an accelerating force whose action is directly opposite to that of P] then for unit of time the acceleration of this force will be Q, for unit of length of the string Q/Z', and for the element of the string (Q/ztyds. The body will move, therefore, in the curve of the string, if we establish between the forces P and the tensions S, in the case of the string, and the accelerating forces Q and the velocity v in the case of the mass, the relation D Fig. 191. The minus sign indicates that the directions of P and <2 are opposite. A closed circular string is in equilibrium when be- ^ tween the tension S of the string, everywhere constant, and the force P falling radially outwards on unit of length, the relation P = S/r obtains, where r is the radius of the circle. A body will move with the con- stant velocity v in a circle, when between the velocity and the accelerating force Q acting radially inwards the relation O V 7 r2 ^ = or Q = obtains. v r ^ r A body will move with constant velocity v in any curve when an accelerating force Q-=v*/r constantly acts The equi- libnum of closed 374 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. on it in the direction of the centre of curvature of each element. A string will lie under a constant tension *$ in any curve if a force P = S/r acting outwardly from the centre of curvature of the element is impressed on unit of length of the string. The deduc- No concept analogous to that of force is applicable motion of to the motion of light. Consequently, the deduction of th g e moSSis the motion of light from the equilibrium of a string or and 1 ?]^ 8 the motion of a mass must be differently effected. A equilibrium . . . - - of strings, mass, let us say, is moving with the velocity AB = v. (Fig. 192.) A force in the direction BD is impressed on the mass which produces an increase of velocity BE, so that by the composition of the ve- locities BC AB and BE the new velocity BF= v' is produced. If we resolve the velocities v, v f into com- ponents parallel and perpendicular to the force in question, we shall per- ceive that the parallel components alone are changed by the action of the force. This being the case, we get, denoting by k the perpendicular component, and by a and a 1 the angles v and v' make with the direction of the force, k = v sin a k = v 1 sin a' or sma v f sin a' v * If, now, we picture to ourselves a ray of light that penetrates in the direction of v a refracting plane at right angles to the direction of action of the force, and thus passes from a medium having the index of refrac- D Fig. 192. THE EXTEXSroX OF THE PRINCIPLES. 375 tion n into a medium having the index of refraction ', Develop- mentofthi* where >n/ri = r/v', this ray of light will describe the illustration < an:e path as the body in the case above. If, there- fore, we wish to imitate the motion of a mass by the motion of a ray of light (in the same curve), we must everywhere put the indices of refraction, n, proportional to the velocities. To deduce the indices of refraction from the forces, we obtain for the velocity d IT) ~ Pdq * and for the index of refraction, by analogy, where P denotes the force and dq a distance-element in the direction of the force. If ds is the element of *the path- and a the angle made by it with the direction of the force, we have then d\ ~\ = P cos a . ds (n*\ d\-\ = Pcosa . ds. For the path of a projectile, under the conditions above assumed, we obtained the expression y = 2 V ax. This same parabolic path will be described by a ray of light, if the law n = V%g(a + x) be taken as the index of refraction of the medium in which it travels. 9. We will now more accurately investigate the Relation of , . 1 - . . . . , , the mini- manner in which this minimum property is related to mum prop- \heform of the curve. Let us take, first, (Fig. 193) a format e broken straight line ABC, which intersects the straight line MN, put AB = s, BC= /, and seek the. condition that makes vs -f- v's' a minimum for the line that passes 376 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. First, do- through the fixed points A and B, where v and v r are the mini?. supposed to have different, though constant, values mum condi- , , , , * ^ , 7- -r r 1-1 - -i T~> tion. above and below J/YV'. If we displace the point B an Infinitely small distance to JO, the new line through A and 6* will remain parallel to the original one, as the drawing symbolically shows. The expression vs -f- v's' is increased hereby by an amount v m sin a -f v m sin a /f , where m = DB. The alteration is accordingly propor- tional to #sin ar+p'sinor', and the condition of minimum is that , ' f A z/sin a =0, or . 7 = . sin a v M Fig. 193. If the expression s/v -f* s '/v' is to be made a minimum, we have, in a similar way, sin a' v'' Second, the If, next, we consider the case of a string stretched ofthis^on" in the direction ABC, the tensions of which >S and S' equilibrium are different above and below MN, in this case it is o as rmg. ^^ minimum of S s -f- S f s ' that is to be dealt with. To obtain a distinct idea of this case, we may imagine the THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 377 string stretched once between A and B and thrice be- tween B and C, and finally a weight P attached. Then S = P and S' = 3 P. If we displace the point B a dis- tance m, 'any diminution of the expression Ss -\- S's' thus effected, will express the increase of work which the attached weight P performs. If Sm$ma-\- S'm sin a' = 0, no work is performed. Hence, the mini- mum of Ss -j- S's' corresponds to a maximum of work. In the present case the principle of least action is sim- ply a different form of the principle of virtual displace- ments. Now suppose that ABC is a ray of light, whose ve- Third, the -r o > application locities z f and v' above and below MN are to each other of this con- dition to the as 3 to i. The motion of light be- tween two points A and B is such that the light reaches B in a mini- mum of time. The physical reason of this is simple. The light travels from A to JB, in the form of ele- mentary waves, by different routes. Owing to the periodicity of the light, the waves generally destroy each other, and only those that reach the designated point in equal times, that is, in equal phases, produce a result. But this is true only of the waves that arrive by the minimum path and its adjacent neigh- boring paths. Hence, for the path actually taken by the light s/v + J /v is a minimum. And since the in- dices of refraction n are inversely proportional to the velocities v of the light, therefore also ns -\- n's' is a minimum. In the consideration of the motion of a mass the con- dition that vs + v's' shall be a minimum, strikes us as something novel. (Fig. 195.) If a mass, in its passage k A Dk i motion of a ray of light. V \ \ f a\ \ B Fig. \ E 195- 378 THE SCIENCE OP MECHANICS. Fourth, it a through a plane MN, receive, as the result of the action application .,. . i i T ,, TN r> /* to the mo- of a force impressed in the direction DJb y an increase of mabs a velocity, by which v, its original velocity, is made v', we have for the path actually taken by the mass the equa- tion r sin ex = v' sin a ' k. This equation, which is also the condition of minimum, simply states that only the ve- locity-component parallel to the direction of the force is altered, but that the component k at right angles thereto re- mains unchanged. Thus, here also, Euler's principle simply states a familiar fact i a a new form. (See p. 5 75. ) Form of the i o. The minimum condition v sin a + ?/ sin a'= minimum it *t r .c *j. i 1 condition may also be written, it we pass trom a nmte broken applicable .... , , r ,1 r to curves, straight line to the elements of curves, in the form v sin a -|- (v -f- dv} sin(# -f- da) = or d(v sin oi) = or, finally, v sin (x = const. In agreement with this, we obtain for the motion of light d (n sin a) = 0, n sin a = const, sinarN ' sin or = 0, = r^?^/. v ) v and for the equilibrium of a string ^(6* sin a) = 0, ,Ssina: = const. To illustrate the preceding remarks by an ex- ample, let us take the parabolic path of a projectile, where a always denotes the angle that the element of the path makes with the perpendicular. Let the ve- locity be v l/2-(# + #), and let the axis of thejy-or- dinates be horizontal. The condition v . sin a. = const, or V zg(a + x*) . dy/ds const, is identical with that which the calculus of variation gives, and we now know THE EXTEXSIOX OF THE PRINCIPLES. 379 Fig. 196. its simple physical significance. If we picture to ourselves illustration a string whose tension is S = V 2 ?(a + #). an arrange- topical v y . . cases by ment which might be effected by fixing frictionless curvilinear J motions. pulleys on horizontal parallel rods placed in a vertical plane, then passing the string through these a sufficient number of times, and finally attaching a weight to the extremity of the string, we shall obtain again, for equilibrium, the preceding condition, the phys- ical significance of which is now ob- vious. When the distances between the rods are made infinitely small the string assumes the parabolic form. In a medium, the refractive index of which varies in the vertical direction by the law n = I/ '2 g(a -f- .#), or the velocity of light in which similarly varies by the law v = 1/V zg(a -f- #), a ray of light will describe a path which is a parabola. If we should make the velocity in such a medium v l/zg^a-^x*), the ray would describe a cycloidal path, for which, not CV zg(a + #) . ds, but the expression Cds/V?>g(a-\-x) would be a minimum. ii. In comparing the equilibrium of a string with the motion of a mass, we may employ in place of a string wound round pulleys, a simple homogeneous cord, provided we subject the cord to an appropriate system of forces. We readily observe that the systems of forces that make the tension, or, as the case may be, the ve- locity, the same function of coordinates, are differ- ent. If we consider, for example, the force of gravity, Fig. 197. THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. ?he condi- v = 1/2^(0 + x). A string, however, subjected to the conse- action of gravity, forms a catenary, the tension of thLiM<icd- which is given by the formula S = vi nx, where ;// uigjuiaio- ^^ ^ ^^ constants. The analogy subsisting between the equilibrium of a string and the motion of a mass is substantially conditioned by the fact that for a string subjected to the action of forces possessing a force- function U, there obtains in the case of equilibrium the easily demonstrable equation 7+ 5 = const. This physical interpretation of the principle of least action is here illustrated only for simple cases ; but it may also be applied to cases of greater complexity, by imagining groups of surfaces of equal tension, of equal velocity, of equally refractive indices constructed which divide the string, the path of the motion, or the path of the light into elements, and by making a in such a case represent the angle which these elements make with the respective surface-normals. The principle of least action was extended to s}^stems of masses by La- grange, who presented it in the form d "2m Cvds = 0. If we reflect that the principle of vis viva, which is the real foundation of the principle of least action, is not annulled by the connection of the masses, we shall comprehend that the latter principle is in this case also valid and physically intelligible. IX, HAMILTON'S PRINCIPLE. i. It was above remarked that various expressions can be devised whose variations equated to zero give the ordinary equations of motion. An expression of this kind is contained in Hamilton's principle THE EXTEXSIOX OF THE PRINCIPLES. 381 = , or fou+ The points of identity of Hamil- ton's and D'Alem- bert's prin- ciples. of a wheel and axle. where 6U and dT denote the variations of the work and the vis viva, vanishing for the initial and terminal epochs. Hamilton's principle is easily deduced from D'Alembert's, and, conversely, D'Alemberfs from Hamilton's ; the two are in fact identical, their differ- ence being merely that of form.* 2. We shall not enter here into any extended in- Hamilton': J m principle vestigation of this subject, but simply exhibit the iden- applied to tity of the two principles by an example the same that served to illustrate the prin- ciple of D'Alembert: the motion of awheel and axle by the over-weight of one of its parts. In place of the actual motion, we may imagine, performed in the same inter- val of time, a different motion, varying in- finitely little from the actual motion, but coinciding exactly with it at the beginning and end. There are thus produced in every element of time dt, variations of the work (#7) and of the vis viva (tfT 7 ); variations, that is, of the values U and T realised in the actual motion. But for the actual mo- tion, the integral expression, above stated, is = 0, and may be employed, therefore, to determine the actual motion. If the angle of rotation performed varies in the element of time dt an amount a from the angle of the actual motion, the variation of the work corre- sponding to such an alteration will be dU= (PJ? Qr} a = Ma. * Compare, for example, Kirchhoff, Vorlesungen ilber mathematische Phy- sik, Mecha.-n.ik, p. 25 et seqq.* and JacobI, VorUsungsn uber Dynamik, p, 58. 382 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Mathemat- The vis viva, for any given angular velocity GO, is ical devel- _. Q opmentof 1 , p;?0 /O,^ ^ this case. 1 = - (/</C- -f- <2 r )-~e>'> and for a variation #<# of this velocity the variation of the vis viva is But if the angle of rotation varies in the element dt an amount a, * da , $G0 ~~- and dt The form of the integral expression, accordingly, is dt But as d^ N_^ therefore, - dt The second term of the left-hand member, though, drops out, because, by hypothesis, at the beginning and end of the motion a = 0. Accordingly, we have dt an expression which, since a in every element of time is arbitrary, cannot subsist unless generally THE EXTENSION OF TPIE PRINCIPLES. 383 Substituting for the symbols the values they represent, we obtain the familiar equation doo __ PR Qr ~Tt ~ ~ D'Alembert s principle gives the equation The same r r & ^ results ob- d N\ tained by r \fy A the use of /// I ' D'AIem-. / bert's prin- which holds for every possible displacement. We might, Clple ' in the converse order, have started from this equation, have thence passed to the expression and, finally, from the latter proceeded to the same re- sult dt dt "i / dt 3. As a second and more simple example let us illustration j , -, ,. r , , ,^ ofthispoint consider the motion of vertical descent. For every by the mo- infmitely small displacement s the equation subsists ticaide^ er " [mg m(dv/dty]s = b, in which the letters retain scent ' their conventional significance. Consequently, this equation obtains C( mv _ m <*v\ s dt= *' \ dt I which, as the- result of the relations v (mvs} dv , ds 384 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. \ d , J , n --- '- dt (m v s) = 0, tit g provided s vanishes at both limits, passes into the form i J (mgs + m v ~ j dt= 0, that is, into the form of Hamilton's principle. Thus, through all the apparent differences of the mechanical principles a common fundamental same- ness is seen. These principles are not the expression of different facts, but, in a measure, are simply views of different aspects of the same fact. x. SOME APPLICATIONS OF THE PRINCIPLES OF MECHANICS TO HYDROSTATIC AND HYDRODYNAMIC QUESTIONS. Method of ' i. We will now supplement the examples which eliminating . . r , , t . r . , . . . the action we have given of the application ot the principles oiuiqui/ of mechanics, as they applied to rigid bodies, by a m sses * f ew hydrostatic and hydrodynamic illustrations. We shall first discuss the laws of equilibrium of a weightless liquid subjected exclusively to the action of so-called molecular forces. The forces of gravity we neglect in our considerations. A liquid may, in fact, be placed in circumstances in which it will behave as if no forces of gravity acted. The method of this is due to PLA- TEAU.* It is effected by immersing olive oil in a mix- ture of water and alcohol of the same density as the oil. By the principle of Archimedes the gravity of the masses of oil in such a mixture is exactly counterbal- anced, and the liquid really acts as if it were devoid of weight. * Statique exfiirimentale et tktorzque des liquides, 1873. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 385 2. First, let us imagine a weightless liquid mass The work ot A molecular free in space. Its molecular forces, we know, act only forces de- . . . pendent on at very small distances. Taking as our radius the dis- a change in J to the liquid's tance at which the molecular forces cease to exert a superficial area. measurable influence, let us describe about a particle #, b) c in the interior of the mass a sphere the so- called sphere of action. This sphere of action is regu- larly and uniformly filled with other particles. The resultant force on the central particles a, b, c is there- fore zero. Those parts only that lie at a distance from the bounding surface less than the radius of the sphere of action are in different dynamic conditions from the particles in the interior. If the radii of curvature of Fig. 199. Fig. 200. the surface-elements of the liquid mass be all regarded as very great compared with the radius of the sphere of action, we may cut off from the mass a superficial stratum of the thickness of the radius of the sphere of action in which the particles are in different physical conditions from those in the interior. If we convey a particle a in the interior of the liquid from the posi- tion a to the position b or c, the physical condition of this particle, as well as that of the particles which take its place, will remain unchanged. No work can be done in this way. Work can be done only when a particle is conveyed from the superficial stratum into the interior, or/ from the interior into the superficial stratum. That is to say, work can be done only by a 386 THE SCIENCE OP MECHANICS. change of size of the surface. The consideration whether the density of the superficial stratum is the same as that of the Interior, or whether It is constant through- out the entire thickness of the stratum, is not primarily essential. As will readily be seen, the variation of the surface-area is equally the condition of the perform- ance of work when the liquid mass Is immersed in a second liquid, as in Plateau's experiments. Diminution We now Inquire whether the work which by the ficiTurea^ transportation of particles into the interior effects a tivl work? 1 " diminution of the surface-area Is positive or negative, that is, whether work is performed or work is ex- pended. If we put two fluid drops in contact, they will coalesce of their own accord ; and as by this action the area of the surface is diminished, it follows that the work that pro- duces a diminution of superfi- cial area in a liquid mass is posi- tive. Van der Mensbrugghe has demonstrated this by a very pretty experiment. A square wire frame is dipped into a solution of soap and water, and on the soap-film formed a loop of moistened thread is placed. If the film within the loop be punc- tured, the film outside the loop will contract till the thread bounds a circle in the middle of the liquid sur- face. But the circle, of all plane figures of the same circumference, has the greatest area ; consequently, the liquid film has contracted to a minimum. Consequent The following will now be clear. A weightless condition ,..,,- . , . -, 1 1 r of liquid liquid, the forces acting on which are molecular forces, equilibrium . . . . ... will be in equilibrium in all forms in which a system of virtual displacements produces no alteration of the liquid's superficial area. But all infinitely small changes Fig. 201. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES 387 of form may be regarded as virtual which the liquid admits without alteration of its volume. Consequently, equilibrium subsists for all liquid forms for which an infinitely small deformation produces a superficial va- riation = 0. For a given volume a minimum of super- ficial area gives stable equilibrium ; a maximum un- stable equilibrium. Among all solids of the same volume, the sphere has the least superficial area. Hence, the form which a free liquid mass will assume, the form of stable equi- librium, is the sphere. For this form a maximum of work is done ; for it, no more can be done If the . liquid adheres to rigid bodies, the form assumed is de- pendent on various collateral conditions, which render the problem more complicated. 3. The connection between the size and the farm of Mode of de- the liquid surface may be investigated as follows. We the connec- . J & tionofthe imagine the closed outer sur- size and face of the liquid to receive without alteration of the li- quid's volume an infinitely small variation. By two sets of mutually perpendicular lines , of curvature, we cut up the original surface into infinitely small rectangular ele- ments. At the angles of these elements, on the original surface, we erect normals to the surface, and determine thus the angles of the corresponding elements of the varied surface. To every element dO of the original surface there now corresponds an element dO' of the varied surface ; by an infinitely small displacement, dn, along the normal, outwards or inwards, dO passes into dO' and into a corresponding variation of magnitude. Let dp, dq be the sides of the element dO. For the 388 THE SCIENCE 0/<* MECHANICS. The mathe- sides dp', dq of the element dO', then, these relations matical de- velopment obtain of this method. , , din r where r and / are the radii of curvature of the princi- pal sections touching the elements of the lines of cur- vature/, q, or the so-called principal radii of curva- ture. 15 ' The radius of curvature of an outwardly convex element is reckoned as positive, that of an outwardly concave element as negative, in the usual manner. For the variation of the element we obtain, accordingly, #. dO^=dO' dO dpdq(\ + Neglecting the higher powers of dn we get 1 ' " ' ~ i.dO. The variation of the whole surface, then, is expressed by ^j\dn.dO .... (1) Furthermore, the normal displacements must be so chosen that that is, they must be such that the sum of the spaces produced by the outward and inward displacements of * The normal at any point of a surface is cut by normals at infinitely neigh- boring points that lie in two directions on the surface from the original point, these two directions being at right angles to each other ; and the distances from the surface at which these normals cut are the two principal, or extreme, radii of curvature of the surface. Trans. Fig. 203. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 389 the superficial elements (in the latter case reckoned as negative) shall be equal to zero, or the volume remain constant. Accordingly, expressions fi") and (2) can be putAconditi< s J * ' on which simultaneously = only if i/r -f~ I / r ' ^ as the same value thegenen for all points of the surface. This will be readily seen pressions _ , ,, . . , . T , , obtained, from the following consideration. Let the elements depends. dO of the original surface be symbolically represented by the elements of the line AX (Fig. 204) and let the normal displacements Sn be erected as ordinates thereon in the plane JS, the outward displacements up- wards as positive and the inward displacements down- wards as negative. Join the extremities E of these ordinates so as to form a curve, and take the quadra- ^^ n ture of the curve, - Fig. 204. reckoning the sur- face above A X as positive and that below It as nega- tive. For all systems of dn for which this quadra- ture 0, the expression (2) also = 0, and all such systems of displacements are admissible, that is, are virtual displacements. Now let us erect as ordinates, in the plane E' , the values of i/r + i/r that belong to the elements dO. A case may be easily Imagined in which the expressions (i) and (2) assume coincidently the value zero. Should, however, i/r+ i/^ have different values for different elements, it will always be possible without altering the zero-value of the expression (2), so to distribute the displacements d n that the expression (i) shall be different from zero. Only on the condition that i/r + i/r' has the same value for all the elements, is expres- 39 o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. sion (i) necessarily and universally equated to zero with expression (2). The sum Accordingly, from the two conditions (i) and (2) it eq^fiibdum follows that I//' + l/r'= const ; that is to say, the sum S,nstantforof the reciprocal values of the principal radii of curva- su?fa*ce le ture, or of the radii of curvature of the principal nor- mal sections, is, in the case of equilibrium, constant for the whole surface. By this theorem the dependence of the area of a liquid surface on its superficial /?r;;z is defined. The train of reasoning here pursued was first developed by GAUSS,* in a much fuller and more special form. It is not difficult, however, to present its essential points in the foregoing simple manner. Application 4. A liquid mass, left wholly to itself, assumes, as erai cond?-" we have seen, the spherical form, and presents an ab- Smemipted solute minimum of superficial area. The equation liquid mas- 1 ^ + ^, = onst - s here visibly fulfilled in the form 2/J? = const, JR. being the radius of the sphere. If the free surface of the liquid mass be bounded by two solid circular rings, the planes of which are parallel to each other and perpendicular to the line joining their mid- dle points, the surface of the liquid mass will assume the form of a surface of revolution. The nature of the meridian curve and the volume of the enclosed mass are determined by the radius of the rings J?, by the distance between the circular planes, and by the value of the expression \/r -\-\/r' for the surface of revolu- tion. When 1 -U 1 - 1 4- 1 -I 7" t V~"7~ h co ~~ '&' the surface of revolution becomes a cylindrical surface. For 1/r + l/r'= 0, where one normal section is'con- * Principia Generalia, Theories Figures Fluidorum in Statu JEquilibrii Gottingen, 1830; Werke, Vol. V, 29, GSttingen, 1867. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 391 vex and the other concave, the meridian curve assumes the form of the catenary. Plateau visibly demonstrated these cases by pouring oil on two circular rings of wire fixed in the mixture of alcohol and water above men- tioned. Now let us picture to ourselves a liquid mass Liquidmas 1 tit r r -. - -, -, . ses whose bounded by surface-parts for which the expression surfaces are 1/r 4- 1/V' has a positive value, and by other parts cave and . , partly con- for which the same expression has a negative value, vex or, more briefly expressed, by convex and concave sur- faces. It will be readily seen that any displacement of the superficial elements outwards along the normal will produce in the concave parts a diminution of the superficial area and in the convex parts an increase. Consequently, work is performed when concave surfaces move outwards and convex surfaces inwards. Work also is performed when a superficial portion moves outwards for which 1/r + 1/r' -)- a, while simulta- neously an equal superficial portion for which 1 f r -f- 1/r' > a moves inwards. Hence, when differently curved surfaces bound a liquid mass, the convex parts are forced inwards and the concave outwards till the condition 1/r + 1/r' = const is fulfilled for the entire surface. Similarly, when a connected liquid mass has several isolated surface- parts, bounded by rigid bodies, the value of the ex- pression 1/r + 1/r' must, for the state of equilibrium be the same for all free portions of the surface. For example, if the space between the two circular Experi- mental rings in the mixture of alcohol and water above re- illustration ferred to, be filled with oil, it is possible, by the use conditions, of a sufficient quantity of oil, to obtain a cylindrical surface whose two bases are spherical segments. The curvatures of the lateral and basal surfaces will accord- 392 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. ingly fulfil the condition l/R + l/oo = l/p + I/A or p = 2^?, where p is the radius of the sphere and R that of the circular rings. Plateau verified this conclusion by experiment. Uqdm- 5 . Let us now study a weightless liquid mass which iSfhiT encloses a hollow space. The condition that 1/r + 1/r' low space. shal][ haye the same value f or the interior and exterior surfaces, is here not realisable. On the contrary, as this sum has always a greater positive value for the closed exterior surface than for the closed interior sur- face, the liquid will perform work, and, flowing from the outer to the inner surface, cause the hollow space to disappear. If, however, the hollow space be occu- pied by a fluid or gaseous substance subjected to a de- terminate pressure, the work done in the last-men- tioned process can be counteracted by the work ^ex- pended to produce the compression, and thus equilib- rium may be produced. Theme- Let us picture to ourselves a liquid mass confined properties between two 'similar and similarly situated surfaces of bubbles. very near eacri other. A bubble is such a system. Its primary condition of equi- librium is the exertion of an excess of pressure by the inclosed gaseous con- tents. If the sum 1/r + 1/r' has the value + a for the exterior surface, it will Fig. 205. haye for the interior surface very nearly the value a. A bubble, left wholly to itself, will al- ways assume the spherical form. If we conceive such a spherical bubble, the thickness of which we neglect, the total diminution of its superficial area, on the shortening of the radius r by dr, will be ibrxdr. If, therefore, in the diminution of the surface by unit of area the work A is performed, then A.rfrndr will THE EXTENSION OP THE PRINCIPLES. 393 be the total amount of work to be compensated for by the work of compression p.^r^ndr expended by the pressure f on the inclosed contents. From this follows ^A/r =p \ from which A may be easily calcu- lated if the measure of r is obtained and p is found by means of a manometer introduced in the bubble. An open spherical bubble cannot subsist. If an Open . bubbles. open -bubble is to become a figure of equilibrium, the sum 1/r + V'"' must not on ly be constant for each of the two bounding surfaces, but must also be equal for both. Owing to the opposite curvatures of the sur- faces, then, l/r-\- 1 //' = (). Consequently, r = r' for all points. Such a surface is called a minimal sur- face ; that is, it has the smallest area consistent with its containing certain closed contours. It is also a sur- face of zero-sum of principal curvatures ; and its ele- ments, as we readily see, are saddle-shaped. Surfaces of this kind are obtained by constructing closed space- curves of wire and dipping the wire into a solution of soap and water.* The soap-film assumes of its own accord the form of the curve mentioned. 6. Liquid figures of equilibrium, made up of thin Plateau's films, possess a peculiar property. The work of the u?e?of equi forces of gravity affects the entire mass of a liquid ; that of the molecular forces is restricted to its super- ficial film. Generally, the work of the forces of grav- ity preponderates. But in thin films the molecular forces come into very favorable conditions, and it is possible to produce the figures in question without difficulty in the open air. Plateau obtained them by dipping wire polyhedrons into solutions of soap and water. Plane liquid films are thus formed, which meet * The mathematical problem of determining such a surface, when the forms of the wires are given, is called Plateau's Problem. Trans. 394 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. one another at the edges of the framework. When thin plane films are so joined that they meet at a hol- low edge, the law l/r + l/r' ~ const no longer holds for the liquid surface, as this sum has the value zero for plane surfaces and for the hollow edge a very large negative value. Conformably, therefore, to the views above reached, the liquid should run out of the films, the thickness of which would constantly decrease, and escape at the edges. This is, in fact, what happens. But when the thickness of the films has decreased to a certain point, then, for physical reasons, which are, as it appears, not yet perfectly known, a state of equilib- rium is effected. Yet, notwithstanding the fact that the fundamental equation 1/r+l/V' = const is not fulfilled in these fig- ures, because very thin liquid films, especially films of viscous liquids, present physical conditions somewhat different from those on which our original suppositions were based, these figures present, nevertheless, in all cases a minimum of superficial area. The liquid films, connected with the wire edges and with one another, always meet at the edges by threes at approximately equal angles of 120, and by fours in corners at approxi- mately equal angles. And it is geometrically demon- strable that these relations correspond to a minimum of superficial area. In the great diversity of phenom- ena here discussed but one fact is expressed, namely that the molecular forces do work, positive work, when the superficial area is diminished. The reason 7- The figures of equilibrium which Plateau ob- eiuiHbrium tained by dipping wire polyhedrons in solutions of metrical, soap, form systems of liquid films presenting a re- markable symmetry. The question accordingly forces itself upon us, What has equilibrium to do with sym- THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 395 metry and regularity ? The explanation is obvious. In every symmetrical system every deformation that tends to destroy the symmetry is complemented by an equal and opposite deformation that tends to restore it. In each deformation positive or negative work is done. One condition, therefore, though not an absolutely sufficient one, that a maximum or minimum of work corresponds to the form of equilibrium, is thus sup- plied by symmetry. Regularity is successive symme- try. There is no reason, therefore, to be astonished that the forms of equilibrium are often symmetrical and regular. 8. The science of mathematical hydrostatics arose The figure . , . . ., . , _ 7 _ oftheearth in connection with a special problem that of the figure \\ilk 3 Fig. 206. of the earth. Physical and astronomical data had led Newton and Huygens to the view that the earth is an oblate ellipsoid of revolution. NEWTON attempted to calculate this oblateness by conceiving the rotating earth as a fluid mass, and assuming that all fluid fila- ments drawn from the surface to the centre exert the same pressure on the centre. HUYGENS'S assumption was that the directions of the forces are perpendicular to the superficial elements. BOUGUER combined both assumptions. CLAIRAUT, finally (Theorie de la figure de la terre, Paris, 1743), pointed out that the fulfilment of both conditions does not assure the subsistence of equilibrium. 396 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Clairaut's point of view. Conditions of equilib- rium of Clairaut's canals. Clairaut's starting-point is this. If the fluid earth is in equilibrium, we may, without disturbing its equi- librium, imagine any portion of it solidified. Accord- ingly, let all of it be solidified but a canal AB, of any form. The liquid in this canal must also be in equilib- rium. But now the conditions which control equilib- rium are more easily investigated. If equilibrium exists in every imaginable canal of this kind, then the entire mass will be in equilibrium. Incidentally Clairaut re- marks, that the Newtonian assumption is realised when the canal passes through the centre (illustrated in Fig. 206, cut 2), and the Huygenian when the canal passes along the surface (Fig. 206, cut 3). But the kernel of the problem, according to Clai- raut, lies in a different view. In all imaginable canals, Z Fig. 207. Fi &- 2o8 - even in one which returns into itself, the fluid must be in equilibrium. Hence, if cross-sections be made at any two points M and N of the canal of Fig. 207, the two fluid columns MPN and MQN must exert on the surfaces of section at M and N equal pressures. The terminal pressure of a fluid column of any such canal cannot, therefore, depend on the length and the form of the fluid column, but must depend solely on the po- sition of its terminal points. Imagine in the fluid in question a canal MN of any form (Fig. 208) referred to a system of rectangular co- THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 397 ordinates. Let the fluid have the constant density p Mathemat- and let the force-components X, Y, Z acting on unit of sion of mass of the fluid in the coordinate directions, be f unc- ditions, and - -r *ke conse- tions of the coordinates x, y, z of this mass. Let the quent gen- . eral condi- element of length of the canal be called ds, and let its tjon of liquid equi- projections on the axes be dx, dy, dz. The force-corn- librium. ponents acting on unit of mass in the direction of the canal are then X(dxjds\ Y(dyjds\ Z(dzjds\ Let q be the cross-section ; then, the total force Impelling the element of mass pqds in the direction ds, is This force must be balanced by the Increment of pres- sure through the element of length, and consequently must be put equal to q . dp. We obtain, accordingly, dp = p (Xdx + Ydy + Zdz]. The difference of pres- sure (/) between the two extremities M and N is found- by integrating this expression from Mto N. But as this difference is not dependent on the form of the canal but solely on the position of the extremities M and N, it follows that p (Xdx + Ydy + Zdz), or, the density being constant, Xdx + Ydy + Zdz, must be a com- plete differential. For this it Is necessary that dU dU dU where 7 is a function of coordinates. Hence, according to Clairaut, the general condition of liqitid equilibrium is, that the liquid be controlled by forces 'which can be ex- pressed as the partial differential coefficients of one and the same fimction of coordinates. 9. The Newtonian forces of gravity, and in fact all central forces, forces that masses exert in the direc- tions of their lines of junction and which are functions 39 8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. character of the distances between these masses, possess this foVc h e e s property. Under the action of forces of this character produce 6 10 the equilibrium of fluids is possible. If we know U, eqm i num replace the first equation by tdU , >dU. <dUj ' v^ ..-- dx + -T- ay + T - dz up P \^dx dy dz or dp = p dU and / = p U-\- const. The totality of all the points for which U = const is a surface, a so-called /<??'<?/ surface. For this surface also / = *#//. As all the force-relations, and, as we now see, all the pressure-relations, are determined by the nature of the function U, the pressure-relations, accordingly, supply a diagram of the force-relations, as was before remarked in page 98. ciairaufs In the theory of Clairaut, here presented, is con- fem of the rained, beyond all doubt, the idea that underlies the potential. doctrine of force-function or potential, which was after- wards developed with such splendid results by La- place, Poisson, Green, Gauss, and others. As soon as our attention has been directed to this property of certain forces, namely, that they can be expressed as derivatives of the same function U", it is at once recog- nised as a highly convenient and economical course to investigate in the place of the forces themselves the function U. If the equation df = p (Xdx + Ydy + Zdz) = pdU be examined, it will be seen that Xdx-{- Ydy -\- Zdz is the element of the work performed by the forces on unit of mass of the fluid in the displacement d 's, whose projections are dx, dy, dz. Consequently, if we trans- port unit mass from a point for which &= C : to an- THE EXTENSION" OF THE PRINCIPLES, 399 other point, indifferently chosen, for which U = C<>, character- ,1 r , r i isticsof the or, more generally, from the surface u=C l to the force-func- surface U=^ C 2 , we perform, no matter by what path the conveyance has been effected, the same amount of work. All the points of the first surface present, with respect to those of the second, the same difference of pressure \ the relation always being such, that where the quantities designated by the same indices belong to the same surface. 10. Let us picture to ourselves a group of such character- very closely adjacent surfaces, of which every two sue- level, or cessive ones differ from each other by the same, very til?! sur- n small, amount of work required to transfer a mass from one to the other ; in other words, imagine the surfaces U= C, U^= C+ dC, U= C+zdC, and so forth. A mass moving on a level surface evidently per- forms no work. Hence, every component force in a direction tangential to the surface is = ; and the di- rection of the resultant forceis everywhere normal to the surface. If we call dn the element of the normal intercepted between two consecutive surf aces, and/ the force requisite to con- vey unit mass from the one surface to the other pjg. 209. through this element, the work done is/, dn = d C. As d C is by hypothesis every- where constant, the force /== dCjdn is inversely pro- portional to the distance between the surfaces consid- 4 oo THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. ered. If, therefore, the surfaces U are known, the directions of the forces are given by the elements of a system of curves everywhere at right angles to these surfaces, and the inverse distances between, the sur- faces measure the magnitude of the forces.* These sur- faces and curves also confront us in the other depart- ments of physics. - We meet them as equipotential surfaces and lines of force in electrostatics and mag- netism, as isothermal surfaces and lines of flow in the theory'of the conduction of heat, and as equipotential surfaces and lines of flow in the treatment of electrical and liquid currents. illustration ii. We will now illustrate the fundamental idea of ?a;u?s a doc- Clairaut's doctrine by another, very simple example. s?mpie ya Imagine two mutually perpendicular planes to cut the example. paper at ^^ angles j n the straight lines OX and OY (Fig. 210). We assume that a force-function exists jj = X y } where x and y are the distances from the two planes. The force-components parallel to OX and >Fare ihen respectively ^7___ Jx ~ y and Y = x ~~ dy ~ * The same conclusion may be reached as follows. Imagine a wr.ter pipe laid from New York to Key West, with its ends turning up vertically, and of glass Let a quantity of water be poured into it, and when equilibrium is attained, let its height be marked on the glass at both ends. These two marks will be on one level surface. Now pour in a little more water and again mark the heights at both ends. The additional water in New York balances the- additional water in Key West. The gravities of the two are equal. But their quantities are proportional to the vertical distances between the marks. ' Hence the force of gravity on a fixed quantity of water is inversely as those vertical distances, that is, inversely as the distances between consecutive level surfaces. Trans. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 401 The level surfaces are cylindrical surfaces, whose generating lines are at right angles to the plane of the paper, and whose directrices, xy = const, are equi- lateral hyperbolas. The lines of force are obtained by turning the first mentioned system of curves through an angle of 45 in the plane of the paper about O. If a unit of mass pass from the point r to by the route rp'O, or rqO } or by any other route, the work done is always Op X O q. If we imagine a closed canal OprqO filled with a liquid, the liquid in the ca- nal will be in equi- librium. If transverse sections be made at any two points, each section will sustain Fig. 210. at both its surfaces the same pressure. We will now modify the example slightly. Let the A modifica- r , _, _.,, i -. tion of this forces be X = j>, Y= a, where a has a constant example, value. There exists now no function U so constituted that X= dUjdx and Y= dU/dy ; for in such a case it would be necessary that dX/dy = d Y/dx, which is ob- viously not true. There is therefore no force-function, and consequently no level surfaces. If unit of mass be transported from r to O by the way of p, the work done is a X Oq. If the transportation be effected by the route rqO, the work done is a X O q + Op X O q. If the canal OprqO were filled with a liquid, the liquid could not be in equilibrium, but would be forced to 02 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. rotate constantly in the direction OfrgO. Currents of this character, which revert into themselves but con- tinue their motion indefinitely, strike us as something quite foreign to our experience. Our attention, how- ever, is directed by this to an important property of the forces of nature, to the property, namely, that the work of such forces may be expressed as a function of coordinates. Whenever exceptions to this principle are observed, we are disposed to regard them as appa- rent, and seek to clear up the difficulties involved, 's is. We shall now examine a few problems of liquid o- motion. The founder of the theory of hydrodynamics is . TORRICELLI. Torricelli,* by observations on liquids dis- charged through orifices in the bottom of vessels, dis- covered the following law. If the time occupied in the complete discharge of a vessel be divided into * equal intervals, and the quantity discharged in the last, the th ; interval be taken as the unit, there will be dis- charged in the ( l) th , the ( a)* , the ( 3 ) th interval, respectively, the quantities 3, 5, 7 . . . - and so forth. An analogy between the motion of falling bodies and the motion of liquids is thus clearly sug- gested. Further, the perception is an immediate^ one, that the most curious consequences would ensue if the liquid, by its reversed velocity of efflux, could rise higher than its original level. Torricelli remarked, in fact, that it can rise at the utmost to this height, and assumed that it would rise exactly as high if all resistances could be removed. Hence, neglecting all resistances, the velocity of efflux, v, of a liquid dis- charged through an orifice in the bottom of a vessel is connected with the height h of the surface of the liquid by the equation v = V*gh ; that is to say, the velocity * De Motu Gravium Projectorum, 1643. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES, 403 of efflux is the final velocity of a body freely falling through the height //, or liquid-head ; for only with this velocity can the liquid just rise again to the sur- face. * Torricelli's theorem consorts excellently with the Varignon's i i i r i -i deduction rest of our knowledge of natural processes: but weoftheveio- . city of feel, nevertheless, the need of a more exact insight, efflux. VARIGNON attempted to deduce the principle from the relation between force and the momentum generated by force. The familiar equation pt-=mv gives, if by a we designate the area of the basal orifice, by h the pressure-head of the liquid, by s its specific gravity, by g the acceleration of a freely falling body, by v the velocity of efflux, and by r a small interval of time, this result . avrs _ ahs . r = . v or v 2 =gh. & Here ahs represents the pressure acting during the time r on the liquid mass avrs/g. Remembering that v is a final velocity, we get, more exactly, if . a-rr- . rs ahs . r = 2 . v* and thence the correct formula v* = 2gh. 13. DANIEL BERNOULLI investigated the motions of fluids by the principle of vis viva. We w?ll now treat the preceding case from this point of view, only ren- dering the idea more modern. The equation which we employ isjfs = mv 2 /2. In a vessel of transverse sec- tion q (Fig. 211), into which a liquid of the specific * The early inquirers deduce cheir propositions in, the incomplete form of proportions, and therefore usually put V proportional to ^gh or ^~h. 404 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Daniel Ber- gravity s is poured till the head h is reached, the surface treatment sinks, say, the small distance dh, and the liquid mass problem, q . dh . s/g is discharged with the velocity p. The work done is the same as though the weight q . dh . s had descended the distance h. The path of the motion in the vessel is not of consequence here. It makes no difference whether the stratum q . dh is discharged directly through the basal orifice, or passes, say, to a position a, while the liquid at a is displaced to I, that at b displaced to c, and that at c discharged. The work done is in each case q . dh , s . h. Equating this work to the vis viva of the discharged liquid, we get q . dh . s dk Fig. air. .. . q . dh . s . h = -, or v = i/2g7i. The sole assumption of this argument is that all the work done in the vessel appears as vis viva in the liquid discharged, that is to say, that the velocities within the vessel and the work spent in overcoming friction therein may be neglected. This assumption is not very far from the truth if vessels of sufficient width are employed, and no violent rotatory t motion is set up. The law of Let us neglect the gravity of the liquid in the ves- liquid efflux . , . ...... , . . when pro- sel, and imagine it loaded by a movable piston, on whose surface-unit the pressure p falls. If the piston be displaced a distance dh, the liquid volume q . dh will be discharged. Denoting the density of the liquid by p and its velocity by v, we then shall have sure of pistons. V 2 \2j> q . p . dh = q . dh . p -^ , or v = -vl . *J if /w/ THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 405 Wherefore, under the same pressure, different liquids are discharged with velocities inversely proportional to the square root of their density. It is generally sup- posed that this theorem is directly applicable to gases. Its form, indeed, is correct ; but the deduction fre- quently employed involves an error, which we shall now expose. 14. Two vessels (Fig. 212) of equal cross-sections The a are placed side by side and connected with each other SSsla by a small aperture in the base of their dividing walls, lov^of For the velocity of flow through this aperture we ob- gases ' tain, under the same suppositions as before, dh s or v = V i g ( Ji , k. ^ -j. ^ ~ 0" 21 " <-> ^ j. ^y If we neglect the gravity of the liquid and imagine the pressures p^ and p z produced by pistons, we shall similarly have v=V 2(/ 1 / 2 )/P- ^ or example, if the pistons employed be loaded with the weights P and P/2, the weight P will sink the distance h and P/% will rise the distance h. The work (P/z)/i is thus left, to generate the vis viva of the effluent fluid. A gas under such circumstances would behave dif- ferently. Supposing the gas to flow from the vessel containing the load Pinto that contain- ing the load P/2, the first weight will fall a distance //, the second, however, since under half the pressure a gas dou- bles its volume, will rise a distance 2/1, so that the work P/i (P/2) 2/^ = would be performed. In the case of gases, accordingly, some additional work, competent to produce the flow between the vessels must be performed. This work the gas itself performs, by expanding, and by overcoming by its force of expan- dh The behav- iour of a gas under the as- sumed con- ditions. Fig. 212. 406 ' THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The result sion a pressure. The expansive force/ and the volume ibrrrTbut^ 1 w of a gas stand to each other in the familiar relation magnftude./2/ = ^, where k, so long as the temperature of the gas remains unchanged, is a constant. Supposing the volume of the gas to expand under the pressure f by an amount dw, the work done is For an expansion from W Q to w, or for an increase of pressure from / to /, we get for the work Conceiving by this work a volume of gas ze/ of density p, moved with the velocity v, we obtain ._ V The velocity of efflux is, accordingly, in this case also inversely proportional to the square root of the density ; Its magnitude, however, is not the same as in the case of a liquid, incom- But even this last view is very defective. Rapid pletenessof _ r i 1 r -, this view, changes of the volumes of gases are always accom- panied with changes of temperature, and, consequently also with changes of expansive force. For this reason, questions concerning the motion of gases cannot be dealt with as questions of pure mechanics, but always involve questions of heat. [Nor can even a thermo- dynamical treatment always suffice : it is sometimes necessary to go back to the consideration of molecular motions.] 15. The knowledge that a compressed gas contains stored- up work, naturally suggests the inquiry, whether THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 407 this is not also true of compressed liquids. As a mat- Relative r ^ volumes of ter of fact, every liquid under pressure ts compressed, compressed 3 J ^- r gases and To effect compression work is requisite, which reap- liquids. pears the moment the liquid expands. But this work, in the case of the mobile liquids, is very small. Imag- ine, in Fig. 213, a gas and a mobile liquid of the same volume, measured by OA, subjected to the same pres- sure, a pressure of one atmosphere, designated b} r AB. If the pressure be reduced to one-half an atmosphere, the volume of the gas will be doubled, while that of the liquid will be increased by only about 25 millionths. The expansive work of the gas is represented by the surface ABDC, that of the liquid by ABLK, where H A J^ =0-00002 5 OA. If the pressure decrease till it become zero, the total work of the liquid is represented by the surface ABI, where AI = 0-00005 OA, and the total work of the gas by the surface contained between AB, the infinite straight line ACEG . . . ., and the infinite hyperbola branch BDFH . . . . Ordinarily, therefore, the work of expansion of liquids may be neglected. There are however phenomena, for ex- ample, the soniferous vibrations of liquids, in which work of this very order plays a principal part. In such cases, the changes of temperature the liquids undergo must also be considered. We thus see that it is only by a fortunate concatenation of circumstances that we are at liberty to consider a phenomenon with any close 4 o8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. approximation to the truth as a mere matter of molar mechanics. The hydro- 1 6. We now come to the idea which DANIEL BER- principie NOULLi sought to apply in his work Hydro dynamic a, sive Bernoulli, de Viribus et Motibus Fluidorum Comment arii (1738). When a liquid sinks, the space through which its cen- tre of gravity actually descends (des census actualis} is equal to the space through which the centre of gravity of the separated parts affected with the velocities ac- quired in the fall can ascend (as census fotentialis}. This Idea, we see at once, is identical with that employed by Huygens. Imagine a vessel filled with a liquid (Fig. 214) \ and let its horizontal cross- section at the distance x from the plane of the basal orifice, be called f(x\ Let the liquid move and its surface descend a distance dx. The centre of gravity, then, descends the distance xf(x) . dx/M, where JkT= Cf(x) dx. If k is the space of potential ascent of the liquid In a cross- lg ' 2I4 ' section equal to unity, the space of po- tential ascent in the cross-section /(#) will be k/f(x} 2 , and the space of potential ascent of the centre of gravity will be r dx } 7(^\ N J Jv*) k~- M ~ M* where , For the displacement of the liquid's surface through a distance dx, we get, by the principle assumed, both JV and k changing, the equation #/(#) dx = Ndk + kdN. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 409 This equation was employed by Bernoulli in the solu- The parai- . ... .. i lelism of tion of various problems. It will be easily seen, that strata. Bernoulli's principle can be employed with success only when the relative velocities of the single parts of the liquid are known. Bernoulli assumes, an assump- tion apparent in the formulas, that all particles once situated in a horizontal plane, continue their motion in a horizontal plane, and that the velocities in the different horizontal planes are to each other in the in- verse ratio of the sections of the planes. This is the assumption of the parallelism of strata. It does not, in many cases, agree with the facts, and in others its agreement is incidental. When the vessel as compared with the orifice of efflux is very wide, no assumption concerning the motions within the vessel is necessary, as we saw in the development of Torricelli's theorem. 17. A few isolated cases of liquid motion were The water- treated by NEWTON and JOHN BERNOULLI. We shall of Newton, consider here one to which a familiar law is directly applic- able. A cylindrical U-tube with vertical branches is filled with a liquid (Fig. 215). The length of the entire liquid column is /, If in one of the branches the column be forced a distance x below the level, the column in lg ' 2I5 ' the other branch will rise the distance x, and the difference of level corresponding to the excursion x will be 2 x. If a is the transverse section of the tube and s the liquid's specific gravity, the force brought into play when the excursion x is made, will be zasx, which, since it must move a mass al$/gv?i\l determine the acceleration (2 asx}/(als/g) = (2^//) x, or, for unit 4io THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. excursion, the acceleration 2-/7. We perceive that pendulum vibrations of the duration will take place. The liquid column, accordingly, vi- brates the same as a simple pendulum of half the length of the column. The liquid A similar, but somewhat more general, problem was of joh n um treated by John Bernoulli. The two branches of a Bernoulli. . , . , J , ._. - , . , cylindrical tube (Fig. 216), curved in any manner, make with the horizon, at the points at which the surfaces of the liquid move, the angles a and ft. Displacing one of the surfaces the dis- tance x 9 the other sur- r rr lace suners an equal displacement. A difference of level is thus produced x (sin a -f- sin/?), and we obtain, by a course of reason- ing similar to that of the preceding case, employing the same symbols, the formula r= l (sin or -f- sin/?) ' The laws of the pendulum hold true exactly for the liquid pendulum of Fig. 215 (viscosity neglected), even for vibrations of great amplitude ; while for the filar pendulum the law holds only approximately true for small excursions. 1 8* The centre of gravity of a liquid as a whole can rise only as high as it would have to fall to produce its velocities. In every case in which this principle appears to present an exception, it can be shown that the excep- FHE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 411 tion is only apparent. One example is Hero's fountain. Hero's J * r . r . fountain. This apparatus, as we know, consists of three vessels, which may be designated in the descending order as A 9 B, C. The water in the open vessel A falls through a tube into the closed vessel C ; the air displaced in C exerts a pressure on the water in the closed vessel B, and this pressure forces the water in B in a jet above A whence it falls back to its original level. The water in B rises, it is true, considerably above the level of B, but in actuality it merely flows by the circuitous route of the fountain and the vessel A to the much lower level of C. Another ap- parent exception to the principle in question is that of Montgol- fi e r ' s hydra ulic ram, in which the liquid by its own gravitational work appears to rise considerably above its original level-. The liquid flows (Fig. 217) from a cistern A through a long pipe RR and a valve V 9 which opens inwards, into a vessel B. When the current becomes rapid enough, the valve V is forced shut, and a liquid mass m affected with the velocity v is suddenly arrested in RR, which must 4 I2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. be deprived of its momentum. If this be done in the time /, the liquid can exert during this time a pressure q = mv/t, to which must be added its hydrostatical pressure /. The liquid, therefore, will be able, during this interval of time, to penetrate with a pressure/ -f ^ through a second valve into a pila Heronis, H, and in consequence of the circumstances there existing will rise" to a higher level in the ascension-tube SS than that corresponding to its simple pressure p. It is to be observed here, that a considerable portion of the liquid must first flow off into JB, before a velocity requi- site to close Fis produced by the liquid's work in JZR. A small portion only rises above the original level ; the greater portion flows from A into B. If the liquid discharged from -5* were collected, it could be easily proved that the centre of gravity of the quantity thus discharged and of that received in B lay, as the result of various losses, actually below the level of A. The principle of the hydraulic ram, that of the An illustra- tion, which . . , , , ., , . . ., elucidates transference of work done by a large liquid mass to a the action of the hy- draulic ram , smaller one, which thus acquires a great vis viva, may be illus- trated in the following very simple manner. Close the narrow opening O of a funnel and plunge it, with its wide opening down- wards, deep into a large vessel of water. If the finger closing the upper opening be quickly removed, the space inside the funnel will rapidly fill with water, and the surface of the water outside the funnel will sink. The work performed Fig. 218. THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 413 Is equivalent to the descent of the contents of the funnel from the centre of gravity ^ of the superficial stratum to the centre of gravity S' of the contents of the fun- nel. If the vessel is sufficiently wide the velocities in it are all very small, and almost the entire vis viva is concentrated in the contents of the funnel. If all the parts of the contents had the same velocities, they could all rise to the original level, or the mass as a whole could rise to the height at which its centre of gravity was coincident with S. But in the narrower sections of the funnel the velocity of the parts is greater than in the wider sections, and the former therefore contain by far the greater part of the vis viva. Consequently, the liquid parts above are vio- lently separated from the parts below and thrown out through the neck of the funnel high above the original surface. The remainder, however, are left considerably below that point, and the centre of grav- ity of the whole never as much as reaches the original level of S. 19. One of the most important achievements of Hydrostatic Daniel Bernoulli is his distinction of hydrostatic and dynamic 777. roi pressure. tiydrodynamic pressure. The pressure which liquids exert is altered by motion ; and the pressure of a liquid in motion may, according to the circumstances, be greater or less than that of the liquid at rest with the same arrangement of parts. We will illustrate this by a simple example. The vessel A, which has the form of a body of revolution with vertical axis, is kept Flg ' 2I9> constantly filled with a frictionless liquid, so that its surface at mn does not change during the discharge at kl. We will reckon the vertical distance of a particle 4 i4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Determina- from the surface /// n downwards as positive and call tion of the _ .. P . . pressures it z. Let us follow the course of a prismatic element of generally ... . . . . acting in li- volume, whose horizontal base-area is a and height 6, quids in . . . . , _ motion. m its downward motion, neglecting, on the assump- tion of the parallelism of strata, all velocities at right angles to z. Let the density of the liquid be p, the velocity of the element v, and the pressure, which is dependent 'on z, p. If the particle descend the dis- tance dz, we have by the principle of vis viva (1) that is, the increase of the vis viva of the element is equal to the work of gravity for the displacement in question, less the work of the forces of pressure of the liquid. The pressure on the upper surface of the element is ap y that on the lower surface is a \_p -|r (dp/dz}fl~\. The element sustains, therefore, if the pressure in- crease downwards, an upward pressure a (dp/dz)p ; and for any displacement dz of the element, the work a(dp/dz)/3dz must be deducted. Reduced, equation (i) assumes the form ;2\ dp and, integrated, gives * .......... (2) If we express the velocities in two different hori- zontal cross-sections <z 1 and a 2 at the depths z^ and z 2 below the surface, by v^ v 2 , and the corresponding pressures by/ 1? / 2 , we may write equation (2) in the form THE EXTENSION' OF THE PRINCIPLES. 415 Taking for our cross-section a l the surface, z 1 = 0, J p^-=. ; and as the same quantity of liquid flows through P^?|^ ith all cross-sections in the same interval of time, a l v l =the^ircum- a 2 v 2 . Whence, finally, the motion. The pressure / 2 of the liquid in motion (the hydro- dynamic pressure) consists of the pressure pg% 2 of the liquid at rest (the hydrostatic pressure) and of a pres- sure (p/2)z;2 [(#2 #f )/# 1] dependent on the density, the velocity of flow, and the cross-sectional areas. In cross- sections larger than the surface of the liquid, the hydrodynamic pressure is greater than the hydrostatic, and vice versa. A clearer idea of the significance of Bernoulli's illustration of these re- principle may be obtained by imagining the liquid m suits by the the vessel A unacted on by gravity, and its outflow quids under . r pressures produced by a constant pressure p. on the surface, produced * * A by pistons. Equation (3) then takes the form If we follow the course of a particle thus moving, it will be found that to every increase of the velocity of flow (in the narrower cross-sections) a decrease of pressure corresponds, and to every decrease of the ve- locity of flow (in the wider cross-sections) an increase of pressure. This, indeed, is evident, wholly aside from mathematical considerations. In the present case every change of the velocity of a liquid element must be exclusively produced by the work of the liquid' s forces of pressure. When, therefore, an element enters into a narrower cross-section, in which a greater velocity of flow prevails, it can acquire this higher velocity only 4 i6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. on the condition that a greater pressure acts on its rear surface than on. its front surface, that is to say, only when it moves from points of higher to points of lower pressure, or when the pressure decreases in the direc- tion of the motion. If we imagine the pressures in a wide section and in a succeeding narrower section to be for a moment equal, the acceleration of the ele- ments in the narrower section will not take place the elements will not escape fast enough ; they will accumu- late before the narrower section ; and at the entrance to it the requisite augmentation of pressure will be im- mediately produced. The converse case is obvious. Treatment 2o. In dealing with more complicated cases, the of a liquid ! . , problem in problems of liquid motion, even though viscosity be which vis- r J cosily and friction are considered. Fig. 220. neglected, present great difficulties ; and when the enormous effects of viscosity are taken into account, anything like a dynamical solution of almost every problem is out of the question. So much so, that al- though these investigations were begun by Newton, we have, up to the present time, only been able to master a very few of the simplest problems of this class, and that but imperfectly. We shall content ourselves with a simple example. If we cause a liquid contained in a vessel of the pressure-head h to flow, not through an orifice in its base, but through a long cylindrical tube fixed in its side (Fig. 220), the velocity of efflux THE EXTENSION' OF THE PRINCIPLES. 417 v will be less than that deducible from Torricelli's law, as a portion of the work is consumed by resistances due to viscosity and perhaps to friction. We find, in fact, that v 1/2 g~h^, where 7^ < h. Expressing by // 1 the z/<r/^#y-head, and by 7i 2 the resistance-headi, we may put h=:h l -j- ^2- ^ to ^6 ma i n cylindrical tube we affix vertical lateral tubes, the liquid will rise in the latter tubes to the heights at which it equilibrates the pressures in the main tube, and will thus indicate at all points the pressures of the main tube. The noticeable fact here is, that the liquid-height at the point of influx of the tube is = 7i 2 , and that it diminishes in the direc- tion of the point of outflow, by the law of a straight line, to zero. The elucidation of this phenomenon is the question now presented. Gravity here does not act directly on the liquid in The condi* the horizontal tube, but all effects are transmitted to it perform- by the pressure of the surrounding parts. If we imag-work in 1 J 1 T- 1 J SUCh CaSGS - me a prismatic liquid element of basal area a. and length ft to be displaced in the direction of its length a distance dz, the work done, as in the previous case, is --= - dz ' ' dz For a finite displacement we have Work is done when the element of volume is displaced from a place of higher to a place of lower pressure. The amount of the work done depends on the size of the element of volume and on the difference of pressure at the initial and terminal points of the motion, and not on the length and the form of the path traversed. 418 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The conse- quences of these con- ditions. If the diminution ot pressure were twice as rapid in one case as in another, the difference of the pressures on the front and rear surfaces, or \h& force of the work, would be doubled, but the space through which the work was done would be halved. The work done would remain the same, whether done through the space ab or ac of Fig. 221. Through every cross-section q of the horizontal tube the liquid' flows with the same velocity v. If, neglect- ing the differences of velocity in the same cross-section, we consider a liquid element which exactly fills the section q and has the length ft, the vis viva qfip(z&/2) of such an element will persist unchanged throughout its entire course in the tube. This is possible only provided the vis viva consumed by friction is replaced by the work of the liquids forces of pressure. Hence, in the direction of the motion of the element the pressure must diminish, and for equal distances, to which the same work of friction corresponds, by equal amounts. The total work of gravity on a liquid element q ft p issuing from the vessel, is q fi pgk. Of this the portion #/?p(# 2 /2) is the vis viva of the element discharged with the velocity v into the mouth of the tube, or, as v = l/2g& 19 the portion qfipgh r The remainder of the work, therefore, q j3 pg/i 2 , is consumed in the tube, if owing to the slowness of the motion we neglect the losses within the vessel. If the pressure-heads respectively obtaining in the vessel, at the mouth, and at the extremity of the tube, are h, A 2 , 0, or the pressures are/ = hgp 9 / 2 h^g p } 0, then by equation (i) of page 417 the work requisite to THE EXTENSION OF THE PRINCIPLES. 419 generate the vis viva of the element discharged into the mouth of the tube is and the work transmitted by the pressure of the liquid to the element traversing the length of the tube, is or the exact amount consumed in the tube. Let us assume, for the sake of argument, that the indirect demonstra- pressure does not decrease from p 9 at the mouth to tion of 1 11 p -1 these con- Zero at the extremity of the tube by the law of a straight sequences. line, but that the distribution of the pressure is differ- ent, say, constant throughout the entire tube. The parts in advance then will at once suffer a loss of ve- locity from the friction, the parts which follow will crowd upon them, and there will thus be produced at the mouth of the tube an augmentation of pressure conditioning a constant velocity throughout its entire length. The pressure at the end of the tube can only be = because the liquid at that point is not prevented from yielding to any pressure impressed upon it. If we imagine the liquid to be a mass of smooth A simile elastic balls, the balls will be most compressed at the which these i r.,1 1,1 ii i i phenomena bottom or the vessel, they will enter the tube in a state may be r . i MI i 11 1 i easily con- 01 compression, and will gradually lose that state in ceived. the course of their motion. We leave the further de- velopment of this simile to the reader. It is evident, from a previous remark, that the work stored up in the compression of the liquid itself, is very small. The motion of the liquid is due to the work of gravity in the vessel, which by means of the pressure of the compressed liquid is transmitted to the parts in the tube. 4 2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. A partial An Interesting modification of the case just dis- cation of cussed is obtained by causing the liquid to flow through discussed, a tube composed of a number of shorter cylindrical tubes of varying widths. The pressure In the direction of outflow then diminishes (Fig. 222) more rapidly in the narrower tubes, in which a greater consumption of work by friction takes place, than in the wider ones. We further note, in every passage of the liquid into a Fig, 222. wider tube, that is to a smaller velocity of flow, an in- crease of pressure (a positive congestion) ; in every passage into a narrower tube, that is to a greater velo- city of flow, an abrupt diminution of pressure (a nega- tive congestion). The velocity of a liquid element on which no direct forces act can be diminished or In- creased only by its passing to points of higher or lower pressure. CHAPTER IV. THE FORMAL DEVELOPMENT OF MECHANICS. i. THE ISOPERIMETRICAL PROBLEMS. i. When the chief facts of a physical science have The formal c . asdistin- once been fixed by observation, a new period of its guished . from the de development begins the dediictive, which we treatedductive.de -.._.- velopment in the previous chapter. In this period, the facts are of physical , ., , . ... ., science. reproducible in the mind without constant recourse to observation. Facts of a more general and complex character are mimicked in thought on the theory that they are made up of simpler and more familiar obser- vational elements. But even after we have deduced from our expressions for the most elementary facts (the principles) expressions for more common and more complex facts (the theorems) and have discovered in all phenomena the same elements, the developmental process of the science is not yet completed. The de- ductive development of the science is followed by its formal development. Here it is sought to put in a clear compendious form, or system, the facts to be repro- duced, so that each can be reached and mentally pic- tured with the least intellectual effort. Into our rules for the mental reconstruction of facts we strive to in- corporate the greatest possible uniformity, so that these rules shall be easy of acquisition. It is to be remarked, that the three periods distinguished are not sharply 422 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. separated from one another, but that the processes of development referred to frequently go hand in hand, although on the whole the order designated is unmis- takable. Theisoperi- 2. A powerful influence was exerted on the formal metrical r 1 i -11 problems, development of mechanics by a particular class of tk>ns q o! s mathematical problems, which, at the close of the maxima ..,.. -. ., , and minima seventeenth and the beginning ot the eighteenth cen- turies, engaged the deepest attention of inquirers. These problems, the so-called isoperimetrical problems, will now form the subject of our remarks. Certain questions of the greatest and least values of quanti- ties, questions of maxima and minima, were treated by the Greek mathemati- cians. Pythagoras is said to have taught that iw v , _~ the circle, of all plane "Xj' figures of a given peri- p. 223 m.eter, has the greatest area. The idea, too, of a certain economy in the processes of nature was not foreign to the ancients. Hero deduced the law of the reflection of light from the theory that light emitted from a point A (Fig. 223) and reflected at M will travel to B by the shortest route. Making the plane of the paper the plane of reflection, SS the intersection of the reflecting surface, A the point of departure, B the point of arrival, and M the point of reflection of the ray of light, it will be seen at once that the line AMB* , where B' is the reflection of B, is a straight line. The line AMB f is shorter than the line ANB', and there- fore also AMB is shorter than ANB. Pappus held similar notions concerning organic nature ; he ex- FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 423 plained, for example, the form of the cells of the honey- comb by the bees' efforts to economise in materials. These ideas fell, at the time of the revival of the The re- searches or sciences, on not unfruitful soil. They were first taken Kepler, Per- up by FERMAT and ROBERVAL, who developed a method Robervai. applicable to such problems. These inquirers ob- served, as Kepler had already done, that a magni- tude y which depends on another magnitude x, gen- erally possesses in the vicinity of its greatest and least values a peculiar property. Let x (Fig. 224) denote abscissas and y ordinates. If, while x increases, y pass through a maximum value, its increase, or rise, will be changed into a decrease, or fall ; and if it pass through a minimum value its fall will be changed into a rise. The neigh- boring values of the maximum \ or minimum value, consequently, pi gi 224 . will lie very near each other, and the tangents to the curve at the points in question will generally be parallel to the axis of abscissas. Hence, to find the maximum or minimum values of a quan- tity, we seek the parallel tangents of its curve. The method of tangents may be put in analytical The P -r-, , , . _ method of iorm. For example, it is required to cut off from a tangents, given line a a portion x such that the product of the two segments x and a x shall be as great as possible. Here, the product x (a x) must be regarded as the quantity y dependent on x. At the maximum value of y any infinitely small variation of x 9 say a variation , will produce no change in y. Accordingly, the required value of x will be found, by putting x(a x) = (x -f- <?) (a x <?) or 424 THE SCIENCE OP MECHANICS. or __ ^ 2x S As S may be made as small as we please, we also get mal effect. whence x a/2. In this way, the concrete idea of the method of tangents may be translated into the language of alge- bra ; the procedure also contains, as we see, the germ of the differential calculus. The refrac- Fermat sought to find for the law of the refraction aamjnf- * of light an expression analogous to that of Hero for law of reflection. He remarked that light, proceeding from a point A, and refracted at a point jM~ 9 travels to J3, not by the shortest route, but in the shortest time. If the path AMB is performed in the shortest time, then a neighboring path ANB, infinitely near the real path, will be described in the same time. If we draw from JV on AM and from M on NB the perpendiculars NP and MQ, then the second route, before refraction, is less than the first route by a distance MP=NM sin a, but is larger than it after refraction by the distance NQ = NM sin/3. On the supposition, therefore, that the velocities in the first and second media are respectively v^ and v 2 , the time required for the path AMB will be a minimum when Fig. 225. JVMsiua = or FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 425 v. sin a: 1 -== -. 7j = n } v 2 smp where n stands for the index of refraction. Hero's law of reflection, remarks Leibnitz, is thus a special case of the law of refraction. For equal velocities (7^ = ?; 2 ), the condition of a minimum of time is identical with the condition of a minimum of space. Huygens. in his optical investigations, applied and - f- . ._ . f . completion further perfected the ideas of Fermat, considering, not of Format's ...... researches. only rectilinear, but also curvilinear motions of light, in media in which the velocity of the light varied con- tinuously from place to place. For these, also, he found that Fermat's law obtained. Accordingly, in all motions of light, an endeavor, so to speak, to produce results in a minimum of time appeared to be the funda- mental tendency. 3. Similar maximal or minimal properties were The prob- brought out in the study of mechanical phenomena. brachisto- As we have already noticed, John Bernoulli knew that a freely suspended chain assumes the form for which its centre of gravity lies lowest. This idea was, of course, a simple one for the investigator who first rec- ognised the general import of the principle of virtual velocities. Stimulated by these observations, inquir- ers now began generally to investigate, maximal and minimal characters. The movement received its most powerful impulse from a problem propounded by John Bernoulli, in June, 1696* the problem of the brackis- tochrone. In a vertical plane two points are situated, A and B. It is required to assign in this plane the curve by which a falling body will travel from A to B in the shortest time. The problem was very ingeniously * Ada, Erudztorum, Leipsic. 426 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. solved by John Bernoulli himself ; and solutions were also supplied by Leibnitz, L'Hopital, Newton, and James Bernoulli. johnBer- The most remarkable solution was JOHN BER- geniousso- NOULLi's own. This inquirer remarks that problems problem of of this class have already been solved, not for the mo- tochrone. tion of falling bodies, but for the motion of light. He accordingly imagines the motion of a falling body re- placed by the motion of ^\ a ray of light. (Comp. \ p. 379-) The two points N_ A and B are supposed "^--p to be fixed in a medium in which the velocity of Fig. 226. , . , , . , light increases in the vertical downward direction by the same law as the velocity of a falling body. The medium is supposed to be constructed of horizontal layers of downwardly decreasing density, such that v = Vigh denotes the velocity of the light in any layer at the distance h be- low A. A. ray of light which travels from A to B un- der such conditions will describe this distance in the shortest time, and simultaneously trace out the curve of quickest descent. Calling the angles made by the element of the curve with the perpendicular, or the normal of the layers, a, a', a". . . ., and the respective velocities v, v' 9 v". . . ., we have sine/ s'ma" = , - = T^ = ....= k = const. . v v or, designating the perpendicular distances below A by x, the horizontal distances from A by y, and the arc of the curve by s 9 FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 4 2 7 The bra- chisto- j 1 chrone a _/ZjV __ ^ cycloid. V whence follows dy* = k 2 v 2 ds 2 = k* v 2 (dx* + ^y 2 ) and because v = "\/igx also 1 dy = dx<*\ , where a = J \a x This is the differential equation of a cycloid, or curve described by a point in the circumference of a circle of radius r = #/2 = i/4v 2 , rolling on a straight line. To find the cycloid that passes through A and B, The con- ^ * struction ot it is to be noted that all cycloids, inasmuch as they produced by similar con- structions, are similar ; and that if generated by the rolling of circles on AD from the point A as origin, are also similarly , . , Fig. 227. situated with respect to the point A. Accordingly, we draw through AB a straight line, and construct any cycloid, cutting the straight line in B*. The radius of the generating circle is, say, r' . Then the radius of the generating circle of the cycloid sought is r= r\AB '/AJ3'}. This solution of John Bernoulli's, achieved entirely without a method, the outcome of pure geometrical fancy and a skilful use of such knowledge as happened to be at his command, is one of the most remarkable and beautiful performances in the history of physical science. John Bernoulli was an aesthetic genius in this field. His brother James's character was entirely differ- ent. James was the superior of John in critical power, 428 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Compari- but in originality and imagination was surpassed by the scientific latter. James Bernoulli likewise solved this problem, of John and though in less felicitous form. But, on the other hand,, aoui!?. er ~ he did not fail to develop, with great thoroughness, a general method applicable to such problems. Thus, in these two brothers we find the two fundamental traits of high scientific talent separated from one another, traits, which in the very greatest natural inquirers, in Newton, for example, are combined to- gether. We shall soon see those two tendencies, which within one bosom might have fought their battles un- noticed, clashing in open conflict, in the persons of these two brothers. Vignette to Leibnitzii et Johannis Bernoulli} comercium efiistolicum. Lausanne and Geneva, Bousquet, 1745. James Ber- 4. James Bernoulli finds that the chief object of noulli'sre- -.._ 11, ., marks on research hitherto had been to find the values of a vari- the general nature of able quantity, for which a second variable quantity, problem, which is a function of the first, assumes its greatest or its least value. The present problem, however, is to find FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 429 from among an infinite number of curves one which pos- sesses a certain maximal or minimal property. This, as he correctly remarks, is a problem of an entirely dif- ferent character from the other and demands a new method. The principles that Tames Bernoulli employed in The princi- pies em- the solution of this problem (A eta Eruditorum, May, ployed in James Ber- 1607}* are as follows: nouiii'sso- *' ' . lution. (1) If a curve has a certain property of maximum or minimum, every portion or element of the curve has the same property. (2) Just as the infinitely adjacent values of the maxima or minima of a quantity in the ordinary prob- lems, for infinitely small changes of the independent variables, are constant, so also is the quantity here to be made a maximum or minimum for the curve sought, for infinitely contiguous curves, constant. (3) It is finally assumed, for the case of the brachis- tochrone, that the velocity is v = '}/2g/i, where h de- notes the height fallen through. If we picture to ourselves a very small portion of the curve (Fig. 228), and, imagining a horizontal tlfres^f ,. , , n -L James Ber- ime drawn through JB, cause nouiii's so- the portion taken to pass into the infinitely contiguous por- tion ADC, we shall obtain, by _ considerations exactly similar ^ to those employed in the treat- ment of Fermat's law, the well- known relation between the lg ' 2 * ' sines of the angles made by the curve-elements with the perpendicular and the velocities of descent. In this deduction the following assumptions are made, * See also his works, Vol. II, p. 768. 43=> THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. cal prob- lem. (i), that the fart, or element, ABC is brachistochro- nous, and (2), that ADC is described in the same time as ABC. Bernoulli's calculation is very prolix ; but its essential features are obvious, and the problem is solved * by the above-stated principles. The Pro- With the solution of the problem of the brachisto- jamesBer- chrone, Tames Bernoulli, in accordance with the prac- noulli, or ... . . theproposi-tice then prevailing among mathematicians, proposed tion of the . . . i general iso- the following more general "isopenmetncal problem ": " Of all isoperimetrical curves (that is, curves of equal "perimeters or equal lengths) between the same two "fixed points, to find the curve such that the space "included (i) by a second curve, each of whose ordi- " nates is a given function of the corresponding ordi- "nate or the corresponding arc of the one sought, (2) "by the ordinates of its extreme points, and (3) by the "part of the axis of abscissas lying between those ordi- " nates, shall be a maximum or minimum." For example. It is required to find the curve BFN, described on the base BN such, that of all curves of the same length on BN> this particular one shall make the area BZN a minimum, where PZ=.{PFJ\ LM = (LKy i , and so on. Let the relation between the ordi- nates of BZN and the cor- responding ordinates oiBFN be given by the curve BIT. To obtain PZ from PF 9 draw FGH at right angles to BG, where BG is at right angles to BN. By hypothesis, then, PZ= GH, and * For the details of this solution and for information generally on the his- tory of this subject, see Woodhouse's Treatise on Isoperimetrical Problems and the Calculus of Variations, Cambridge, 1810. Trans. FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 43 * for the other ordinates. Further, we put BP = y, = x, PZ = x n . John Bernoulli gave, forthwith, a solution of this John problem, in the form Si lem ' where a is an arbitrary constant. For n = 1, that is, JST^/V is a semicircle on J5W" as diameter, and the area ZNis equal to the are&JBFN. For this par- ticular case, the solution, in fact, is correct. But the general formula is not universally valid. On the publication of John Bernoulli's solution, James Bernoulli openly engaged to do three things : first, to discover his brother's method ; second, to point out its contradictions and errors ; and, third, to give the true solution. The jealousy and animosity of the two brothers culminated, on this occasion, in a violent and acrimonious controversy, which lasted till James's death. After James's death, John virtually confessed his error and adopted the correct method of his brother. James Bernoulli surmised, and in all probability James Ber- correctly, that John, misled by the results of his re- criticism of searches on the catenary and the curve of a sail filled nouiH's so- .,.,,,. , , lution. with wind, had again attempted an indirect solution, imagining BJ?N filled with a liquid of variable density and taking the lowest position of the centre of gravity as determinative of the curve required. Making the ordinate PZ=p, the specific gravity of the liquid in the ordinate PF = x must be f/x, and similarly in every other ordinate. The weight of a vertical fila- 432 THE SCIENCE OF MECJIAXICS. ment is then / . dy/x 9 and its moment with respect to 1 pdv 1 noulli's general so- lution. Hence, for the lowest position of the centre of gravity, J. Cp dy, or Cp dy = BZN, is a maximum. But the fact is here overlooked, remarks James Bernoulli, that with the variation of the curve BFN the weight of the liquid also is varied. Consequently, in this simple form the deduction is not admissible. The funds- In the solution which he himself gives, James Ber- principie of noulli once more assumes that the small portion F F ltt James Ber- . , of the curve possesses the prop- erty which the whole curve pos- sesses. And then taking the four successive points F F, F n F fft , of which the two extreme ones are fixed, he so varies F t and F f , that the length of the arc F F, F rl F lft remains unchanged, which is possible, of course, only by a displacement of two points. We shall not follow his involved and unwieldy calculations. The principle of the process is clearly indicated in our remarks. Retaining the des- ignations above employed, James Bernoulli, in sub- stance, states that when d $ doc -"' Cpdy is a maximum, and when v.._ c jx* 1/2 / j Jpdyi is a minimum. FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 433 The dissensions between the two brothers were, we may admit, greatly to be deplored. Yet the genius of the one and the profundity of the other have borne, in the stimulus which Euler and Lagrange received from their several investigations, splendid fruits. 5. Euler (Problcmatis IsoperimetriciSolutio Gcneralis^ Euier's Com. Acad. Petr. T. VI, for 1733, published in 1738)* ciassifica- 3 ' 3-J* r . tionoi the was the first to give a more general method of treating isoperimet- b & . rical prob- these questions of maxima and minima, or isopenmetri- lems. cal problems. But even his results were based on prolix geometrical considerations, and not possessed of analytical generality. Euler divides problems of this category, with a clear perception and grasp of their differences, into the following classes : (1) Required, of all curves, that for which a prop- erty A is a maximum or minimum. (2) Required, of all curves, equally possessing a property A, that for which B is a maximum or mini- mum. (3) Required, of all curves, equally possessing two properties, A and B, that for which C is a maximum or minimum. And so on. A problem of the first class is (Fig. 231) the finding Example* of the shortest curve through M and N. A problem of the second class is the finding of a curve through M and N, which, having the given length A, makes the area MPN "a maximum. A problem of the third class would be : of all curves of the given length A, which pass through M, N and contain the same area MPN~B, to find one which describes when rotated about J/TVthe least surface of revolution. And so on. * Euier's principal contributions to this subject are contained in three memoirs, published in the Commentaries of Petersburg f or the years 1733, J 736i and 1766, and in the tract Methodus inveniendi Lineas Curvas Proprietate Maximi Minimive gaudentes, Lausanne and Geneva, 1744. Trans. 434 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. We may observe here, that the finding of an abso- lute maximum or minimum, without collateral condi- tions, is meaningless. Thus, all the curves of which in the first example the shortest is sought possess the common property of pas- sing through the points M and N. The solution of problems of the first class requires the variation of two elements of the curve or of one point. This is also sufficient. In problems of the second class three elements or Fig. 231. iwo points must be varied ; the reason being, that the varied portion must possess in common with the unvaried portion the prop- erty A, and, as B is to be made a maximum or mini- mum, also the property,^, that is, must satisfy two con- ditions. Similarly, the solution of problems of the third class, requires the variation of four elements. And so on. The com- The solution of a problem of a higher class involves, mutability ,.,. . 1 . . .,,. of the isq- by implication, the solution of its converse, in all its caPproper- forms. Thus, in the third class, we vary four elements Ruler's in- of the curve, so, that the varied portion of the curve shall share equally with the original portion the values A and B and, as C is to be made a maximum or a minimum, also the value C. But the same conditions must be satisfied, if of all curves possessing equally B and C that for which A Is a maximum or minimum is sought, or of all curves possessing A and C that for which B is a maximum or minimum is sought. Thus a circle, to take an example from the second class, con- tains, of all lines of the same length A, the greatest area B, and the circle, also, of all curves containing the same area B, has the shortest length A. As the FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 435 condition that the property A shall be possessed in common or shall be a maximum, is expressed in the same manner, Euler saw the possibility of reducing the problems of the higher classes to problems of the first class. If, for example, it is required to find, of all curves having the common property A, that which makes B a maximum, the curve is sought for which A ~\~ mB is a maximum, where m is an arbitrary con- stant. If on any change of the curve, A -f- mB, for any value of m, does not change, this is generally possible only provided the change of A, considered by itself, and that of J3, considered by itself, are = 0. 6. Euler was the originator of still another impor- The funda- . . mental tant advance. In treating the problem of finding the principle of . . . . - . , . . James Ber- brachistochrone in a resisting medium, which was in- nouiii's 11-1 method vestierated by Herrmann and him, the existing mem- shown not i ^ , , , . , . to be uni- ods proved incompetent. For the brachistochrone in versaiiy a vacuum, the velocity depends solely on the vertical height fallen through. The velocity In one portion of the curve is in no wise dependent on the other por- tions. In this case, 'then, we can indeed say, that if the whole curve is brachistochronous, every element of it is also brachistochronous. But in a resisting medium the case is different. The entire length and form of the preceding path enters into the determina- tion of the velocity in the element. The whole curve can be brachistochronous without the separate ele- ments necessarily exhibiting this property. By con- siderations of this character, Euler perceived, that the principle introduced by James Bernoulli did not hold universally good, but that in cases of the kind referred to, a more detailed treatment was required. 7. The methodical arrangement and the great num- ber of the problems solved, gradually led Euler to sub- 43 6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Lagrange's stantially the same methods that Lagrange afterwards histo e ry n of e developed in a somewhat different form, and which ins ofVari- now go by the name of the Calculus of Variations. First, a ions. jQ^n Bernoulli lighted on an accidental solution of a problem, by analogy. James Bernoulli developed, for the solution of such problems, a geometrical method. Euler generalised the problems and the geometrical method. And finally, Lagrange, entirely emancipating himself from the consideration of geometrical figures, gave an analytical method. Lagrange remarked, that the increments which functions receive in consequence of a change in their form are quite analogous to the in- crements they receive in consequence of a change of their independent variables. To distinguish the two species of increments, Lagrange denoted the former by d, the latter by d. By the observation of this anal- ogy Lagrange was enabled to write down at once the equations which solve problems of maxima and minima. Of this idea, which has proved itself a very fertile one, Lagrange never gave a verification ; in fact, did not even attempt it. His achievement is in every respect a peculiar one. He saw, with great economical in- sight, the foundations which in his judgment were suf- ficiently secure and serviceable to build upon. But the acceptance of these fundamental principles them- selves was vindicated only by its results. Instead of employing himself on the demonstration of these prin- ciples, he showed with what success they could be em- ployed. (J&ssai d'une nouvelle methods poitr determiner les maxima et minima des formules integralcs indcfimes. Misc. Taur. 1762.) The difficulty which Lagrange's contemporaries and successors experienced in clearly grasping his idea, is quite intelligible. Euler sought in vain to clear up the FORMAL f DE VEL OPMENT. 437 difference between a variation and a differential byThemis- concep- imaginin: constants contained in the function, with tions of La- grange s the change of which the form of the function changed, idea. The increments of the value of the function arising from the increments of these constants were regarded by him as the variations, while the increments of the function springing from the increments of the indepen- dent variables were the differentials. The conception of the Calculus of Variations that springs from such a view is singularly timid, narrow, and illogical, and does not compare with that of Lagrange. Even Lindelof's modern work, so excellent in other respects, is marred by this defect. The first really competent presenta- tion of Lagrange's idea is, in our opinion, that of JEL- LETT.* Jellett appears to have said what Lagrange per- haps was unable fully to say, perhaps did not deem it necessary to say. 8. Tellett's view is, in substance, this. Quantities Joiiett'sex- ....... ^ position of generally are divisible into constant and variable quan- theprmci- . . , pies of the titles ; the latter being subdivided into independent Calculus of -.... Variations. and dependent variables, or such as may be arbitrarily changed, and such whose change depends on the change of other, independent, variables, in some way - connected with them. The latter are called functions of the former, and the nature of the relation that con- nects them is termed the form of the function. Now, quite analogous to this division of quantities into con- stant and variable, is the division of the forms of func- tions into determinate (constant) and indeterminate (vari- able). If the form of a function, y = <p(x) t is inde- terminate, or variable-, the value of the function y can change in two ways : (i) by an increment dx of the * An Elementary Treatise on the Calculus of Variations, By the Rev. John Hewitt Jellett. Dublin, 1850. 43 8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. independent variable x, or (2) by a change oiform, by a passage from cp to cp^ The first change is the dif- ferential dy, the second, the variation dy. Accord- ingly, dy = cp (x -j- dx) cp (V), and The object The change of value of an indeterminate function of the cal- . cuius of va- due to a mere change of form involves no problem, unrated, just as the change of value of an independent variable involves none. We may assume any change of form we please, and so produce any change of value we please. A problem is not presented till the change in value of a determinate function (F} of an indetermi- nate function <p, due to a change of form of the included indeterminate function, is required. For example, if we have a plane curve of the indeterminate form y== cp (V), the length of its arc between the abscissae X Q and x l is = PJi+few) 2 . dx = r J J > \ dx j J \ a determinate function of an indeterminate function. The moment a definite form of curve is fixed upon, the value of can be given. For any change of form of the curve, the change in value of the length of the arc, SS, is determinate. In the example given, the func- tion S does not contain the function y directly, but through its first differential coefficient dy/dx, which is itself dependent on y. Let u = J?(y) be a determinate function of an indeterminate function y = <p (V) ; then du=F(y + Sy} - F(y) = ~ Sy. Again, let u =F(y, dyjdx) be a determinate function FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 439 of an indeterminate function, y = cp(x). For a change of form of <>, the value of y changes by dy and the value of dy/dx by $(dy/dx). The corresponding change in the value of u is s-. dy J ^ dy_ dx doc The expression d ~ is obtained by our definition from Expres- F X sions tor dy __ __ dx~ dx dx~~~ dx coefficients, Similarly, the following results are found : ^__^cty ~ ~ ' and so forth. We now proceed to a problem, namely, the d e- A problem. termination of the form of the function jy= <p(x) that will render where V- r a maximum or minimum ; cp denoting an indetermi- nate, and F a determinate function. The value of U may be varied (i) by a change of the limits, x Q9 x. Outside of the limits, the change of the independent variables x, as such, does not affect U\ accordingly, if we regard the limits as fixed, this is the only respect in which we need attend to x. The only other way (2) in which the value of U is susceptible of variation 44 o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. is by a change of the form of y = ^?(V). This produces a change of value in amounting to dy i* j $y $ $ dx d x 2 and so forth. The total change in U, which we shall call DU, and to express the maximum-minimum con- dition put =0, consists of the differential ^/7and the variation dU. Accordingly, Expression Denoting by V^dx^ and V^doc^ the increments of variation of U due to the change of the limits, we then have the func- tion in - r i question. DU= V^ dx^ F Q dx Q + d Vdx = d V. dx = 0. But by the principles stated on page 439 we further get 4. <7 y + <7 7^" For, the sake of brevity we put d _T- N dV -p *L- P 7 - "* 9 7 - 1 J 7 o - 9 J Then FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. x \. J y gratioi / the thi term o One difficulty here is, that not only dy, but also the f *Pg^ terms ddy/dx, d* dy/dx 2 .... occur in this equation, variati terms which are dependent on one another, but not in a directly obvious manner. This drawback can be removed by successive integration by parts, by means of the formula Cu dv = u v Cv du. By this method dP^ . , /* . , , ~d2 Sy +J -j^ Sydx > and so on - Performing all these integrations between the limits, we obtain for the condition DU= the expression ~dx />- + which now contains only dy under the integral sign. The terms in the first line of this expression are independent of any change in the form of the function and depend solely upon the variation of the limits. 44 2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The inter- The terms of the two following lines depend on the Sie resSts. change in the form of the function, for the limiting values of x only ; and the indices i and 2 state that the actual limiting values are to be put in the place of the general expressions. The terms of the last line, finally, depend on the general change in the form of the function. Collecting all the terms, except those in the last line, under one designation a^ <X Q , and calling the expression in parentheses in the last line /?, we have But this equation can be satisfied only if ,-a = o ................ a) and ty&y<fx = Q ................ (2) XQ For if each of the members were not equal to zero, each would be determined by the other. But the in- tegral of an indeterminate function cannot be expressed in terms of its limiting values only. Assuming, there- fore, that the equation The equa- holds generally good, its conditions can be satisfied, tion which . . solves the since ov is throughout arbitrary and its generality of problem, or makes the form cannot be restricted, only by making ft = 0. By function in > J J t> / J question a the maximum or mini- mum. therefore, the form of the function y <p(x) that makes the expression U a maximum or minimum is defined. FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 443 Equation (3) was found by Euler. But Lagrange first showed the application of equation (i), for the deter- mination of a function by the conditions at its limits. By equation (3), which it must satisfy, the form of the function y = <p(x) is generally determined ; but this equation contains a number of arbitrary constants, whose values are determined solely by the conditions at the limits. With respect to notation, Jellett rightly remarks, that the employment of the symbol d in the first two terms V^dx^ =V Q dx Q of equation (i), (the form used by Lagrange,) is illogical, and he correctly puts for the increments of the independent variables the usual symbols dx^ dx^. o. To illustrate the use to which these equations A practical _ _ , . ...... illustration may be put, let us seek the form of the function that of the use J r of these makes equations. a minimum the shortest line. Here V=f( d J\ \dxj- All expressions except d_y_ dx p _____ . '~'~r vanish in equation (3)^ and that equation becomes dP^/dx = ; which means that P 19 and consequently its only variable, dy/dx, is independent of x. Hence, dy/dx = a, and y -- ax -f- , where a and ^ are con- stants. The constants a, b are determined by the values of 444 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Develop- the limits. If the straight line passes through the ment of the . .. . illustration, points X O ,}'Q and # 1? y l9 then and as dx^ = dx l = 0, <5j> = Sy^ = 0, equation (i) vanishes. The coefficients $ (dy/dx} 9 d (dtyjdx*^ .... independently vanish. Hence, the values of a and b are determined by the equations (;;z) alone. If the limits X Q , x l only are given, butj/ , j^ are indeterminate, we have dx^ = dx^ = 0, and equation (i) takes the form which, since &y Q and dy^ are arbitrary, can only be satisfied if a = 0. The straight line is in this case y 3, parallel to the axis of abscissas, and as b is inde- terminate, at any distance from it. It will be ' noticed, that equation (i) and the sub- sidiary conditions expressed in equation (#2), with re- spect to the determination of the constants, generally complement each other. If is to be made a minimum, the integration of the appro- priate form of (3) will give x c' x ~ e If Z is a minimum, then ^nZ also is a minimum, and the curve found will give, by rotation about the axis of abscissae, the least surface of revolution. Further, FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 445 to a minimum of Z the lowest position of the centre of gravity of a homogeneously heavy curve of this kind corresponds ; the curve is therefore a catenary. The determination of the constants c, c' is effected by means of the limiting conditions, as above. In the treatment of mechanical problems, a dis- variations r m and virtual tinction is made between the increments of coordinates displace- ments dis- that actually take place in time, namely, dx, dy, dz, tinguished. and the possible displacements dx, dy, dz, considered, for instance, in the application of the principle of vir- tual velocities. The latter, as a rule, are not varia- tions ; that is, are not changes of value that spring from changes in the form of a function. Only when we consider a mechanical system that is a continuum, as for example a string, a flexible surface, an elastic body, or a liquid, are we at liberty to regard d x, $y, dz as indeterminate functions of the coordinates x, y, z, and are we concerned with variations. It is not our purpose in this work, to develop math- importance r * 9 r of the cal- ematical theories, but simply to treat the purely phys- cuius of va- ' r J r J r J riations for ical part of mechanics. But the history of the isopen- mechanics, metrical problems and of the calculus of variations had to be touched upon, because these researches have ex- ercised a very considerable influence on the develop- ment of mechanics. Our sense of the general prop- erties of systems, and .of properties of maxima and minima in particular, was much sharpened by these investigations, and properties of the kind referred to were subsequently discovered in mechanical systems with great facility. As a fact, physicists, since La- grange's time, usually express mechanical principles in a maximal or minimal form. This predilection would be unintelligible without a knowledge of the historical development. 446 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. n. THEOLOGICAL. ANIMISTIC, AND MYSTICAL POINTS OF VIEW IN MECHANICS. i. If, in entering a parlor in Germany, we happen to hear something said about some man being very pious, without having caught the name, we may fancy that Privy Counsellor X was spoken of, or Herr von Y ; we should hardly think of a scientific man of our acquaintance. It would, however, be a mistake to sup- pose that the want of cordiality, occasionally rising to embittered controversy, which has existed in our day between the scientific and the theological faculties, always separated them. A glance at the history of science suffices to prove the contrary. The con- People talk of the " conflict " of science and the- fhe e church olo y> or better of scienc e and the church. It is in ' truth a prolific theme. On the one hand, we have the long catalogue of the sins of the church against pro- gress, on the other side a " noble army of martyrs," among them no less distinguished figures than Galileo and Giordano Bruno. It was only by good luck that Descartes, pious as he was, escaped the same fate. These things are the commonplaces of history ; but it would be a great mistake to suppose that the phrase " warfare of science" is a correct description of its general historic attitude toward religion, that the only repression of intellectual development has come from priests, and that if their hands had been held off, grow- ing science would have shot up with stupendous velo- city. No doubt, external opposition did have to be fought j and the battle with it was no child's play. FORMAL DEVELOPMENT 447 Nor was any engine too base for the church to handle The stnier- J & pleofscien- in this struggle. She considered nothing but how to tists with 00 their own conquer ; and no temporal policy ever was conducted P^on- so selfishly, so unscrupulously, or so cruelly. But in- ideas, vestigators have had another struggle on their hands, and by no means an easy one, the struggle with their own preconceived ideas, and especially with the notion that philosophy and science must be founded on the- ology. It was but slowly that this prejudice little by little was erased. 2. But let the facts speak for themselves, while we Historical . examples. introduce the reader to a few historical personages. Napier, the inventor of logarithms, an austere Puri- tan, who lived in the sixteenth century, was, in addi- tion to his scientific avocations, a zealous theologian. Napier applied himself to some extremely curious speculations. He wrote an exegetical commentary on the Book of Revelation, with propositions and mathe- matical demonstrations. Proposition XXVI, for ex- ample, maintains that the pope is the Antichrist ; propo- sition XXXVI declares that the locusts are the Turks and Mohammedans ; and so forth. Blaise Pascal (1623-1662), one of the most rounded geniuses to be found among mathematicians and phys- icists, was extremely orthodox and ascetical. So deep were the convictions of his heart, that despite the gen- tleness of his character, he once openly denounced at Rouen an instructor in philosophy as a heretic. The healing of his sister by contact with a relic most seri- ously impressed him, and he regarded her cure as a miracle. On these facts taken by themselves it might be wrong to lay great stress ; for his whole family were much inclined to religious fanaticism. But there are plenty of other instances of his religiosity. Such was 44 8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Pascal. his resolve, which was carried out, too, to abandon altogether the pursuits of science and to devote his life . solely to the cause of Christianity. Consolation, he used to say, he could find nowhere but in the teachings of Christianity ; and all the wisdom of the world availed him not a whit. The sincerity of his desire for the conversion of heretics is shown in his Lettres provin- ciates, where he vigorously declaims against the dread ful subtleties that the doctors of the Sorbonne had devised, expressly to persecute the Jansenists. Very remarkable is Pascal's correspondence with the theo- logians of his time ; and a modern reader is not a little surprised at finding this great "scientist" seriously discussing in one of his letters whether or not the Devil was able to work miracles. otto yon Otto von Guericke, the inventor of the air-pump, Guericke. .,. 1f . , , . . r i i i occupies himself, at the beginning of his book, now little over two hundred years old, with the miracle of Joshua, which he seeks to harmonise with the ideas of Copernicus. In like manner, we find his researches on the vacuum and the nature of the atmosphere in- troduced by disquisitions concerning the location of heaven, the location of hell, and so forth. Although Guericke really strives to answer these questions as ra- tionally as he can, still we notice that they give him considerable trouble, questions, be it remembered, that to-day the theologians themselves would consider absurd. Yet Guericke was a man who lived after the Reformation ! The giant mind of Newton did not disdain to employ itself on the interpretation of the Apocalypse. On such subjects it was difficult for a sceptic to converse with him. When Halley once indulged in a jest concerning theological questions, he is said to have curtly repulsed FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 449 him with the remark : "I have studied these things ; Newtonand Leibnitz. you have not ! " We need not tarry by Leibnitz, the inventor of the be'st of all possible worlds and of pre-established har- mony inventions which Voltaire disposed of in Can- dide, a humorous novel with a deeply philosophical pur- pose. But everybody knows that Leibnitz was almost if not quite as much a theologian, as a man of science. Let us turn, however, to the last century. Euler, in Euier. his Letters to a German Princess, deals with theologico- philosophical problems in the midst of scientific ques- tions. He speaks of the difficulty involved in explaining the interaction of body and mind, due to the total diversity of these two phenomena, a diversity to his mind undoubted. The system of occasionalism, devel- oped by Descartes and his followers, agreeably to which God executes for every purpose of the soul, (the soul it- self not being able to do so,) a corresponding movement of the body, does not quite satisfy him. He derides, also, and not without humor, the doctrine of pre- established harmony, according to which perfect agree- ment was established from the beginning between the movements of the body and the volitions of the soul, although neither is in any way connected with the other, just as there is harmony between two different but like-constructed clocks. He remarks, that in this view his own body is as foreign to him as that of a rhinoceros in the midst of Africa, which might just as well be in pre-established harmony with his soul as its own. Let us hear his own words. In his day, Latin was almost universally written. When a German scholar wished to be especially condescending, he wrote in French : " Si dans le cas d'un d®lement "de mon corps Dieu ajustait celui d'un rhinoceros, 450 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. "en sorte que ses mouvements fussent tellement d'ac " cord avec les ordres de mon ame, qu'il levat la pattc " au moment que je voudrais lever la main, et ains " des autres operations, ce serait alors mon corps. Je "me trouverais subitement dans la forme d'un rhino- <e ceros au milieu de 1'Afrique, mais non obstant cek "mon ame continuerait les meme operations. J'aurais "^galement 1'honneur d'^crire a V. A., mais je ne sais "pas comment elle recevrait mes lettres. " Euier's One would almost imagine that Euler, here, had been theological . __ . . 1 proclivities tempted to play Voltaire. And yet, apposite as was his criticism in this vital point, the mutual action oi body and soul remained a miracle to him, still. But he extricates himself, however, from the question of the freedom of the will, very sophistically. To give some idea of the kind of questions which a scientist was per- mitted to treat in those days, it may be remarked that Euler institutes in his physical "Letters" investiga- tions concerning the nature of spirits, the connection between body and soul, the freedom of the will, the influence of that freedom on physical occurrences, prayer, physical and moral evils, the conversion of sin- ners, and such like topics ; and this in a treatise full of clear physical ideas and not devoid of philosophical ones, where the well-known circle-diagrams of logic have their birth-place. character 3. Let these examples of religious physicists suffice. logical We have selected them intentionally from among the the great in- foremost of scientific discoverers. The theological pro- clivities which these men followed, belong wholly to their innermost private life. They tell us openly things which they are not compelled to tell us, things about which they might have remained silent. What they litter are not opinions forced upon them from without ; FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 451 they are their own sincere views. They were not con- scious of any theological constraint. In a court which harbored a Lamettrie and a Voltaire, Eulerhad no rea- son to conceal his real convictions. According: to the modern notion, these men should character & ' ot their age. at least have seen that the questions they discussed did not belong under the heads where they put them, that they were not questions of science. Still, odd as this contradiction between inherited theological beliefs and "independently created scientific convictions seems to us, it is no reason for a diminished admiration of those leaders of scientific thought. Nay, this very fact is a proof of their stupendous mental power : they were able, in spite of the contracted horizon of their age, to which even their own aper$us were chiefly limited, to point out the path to an elevation, where our genera- tion has attained a freer point of view. Every unbiassed mind must admit that the age in which the chief development of thascience of mechan- ics took place, was an age of predominantly theological cast. Theological questions were excited by everything, and modified everything. No wonder, then, that me- chanics took the contagion. But the thoroughness with which theological thought thus permeated scientific inquiry, will best be seen by an examination of details. 4. The impulse imparted in antiquity to this direc- Galileo's tion of thought by Hero and Pappus has been alluded on the , strength of to m the preceding chapter. At the beginning of the materials. seventeenth century we find Galileo occupied with prob- lems concerning the strength of materials. He shows that hollow tubes offer a greater resistance to flexure than solid rods of the same length and the same quantity of material, and at once applies this discovery to the explanation of the forms of the bones of animals, which 452 'I HE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. are usually hollow and cylindrical in shape. The phe- nomenon is easily illustrated by the comparison of a flatly folded and a rolled sheet of paper. A horizontal beam fastened at one extremity-and loaded at the other may be remodelled so as to be thinner at the loaded end without any loss of stiffness and with a consider- able saving of material. Galileo determined the form of a beam of equal resistance at each cross-section. He also remarked that animals of similar geometrical con- struction but of considerable difference of size would comply in very unequal proportions with the laws of resistance. Evidences The forms of bones, feathers, stalks, and other or- of design - . in nature, game structures, adapted, as they are, in their minut- est details to the purposes they serve, are highly cal- culated to make a profound impression on the thinking beholder, and this fact has again and again been ad- duced in proof of a supreme wisdom ruling in nature. Let us examine, for instance, the pinion-feather of a bird, The quill is a hollow tube diminishing in thick- ness as we go towards the end, that is, is a body of equal resistance. Each little blade of the vane re- peats in miniature the same construction. It would require considerable technical knowledge even to imi- tate a feather of this kind, let alone invent it. We should not forget, however, that investigation, and not mere admiration, is the office of science. We know how Darwin sought to solve these problems,- by the theory of natural selection. That Darwin's solution is a complete one, may fairly be doubted ; Darwin him- self questioned it. All external conditions would be powerless if something were not -present that admitted of variation. But there can be no question that his theory is the first serious attempt to replace mere ad- FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 453 miration of the adaptations of organic nature by seri- ous inquiry into the mode of their origin. Pappus's ideas concerning the cells of honeycombs The ceils c rj: & J the honey- Were the subject of animated discussion as late as the comb. eighteenth century. In a treatise, published in 1865, entitled Homes Without Hands (p. 428), Wood substan- tially relates the following : " Maraldi had been struck with the great regularity of the cells of the honey- comb. He measured the angles of the lozenge-shaped plates, or rhombs, that form the terminal walls of the cells, and found them to be respectively 109 28' and 70 32'. Rdaumur, convinced that these angles were in some way connected with the economy of the cells, requested the mathematician Konig to calculate the form of a hexagonal prism terminated by a pyramid composed of three equal and similar rhombs, which would give the greatest amount of space with a given amount of material. The answer was, that the angles should be 109 26' and 70 34'. The difference, accord- ingly, was two minutes. Maclaurin,* dissatisfied with this agreement, repeated Maraldi's measurements, found them correct, and discovered, in going over the calcu- lation, an error in the logarithmic table employed by Konig. Not the bees, but the mathematicians were * wrong, and the bees had helped to detect the error ! " Any one who is acquainted with the methods of meas- uring crystals and has seen the cell of a honeycomb, with its rough and non-reflective surfaces, will question whether the measurement of such cells can be executed with a probable error of only two minutes, f So, we must take this story as a sort of pious mathematical * Philosophical Transactions for 1743. Trans. t But see G. F. Maraldi in the M&moires de Vacadimie for 1712. It is, how- ever, now well known the cells vary considerably. See Chauncey Wright, Philosophical Discussions, 1877, p. 311. Trans. 454 TJIE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. fairy-tale, quite apart from the consideration that noth- ing would follow from it even were it true. Besides, from a mathematical point of view, the problem is too imperfectly formulated to enable us to decide the ex- tent to which the bees have solved it. other The ideas of Hero and Fermat, referred to in the instances. . , previous chapter, concerning the motion of light, at once received from the hands of Leibnitz a theolog- ical coloring, and played, as has been before mentioned, a predominant role in the development of the calculus of variations. In Leibnitz's correspondence with John Bernoulli, theological questions are repeatedly dis- cussed in the very midst of mathematical disquisitions. Their language is not unfrequently couched in biblical pictures. Leibnitz, for example, says that the problem of the brachistochrone lured him as the apple had lured Eve. Thetheo- Maupertuis, the famous president of the Berlin neiofthe Academy, and a friend of Frederick the Great, gave feasfac- 6 a new impulse to the theologising bent of physics by the enunciation of his principle of least action. In the treatise which formulated this obscure principle, and which betrayed in Maupertuis a woeful lack of mathe- matical accuracy, the author declared his principle to be the one which best accorded with the wisdom of the Creator. Maupertuis was an ingenious man, but not a man of strong, practical sense. This is evidenced by the schemes he was incessantly devising : his bold prop- ositions to found a city in which only Latin should be spoken, to dig a deep hole in the earth to find new substances, to institute psychological investigations by means of opium and by the dissection of monkeys, to explain the formation of the embryo by gravitation, and so forth. He was sharply satirised by Voltaire in the FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 455 Histoire du docteur Akakia, a work which led, as we know, to the rupture between Frederick and Voltaire. Maupertuis's principle would in all probability soon Euier'sre- ^ r r r J tention of have been forgotten, had Euler not taken up the sug- the theoiog- b ' .... ical basis of gestion. Euler magnanimously left the principle its this prin- name, Maupertuis the glory of the invention, and con- verted it into something new and really serviceable. What Maupertuis meant to convey is very difficult to ascertain. What Euler meant may be easily shown by simple examples. If a body is constrained to move on a rigid surface, for instance, on the surface of the earth, it will describe when an impulse is imparted to it, the shortest path between its initial and terminal positions. Any other path that might be prescribed it, would be longer or would require a greater time. This principle finds an application in the theory of atmospheric and oceanic currents. The theological point of view, Euler retained. He claims it is possible to explain phenomena, not only from their physical causes, but also from their purposes. " As the construction of the universe is the "most perfect possible, being the handiwork of an " all-wise Maker, nothing can be met with in the world "in which some maximal or minimal property is not "displayed. There is, consequently, no doubt but "that all the effects of the world can be derived by "the method of maxima and minima from their final "causes as well as from their efficient: ones."* 5. Similarly, the notions of the constancy of the quantity of matter, of the constancy of the quantity of * " Quum enim mundi nniversi fabrica sit perfectissima, atque a creatore sapientissimo absoluta, nihil omnino in nmndo contingit, in quo non uiaxhm minimive ratio quaepiam eluceat; quam ob rein dubium prorsus est nullum, quin omnes mundi effectus ex causis finalibus, ope rnethodi maximorum et minimorum, aeqxie feliciter determinari quaeant, atque ex ipsis causis efficicn- tibus." (Methodus inveniendi linens curvas maximi minimive proprietate gaudentes. Lausanne, 1744.) 45 6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The central motion, of the Indestructibility of work or energy, con- modern ceptions which completely dominate modern physics, ma } iniy S of all arose under the influence of theological ideas. The orfgin. gl a notions in question had their origin in an utterance of Descartes, before mentioned, in the Principles of 'Philos- ophy ', agreeably to which the quantity of matter and mo- tion originally created in the world, such being the only course compatible with the constancy of the Crea- tor, is always preserved unchanged. The conception of the manner in which this quantity of motion should be calculated was very considerably modified in the progress of the idea from Descartes to Leibnitz, and to their successors, and as the outcome of these modifi- cations the doctrine gradually and slowly arose which is now called the "law of the conservation of energy." But the theological background of these ideas only slowly vanished. In fact, at the present day, we still meet with scientists who indulge in self-created mys- ticisms concerning this law. Gradual During the entire sixteenth and seventeenth centu* transition . ..... . , from the nes, down to the close of the eighteenth, the prevail- point of ing inclination of inquirers was, to find in all physical laws some particular disposition of the Creator. But a gradual transformation of these views must strike the attentive observer. Whereas with Descartes and Leibnitz physics and theology were still greatly inter- mingled, in the subsequent period a distinct endeavor is noticeable, not indeed wholly to discard theology, yet to separate it from purely physical questions. Theo- logical disquisitions were put at the beginning or rele- gated to the end of physical treatises. Theological speculations were restricted, as much as possible, to the question of creation, that, from this point onward, the way might be cleared for physics. FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 457 Towards the close of the eighteenth century a re- ultimate . complete markable change took place, a change which was emancipa- apparently an abrupt departure from the current trend physics F.f J r f from t heo]- of thought, but in reality was the logical outcome of ogy. the development indicated. After an attempt in a youthful work to found mechanics on Euler' s principle of least action, Lagrange, in a subsequent treatment of the subject, declared his intention of utterly disre- garding theological and metaphysical speculations, as in their nature precarious and foreign to science. He erected a new mechanical system on entirely different foundations, and no ane conversant with the subject will dispute its excellencies. All subsequent scientists of eminence accepted Lagrange's view, and the pres- ent attitude of physics to theology was thus substan- tially determined. 6. The idea that theology and physics are two dis- The mod- C3 - 7 r J era ideal tinct branches of knowledge, thus took, from its first always the ' ' attitude of germination in Copernicus till its final promulgation * he greatest * r f inquirers. by Lagrange, almost two centuries to attain clearness in the minds of investigators. At the same time it cannot be denied that this truth was always clear to the greatest minds, like Newton. Newton never, de- spite his profound religiosity, mingled theology with the questions of science. True, even he concludes his Optics > whilst on its last pages his clear and luminous intellect still shines, with an exclamation of humble contrition at the vanity of all earthly things. But his optical researches proper, in contrast to those of Leib- nitz, contain not a trace of theology. The same may be said of Galileo and Huygens. Their writings con- form almost absolutely to the point of view of La- grange, and may be accepted in this respect as class- ical. But the general views and tendencies of an age 458 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. must not be judged by Its greatest, but by its average, minds. The theo- To comprehend the process here portrayed, the gen- logical con- i r rr t ception of eral condition of affairs in these times must be consid- naturai and ered. It stands to reason that in a stage of civilisation a'bie. in which religion is almost the sole education, and the only theory of the world, people would naturally look at things in a theological point of view, and that they would believe that this view was possessed of compe- tency in all fields of research. If we transport ourselves back to the time when people played the organ with their fists, when they had to have .the multiplication table visibly before them to calculate, when they did so much with their hands that people now-a-days do with their heads, we shall not demand of such a time that it should critically put to the test its own views and the- ories. With the widening of the intellectual horizon through the great geographical, technical, and scien- tific discoveries and inventions of the fifteenth and six- teenth centuries, with the opening up of provinces in which it was impossible to make any progress with the old conception of things, simply because it had been formed prior to the knowledge of these provinces, this bias of the mind gradually and slowly vanished. The great freedom of thought which appears in isolated cases in the early middle ages, first in poets and then in scientists, will always be hard to understand. The en- lightenment of those days must have been the work of a few very extraordinary minds, and can have been bound to the views of the people at large by but very slender threads, more fitted to disturb those views than to re- form them. Rationalism does not seem to have gained a broad theatre of action till the literature of the eigh- teenth century. Humanistic, philosophical, historical, FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 459 and physical science here met and gave each other mutual encouragement. All who have experienced, in part, in its literature, this wonderful emancipation of the human intellect, will feel during their whole lives a deep, elegiacal regret for the eighteenth century. 7. The old point of view, then, is abandoned. Its The en- history is now detectible only in the form of the me-mentofthe new views. . chanical principles. And this form will remain strange to us as long as we neglect its origin. The theological conception of things gradually gave way to a more rigid conception ; and this was accompanied with a considerable gain in enlightenment, as we shall now briefly indicate. When we say light travels by the paths of shortest time, we grasp by such an expression many things. But we do not know as yet why light prefers paths of shortest time. We forego all further knowledge of the phenomenon, if we find the reason in the Creator's wis- dom. We of to-day know, that light travels by all paths, but that only on the paths of shortest time do the waves of light so intensify each other that a per- ceptible result is produced. Light, accordingly, only appears to travel by the paths of shortest time. After Extrava- ficince as the prejudice which prevailed on these questions had well as . - .,.,,. . economy in been removed, cases were immediately discovered in nature. which by the side of the supposed economy of nature the most striking extravagance was displayed. Cases of this kind have, for example, been pointed out by Jacob! In connection with Euler's principle of least ac- tion. A great many natural phenomena accordingly produce the impression of economy, simply because they visibly appear only when by accident an econom- ical accumulation of effects take place. This is the same idea in the province of inorganic nature that Dar- 460 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. win worked out in the domain of organic nature. We facilitate instinctively our comprehension of nature by applying to it the economical ideas with which we are familiar. Expiana- Often the phenomena of nature exhibit maximal imaiand * or minimal properties because when these greatest or effects. least properties have been established the causes of all further alteration are removed. The catenary gives the lowest point of the centre of gravity for the simple reason that when that point has been reached all fur- ther descent of the system's parts is impossible. Li- quids exclusively subjected to the action of molecular forces exhibit a minimum of superficial area, because stable equilibrium can only subsist when the molecular forces are able to effect no further diminution of super- ficial area. The important thing, therefore, is not the maximum or minimum, but the removal of work ; work being the factor determinative of the alteration. It sounds much less imposing but is much more elucida- tory, much more correct and comprehensive, instead of speaking of the economical tendencies of nature, to say : " So much and so much only occurs as in virtue of the forces and circumstances involved can occur. " Points of The question may now justly be asked, If the point identity in. rit 1*111 i thetheoiog-of view of theology which led to the enunciation of the scientific principles of mechanics was utterly wrong, how comes t?ons ep it that the principles themselves are in all substantial points correct ? The answer is e^sy. In the first place, the theological view did not supply the contents of the principles, but simply determined their guise \ their mat- ter was derived from experience. A similar influence would have been exercised by any other dominant type of thought, by a commercial attitude, for instance, such as presumably had its effect on Stevinus's thinking. In FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 461 the second "place, the theological conception of nature itself owes its origin to an endeavor to obtain a more comprehensive view of the world ; the very same en- deavor that is at the bottom of physical science. Hence, even admitting that the physical philosophy of theology is a fruitless achievement, a reversion to a lower state of scientific culture, we still need not repudiate the sound root from which it has sprung and which is not differ- ent from that of true physical inquiry. In fact, science can accomplish nothing by the con- Necessity * ^ of a con- sideration of mdividualia.cts : from time to time it muststant con- sideration cast its .glance at the world as a whole. Galileo's of the AH. laws of falling bodies, Huygens's principle of vis viva, the principle of virtual velocities, nay, even the con- cept of mass, could not, as we saw, be obtained, ex- cept by the alternate consideration of individual facts and of nature as a totality. We may, in our men- tal reconstruction of mechanical processes, start from the properties of isolated masses (from the elementary or differential laws), and so compose our pictures of the processes ; or, we may hold fast to the properties of the system as a whole (abide by the integral laws). Since, however, the properties of one mass always in- clude relations to other masses, (for instance, in ve- locity and acceleration a relation of time is involved, that is, a connection with the whole world,) it is mani- fest that purely differential, or elementary, laws do not exist. It would be illogical, accordingly, to exclude as less certain this necessary view of the All, or of the more general properties of nature, from our studies. The more general a new principle is and the wider its scope, the more perfect tests will, in view of the possi- bility of error, be demanded of it. The conception of a will and intelligence active in 462 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Pagan ideas nature is by no means the exclusive property of Chris- dces P rife in tian monotheism. On the contrary, this idea is a quite the modern .... . ,..-. _ world, familiar one to paganism and fetishism. Paganism, however, finds this will and intelligence entirely in in- dividual phenomena, while monotheism seeks it in the All. Moreover, a pure monotheism does not exist. The Jewish monotheism of the Bible is by no means free from belief in demons, sorcerers, and witches ; and the Christian monotheism of mediaeval times is even richer in these pagan conceptions. We shall not speak of the brutal amusement in which church and state indulged in the torture and burning of witches, and which was undoubtedly provoked, in the majority of cases, not by avarice but by the prevalence of the ideas mentioned. In his instructive work on Primitive Culture Tylor has studied the sorcery, superstitions, and miracle-belief of savage peoples, and compared them with the opinions current in mediaeval times con- cerning witchcraft. The similarity is indeed striking. The burning of witches, which was so frequent in Europe in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, is to-day vigorously conducted in Central Africa. Even now and in civilised countries and among cultivated people traces of these conditions, as Tylor shows, still exist in a multitude of usages, the sense of which, with our altered point of view, has been forever lost. 8. Physical S9ience rid itself only very slowly of these conceptions.' The celebrated work of Giambatista della Porta, Magia naturalis, which appeared in 1558, though it announces important physical discoveries, is yet filled with stuff about magic practices and demono- logical arts of all kinds little better than those of a red- skin medicine-man. Not till the appearance of Gil- bert's work, De magnete (in 1600), was any kind of re- FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 4^3 striction placed on this tendency of thought. When we Amm^sti reflect that even Luther is said to have had personal science, encounters with the Devil, that Kepler, whose aunt had been burned as a witch and whose mother came near meeting the same fate, said that witchcraft could not be denied, and dreaded to express his real opinion of astrology, we can vividly picture to ourselves the thought of less enlightened minds of those ages. Modern physical science also shows traces of fetish- ism, as Tylor well remarks, in its " forces." And the hobgoblin practices of modern spiritualism are ample evidence that the conceptions of paganism have not been overcome even by the cultured society of to-day. It is natural that these ideas so obstinately assert themselves. Of the many impulses that rule man with demoniacal power, that nourish, preserve, and propagate him, without his knowledge or supervision, of these impulses of which the middle ages present such great pathological excesses, only the smallest part is accessible to scientific analysis and conceptual knowledge. The fundamental character of all these instincts is the feeling of our oneness and sameness with nature ; a feeling that at times can be silenced but never eradicated by absorbing intellectual occupa- tions, and which certainly has a sound basis, no matter to what religious absurdities it may have given rise. 9. The French encyclopaedists of the eighteenth century imagined they were not far from a final ex- planation of the world by physical and mechanical prin- ciples ; Laplace even conceived a mind competent to foretell the progress of 'nature for all eternity, if but the masses, their positions, and initial velocities were given. In the eighteenth century, this joyful overestimation of the scope of the new physico-mechanical ideas is par- 464 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. ove-esti- donable. Indeed, it is a refreshing, noble, and ele- theme- vating spectacle ; and we can deeply sympathise with vie a w. 1Ca this expression of intellectual joy, so unique in history. But now, after a century has elapsed, after our judg- ment has grown more sober, the world-conception of the encyclopaedists appears to us as a mechanical mythology in contrast to the animistic of the old religions. Both views contain undue and fantastical exaggerations of an incomplete perception. Careful physical research will lead, however, to an analysis of our sensations. We shall then discover that our hunger is not so essen- tially different from the tendency of sulphuric acid for zinc, and our will not so greatly different from the pressure of a stone, as now appears. We shall again feel ourselves nearer nature, without its being neces- sary that we should resolve ourselves into a nebulous and mystical mass of molecules, or make nature a haunt of hobgoblins. The direction in which this en- lightenment is to be looked for, as the result of long and painstaking research, can of course only be sur- mised. To anticipate the result, or even to attempt to introduce it into any scientific investigation of to-day, would be mythology, not science. Pretensions Physical science does not pretend to be a complete and atti- . r -_..... .. tude^of view of the world ; it simply claims that it is working science, toward such a complete view in the future. The high- est philosophy of the scientific investigator is precisely this toleration of an incomplete conception of the world and the preference for it rather than an apparently per- fect, but inadequate conception. Our religious opin- ions are always our own private affair, as long as we do not obtrude them upon others and do not apply them to things which come under the jurisdiction of a differ- ent tribunal. Physical inquirers themselves entertain FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 465 the most diverse opinions on this subject, according to the range of their intellects and their estimation of the consequences. Physical science makes no investigation at all into things that are absolutely inaccessible to exact investi- gation, or as yet inaccessible to it. But should prov- inces ever be thrown open to exact research which are now closed to it, no well-organised man, no one who cherishes honest intentions towards himself and others, will any longer then hesitate to countenance inquiry with a view to exchanging his opinion regarding such provinces for positive knowledge of them. When, to-day, we see society waver, see it change Results of the incom- its views on the same question according to its mood and pieteness of our view of the events of the week, like the register of an organ, when the world. we behold the profound mental anguish which is thus prpduced, we should know that this is the natural and necessary outcome of the incompleteness and transi- tional character of our philosophy. A competent view of the world can never be got as a gift ; we must ac- quire it by hard work. And only by granting free sway to reason and experience in the provinces in which they alone are determinative, shall we, to the weal of man- kind, approach, slowly, gradually, but surely, to that ideal of a monistic view of the world which is alone compatible with the economy of a sound mind. in. ANALYTICAL MECHANICS. i . The mechanics of Newton are purely geometrical. The geo- TT i i i i r i--.--. - metrical He deduces his theorems from his initial assumptions mechanics ., , ,. . of Newton. entirely by means of geometrical constructions. His procedure is frequently so artificial that, as Laplace 466 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. remarked, it is unlikely that the propositions were dis- covered in that way. We notice, moreover, that the expositions of Newton are not as candid as those of Galileo and Huygens. Newton's is the so-called syn- thetic method of the ancient geometers. Analytic When we deduce results from given suppositions, mechanics. . nj , 7 j- TTTI -it the procedure is called synthetic. When we seek the conditions of a proposition or of the properties of a fig- ure, the procedure is analytic. The practice of the latter method became usual largely in consequence of the application of algebra to geometry. It has become customary, therefore, to call the algebraical method generally, the analytical. The term " analytical me- chanics," which is contrasted with the synthetical, or geometrical, mechanics of Newton, is the exact equiva- lent of the phrase " algebraical mechanics." Euierand 2. The foundations of analytical mechanics were n'n's con- laid by EULER (Mechanic a, sive Motus Scientia Analytice Exposita, St. Petersburg, 1736). But while Euler's method, in its resolution of curvilinear forces into tan- gential and normal components, still bears a trace of the old geometrical modes, the procedure of MACLAURIN (A Complete System of Fluxions, Edinburgh, 1742) marks a very important advance. This author resolves all forces in three fixed directions, and thus invests the computations of this subject with a high degree of symmetry and perspicuity. 3. Analytical mechanics, however, was brought to its highest degree of perfection by LAGRANGE. La- grange's aim is (Mecanique analytique, Paris, 1788) to dispose once for all oi the reasoning necessary to resolve mechanical problems, by embodying as much as pos- sible of it in a single formula. This he did. Every case that presents itself can now be dealt with by a very FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 467 simple, highly symmetrical and perspicuous schema; and whatever reasoning is left is performed by purely mechanical methods. The mechanics of Lagrange is a stupendous contribution to the economy of thought. In statics, Lagrange starts from the principle of statics 500 r m r m founded on virtual velocities. On a number of material points the princi- ples of vir- ;;/ 1? ;;/ 2 , ;# 3 . . . ., definitely connected with one another, tuai veioci- are impressed the forces P^ P 2 , P% . . . . If these points receive any infinitely small displacements / 1? / 2 , / 3 . . . . compatible with the connections of the sys- tem, then for equilibrium 2 ' Pp = ; where the well- known exception in which the equality passes into an inequality is left out of account. Now refer the whole system to a set of rectangular coordinates. Let the coordinates of the material points be x^, j/ 1 , z 19 x 2 , y 2 , z 2 . . . . Resolve the forces into the components X lf V 1} Z 19 X 2 , Y 2 , Z 2 . . . . parallel to the axes of coordinates, and the displacements into the displacements $x l} 6y I9 dz^, dx^, $y 2 > $z 2 ' - - also parallel to the axes. In the determination of the work done only the displacements of the point of appli- cation in the direction of each force-component need be considered for that component, and the expression of the principle accordingly is + Ydy -\-Z6z) = ........ (1) where the appropriate indices are to be inserted for the points, and the final expressions summed. The fundamental formula of dynamics is derived Dynamics . on the prin- from D'Alembert's principle. On the material points cipie of . . r r D'Alem- m v m 2 , ;;/ 3 . . . ., having the coordinates # 1 ,jy 1 , # 15 x t> , ben. j; 2 , z 2 . . . . the force-components X lt F x , Z 19 X 2 , Y 2) Z 2 . . . . act. But, owing to the connections of the 468 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. system's parts, the masses undergo accelerations, which are those of the forces. These are called the effective forces. But the impressed forces, that is, the forces which exist by virtue of the laws of physics, X, Y, Z. . . . and the negative of these effective forces are, owing to the connections of the system, in equilibrium. Applying, accordingly, the principle of virtual velocities, we get ?\(Y 2-{ \X ; Discussion 4. Thus, Lagrange conforms to tradition in making grange's statics precede dynamics. He was by no means com- pelled to do so. On the contrary, he might, with equal propriety, have started from the proposition that the connections, neglecting their straining, perform no work, or that all the possible work of the system is due to the impressed forces. In the latter case he would have begun with equation (2), which expresses this fact, and which, for equilibrium (or non-accelerated motion) reduces itself to (i) as a particular case. This would have made analytical mechanics, as a system, even more logical. Equation (i), which for the case of equilibrium makes the element of the work corresponding to the assumed displacement = 0, gives readily the results discussed in page 69. If dV dV dV dot dy> dz ! FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 4 6 9 that is to say, If X, Y t Z are the partial differential co- efficients of one and the same function of the coordi- nates of position, the whole expression under the sign of summation is the total variation, 6 V, of V. If the latter is = 0, J^is in general a maximum or a minimum. 5. We will now illustrate the use of equation (i) by indication J u ^ / J of the gen- a simple example. If all the points of application of the g*{ h s ^ u . forces are independent of each other, no problem is tion of stat- * ical prot>- presented. Each point is then In equilibrium only Jems. when the forces impressed on it, and consequently their components, are = 0. All the displacements d x, dy, dz. . . . are then wholly arbitrary, and equation (i) can subsist only provided the coefficients of all the displacements doc, dy, dz. . . . are equal to zero. But if equations obtain between the coordinates of the several points, that is to say, if the points are sub- ject to mutual constraints, the equations so obtaining will be of the form J?(jx^ y 19 z^ x 2 , y 2 , z 2 . . . .) = 0, or, more briefly, of the form F= 0. Then equations also obtain between the displacements, of the form <?jr dF dF dF ? _ i _ i _ i _ 8 .... | which we shall briefly designate as.>-^ 0. If the system consist of n points, we shall have 372 coordi- nates, and equation (i) will contain 372 magnitudes d,r, dy, dz. . . . If, further, between the coordinates m equations of the form ^=0 subsist, then m equa- tions of the form DP= will be simultaneously given between the variations dx, dy, #.... By these equations m variations can be expressed in terms of the remainder, and so inserted in equation (i). In (i), therefore, there are left 3 n m arbitrary displace- ments,, whose coefficients are put = 0. There are thus 470 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. A statical example. obtained between the forces and the coordinates 3 n m equations, to which the m equations (F = 0) must be added. We have, accordingly, in all, 3/2 equations, which are sufficient to determine the $n coordinates of the position of equilibrium, provided the forces are given and only the form of the system's equilibrium is sought. But if the form of the system is given and the forces are sought that maintain equilibrium, the question is indeterminate. We have then, to determine 3 n force- components, only 372 m equa- tions ; the m equations (F = 0) not containing the force-compo- nents. As an example of this man- ner of treatment we shall select a lever OM= a, free to rotate about the origin of coordinates in the plane XY, and having at its end a second, simi- lar lever MN=b. At M and N, the coordinates of which we shall call x, y and x i9 j/ 1 , the forces X, Fand X 19 YI are applied. Equation (i), then, has the form Xdx + X^d*! + Ydy + Y^dy^ = ... (3) Of the form F= two equations here exist ; namely, X Fig. 232. 1 j)*t*=Q f The equations DF= 0, accordingly, are l y) dy^ . (5) Here, two of the variations in (5) can be expressed in terms of the others and introduced in (3). Also for FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 47 1 purposes of elimination Lagrange employed a per- .^^an^e's fectly uniform and systematic procedure, which may nate coeffi- be pursued quite mechanically, without reflection. We shall use it here. It consists in multiplying each of the equations (5) by an indeterminate coefficient A, /*, and adding each, in this form to (3). So doing, we obtain The coefficients of the four displacements may now be put directly = 0. For two displacements are ar- bitrary, and the two remaining coefficients may be made equal to zero by the appropriate choice of A and yu which is tantamount to an elimination of the two remaining displacements. We have, therefore, the four equations X l (6) We shall first assume that the coordinates are given, and seek the forces that maintain equilibrium. The values of A and JJL are each determined by equating to zero two coefficients. We get from the second and fourth equations, X, A -- L anc i JK whence that is to say, the total component force impressed at N has the direction MN. From the first and third equations we get 472 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. , Their em- A = ployment in the deter- f an< ^ fr m ^ese by simple reduction y that is to say, the resultant of the forces applied at M and N acts in the direction OM. * The four force-components are accordingly subject to only two conditions, (7) and (8). The problem, con- sequently, is an indeterminate one ; as it must be from the nature of the case ; for equilibrium does not depend upon the absolute magnitudes of the forces, but upon their directions and relations. If we assume that the forces are given and seek the four coordinates, we treat equations (6) in exactly the same manner. Only, we can now make use, in addi- tion, of equations (4). Accordingly, we have, upon the elimination of A. and JJL, equations (7) and (8) and two equations (4). From these the following, which fully solve the problem, are readily deduced * The mechanical interpretation of the indeterminate coefficients A ft may be shown as follows. Equations (6) express the equilibrium of two free points on which in addition to X, V, X, Y other forces act which answer to the re- maining expressions and just destroy^", Y,-X"i, Y^. The point N, for example, is in equilibrium if X-L is destroyed by a force n(xix} t undetermined as yet in magnitude, and YI by a force /J, (y y}. This supplementary force is due to the constraints. Its direction is determined ; though its magnitude is not, If we call the angle which it makes with the axis of abscissas a, we shall have that is to say, the force due to the connections acts in the direction of . FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 473 ^ Character Yl entpror" Simple as this example is, it is yet sufficient to give us a distinct idea of the character and significance of Lagrange's method. The mechanism of this method is excogitated once for all, and in its application to par- ticular cases scarcely any additional thinking is re- quired. The simplicity of the example here selected being such that it can be solved by a mere glance at the figure, we have, in our study of the method, the advantage of a ready verification at every step. 6. We will now illustrate the application of equa- General tion (2), which is Lagrange's form of statement of the P s S oiution D'Alembert's principle. There is no problem when Seal "pro?- the masses move quite independently of one another. Each mass yields to the forces applied to it ; the va- riations dx, dy, 3 z . . . . are wholly arbitrary, and each coefficient may be singly put = 0. For the motion of n masses we thus obtain 3 n simul- taneous differential equations. But if equations of condition (]?=. 0) obtain between the coordi- nates, these equations will lead to others (DF= 0) between the dis- placements or variations. With the latter we proceed exactly as in the application of equation (i). Only it must be noted here that the equations F= must eventually be em- ployed in their undifferentiated as well as in their dif- ferentiated form, as will best be seen from the follow- ing example. 474 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. A dynam- A heavy material point /#, lying in a vertical plane ica exam ^^ .^ ^^ to move on a straight line, y = ax, inclined at an angle to the horizon. (Fig. 233.) Here equa- tion (2) becomes and, since X= 0, and Y= mg, also ^*- + (*+S)*= ........ () The place of ^~ is taken by jy = tf.# ................... (10) and for DF = we have Equation (9), accordingly, since dy drops out and dx is arbitrary, passes into the form By the differentiation of (10), or (J^= 0), we have d*y __ ~dt*~ and, consequently, Then, by the integration of (n), we obtain a t* and where b and c are constants of integration, determined by the initial position and velocity of m. This result can also be easily found by the direct method. FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 475 Some care is necessary In the application of equa- A modifica J r * ^ . tionofthis tion (i) if F = contains the time. The procedure in example. such cases maybe illustrated by the following example. Imagine in the preceding case the straight line on which m descends to move vertically upwards with the acceleration y. We start again from equation (9) F= is here replaced by (12) To form DJF= 0, we vary (12) only with respect to x and y, for we are concerned here only with the possible displacement of the system in its position at any given instant, and not with the displacement that actually takes place in time. We put, therefore, as in the pre- vious case, and obtain, as before, But to get an equation In x alone, we have, si-nce x and y are connected in (13) by the actual motion, to differentiate (12) with respect to t and employ the re- sulting equation for substitution in (13). In this way the equation d * x , ( , , <l* x \ _+( ;f+ y + tf _J tf= is obtained, which, integrated, gives 47 6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. If a weightless body ;;/ lie on the moving straight line, we obtain these equations results which are readily understood, when we re- flect that, on a straight line moving upwards with the acceleration y, m behaves as if it were affected with a downward acceleration y on the straight line at rest. Discussion 7- The procedure with equation (12) in the preced- i ? Ied h ^m^~ ing example may be rendered somewhat clearer by the ple * following consideration. Equation (2), D'Alembert's principle, asserts, that all the work that can be done in the displacement of a system is done by the impressed forces and not by the connections. This jl is evident, since the rigidity of the con- nections allows no changes in the rela- Fig. 234. tive positions which would be neces- sary for any alteration in the potentials of the elastic forces. But this ceases to be true when the connec- tions undergo changes in time. In this case, the changes of the connections perform work, and we can then ap- ply equation (2) to the displacements that actually take place only provided we add to the impressed forces the forces that produce the changes of the connections. A heavy mass m is free to move on a straight line parallel to 6>F(Fig. 234.) Let this line be subject to FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 477 a forced acceleration In the direction of x, suc ^ t ^ at I ^ u h S g r ^ d 1 ] the equation J? = becomes if jed exam- D'Alembert's principle again gives equation (9). But since from DF= it follows here that doc 0, this equation reduces itself to ,= ............ (15) in which 6y Is wholly arbitrary. Wherefore, and to which must be supplied (14) or It is patent that (15) does not assign the total work of the displacement that actually takes place, but only that of Qmz possible displacement on the straight line conceived, for the moment, as fixed. If we imagine the straight line massless, and cause it to travel parallel to itself in some guiding mechan- ism moved by a force my, equation (2) will be re- placed by and since dx, dy are wholly arbitrary here, we obtain the two equations _ 47 8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. which give the same results as before. The apparently different mode of treatment of these cases is simply the result of a slight inconsistency, springing from the fact that all the forces involved are, for reasons facilitating calculation, not included in the consideration at the outset, but a portion is left to be dealt with subse- quently. Deduction 8. As the different mechanical principles only ex- i f p ie e o?"* press different aspects of the same fact, any one of grange's them is easily deducible from any other \ as we shall tSPdySam- now illustrate by developing the principle of vis -viva icai equa- frQm e q. uat ; on ( 2 ) o f pa g e ^53. Equation (2) refers to instantaneously possible displacements, that is, to "vir- tual" displacements. But when the connections of a system are independent of the time, the motions that actually take place are "virtual " displacements. Conse- quently the principle may be applied to actual motions. For doc, dy, $z, we may, accordingly, write dx, dy, dz> the displacements which take place in time, and put 2 (Xdx + Ydy + Zdz) = The expression to the right may, by introducing for dx, (dx/df) dt and so forth, and by denoting the velo- city by v, also be written !d*x dx d*y dy d* z dz \-dW dt dt + d* Tt dt + fi* Tt dt = FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 479 Also in the expression to the left, (dx/df] dt may be Force- r . 9 \ f J J function. written for dx. Bat this gives J2 (Xdx + Ydy + Zdz) = where V Q denotes the velocity at the beginning and v the velocity at the end of the motion. The integral to the left can always be found if we can reduce it to a single variable, that is to say, if we know the course of the motion in time or the paths which the movable points describe. If, however, X, Y, Z are the partial differ- ential coefficients of the same function Uoi coordinates, if, that is to say, dU ^_ <p as is always the case when only central forces are in- volved, this reduction is unnecessary. The entire ex- pression to the left is then a complete differential. And we have which is to say, the difference of the force-functions (or work) at the beginning and the end of the motion is equal to the difference of the vires iriva at the be- ginning and the end of the motion. The vires invce are in such case also functions of the coordinates. In the case of a body movable in the plane of X and Y suppose, for example, X = y, Y= x ; we then have J(ydx xdy} = But if X= a, Y= x, the integral to the left is f(a dx + x dy). This integral can be assigned the moment we know the path the body has traversed, that 4 So THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. is, if y is determined a function of x. If, for example, y =jfix 2 , the integral would become _ J(a dx = a The difference of these two cases is, that in the first the work is simply a function of coordinates, that a force-function exists, that the element of the work is a complete differential, and the work consequently is de- termined by the initial and final values of the coordi- nates, while in the second case it is dependent on the entire path described. Essential Q. These simple examples, in themselves present- of an^t- ing no difficulties, will doubtless suffice to illustrate the ch^nTcs". general nature of the operations of analytical mechan- ics. No fundamental light can be expected from this branch of mechanics. On the contrary, the discovery of matters of principle must be substantially completed before we can think of framing analytical mechanics ; the sole aim of which is a perfect practical mastery of problems. Whosoever mistakes this situation, will never comprehend Lagrang'e's great performance, which here too is essentially of an economical character. Poin- sot did not altogether escape this error. It remains to be mentioned that as the result of the labors of Mobius, Hamilton, Grassmann, and others, a new transformation of mechanics is preparing. These inquirers have developed mathematical conceptions that conform more exactly and directly to our geomet- rical ideas than do the conceptions of common analyt- ical geometry ; and the advantages of analytical gene- rality and direct geometrical insight are thus united. But this transformation, of course, lies, as yet, beyond the limits of an historical exposition. (See p. 577.) FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 4*1 THE ECONOMY OF SCIENCE. i. It is the object of science to replace, or save, ex- The basrf periences, by the reproduction and anticipation of facts economy in thought. Memory is handier than experience, and often answers the same purpose. This economical office of science, which fills its whole life, is apparent at first glance ; and with its full recognition all mys- ticism in science disappears. Science is communicated by instruction, in order that one man may profit by the experience of another and be spared the trouble of accumulating it for him- self ; and thus, to spare posterity, the experiences of whole generations are stored up in libraries. Language, the instrument of this communication, The eco- - . , nomical is itself an economical contrivance. Experiences are characte analysed, or broken up, into simpler and more familiar " experiences, and then symbolised at some sacrifice of precision. The symbols of speech are as yet restricted in their use within national boundaries, and doubtless will long remain so. But written language is gradually being metamorphosed into an ideal universal character. It is certainly no longer a mere transcript of speech. Numerals, algebraic signs, chemical symbols, musical notes, phonetic alphabets, may be regarded as parts already formed of this universal character of the fu- ture ; they are, to some extent, decidedly conceptual, and of almost general international use. The analysis of colors, physical and physiological, is already far enough advanced to render an international system of color-signs perfectly practical. In Chinese writing, 4 g 2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Possibility we have an actual example of a true ideographic Ian sanan 1 -" 61 guage, pronounced diversely in different provinces, yet guage. everywhere carrying 'the same meaning. Were the system and its signs only of a simpler character, the use of Chinese writing might become universal. The dropping of unmeaning and needless accidents of gram- mar, as English mostly drops them, would be quite requisite to the adoption of such a system. But uni- versality would not be the sole merit of such a char- acter ; since to read it would be to understand it. Our children often read what they do not understand \ but that which a Chinaman cannot understand, he is pre- cluded from reading. Econom- 2. In the reproduction of facts in thought, we iero c f h a a n ac " never reproduce the facts in full, but .only that side of sentatFona them which is important to us, moved to this directly worM. or indirectly by a practical interest. Our reproductions are invariably abstractions. Here again is an econom- ical tendency. Nature is composed of sensations as its elements. Primitive man, however, first picks out certain com- pounds of these elements those namely that are re- latively permanent and of greater importance to him. The first and oldest words are names of " things. 37 Even here, there is an abstractive process, an abstrac- tion from the surroundings of the things, and from the continual small changes which these compound sensa- tions undergo, which being practically unimportant are not noticed. No inalterable thing exists. The thing is an abstraction, the name a symbol, for a compound of elements from whose changes we abstract. The reason we assign a single word to a whole compound is that we need to suggest all the constituent sensations at once. When, later, we come to remark the change- FORMAL DEVELOPMENT, 483 ableness, we cannot at the same time hold fast to the idea of the thing's permanence, unless we have recourse to the conception of a thing-iri-itself, or other such like absurdity. Sensations are not signs of things ; but, on the contrary, a thing is a thought-symbol for a com- pound sensation of relative fixedness. Properly speak- ing the world is not composed of "things" as its ele- ments, but of colors, tones, pressures, spaces, times, in short what we ordinarily call individual sensations. The whole operation is a mere affair of economy. In the reproduction of facts, we begin with the more durable and familiar compounds, and supplement these later with the unusual by way of corrections. Thus, we speak of a perforated cylinder, of a cube with bev- eled edges, expressions involving contradictions, un- less we accept the view here taken. All judgments are such amplifications and corrections of ideas already admitted. 3. In speaking of cause and effect we arbitrarily The ideas , . r , , , . cause and give relief to those elements to whose connection we effect, have to attend in the reproduction of a fact in the re- spect in which it is important to us. There is no cause nor effect in nature ; nature has but an individual exis- tence \ nature simply is. Recurrences of like cases in which A is always connected with B, that is, like results under like circumstances, that is again, the essence of the connection of cause and effect, exist but in the abstrac- tion which we perform for the purpose of mentally re- producing the facts. Let a fact become familiar, and we no longer require this putting into relief of its con- necting marks, oux" attention is no longer attracted to the new and surprising, and we cease to speak of cause and effect. Heat is said to be the cause of the tension of steam ; but when the phenomenon becomes familiar . 484 TUE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. we think of the steam at once with the tension proper to its temperature. Acid is said to be the cause of the reddening of tincture of litmus ; but later we think of the reddening as a property of the acid. Hume, Hume first propounded the question, How can a Schopen- thing A act on another thing B ? Hume, in fact, re- hauer's ex- . , . , pianadons iects causality and recognises only a wonted succes- of cause ... " '_ , , -, -, and effect, sion in time. Kant correctly remarked that a necessary connection between A and B could not be disclosed by simple observation. He assumes an innate idea or category of the mind, a Verstandesbe griff, under which the cases of experience are subsumed. Schopenhauerj who adopts substantially the same position, distin- guishes four forms of the "principle of sufficient rea- son 3 ' the logical, physical, and mathematical form, and the law of motivation. But these forms differ only as regards the matter to which they are applied, which may belong either to outward or inward experience. Cause and The natural and common-sense explanation is ap- economicai parently this. The ideas of cause and effect originally implements r j , j r , . , - of thought, sprang from an endeavor to reproduce facts in thought. At first, the connection of A and J3, of C and D, of E and Fj and so forth, is regarded as familiar. But after a greater range of experience is acquired and a con- nection between M and N is observed, it often turns out that we recognise M as made iip of A, C, E, and N of B, D 7 J?, the connection of which was before a fa- miliar fact and accordingly possesses with us a higher authority. This explains why a person of experience regards a new event with different eyes than the nov- ice. The new experience is illuminated by the mass of old experience. As a fact, then, there really does exist in the mind an "idea" under which fresh experi- ences are subsumed ; but that idea has itself been de- FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 485 veloped from experience. The notion of the necessity of the causal connection is probably created by our voluntary movements in the world and by the changes which these indirectly produce, as Hume supposed but Schopenhauer contested. Much of the authority of the ideas of cause and effect is due to the fact that they are developed instinctively and involuntarily, and that we are distinctly sensible of having personally con- tributed nothing to their formation. We may, indeed, say, that our sense of causality is not acquired by the individual, but has been perfected in the develop- ment of the race. Cause and effect, therefore, are things of thought, having an economical office. It can- not be said why they arise. For it is precisely by the abstraction of uniformities that we know the question "why." (See Appendix, XXVI, p. 579.) 4. In the details of science, its economical character Econom- is still more apparent. The so-called descriptive sci- tures of 1 . n . . , .all laws of ences must chiefly remain content with reconstructing nature, individual facts. Where it is possible, the common fea- tures of many facts are once for all placed in relief. But in sciences that are more highly developed, rules for the reconstruction of great numbers of facts maybe embod- ied in a single expression. Thus, instead of noting indi- vidual cases of light-refraction, we can mentally recon- struct all present and future cases, if we know that the incident ray, the refracted ray, and the perpendicular lie in the same plane and that sin a/sm /3 = n. Here, instead of the numberless cases of refraction in different combinations of matter and under all different angles of incidence, we have simply to note the rule above stated and the values of n, which is much easier. The economical purpose is here unmistakable. In nature there is no law of refraction, only different cases of re- 486 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. fraction. The law of refraction is a concise compen- dious rule, devised by us for the mental reconstruction of a fact, and only for its reconstruction in part, that is, on its geometrical side. The econ- 5. The sciences most highly developed economically nSthemaS are those whose facts are reducible to a few numerable ences. elements of like nature. Such is the science of mechan- ics, in which we deal exclusively with spaces, times, and masses. The whole previously established econ- omy of mathematics stands these sciences in stead. Mathematics may be defined as the economy of count- ing. Numbers are arrangement-signs which, for the sake of perspicuity and economy, are themselves ar- ranged in a simple system. Numerical operations, it is found, are independent of the kind of objects operated on, and are consequently mastered once for all. When, for the first time, I have occasion to add five objects to seven others, I count the whole collection through, at once ; but when I afterwards discover that I can start counting from 5, I save myself part of the trouble ; and still later, remembering that 5 and 7 always count up to 12, I dispense with the numeration entirely. Arithmetic The object of all arithmetical operations is to save andaige- ^-^^ nume ration, by utilising the results of our old operations of counting. Our endeavor is, having done a sum once, to preserve the answer for future use. The first four rules of arithmetic well illustrate this view. Such, too, is the purpose of algebra, which, substitut- ing -relations for values, symbolises and definitively fixes all numerical operations that follow the same rule. For example, we learn from the equation FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 487 that the more complicated numerical operation at the ' left may always be replaced by the simpler one at the right, whatever numbers x and y stand for. We thus save ourselves the labor of performing In future cases the more complicated operation. Mathematics is the method of replacing in the most comprehensive and economical manner possible, new numerical operations by old ones done already with known results. It may happen in this procedure that the results of operations are employed which were originally performed centu- ries ago. Often operations involving intense mental effort The theory . . . ofdeter- may be replaced by the action of semi-mechanical minants. routine, with great saving of time and avoidance of fatigue. For example, the theory of determinants owes its origin to the remark, that it is not necessary to solve each time anew equations of the form from which result but that the solution may be effected by means of the coefficients, by writing down the coefficients according to a prescribed scheme and operating with them me- chemically. Thus, and similarly '' *\ = P, and ^ ^ !== a /- /} yT x- I *- 4 88 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Calculating Even a total disburdening of the mind can be ef- fected in mathematical operations. This happens where operations of counting hitherto performed are symbol- ised by mechanical operations with signs, and our brain energy, instead of being wasted on the repetition of old operations, is spared for more important tasks. The merchant pursues a like economy, when, instead of directly handling his bales of goods, he operates with bills of lading or assignments of them. The drudgery of computation may even be relegated to a machine. Several different types of calculating ma- chines are actually in practical use. The earliest of these (of any complexity) was the difference-engine of Babbage, who was familiar with the ideas here pre- sented. other ab- A numerical result is not always reached by the methods of actual solution of the problem \ it may also be reached results? 6 indirectly. It is easy to ascertain, for example, that a curve whose quadrature for the abscissa x has the value #'", gives an increment mx m ~*dx of the quadrature for the increment dx of the abscissa. But we then also know that Cnix m ' t dx = x m \ that is, we recognise the quan- tity x' n from the increment mx m ~~ l dx as unmistakably as we recognise a fruit by its rind. Results of this kind, accidentally found by simple inversion, or by processes more or less analogous, are very extensively employed in mathematics. That scientific work should be more useful the more it has been used, while mechanical work is expended in use, may seem strange to us. When a person who daily takes the same walk accidentally finds a shorter cut, and thereafter, remembering that it is shorter, al- ways goes that way, he undoubtedly saves himself the difference of the work. But memory is really not work. FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 489 It only places at our disposal energy within our present or future possession, which the circumstance of igno- rance prevented us from availing ourselves of. This is precisely the case with the application of scientific ideas. The mathematician who pursues his studies with- Necessity c of clear out clear views of this matter, must often have the views on 7 this sub- uncomfortable feeling that his paper and pencil sur- ject. pass him in intelligence. Mathematics, thus pursued as an object of instruction, is scarcely of more educa- tional value than busying oneself with the Cabala. On the contrary, it induces a tendency toward mystery, which is pretty sure to bear its fruits. 6. The science of physics also furnishes examples Examples of this economy of thought, altogether similar to those omy of ec we have just examined. A brief reference here will suf- physics, fice. The moment of Inertia saves us the separate con- sideration of the individual particles of masses. By the force-function we dispense with the separate in- vestigation of individual force-components. The sim- plicity of reasonings Involving force-functions springs from the fact that a great amount of mental work had to be performed before the discovery of the properties of the force-functions was possible. Gauss's dioptrics dispenses us from the separate consideration of the single refracting surfaces of a dioptrical system and substitutes for it the principal and nodal points. But a careful consideration of the single surfaces had to precede the discovery of the principal and nodal points. Gauss's dioptrics simply saves us the necessity of often repeating this consideration. We must admit, therefore, that there is no result of science which In point of principle could not have been arrived at wholly without methods. But, as a matter 490 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. science a of fact, within the short span of a human life and with problem, man's limited powers of memory, any stock of knowl- edge worthy of the name is unattainable except by the greatest mental economy. Science itself, therefore, may be regarded as a minimal problem, consisting of the completest possible presentment of facts with the least possible expenditure of thought. 7. The function of science, as we take it, is to re- place experience. Thus, on the one hand, science must remain in the province of experience, but, on the other, must hasten beyond it, constantly expecting con- firmation, constantly expecting the reverse. Where neither confirmation nor refutation is possible, science is not concerned. Science acts and only acts in the domain of uncompleted experience. Exemplars of such branches of science are the theories of elasticity and of the conduction of heat, both of which ascrioe to the smallest particles of matter only such properties as ob- servation supplies in the study of the larger portions. The comparison of theory and experience may be far- ther and farther extended, as our means of observation increase 1 in refinement. The princi- Experience alone, without the ideas that are asso- nu?ty?the ciated with it, would forever remain strange to us. entific Those ideas that hold good throughout the widest do- mains of research and that supplement the greatest amount of experience, are the most scientific. The prin- ciple of continuity, the use of which everywhere per- vades modern inquiry, simply prescribes a mode of * conception which conduces in the highest degree to the economy of thought. 8. If a long elastic rod be fastened in a vise, the rod may be made to execute slow vibrations. These are directly observable, can be seen, touched, and FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 491 graphically recorded. If the rod be shortened, the Example n- r J , IT lustrative vibrations will increase in rapidity and cannot be di-of the 1-111 j method of rectly seen ; the rod will present to the sight a blurred science, image. This is a new phenomenon. But the sensa- tion of touch is still like that of the previous case \ we can still make the rod record its movements ; and if we mentally retain the conception of vibrations, we can still anticipate the results of experiments. On further shortening the rod the sensation of touch is altered ; the rod begins to sound ; again a new phenomenon is presented. But the phenomena do not all change at once ; only this or that phenomenon changes ; conse- quently the accompanying notion of vibration, which is not confined to any single one, is still serviceable, still economical. Even when the sound has reached so high a pitch and the vibrations ' have become so small that the previous means of observation are not of avail, we still advantageously imagine the sounding rod to perform vibrations, and can predict the vibra- tions of the dark lines in the spectrum of the polarised light of a rod of glass. If on the rod being further shortened all the phenomena suddenly passed into new phenomena, the conception of vibration would no longer be serviceable because it would no longer afford us a means of supplementing the new experiences by the previous ones. When we mentally add to those actions of a human being which we can perceive, sensations and ideas like our own which we cannot perceive, the object of the idea we so form is economical. The idea makes ex- perience intelligible to us ; it supplements and sup- plants experience. This idea is not regarded as a great scientific discovery, only because its formation is so natural that every child conceives it. Now, .this is 4 Q2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS exactly what we do when we imagine a moving body which has just disappeared behind a pillar, or a comet at the moment invisible, as continuing its motion and retaining its previously observed properties. We do this that we may not be surprised by its reappearance. We fill out the gaps in experience by the ideas that experience suggests. AH scien- 9- Yet not all the prevalent scientific theories origi- odes'no't nated so naturally and artlessly. Thus, chemical, elec- fhe^nc?- 11 trical, and optical phenomena are explained by atoms. Snuity? n " But the mental artifice 'atom was not formed by the principle of continuity ; on the contrary, it is a pro- duct especially devised for the purpose in view. Atoms cannot be perceived by the senses ; like all substances, they are things of thought. Furthermore, the atoms are invested with properties that absolutely contradict the attributes hitherto observed in bodies. However well fitted atomic theories may be to reproduce certain groups of facts, the physical inquirer who has laid to heart Newton's rules will only admit those theories as provisional helps, and will strive to attain, in some more natural way, a satisfactory substitute. Atoms and The atomic theory plays a part in physics similar tai artifices, to that of certain auxiliary concepts in mathematics; it is a mathematical model for facilitating the mental reproduction of facts. Although we represent vibra- tions by the harmonic formula, the phenomena of cool- ing by exponentials, falls by squares of times, etc., no one will fancy that vibrations in themselves have any- thing to do with the circular functions, or the motion of falling bodies with squares. It has simply been ob- served that the relations between the quantities inves- tigated were similar to certain relations obtaining be- tween familiar mathematical functions, and these more FORMAL DEVELOPMENT. 493 familiar ideas are employed as an easy means of sup- plementing experience. Natural phenomena whose re- lations are not similar to those of functions with which we are familiar, are at present very difficult to recon- struct. But the progress of mathematics may facilitate the matter. As mathematical helps of this kind, spaces of more Muiti- than three dimensions may be used, as I have else- sio a ^ where shown. But it is not necessary to regard these, on this account, as anything more than mental arti- fices. * *As the outcome of the labors of Lobatchevski, Bolyai, Gauss, and Rie- mann, the view has gradually obtained currency in the mathematical world, that that which we call space is a particular, actual case of a more general, conceivable case of multiple quantitative manifoldness. The space of sight and touch is a threefold manifoldness; it possesses three dimensions ; and every point in it can be defined by three distinct and independent data. But it is possible to conceive of a quadruple or even multiple space-like manifold- ness. And the character of the manifoldness may also be differently conceived from the manifoldness of actual space. We regard this discovery, which is chiefly due to the labors of Riemann, as a very important one. The properties of actual space are here directly exhibited as objects of experience, and the pseudo-theories of geometry that seek to excogitate these properties by meta- physical arguments are overthrown. A thinking being is supposed to live in the surface of a sphere, with no other kind of space to institute comparisons with. His space will appear to him similarly constituted throughout. He might regard _it as infinite, and could only be convinced of the contrary by experience. Starting from any two points of a great circle of the sphere and proceeding at right angles thereto on other great circles, he could hardly expect that the circles last mentioned would intersect. So, also, with respect to the space in which we live, only ex- perience can decide whether it is finite, whether parallel lines intersect in it, or the like. The significance of this elucidation can scarcely be overrated. An enlightenment similar to that which Riemann inaugurated in science was produced in the rnind of humanity at large, as regards the surface of the earth, by the discoveries of the first circumnavigators. The theoretical investigation of the mathematical possibilities above re- ferred to, has, primarily, nothing to do with the question whether things really exist which correspond to these possibilities; and we must not hold mathe- maticians responsible for the popular absurdities which their investigations have given rise to. The space of sight and touch is 2?/zr<?<?-dimensional ; that, no one ever yet doubted. If, now, it should be found that bodies vanish from this space, or new bodies get into it, the question might scientifically be dis- cussed whether it would facilitate and promote our insight into things to con- ceive experiential space as part of a four-dimensional or multi-dimensional 494 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Hypotheses This is the case, too, with all hypothesis formed and facts . . . r ,->. for trie explanation of new phenomena. Our concep- tions of electricity fit in at once with the electrical phe- nomena, and take almost spontaneously the familiar course, the moment we note that things take place as if attracting and repelling fluids moved on the surface of the conductors. But these mental expedients have nothing whatever to do with the phenomenon itself. (See Appendix, XXVII, p. 579.) space. Yet in such a case, this fourth dimension would, none the less, remain a pure thing of thought a inenta'l fiction. But this is not the way matters stand. The phenomena mentioned were not forthcoming until after the new views were published, and were then ex- hibited in the presence of certain persons at spiritualistic seances. The fourth dimension was a very opportune discover^ for the spiritualists and for theo- logians who were in a quandary about the location of hell. The use the spiri- tualist makes of the fourth dimension is this, 'it is possible to move out of a finite straight line, without passing the extremities, through the second dimen- sion ; out of a finite closed surface through the third ; and, analogously, out of a finite closed space, without passing through the enclosing boundaries, through the fourth dimension. Even the tricks that prestidigitateurs, in the old days, harmlessly executed in three dimensions, are now invested with a new halo by the fourth. But the tricks of the spiritualists, the tying or untying of knots in endless strings, the removing of bodies from closed spaces, are all performed in cases where there is absolutely nothing at stake. All is purpose- less jugglery. We have not yet found &n accoucheur who has accomplished, parturition through the fourth dimension. If we should, the question would at once become a serious one. Professor Simony's beautiful tricks in rope- tying, which, as the performance of a prestidigitateur, are very admirable, speak against, not for, the spiritualists. Everyone is free to set up an opinion and to adduce proofs in support of it. Whether, though, a scientist shall find it worth his while to enter into serious investigations of opinions so advanced, is a question which his reason and instinct alone can decide, if these things, in the end, should turn out to be true, I shall not be ashamed of being the last to believe them. What I have seen of them was not calculated to make me less sceptical. I myself regarded multi-dimensioned spa^e as a mathematico-physical help even, prior to the appearance of Riemann's memoir. But 1 trust tuat no one will employ what I have thought, said, and written on this subject as a basis for the fabrication of ghost stories. (Compare Mach, Die Geschi>.hte und die Wurzel des Satzes von, der Er ka.it ting der Arbeit.} CHAPTER V. THE RELATIONS OF MECHANICS TO OTHER DE- PARTMENTS OF KNOWLEDGE, i. THE RELATIONS OF MECHANICS TO PHYSICS. 1. Purely mechanical phenomena do not exist. The J t ^ a production of mutual accelerations in masses is, to all J^ appearances, a purely dynamical phenomenon. Butbeion with these dynamical results are always associated ence - thermal, magnetic, electrical, and chemical phenom- ena, and the former are always modified in proportion as the latter are asserted. On the other hand, thermal, magnetic, electrical, and chemical conditions also can produce motions. Purely mechanical phenomena, ac- cordingly, are abstractions, made, either intentionally or from necessity, for facilitating our comprehension of things. The same thing is true of the other classes of physical phenomena. Every event belongs, in a strict sense, to all the departments of physics, the latter be- ing separated only by an artificial classification, which is partly conventional, partly physiological, and partly historical. 2. The view that makes mechanics the basis of the remaining branches of physics, and explains all physical phenomena by mechanical ideas, is in our judgment a prejudice. Knowledge which is historically first, is not necessarily the foundation of all that is subsequently 496 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The me- gained. As more and more facts are discovered and aspects of classified, entirely new ideas of general scope can be necessarily formed. We have no means of knowing, as yet, which its funda- . mental of the physical phenomena go deepest, whether the mechanical phenomena are perhaps not the most super- ficial of all, or whether all do not go equally deep. Even in mechanics we no longer regard the oldest law, the law of the lever, as the foundation of all the other principles. ^ Artificiality The mechanical theory of nature, is, undoubtedly, chanicai in an historical view, both intelligible and pardonable : conception . of the and it may also, for a time, have been of much value. world. J . . . But, upon the whole, it is an artificial conception. Faithful adherence to the method that led the greatest investigators of nature, Galileo, Newton, Sadi Carnot, Faraday, and J. R. Mayer, to their great results, re- stricts physics to the expression of actual facts, and forbids the construction of hypotheses behind the facts, where nothing tangible and verifiable is found. *If this is done, only the simple connection of the motions of masses, of changes of temperature, of changes in the values of the potential function, of chemical changes, and so forth is to be ascertained, and nothing is to be imagined along with these elements except the physical attributes or characteristics directly or indirectly given by observation. This idea was elsewhere * developed by the author with respect to the phenomena of heat, and indicated, in the same place, with respect to electricity. All hy- potheses of fluids or media are eliminated from the theory of electricity as entirely superfluous, when we reflect that electrical conditions are all given by the * Mach, Die Geschichte und die Wurzel des Satzes -von der Erhaltung dsr Arbeit. ITS RELATIONS TO OTHER SCIENCES. 497 values of. the potential function V and the dielectric science " should be constants. If we assume the differences of the values based on facts, not of Kto be measured (on the electrometer) by the forces, on hypoth- and regard Kand not the quantity of electricity Q as the primary notion, or measurable physical attribute,, we shall have, for any simple insulator, for our quan- tity of electricity ay d*V d*V (where x, y, z denote the coordinates and dv the ele- ment of volume,) and for our potential* Here Q and F appear as derived notions, in which no conception of fluid or medium is contained. If we work over in a similar manner the entire domain of physics, we shall restrict ourselves wholly to the quan- titative conceptual expression of actual facts. All su- perfluous and futile notions are eliminated, and the imaginary problems to which they have given rise fore- stalled. (See Appendix XXVIII, p. 583.) The removal of notions whose foundations are his- torical, conventional, or accidental, can best be fur- thered by a comparison of the conceptions obtaining in the different departments, and by finding for the conceptions of every department the corresponding conceptions of others. We discover, thus, that tem- peratures and potential functions correspond to the velocities of mass-motions. A single velocity-value, a single temperature-value, or a single value of potential function, never changes alone. But whilst in the case of velocities and potential functions, so far as we yet * Using the terminology of Clausius. 498 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, pesirabii- know, only differences come into consideration, the compare- significance of temperature is not only contained in its tive pfays- ic*. difference with respect to other temperatures. Thermal capacities correspond to masses, the potential of an electric charge to quantity of heat, quantity of elec- tricity to entropy, and so on. The pursuit of such re- semblances and differences lays the foundation of a comparative physics, which shall ultimately render pos- sible the concise expression of extensive groups of facts, without arbitrary additions. We shall then possess a homogeneous physics, unmingled with artificial atomic theories. It will also be perceived, that a real economy of scientific thought cannot be attained by mechanical hypotheses. Even if an hypothesis were fully com- petent to reproduce a given department of natural phe- nomena, say, the phenomena of heat, we should, by accepting it, only substitute for the actual relations be- tween the mechanical and thermal processes, the hy- pothesis. The real fundamental facts are replaced by an equally large number of hypotheses, which is cer- tainly no gain. Once an hypothesis has facilitated, as best it can, our view of new facts, by the substitu- tion of more familiar ideas, its powers are exhausted. We err when we expect more enlightenment from an hypothesis than from the facts themselves. circum- 3* The development of the mechanical view was whicif fa- favored by many circumstances. In the first place, a deve*io]> e connection of all natural events with mechanical pro- mechanical cesses is unmistakable, and it is natural, therefore, that view - we should be. led to explain less known phenomena by better known mechanical events. Then again, it was first in the department of mechanics that laws of gen- eral and extensive scope were discovered. A law of ITS RELATIONS TO OTHER SCIENCES. 499 this kind is the principle of vis viva 2 (17^ 7 ) = 2%m(v\ ?'), which states that the increase of the vis viva of a system in its passage from one position to another is equal to the increment of the force-function, or work, which is expressed as a function of the final and initial positions. If we fix our attention on the work a system can perform and call it with Helmholtz the Spannkraft, *$*,* then the work actually performed, U, will appear as a diminution of the Spannkraft^ K, initially present; accordingly, S=K 7, and the principle of vis viva takes the form ^ _|_ iy 2 /// 1] 2 const, that is to say. every diminution of the Spannkraft, is The con- J J 2 y servation of compensated for by an increase of the vis viva. In this Energy, form the principle is also called the law of the Conser- vation of Energy ', in that the sum of the Spannkraft (the potential energy) and the vis viva (the kinetic energy) remains constant in the system. But since, in nature, it is possible that not only vis viva should appear as the consequence of work performed, but also quantities of heat, or the potential of an electric charge, and so forth, scientists saw in this law the expression of a mechanical action as the basis of all natural actions. However, nothing is contained in the expression but the fact of an invariable quantitative connection between mechani- cal and other kinds of phenomena. 4. It would be a mistake to suppose that a wide and extensive view of things was first introduced into physical science by mechanics. On the contrary, this * Helmhohz tisnd this tarni in 1847; but it is not found in his Hubsoqwnt papers; and in 1882 (Wisstnschaftliche Abhandlttngen, II, 965) he expressly discards it in favor of the English "potential energy," Ho even (p. <}6B) pre- fers Clausius'K word Ergal to Spannkr&ft, which is quite out of agreement with modern terminology. Trans, 500 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. Compre- insight was possessed at all times by the foremost ness of inquirers and even entered into the construction of view the ,..,.. 1-1 r condition, mechanics itself, and was, accordingly, not first created suit, of me- by the latter. Galileo and Huygens constantly alter- nated the consideration of particular details with the consideration of universal aspects, and reached their results only by a persistent effort after a simple and consistent view. The fact that the velocities of indi- vidual bodies and systems are dependent on the spaces descended through, was perceived by Galileo and Huygens only by a very detailed investigation of the motion of descent in particular cases, combined with the consideration of the circumstance that bodies gen- erally, of their own accord, only sink. Huygens especially speaks, on the occasion of this inquiry, of the impossibility of a mechanical perpetual motion ; he possessed, therefore, the modern point of view. He felt the incompatibility of the idea of a perpetual motion with the notions of the natural mechanical processes with which he was familiar. Exempiifi- Take the fictions of Stevinus say, that of the end- this in ste- less chain on the prism. Here, too, a deep, broad searches!" insight is displayed. We have here a mind, disciplined by a multitude of experiences, brought to bear on an individual case. The moving endless chain is to Ste- vinus a motion of descent that Is not a descent, a mo- tion without a purpose, an intentional act that does not answer to the intention, an endeavor for a change which does not produce the change. If motion, gener- ally, is the result of descent, then in the particular case descent is the result of motion. It is a sense of the mutual Interdependence of v and h in the equation v = ]/2g/i that is here displayed, though of course in not so definite a form. A contradiction exists in this ITS RELATIONS TO OTHER SCIENCES. 501 fiction for Stevinus's exquisite investigative sense that would escape less profound thinkers. This same breadth of view, which alternates the Also, in the researches individual with the universal, is also displayed, only in of QU not this instance not restricted to mechanics, in the per- Mayer. formances of Sadi Carnot. When Carnot finds that the quantity of heat Q which, for a given amount of work Z, has flowed from a higher temperature / to a lower temperature /, can only depend on the tempera- tures and not on the material constitution of the bodies, he reasons in exact conformity with the method of Galileo. Similarly does J. R. Mayer proceed in the enunciation of the principle of the equivalence of heat and work. In this achievement the mechanical view was quite remote from Mayer's mind ; nor had he need of it. They who require the crutch of the mechanical philosophy to understand the doctrine of the equiva- lence of heat and work, have only half comprehended the progress which it signalises. Yet, high as we may place Mayer's original achievement, it is not on that account necessary to depreciate the merits of the pro- fessional physicists Joule, Helmholtz, Clausius, and Thomson, who have done very much, perhaps all, to- wards the detailed estaltlishmcnt and fcrfcctlon of the new view. The assumption of a plagiarism of Mayer's ideas is in our opinion gratuitous. They who advance it, are under the obligation to fnwe it. The repeated appearance of the same idea is not new in history. We shall not take up here the discussion of purely personal questions, which thirty years from now will no longer Interest students. But It is unfair, from a pretense of justice, to insult men, who If they had accomplished but a third of their actual services, would have lived highly honored and unmolested lives, (Seep. 584.) 5 o2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The inter- 5. We shall now attempt to show that the broad enceof the view expressed in the principle of the conservation ture. of energy, is not peculiar to mechanics, but is a condi- tion of logical and sound scientific thought generally. The business of physical science is the reconstruction of facts in thought, or the abstract quantitative expres- sion of facts. The rules which we form for these recon- structions are the laws of nature. In the conviction that such rules are possible lies the law of causality. The law of causality simply asserts that the pheno'mena of nature are dependent on one another. The special em- phasis put on space and time in the expression of the law of causality is unnecessary, since the relations of space and time themselves implicitly express that phe- nomena are dependent on one another. The laws of nature are equations between the meas- urable elements a ft yd . . . . coof phenomena. As na- ture is variable, the number of these equations is al- ways less than the number of the elements. If we know all the values of a /3yd . . ., by which, for example, the values of A JJLV . . . are given, we may call the group afiyS . . . the cause and the group "kjjLv . ... the effect. In this sense we may say that the effect is uniquely determined by the cause. The prin- ciple of sufficient reason, in the form, for instance, in which Archimedes employed it in the development of the laws of the lever, consequently asserts nothing more than that the effect cannot by any given set of circumstances be at once determined and undetermined. If two circumstances a and A are connected, then, supposing all others are constant, a change of A will be accompanied by a change of a, and as a general rule a change of a by a change of A. The constant observance of this mutual interdependence is met with RELATIONS TO OTHER SCIE.\ 7 CES. 503 in Stevinus, Galileo, Huygens, 'and other great inquir- j ers. The idea is also at the basis of the discovery of ^/////^/'-phenomena. Thus, a change in the volume of basis of ail " ' tfroaf dis- a gas due to a change of temperature is supplemented cm ---- by the counter-phenomenon of a change of tempera- ture on an alteration of volume ; Seebeck's phenome- non by Peltier's effect, and so forth. Care must, of course, be exercised, in such inversions, respecting the form of the dependence. Figure 235 will render clear how a perceptible altera- tion of a may always be produced by r an alteration of A, but a change of A not necessarily by a change of a. The relations be- tween electromagnetic and induction phenomena, dis- covered by Faraday, are a good instance of this truth. If a set of circumstances aftyfi. . ., by which a various ' ' ' J iormsof <x- second set \iiv . . . is determined, be made to pass i; 1 "}^ " ot r J * f this truth. from its initial values to the terminal values oe' fi'y d' . . ., then TLJJ.V . . . also will pass into A'/fV. . . If the first set be brought back to its initial state, also the second set will be brought back to its initial state. This is the meaning of the "equivalence of cause and effect/' which Mayer again and again emphasizes. If the first group suffer only periodical changes, the second group also can suffer only periodical changes, not continuous permanent ones. The fertile methods of thought of Galileo, Huygens, S. Carnot, Mayer, and their peers ? are all reducible to .the simple but sig- nificant perception, that purely periodical ultfratwns <>f one set of circumstances can only constitute the source of similarly periodical alterations of a second se/ of ci re it in- stances, not of continuous and permanent alterations. Such maxims, as "the effect is equivalent to the cause/ 1 5 o 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. "work cannot be created out of nothing," "a. per- petual motion is impossible/' are particular, less defi- nite, and less evident forms of this perception, which in itself is not especially concerned with mechanics, but is a constituent of scientific thought generally. With the perception of this truth, any metaphysical mystic- ism that may still adhere to the principle of the con- servation of energy* is dissipated. (See p. 585.) Purpose of All ideas of conservation, like the notion of sub- the ideas of conserva- stance, have a solid foundation in the economy of thought. A mere unrelated change, without fixed point of support, or reference, is not comprehensible, not mentally reconstructible. We always inquire, accord- ingly, what idea can be retained amid all variations as permanent, what law prevails, what equation remains fulfilled, what quantitative values remain constant ? When we say the refractive index remains constant in all cases of refraction, ^remains = 9-810;^ in all cases of the motion of heavy bodies, the energy remains con- stant in every isolated system, all our assertions have one and the same economical function, namely that of facilitating our mental reconstruction of facts. THE RELATIONS OF MECHANICS TO PHYSIOLOGY. Conditions i- All science has its origin in the needs of life. dlvefo 6 -However minutely it may be subdivided by particular science! vocations or by the restricted tempers and capacities of those who foster it, each branch can attain its full and best development only by a living connection with the whole. Through such a union alone can it approach * When we reflect that the principles of science are all abstractions that presuppose repetitions of similar cases, the absurd applications of the law of the conservation of forces to the universe as a whole fall to the ground. ITS RELATIONS TO OTHER SCIENCES. 505 its true maturity, and be insured against lop-sided and monstrous growths. The division of labor, the restriction of individual Confusion . ot the inquirers to limited provinces, the investigation of moans and those provinces as a life-work, are the fundamental science, conditions of a fruitful development of science. Only by such specialisation and restriction of work can the economical instruments of thought requisite for the mastery of a special field be perfected. But just here lies a danger the danger of our overestimating the in- struments, with which we are so constantly employed, or even of regarding them as the objective point of science. 2. Now, such a state of affairs has, in our opinion, physics actually been produced by the disproportionate formal mmufthe development of physics. The majority of natural in- physiology. quirers ascribe to the intellectual implements of physics, to the concepts mass, force, atom, and so forth, whose sole office is to revive economically arranged expe- riences, a reality beyond and independent of thought. Not only so, but it has even been held that fliese forces and masses are the real objects of inquiry, and, if once they were fully explored, all the rest would follow from the equilibrium and motion of these masses. A person who knew the world only through the theatre, if brought behind the scenes and permitted to view the mechan- ism of the stage's action, might possibly believe that the real world also was in need of a machine-room, and that if this were once thoroughly explored, we should know all. Similarly, we, too, should beware lest the intellectual machinery, employed in the representation of the world on the stage of thought, be regarded as the basis of the real world. 3. A philosophy is involved in any correct view of 5 o6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The at- the relations of special knowledge to the great body of pT"mVeef- x " knowledge at large, a philosophy that must be de- motions, manded of every special investigator. The lack of it is asserted in the formulation of imaginary problems, in the very enunciation of which, whether regarded as soluble or insoluble, flagrant absurdity is involved. Such an overestimation of physics, in contrast to physi- ology, such a mistaken conception of the true relations of the two sciences, is displayed in the inquiry whether it is possible to explain feelings by the motions of atoms? Explication Let us seek the conditions that could have impelled of this . . anomaly, the mind to formulate so curious a question. We find in the first place that greater confidence is placed in our experiences concerning relations of time and space ; that we attribute to them a more objective, a moremz/ character than to our experiences of colors, sounds, temperatures, and so forth. Yet, if we investigate the matter accurately, we must surely admit that our sen- sations of time and space are just as much sensations as are our sensations of colors, sounds, and odors, only that in our knowledge of the former we are surer and clearer than in that of the latter. Space and time are well-ordered systems of sets of sensations. The quan- tities stated in mechanical equations are simply ordinal symbols, representing those members of these sets that are to be mentally isolated and emphasised. The equations express the form of interdependence of these ordinal symbols. A body is a relatively constant sum of touch and sight sensations associated with the same space and time sensations. Mechanical principles, like that, for instance, of the mutually induced accelerations of two masses, give, either directly or indirectly, only some ITS RELATIONS TO OTHER SCIENCES. 507 combination of touch, sight, light, and time sensations. They possess intelligible meaning only by virtue of the sensations they involve, the contents of which may of course be very complicated. It would be equivalent, accordingly, to explaining MorfcMjf the more simple and immediate by the more compli- sncher- r J . rors. cated and remote, if we were to attempt to derive sen- sations from the motions of masses, wholly aside from the consideration that the notions of mechanics are economical implements or expedients perfected to represent mechanical and not physiological or psycho- logical facts. If the means and aims of research were properly distinguished, and our expositions were re- stricted to the presentation of actual facts, false prob- lems of this kind could not arise. 4. All physical knowledge can only mentally repre- The prmci- sent and anticipate compounds of those elements we dumjW mt call sensations. It is concerned with the connection of ti/m but these elements. Such an element, say the heat of a body aspect o" A, is connected, not only with other elements, say with such whose aggregate makes up the flame J3, but also with the aggregate of certain elements of our body, say with the aggregate of the elements of a nerve J\T. As simple object and element JVis not essentially, but only conventionally, different from A and B, The connection of A and B is a problem of physics^ that of A and N a problem of physiology. Neither is alone existent; both exist at once. Only provisionally can we neglect either. Processes, thus, that in appearance arc purely mechanical, are, in addition to their evident mechani- cal features, always physiological, and, consequently, also electrical, chemical, and so forth. The science of mechanics does not comprise the foundations, no, nor even a part of the world, but only an aspect of it. APPENDIX. I. (See page 3.) Recent research has contributed greatly to our knowledge of the scientific literature of antiquity, and our opinion of the achievements of the ancient world in science has been correspondingly increased. Schia- parelli has done much to place the work of the Greeks in astronomy in its right light, and Govi has disclosed many precious treasures in his edition of the Optics of Ptolemy. The view that the Greeks were especially neglectful of experiment can no longer be maintained unqualifiedly. The most ancient ex- periments are doubtless those of the Pythagoreans, who employed a monochord with moveable bridge for determining the lengths of strings emitting harmonic notes. Anaxagoras's demonstration of the corporeal- ity of the air by means of closed inflated tubes, and that of Empedocles by means of a vessel having its orifice inverted in water (Aristotle, Physics} are both primitive experiments. Ptolemy instituted systematic experiments on the refraction of light, while his ob- servations in physiological optics are still full of in- terest to-day. Aristotle {Meteorology) describes phe- nomena that go to explain the rainbow. The absurd stories which tend to arouse our mistrust, like that of Pythagoras and the anvil which emitted harmonic 5 io THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. notes when struck by hammers of different weights, probably sprang from the fanciful brains of ignorant reporters. Pliny abounds in such vagaries. But they are not, as a matter of fact, a whit more incorrect or nonsensical than the stories of Newton's falling apple and of Watts's tea-kettle. The situation is, more- over, rendered quite intelligible when we consider the difficulties and the expense attending the production of ancient books and their consequent limited circula- tion. The conditions here involved are concisely dis- cussed by J. Mueller in his paper, "Ueber das Ex- periment in den physikalischen Studien der Grie- chen," Naturwiss. Verein zu Innsbruck, XXIII. , 1896- 1897. 11. (See page 8 J Researches in mechanics were not begun by the Greeks until a late date, and in no wise keep pace with the rapid advancement of the race in the domain of mathematics, and notably in geometry. Reports of mechanical inventions, so far as they relate to the early inquirers, are extremely meager. Archytas, a distinguished citizen of Tarentum {circa 400 B. C.), famed as a geometer and for his employment with the problem of the duplication of the cube, devised me- chanical instruments for the description of various curves. As an astronomer he taught that the earth was spherical and that it rotated upon its axis once a day. As a mechanician he founded the theory of pul- leys. He is also said to have applied geometry to mechanics in a treatise on this latter science, but all information as to details is lacking. We are told, though, by Aulus Gellius (X. 12) that Archytas con- APPENDIX, 51 1 structed an automaton consisting of a flying dove of wood and presumably operated by compressed air, which created a great sensation. It is, in fact, char- acteristic of the early history of mechanics that atten- tion should have been first directed to its practical advantages and to the construction of automata de- signed to excite wonder in ignorant people. Even in the days of Ctesibius (285-247 B. C.) and Hero (first century A. D.) the situation had not ma- terially changed. So, too, during the decadence of civilisation in the Middle Ages, the same tendency as- serts itself. The artificial automata and clocks of this period, the construction of which popular fancy as- cribed to the machinations of the Devil, are well known. It was hoped, by imitating life outwardl}', to apprehend it from its inward side also. In intimate connexion with the resultant 'misconception of life stands also the singular belief in the possibility of a perpetual motion. Only gradually and slowly, and in indistinct forms, did the genuine problems of mechan- ics loom up before the minds of inquirers. Aristotle/s tract, Mechanical Problems (German trans, by Poselger, Hannover, 1881) is characteristic in this regard. Aris- totle is quite adept in detecting and in formulating problems ; he perceived the principle of the parallel- ogram of motions, and was on the verge of discover- ing centrifugal force; but in the actual solution of problems he was infelicitous. The entire tract par- takes more of the character of a dialectic than of a scientific treatise, and rests content with enunciating the "apories," or contradictions, involved in the prob- lems. But the tract upon the whole very well illus- trates the intellectual situation that is characteristic of the beginnings of scientific investigation. 5 i2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. "If a thing take place whereof the cause be not apparent, even though it be in accordance with na- ture, it appears wonderful. . . . Such are the instances in which small things overcome great things, small weights heavy weights, and incidentally all the prob- lems that go by the name of 'mechanical.' . . . To the apories (contradictions) of this character belong those that appertain to the lever. For it appears con- trary to reason that a large weight should be set in motion by a small force, particularly when that weight is in addition combined with a larger weight. A weight that cannot be moved without the aid of a lever can be moved easily with that of a lever added. The pri- mordial cause of all this is inherent in the nature of the circle, which is as one should naturally expect : for if- is not contrary to reason that something won- derful should proceed out 'of something else that is wonderful. The combination of contradictory prop- erties, however, into a single unitary product is the most wonderful of all things. Now, the circle is ac- tually composed of just such contradictory properties. For it is generated by a thing that is in motion and by a thing that is stationary at a fixed point. " In a subsequent passage of the same treatise there is a very dim presentiment of the principle of virtual velocities. Considerations of the kind here adduced give evi- dence of a capacity for detecting and enunciating prob- lems, but are far from conducting the investigator to their solution. in. (See page 14.) It may be remarked in further substantiation of the criticisms advanced at pages 13-14, that it is very APPENDIX. 513 obvious that if the arrangement is absolutely sym- metrical in every respect, equilibrium obtains on the assumption of any form of dependence whatever of the disturbing factor on .Z, or, generally, on the as- sumption P.f{L}\ and that consequently t\ie. particular form of dependence PL cannot possibly be inferred from the equilibrium. The fallacy of the deduction must accordingly be sought in the transformation to which the arrangement is subjected. Archimedes makes the action of two equal weights to be the same under all circumstances as that of the combined weights acting at the middle point of their line of junction. But, seeing that he both knows and as- sumes that distance from the fulcrum is determina- tive, this procedure is by the premises impermissible,, if the two weights are situated at unequal distances from the fulcrum. If a weight situated at a distance from the fulcrum is divided into two equal parts, and these parts are moved in contrary directions symmet- rically to their original point of support ; one of the equal weights will be carried as near to the fulcrum as the other weight is carried from it. If it is assumed that the action remains constant during such proce- dure, then, the particular form of dependence of the moment on L is implicitly determined by what has been done, inasmuch as the result is only possible provided the form be PL, or be proportional 'to L* But in such an event all further deduction is superfluous. The entire deduction contains the proposition to be demonstrated, by assumption if not explicitly. 5 r 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. IV. (See page 20.) Experiments are never absolutely exact, but they at least may lead the inquiring mind to conjecture that the key which will clear up the connexion of all the facts is contained in the exact metrical expression PL. On no other hypothesis are the deductions of Archimedes, Galileo, and the rest Intelligible. The required transformations, extensions, and compres- sions of the prisms may now be carried out with per- fect certainty. A knife edge may be introduced at any point un- der a prism suspended from its center without dis- turbing the equilib- rium (see Fig- 236), and several such ar- rangements may be rigidly combined to- 1 zsg gether so as to form Fig. 236. apparently new cases of equilibrium. The conversion and disintegration of the case of equi- librium into several other cases (Galileo)- is possible only by taking into account the value of PL. I can- not agree with O. Holder who upholds the correct- ness of the Archimedean deductions against my criti- cisms in his essay Denken und Anschauung in dcr Gco- metrie, although I am greatly pleased with the extent of our agreement as to the nature of the exact sci- ences and their foundations. It would seem as if Archimedes (JDe cequiponderantibus) regarded it as a general experience that two equal weights may under all circumstances be replaced by one equal to their APPENDIX. 5*5 combined weight at the center (Theorem 5, Corrol- ary 2). In such an event, his long deduction (Theo- rem 6) would be necessary, for the reason sought fol- lows immediately (see pp. 14, 513). Archimedes's mode of expression is not in favor of this view. Nevertheless, a theorem of this kind cannot be re- garded as a priori evident; and the views advanced on pp. 14, 513 appear to me to be still uncontro- verted. (See page 29.) Stevinus's procedure may be looked at from still another point of view. If it is a fact, for our mechan- ical instinct, that a heavy endless chain will not ro- tate, then the individual simple cases of equilibrium on an inclined plane which Stevinus devised and which are readily controlled quantitatively, may be regarded as so many special experiences. For It Is not essential that the experiments should have been actually carried out, if the result is beyond question of doubt. As a matter of fact, Stevinus experiments in thought. Stevinus's result could actually have been deduced from the corresponding physical exper- iments, with friction reduced to a minimum. In an analogous manner, Archimedes's considerations with respect to the lever might be conceived after the fashion of Galileo's procedure. If the various mental experiments had been executed physically, the linear dependence of the static moment on the distance of the weight from the axis could be deduced with per- fect rigor. We shall have still many instances to acl duce, among the foremost Inquirers in the domain of mechanics, of this tentative adaptation of special 5 i6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. quantitative conceptions to general instinctive im- pressions. The same phenomena are presented in other domains also. I may be permitted to refer in this connexion to the expositions which I have given in my Principles of Heat, page 151. It may be said that the most significant and most important advances in science have been made in this manner. The habit which great inquirers have of bringing their single conceptions into agreement with the general concep- tion or ideal of an entire province of phenomena., their constant consideration of the whole in their treatment of parts, may be characterised as a genuinely philo- sophical procedure. A truly philosophical treatment of any special science will always consist in bringing the results into relationship and harmony with the established knowledge of the whole. The fanciful extravagances of philosophy, as well as infelicitous and abortive special theories, will be eliminated in this manner. It will be worth while to review again the points of agreement and difference in the mental procedures of Stevinus and Archimedes. Stevinus reached the very general view that a mobile, heavy, endless chain of any form stays at rest. He is able to deduce from this general view, without difficulty, special cases, which are quantitatively easily controlled. The case from which Archimedes starts, on the other hand, is the most special conceivable. He cannot possibly deduce from his special case in an unassailable man- ner the behavior which may be expected under more general conditions. If he apparently succeeds in so doing, the reason is that he already knows the result which he is seeking, whilst Stevinus, -although he too doubtless knows, approximately at least, what he is APPENDIX. 517 In search of, nevertheless could have found it directly by his manner of procedure, even if he had not known it. When the static relationship is rediscovered in such a manner it has a higher value than the result of a metrical experiment would have, which always de- viates somewhat from the theoretical truth. The de- viation increases with the disturbing circumstances, as with friction, and decreases with the diminution of these difficulties. The exact static relationship is reached by idealisation and disregard of these dis- turbing elements. It appears in the Archimedean and Stevinian procedures as an hypothesis without which the individual facts of experience would at once be- come involved in logical contradictions. Not until we have possessed this hypothesis can we by operat- ing with the exact concepts reconstruct the facts and acquire a scientific and logical mastery of them. The lever and the inclined plane are self-created ideal ob- jects of mechanics. These objects alone completely satisfy the logical demands which we make of them ; the physical lever satisfies these conditions only in measure in which it approaches the ideal lever. The natural inquirer strives to adapt his ideals to reality, VI. (See page no } Our modern notions with regard to the nature of air are a direct continuation of the ancient ideas. An- axagoras proves the corporeality of air from its resist- ance to compression in closed bags of skin, and from the gathering up of the expelled air (in the form of bubbles?) by water (Aristotle, Phystcs, IV., 9). Ac- cording to Empedoclcs, the air prevents the water 5 i8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. from penetrating into the interior of a vessel immersed with its aperture downwards (Gomperz, Griechische Denker, L, p. 191). Philo of Byzantium employs for the same purpose an inverted vessel having in its bot- tom an orifice closed with wax. The water will not penetrate into the submerged vessel until the wax cork is removed, wherupon the air escapes in bubbles. An entire series of experiments of this kind is per- formed, in almost the precise form customary in the schools to-day (Philonis lib. de ingeniis spiritualibus, in V. Rose's Anecdota gr&ca et latino^. Hero describes in his Pneumatics many of the experiments of his predecessors, with additions of his own ; in theory he is an adherent of Strato, who occupied an intermedi- ate position between Aristotle and Democritus. An absolute and continuous vacuum, he says, can be produced only artificially, although numberless tiny vacua exist between the particles of bodies, including air, just as air does among grains of sand. This is proved*, in quite the same ingenuous fashion as in our present elementary books, from the possibility of rare- fying and compressing bodies, including air (inrush- ing and outrushing of the air in Hero's ball). An ar- gument of Hero's for the existence of vacua (pores) between corporeal particles rests on the fact that rays of light penetrate water. The result of artificial^ in- creasing a vacuum, according to Hero and his prede- cessors, is always the attraction and solicitation of adjacent bodies. A light vessel with a narrow aper- ture remains hanging to the lips after the air has been exhausted. The orifice may be closed with the finger and the vessel submerged in water. "If the finger be released, the water will rise in the vacuum created, although the movement of the liquid upward is not APPENDIX. 519 according to nature. The phenomenon of the cup- ping-glass is the same ; these glasses, when placed on the body, not only do not fall off, although they are heavy enough, but they also draw out adjacent particles through the pores of the body.' ' The bent siphon is also treated at length. "The filling of the siphon on exhaustion of the air is accomplished by the liquid's closely following the exhausted air, for the reason that a continuous vacuum is inconceiv- able." If the two arms of the siphon are of the same length, nothing flows out. "The water is held in equilibrium as in a balance." Hero accordingly ccn- ceives of the flow of water as analogous to the move- ment of a chain hanging with unequal lengths over a pulley. The union of the two columns, which for us is preserved by the pressure of the atmosphere, is cared for in his case by the ** inconceivability of a continuous vacuum." It is shown at length, not that the smaller mass of water is attracted and drawn along by the greater mass, and that conformably to this principle water cannot flow upwards, but rather that the phenomenon is in harmony with the principle of communicating vessels. The many pretty and in- genious tricks which Hero describes in his Pneumatics and in his Automata, and which were designed partly to entertain and partly to excite wonder, offer a charming picture of the material civilisation of the clay rather than excite our scientific interest. The auto- matic sounding of trumpets and the opening of tem- ple doors, with the thunder simultaneously produced, are not matters which interest science properly so called. Yet Hero's writings and notions contributed much toward the diffusion of physical knowledge (compare W. Schmidt, If<n?$ Wtrkt, Leipslc, 1899, 5 20 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. and Diels, System des Strato, Sitzungsberichte der J3er~ liner Akademie, 1893). VII, (See page 129.) It has often been asserted that Galileo had prede- cessors of great prominence in his method of think- ing, and while it is far from our purpose to gainsay this, we have still to emphasise the fact that Galileo overtowered them all. The greatest predecessor of Galileo, to whom we have already referred in another place, was Leonardo da Vinci, 1452-1519; now, it was impossible for Leonardo's achievements to have influenced the development of science at the time, for the reason that they were not made known in their entirety until the publication of Venturi in 1797. Leo- nardo knew the ratio of the times of descent down the slope and the height of an inclined plane. Fre- quently also a knowledge of the law of inertia is at- tributed to him. Indeed, some sort of instinctive knowledge of the persistence of motion once begun will not be gainsaid to any normal man. But Leo- nardo seems to have gone much farther than this. He knows that from a column of checkers one of the pieces may be knocked out without disturbing the others; he knows that a body in motion will move longer according as the resistance is less, but he be-, lieves that the body will move a distance proportional to the impulse, and nowhere expressly speaks of the persistence of the motion when the resistance is alto- gether removed. (Compare Wohlwill, Bibliotkeca Ma- thematica, Stockholm, 1888, p. 19). Benedetti (1530 1590) knows that falling bodies are accelerated, and explains the acceleration as due to the summation APPENDIX. 521 of the impulses of gravity (Divers, speculat. math, et physic, liber, Taurini, 1585). He ascribes the progres- sive motion of a projectile, not as the Peripatetics did, to the agency of the medium, but to the virtus imflressa, though without attaining perfect clearness with regard to these problems. Galileo seems actu- ally to have proceeded from Benedetti's point of view, for his youthful productions are allied to those of Benedetti. Galileo also assumes a virtus zmfiressa, which he conceives to decrease in efficiency, and ac- cording to Wohlwill it appears that it was not until 1604 that he came into full possession of the laws of falling bodies. G. Vailati, who has devoted much attention to Be- nedetti's investigations (Atti della 7?. Acad* di Torino, Vol. XXXIII., 1898), finds the chief merit of Bene- detti to be that he subjected the Aristotelian views to mathematical and critical scrutiny and correction, and endeavored to lay bare their inherent contradictions, thus preparing the way for further progress. He knows that the assumption of the Aristotelians, that the velocity of falling bodies is inversely proportional to the density of the surrounding medium, is un- tenable and possible only in special cases. Let the velocity of descent be proportional to f t?, where/ is the weight of the body and q the upward impulsion due to the medium. If only half the velocity of de- scent is set up in a medium of double the density, the equation/ ^ = 2 (/ 2^) must exist, a relation which is possible only in case j* = 3#. Light bodies per se do not exist for Benedetti; he ascribes weight and upward impulsion even to air, Different-sixed bodies of the same material fall, in his opinion, with the same velocity. Benedetti reaches this result by 522 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS conceiving equal bodies falling alongside each other first disconnected and then connected, where the con- nexion cannot alter the motion. In this he approaches to the conception of Galileo, with the exception that the latter takes a profotmder view of the matter. Nevertheless, Benedetti also falls into many errors; he believes, for example, that the velocity of descent of bodies of the same size and of the same shape is proportional to their weight, that is, to their density. His reflexions on catapults, no less than his views on the' oscillation of a body about the center of the earth in a canal bored through the earth, are interesting, and contain little to be criticised. Bodies projected horizontally appear to approach the earth more slowly, Benedetti is accordingly of the opinion that the force of gravity is diminished also in the case of a top rotat- ing with its axis in a vertical position. He thus does not solve the riddle fully, but prepares the way for the solution. vin. (See page 134.) If we are to understand Galileo's train of thought, we must bear in mind that he was already in posses- sion of instinctive experiences prior to his resorting to experiment. Freely falling bodies are followed with more diffi- culty by the eye the longer and the farther they have fallen ; their impact on the hand receiving them is in like measure sharper ; the sound of their striking louder. The velocity accordingly increases with the time elapsed and the space traversed. But for scien- tific purposes our mental representations of the facts of sensual experience must be submitted to conceptual APPENDIX. 523 formulation. Only thus may they be used for discov- ering by abstract mathematical rules unknown prop- erties conceived to be dependent on certain initial properties having definite and assignable arithmetic values; or, for completing what has been only parti}' given. This formulation is effected by Isolating and emphasising what is deemed of Importance, by neg- lecting what Is subsidiary, by abstracting, by idealis- ing. The experiment determines whether the form chosen is adequate to the facts. Without some pre- conceived opinion the experiment is Impossible, be- cause its form is determined by the opinion. For how and on what could we experiment if we did not previously have some suspicion of what we were about ? The complemental function which the experi- ment Is to fulfil is determined entirely by our prior experience. The experiment confirms, modifies, or overthrows our suspicion. The modern inquirer would ask In a similar predicament : Of what Is v a function? What function of / Is ?>? Galileo asks, In his Ingenu- ous and primitive way : Is v proportional to s f Is y proportional to /? Galileo, thus, gropes his way along synthetically, but reaches his goal nevertheless. Sys- tematic, routine methods are the final outcome of re- search, and do not stand perfectly developed at the disposal of genius in the first steps it takes, (Com- pare the article "Ueber Gedankenexperlmente," Zett- schrift fur denfhys. und chew. Unterricht, 1897, I.) ix. (See page 140.) In an exhaustive study m the Ztitschrift ffir Vol&cr- psychologic, 1884, Vol. XIV., pp. 365-410, and Vol. 5 2 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. XV., pp. 70-135, 337-387, entitled " Die Entdeckung des Beharrungsgesetzes," E. Wohlwill has shown that the predecessors and contemporaries of Galileo, nay, even Galileo himself, only very gradually abandoned the Aristotelian conceptions for the acceptance of the law of inertia. Even in Galileo's mind uniform cir- cular motion and uniform horizontal motion occupy distinct places. Wohlwill's researches are very ac- ceptable and show that Galileo had not attained per- fect clearness in his own new ideas and was liable to frequent reversion to the old views, as might have been expected. Indeed, from my own exposition the reader will have inferred that the law of inertia did not possess in Galileo's mind the degree of clearness and univer- sality that it subsequently acquired. (See pp. 140 and 143.) With regard to my exposition at pages 140- 141, however, I still believe, in spite of the opinions of Wohlwill and Poske, that I have indicated the point which both for Galileo and his successors must have placed in the most favorable light the transition from the old conception to the new. How much was wanting to absolute comprehension, may be gathered from the fact that Baliani was able without difficulty to infer from Galileo's statement that acquired velo- city could not be destroyed, a fact which Wohlwill himself points out (p. 112). It is not at all surpris- ing that in treating of the motion of heavy bodies, Galileo applies his law of inertia almost exclusively to horizontal movements. Yet he knows that a mus- ket-ball possessing no weight would continue rectiline- arly on its path in the direction of the barrel, {Dia- logues on the two World Systems, German translation, Leipsic, 1891, p. 184.) His hesitation in enunciating APPENDfX. 525 in Its most general terms a law that at first blush ap- pears so startling, is not surprising. x. (See page 155.) We cannot adequately appreciate the extent of Galileo's achievement in the analysis of the motion of projectiles until we examine his predecessors' endeav- ors in this field. Santbach (1561) is of opinion, that a cannon-ball speeds onward in a straight line until Its velocity is exhausted and then drops to the ground in a vertical direction. Tartaglia (1537) compounds the path of a projectile out of a straight line, the arc of a circle, and lastly the vertical tangent to the arc. He Is perfectly aware, as Rivius later (1582) more dis- tinctly states, that accurately viewed the path Is curved at all points, since the deflective action of gravity never ceases ; but he is yet unable to arrive at a complete analysis. The Initial portion of the path Is well calculated to arouse the Illusive impres- sion that the action of gravity has been annulled by the velocity of the projection, an illusion to which even Benedetti fell a victim. (See Appendix, vn,, p. 129.) We fail to observe any descent in the Initial part of the curve, and forget to take into account the shortness of the corresponding time of the descent. By a similar oversight a jet of water may assume the appearance of a solid body suspended in the air, if one Is unmindful of the fact that It is made up of a mass of rapidly alternating minute particles. The same Illusion Is met with in the centrifugal pendulum, In the top, in Aitken's flexible chain rendered rigid by rapid rotation {Philosophical Maga&iue, 1878), in the locomotive which rushes safely across a defective 5 26 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. bridge, through which it would have crashed if at rest, but which, owing to the insufficient time of des- cent and of the period in which it can do work, leaves the "bridge intact. On thorough analysis none of these phenomena are more surprising than the most ordiriar}' events. As Vailati remarks, the rapid spread of firearms in the fourteenth century gave a distinct impulse to the study of the motion of projectiles, and indirectly to that of mechanics generally. Essentially the same conditions occur in the case of {lie ancient catapults and in the hurling of missiles by the hand, but the new and imposing form of the phenomenon doubtless exercised a great fascination on the curios- ity of people. So much for history. And now a word as to the notion of "composition." Galileo's conception of the motion of a projectile as a process compounded of two distinct and independent motions, is suggestive of an entire group of similar important epi^temologi- cal processes. We may say that it is as Important to perceive the non dependence of two circumstances A and J3 on each other, as it is to perceive the dependence of two circumstances A and C on each other. For the first perception alone enables us to pursue the second relation with composure. Think only of how serious an obstacle the assumption of non-existing causal relations constituted to the research of the Middle Ages. Similar to Galileo's discovery is that of the parallelogram of forces by Newton, the compo- sition of the vibrations of strings by Sauveur, the com- position of thermal disturbances by Fourier. Through this latter inquirer the method of compounding a phe- nomenon out of mutually independent partial phe- nomena by means of representing a general integral APPENDIX. 527 as the sum of particular integrals has penetrated into every nook and corner of physics. The decomposi- tion of phenomena into mutually independent parts has been aptly characterised by P. Volkmann as iso- lation, and the composition of a phenomenon out of such parts, superposition. The two processes combined enable us to comprehend, or "reconstruct In thought, piecemeal, what, as a whole, it would be impossible for us to grasp. "Nature with its myriad phenomena assumes a unified aspect only in the rarest cases; in the major- ity of instances it exhibits a thoroughly composite character . . . ; it is accordingly one of the duties of science to conceive phenomena as made up of sets of partial phenomena, and at first to study these partial phenomena in their purity. Not until we know to what extent each circumstance shares in the phenom- enon as an entirety do we acquire a command over the whole. . . ." (Cf. P. Volkmann, Erkenntnisstheo- retische Grundziige der Naturwissenschaft, 1896, p. 70. Cf. also my Principles of Heat, German edition, pp, 123, 151, 452). XI. (See page 161.) The perspicuous deduction of the expression for centrifugal force based on the principle of Hamilton's hodograph may also be mentioned. If a body move uniformly in a circle of radius r (Fig, 237), the velo- city 7/ at the point A of the path is transformed by the traction of the string into the velocity v of like magnitude but different direction at the point JB. If from O as centre (Fig, 238) we lay off as to magni- tude and direction all the velocities the body succcs- 528 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. sively acquires, these lines will represent the sum of the radii v of the circle. For OM to be trans- formed into ON y the perpendicular component to it, MJV, must be added. During the period of revolu- tion T the velocity is uniformly increased in the direc- tions of the radii r by an amount ZTTV. The numeri- M N Fig. 237. Fig. 238. Fig. 23?. cal measure of the radial acceleration Is therefore cp -, and since vT=2rtr, therefore also <p = . If to OM=u the very small component w is added (Fig. 239), the resultant will strictly be a greater velocity = #_|- } as the approximate ex- traction of the square root will show. But on contin- uous deflection -r vanishes with respect to v ; hence, 2v only the direction, but not the magnitude, of the velocity changes. XII. (See page 162.) Even Descartes thought of explaining the centri- petal impulsion of floating bodies in a vortical me- dium, after this manner. But Huygens correctly re- APPENDIX. 529 marked that on this hypothesis we should have to assume that the lightest bodies received the greatest centripetal impulsion, and that all heavy bodies would without exception have to be lighter than the vortical medium. Huygens observes further that like phe- nomena are also necessarily presented in the case of bodies, be they what they may, that do not participate in the whirling movement, that is to say, such as might exist without centrifugal force in a vortical medium affected with centrifugal force. For exam- ple, a sphere composed of any material whatsoever but moveable only along a stationary axis, say a wire, is impelled toward the axis of rotation in a whirling medium. In a closed vessel containing water Huygens placed small particles of sealing wax which are slightly heavier than water and hence touch the bot- tom of the vessel. If the vessel be rotated, the par- ticles of sealing wax will flock toward the outer rim of the vessel. If the vessel be then suddenly brought to rest, the water will continue to rotate while the particles of sealing wax which touch the bottom and are therefore more rapidly arrested in their move- ment, will now be impelled toward the axis of the vessel. In this process Huygens saw an exact replica of gravity. An ether whirling in one direction only, did not appear to fulfil his requirements. Ultimately, he thought, it would sweep everything with it* He accordingly assumed ether-particles that sped rapidly about in all directions, it being his theory that In a closed space, circular, as contrasted with radial, mo- tions would of themselves preponderate. This ether appeared to him adequate to explain gravity. The detailed exposition of this kinetic theory of gravity is 53 o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. found in Huygens's tract On the Cause of Gravitation (German trans, by Mewes, Berlin, 1893). See also Lasswitz, Gcschichte der Atomistik, 1890, Vol. II., p. 344- XITI. (See page 187 ) It has been impossible for us to enter upon the signal achievements of Huygens in physics proper. But a few points may be briefly indicated. He is the creator of the wave-theory of light, which ultimately overthrew the emission theory of Newton. His at- tention was drawn, in fact, to precisely those features of luminous phenomena that had escaped Newton. With respect to physics he took up with great enthu- siasm the idea of Descartes that all things were to be explained mechanically, though without being blind to its errors, which he acutely and correctly criticised. His predilection for mechanical explanations rendered him also an opponent of Newton's action at a distance, which he wished to replace by pressures and impacts, that is, by action due to contact. In his endeavor to do so he lighted upon some peculiar conceptions, like that of magnetic currents, which at first could not compete with the influential theory of Newton, but has recently been reinstated in its full rights in the unbiassed efforts of Faraday and Maxwell. As a geometer and mathematician also Huygens is to be ranked high, and in this connexion reference need be made "only to his theory of games of chance. His astronomical observations, his achievements in theo- retical and practical dioptrics advanced these depart- ments very considerably. As a technicist he is the inventor of the powder-machine, the idea of which APPENDIX. 53 1 has found actualisation in the modern gas-machine. As a physiologist he surmised the accommodation of the eye by deformation of the lens. All these things can scarcely be mentioned here. Our opinion of Huy- gens grows as his labors are made better known by the complete edition of his works. A brief and reveren- tial sketch of his scientific career in all its phases is given by J. Bosscha in a pamphlet entitled Christian Huyghens, Rede am 200. Gedachtnisstage seines Lehens- endes, German trans, by Engelmann, Leipsic, 1895. XIV. (See page 190.) Rosenberger is correct in his statement (Newton und seine physikalischen Principien, 1895) that the Idea of universal gravitation did not originate with New- ton, but that Newton had many highly deserving pred- ecessors. But it may be safely asserted that it was, with all of them, a question of conjecture, of a groping and imperfect grasp of the problem, and that no one before Newton grappled with the notion so compre- hensively and energetically; so that above and beyond the great mathematical problem, which Rosenberger concedes, there still remains to Newton the credit of a colossal feat of the imagination. Among Newton's forerunners may first be men- tioned Copernicus, who (in 1543) says: t l am at least of opinion that gravity is nothing" more than a natural tendency implanted in particles by the divine providence of the Master of the Universe, by virtue of which, they, collecting together in the shape of a sphere, do form their own proper unity and integrity. And it is to be assumed that this propensity is in* herent also in the sun, the moon, and the other plan- 53 2 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. ets." Similarly, Kepler (1609), like Gilbert before him (1600), conceives of gravity as the analogue of magnetic attraction. By this analogy, Hooke, it seems, is led to the notion of a diminution of gravity with the distance ; and in picturing its action as due to a kind of radiation, he even hits upon the idea of its acting inversely as the square of the distance. He even sought to determine the diminution of its effect (1686) by weighing bodies hung at different heights from the top of Westminster Abbey (precisely after the more modern method of Jolly), by means of spring- balances and pendulum clocks, but of course -without results. The conical pendulum appeared to him admirably adapted for illustrating the motion of the planets. . Thus Hooke really approached nearest to Newton's conception, though he never completely reached the latter's altitude of view. In two instructive writings {Kepler'' $ Lehre von der Gravitation, Halle, 1896: Die Gravitation bei Galileo u. Horelli, Berlin, 1897) E. Gold beck investigates the early history of the doctrine of gravitation with Kepler on the one hand and Galileo and Borelli on the other. Despite his adherence to scholastic, Aristotelian no- tions, Kepler has sufficient insight to see that there is a real physical problem presented by the phenomena of the planetary system; the moon, in his view, is swept along with the earth in its motion round the sun, and in its turn drags the tidal wave along with it, just as the earth attracts heavy bodies. Also, for the planets the source of motion is sought in the sun, from which immaterial levers extend that rotate with the sun and carry the distant planets around more slowly than the near ones. By this view, Kepler was enabled to guess that the period of rotation of the sun APPENDIX. 533 was less than eighty-eight days, the period of revolu- tion of Mercury. At times, the sun Is also conceived as a revolving magnet, over against which are placed the magnetic planets. In Galileo's conception of the universe, the formal, mathematical, and esthetical point of view predominates. He rejects each and every assumption of attraction, and even scouted the idea as childish in Kepler. The planetary system had not yet taken the shape of a genuine physical problem for him. Yet he assumed with Gilbert that an imma- terial geometric point can exercise no physical action, and he did very much toward demonstrating the ter- restrial nature of the heavenly bodies. Borelli (in his' work on the satellites of the Jupiter) conceives the planets as floating between layers of ether of differing densities. They have a natural tendency to approach their central body, (the term attraction is avoided,) ' which is offset by the centrifugal force set up by the revolution. Borelli illustrates his theory by an experi- ment very similar to that described by us in Fig. 106, p. 162. As will be seen, he approaches very closely to Newton. His theory is, though, a combination of Descartes's and Newton's. xv. (Sec page 191.) Newton illustrated the identity of terrestrial grav- ity with the universal gravitation that determined the motions of the celestial bodies, as follows. He con- ceived a stone to be hurled with successive increases of horizontal velocity from the top of a high moun- tain. , Neglecting the resistance of the air, the para- bolas successively described by the stone will increase in length until finally they will fall clear of the earth 534 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. altogether, and the stone will be converted into a satellite circling round the earth. Newton begins with the fact of universal gravity. An explanation of the phenomenon was not forthcoming, and it was not his wont, he says, to frame hypotheses. Nevertheless he could not set his thoughts at rest so easily, as is ap- parent from his well-known letter to Bentley. That gravity was immanent and innate in matter, so that one body could act on another directly through empty space, appeared to him absurd. But he is unable to decide whether the intermediary agency is material or immaterial (spiritual?). Like all his predecessors and successors, Newton felt the need of explaining gravi- tation, by some such means as actions of contact. Yet the great success which Newton achieved in astron- omy with forces acting at a distance as the basis of deduction, soon changed the situation very consider- ably. Inquirers accustomed themselves to these forces as points of departure for their explanations and the impulse to inquire after their origin soon disappeared almost completely. The attempt was now made to introduce' these forces into all the departments of physics, by conceiving bodies to be composed of par- ticles separated by vacuous interstices and thus acting on one another at a distance. Finally even, the re- sistance of bodies to pressure and impact, this is to say, even forces of contact, were explained by forces acting at a distance between particles. As a fact, the functions representing the former are more compli- cated than those representing the latter. The doctrine of forces acting at a distance doubt- less stood in highest esteem with Laplace and his contemporaries. Faraday's unbiassed and ingenious conceptions and Maxwell's mathematical formulation APPENDIX. 535 of them again turned the tide in favor of the forces of contact. Divers difficulties had raised doubts in the minds of astronomers as to the exactitude of New- ton's law, and slight quantitative variations of it were looked for. After it had been demonstrated, however, that electricity travelled with finite velocity, the ques- tion of a like state of affairs in connexion with the analogous action of gravitation again naturally arose. As a fact, gravitation bears a close resemblance to electrical forces acting at a distance, save in the single respect that so far as we know, attraction only and not repulsion takes place in the case of gravitation. Foppl ("Ueber eine Erweiterung des Gravitations- gesetzes," Sitzungsber. d. Munch. Akad., 1897, p. 6 et seq.) is of opinion, that we may, without becoming involved in contradictions, assume also with respect to gravitation negative masses, which attract one an- other but repel positive masses, and assume therefore also finite fields of gravitation, similar to the electric fields. Drude (in his report on actions at a distance made for the German Naturforscherversammhmg of 1897) enumerates many experiments for establishing a velocity of propagation for gravitation, which go back as far as Laplace. The result is to be regarded as a negative one, for the velocities which it is at all possible to consider as such, do not accord with one another, though they are all very large multiples of the velocity of light. Paul Gerber alone ("Ueber die* raumliche u. zeitliche Ausbreitung der Gravitation/' Zeitschrtft f. Math. u. P/tys., 1898, IL), from the peri- helial motion of Mercury, forty- one seconds in a cen- tury, finds the velocity of propagation of gravitation to be the same as that of light. This would speak in favor of the ether as the medium of gravitation. (Com- 536 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. pareW. Wien, " Ueber die Moglichkeit einer elektro- magnetischen Begriindung der Mechanik," Archives Nterlandaises, The Hague, 1900, V., p. 96.) XVI. (See page 195.) It should be observed that the notion of mass as quantity of matter was psychologically a very natural conception for Newton, with his peculiar develop- ment. Critical inquiries as to the origin of the con- cept of matter could not possibly be expected of a scientist in Newton's day. The concept developed quite instinctively -, it is discovered as a datum per- fectly complete, and is adopted with absolute ingenu- ousness. The same is the case with the concept of force. But force appears conjoined with matter. And, inasmuch as Newton invested all material particles with precisely identical gravitational forces, inasmuch as he regarded the forces exerted by the heavenly bodies on one another as the sum of the forces of the individual particles composing them, naturally these forces appear to be inseparably conjoined with the quantity of matter. Rosenberger has called attention to this fact in his book, Newton und seine physikalischen Principien (Leipzig, 1895, especially page 192). I have endeavored to show elsewhere (Analysis of the Sensations, Chicago, 1897) how starting from the constancy of the connexion between different sensa- tions we have been led to the assumption of an abso- lute constanc}^ which we call substajice, the most ob vio'tis and prominent example being that of a moveable body distinguishable from its environment. And see- ing that such bodies are divisible into homogeneous parts, of which each presents a constant complexus A PPENDIX. 537 of properties, we are induced to form the notion of a substantial something that is quantitatively variable, which we call matter. But that which we take away from one body, makes its appearance again at some other place. The quantity of matter in its entirety, thus, proves to be constant. Strictly viewed, how- ever, we are concerned -with precisely as many sub- stantial quantities as bodies have properties, and there is no other function left for matter save that of representing the constancy of connexion of the several properties of bodies, of which man is one only. (Com- pare my Principles of Heat, German edition, 1896, page 425.) xvn. (See page 216.) Of the theories of the tides enunciated before Newton, that of Galileo alone may be briefly men- tioned. Galileo explains the tides as due to the rela- tive motion of the solid and liquid parts of the earth, and regards this fact as direct evidence of the motion of the earth and as a cardinal argument .in favor of the Co- pernican system. If the earth (Fig. 240) rotates from the west to the east, and is affected at the same time with a pro- gressional motion, the parts of the earth at a will move with the sum, and the parts at b with the difference, of the two velocities. The water in the bed of the ocean, which is unable to fol- low this change in velocity quickly enough, behaves like the water in a plate swung rapidly back and forth, or like that in the bottom of a skiff which is rowctl 538 THE SCIENCE Of MECHANICS. with rapid alterations of speed : it piles up now in the front and now at the back. This is substantially the view that Galileo set forth in the Dialogue on the Two World Systems. Kepler's view, which supposes attraction by the moon, appears to him mystical and childish. He is of the opinion that it should be rele- gated to the category of explanations by "sympathy" and "antipathy," and that it admits as easily of refu- tation as the doctrine according to which the tides are created by radiation and the consequent expansion of the water. That on his theory the tides rise only once a day, did not, of course, escape Galileo's atten- tion. But he deceived himself with regard to the difficulties involved, believing himself able to explain the daily, monthly, and yearly periods by considering the natural oscillations of the water and the altera- tions to which its motions are subject. The principle of relative motion is a correct feature of this theory, but it is so infelicitously applied that only an ex- tremely illusive theory could result. We will first convince ourselves that the conditions supposed to be involved would not have the effect ascribed to them. Conceive a homogeneous sphere of water; any other effect due to rotation than that of a corres- ponding oblateness we should not expect. Now, sup- pose the ball to acquire in addition a uniform motion of progression. Its various parts will now as before remain at relative rest with respect to one another. For the case in question does not differ, according to our view, in any essential respect from the preceding, inasmuch as the progressive motion of the sphere may be conceived to -be replaced by a motion in the opposite direction of all surrounding bodies. Even for the person who is inclined to regard the motion APPENDIX. 539 as an " absolute " motion, no change Is produced in the relation of the parts to one another by uniform motion of progression. Now, let us cause the sphere, the parts of which have no tendency to move with re- spect to one another, to congeal at certain points, so that sea-beds with liquid water in them are produced. The undisturbed uniform rotation will continue, and consequently Galileo's theory Is erroneous. But Galileo's idea appears at first blush to be ex- tremely plausible; how is the paradox explained? It is due entirely to a negative conception of the law of Inertia. If we ask what acceleration the water expe- riences, everything is clear. Water having no weight would be hurled off at the beginning of rotation ; water having weight, on the other hand, would de scribe a central motion around the center of the earth With its slight velocity of rotation It would be forced more and more toward the center of the earth, with just enough of Its centripetal acceleration counter- acted by the resistance of the mass lying beneath, as to make the remainder, conjointly with the given tangential velocity, sufficient for motion in a circle* Looking at it from this point of view, all doubt and obscurity vanishes. But It must In justice be added that it was almost Impossible for Galileo, unless his genius were supernatural, to have gone to the bottom of the matter. He would have been obliged to antici- pate the great intellectual achievements of Htiygens and Newton. xvin. (See pae 2x8.) H. Streintz's objection (Die fhysikalisehen Grtmd* lagcn dcr Mechanik, Lelpsic, 1883, p, 117), that a com- 54 o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, parison of masses satisfying my definition can be ef- fected only by astronomical means, I am unable to admit. The expositions on pages 202, 218-221 amply refute this. Masses produce in each other accelera- tions in impact, as well as when subject to electric and magnetic forces, and when connected by a string on At wood's machine. In my Elements of Physics (second German edition, 1891, page 27) I have shown how mass-ratios can be experimentally determined on a centrifugal machine, in a very elementary and pop- ular manner. The criticism in question, therefore, may be regarded as refuted. My definition is the outcome of an endeavor to establish the interdependence of phenomena and to re- move all metaphysical obscurity, without accomplish- ing on this account less than other definitions have done. I have pursued exactly the same course with respect to the ideas, " quantity of electricity " (" On the Fundamental Concepts of Electrostatics," 1883, Popular Scientific Lectures, Open Court Pub. Co., Chi- cago, 1898), " temperature,' 7 "quantity of heat" {Zcit- schrift fur den physikalischen u?id chemischen Unterricht, Berlin, 1888, No. i), and so forth. With the view here taken of the concept of mass is associated, how- ever, another difficulty, which must also be carefully noted, if we would be rigorously critical in our analy- sis of other concepts of physics, as for example the concepts of the theory of heat. Maxwell made refer- ence to this point in his investigations of the concept of temperature, about the same time as I did with re- spect to the concept of heat. I would refer here to the discussions on this subject in my Principles of Heat (German edition, Leipsic, 1896), particularly page 41 and page 190. APPENDIX. 541 XIX. (See page 226.) My views concerning physiological time, the sen- sation of time, and partly also concerning physical time, I have expressed elsewhere (see Analysis of the Sensations, 1886, Chicago, Open Court Pub. Co., 1897, pp. 109-118, 179-181). As in trie study of thermal phenomena we take as our measure of temperature an arbitrarily chosen indicator of volume, which varies in almost parallel correspondence with our sensation of heat, and which is not liable to the uncontrollable disturbances of our organs of sensation, -so, for simi- lar reasons, we select as our measure of time an arbi- trarily chosen motion, (the angle of the earth's rotation, or path of a free body,) which proceeds in almost parallel correspondence with our sensation of time. If we have once made clear to ourselves that we arc concerned only with the ascertainment of the inter- dependence of phenomena, as I pointed out as early as 1865 (J[7ebcr den Zeitsinn dcs Ohres, Sitzuwgsberichte der Wiener Akademie) and 1866 (Fichte's Zeits thrift flir Philosophic), all metaphysical obscurities disappear. (Compare J Epstein, Die logischen Principien der Zeit- messung, Berlin, 1887.) I have endeavored also (Principles of Heat ^ German edition, page 51) to point out the reason for the natu- ral tendency of man to hypostatise the concepts which have great value for him, particularly those at which he arrives instinctively, without a knowledge of their development. The considerations which I there* ad- duced for the concept of temperature may be easily applied to the concept of time, and render the origin 542 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. of Newton's concept of "absolute" time intelligible. Mention is also made there (page 338) of the connex- ion obtaining between the concept of energy and the irreversibility of time, and the view is advanced that the entropy of the universe, if it could ever possibly be determined, would actually represent a species of absolute measure of time. I have finally to refer here also to the discussions of Petzoldt ("Das Gesetz der Eindeutigkeit," Vierteljahrsschrift fur wissenschaftliche Philosophic, 1894, page 146), to which I shall reply in another place. (See page 238.) Of the treatises which have appeared since 1883 on the law of inertia, w all of which furnish welcome evidence of a heightened interest in this question, I can here only briefly mention that of Streintz (Physi- kalische Grundlagen der Mechanik, Leipsic, 1883) and that of L. Lange {Die geschichtliche JZntwicklung des Bewegungsbegriffes, Leipsic, 1886). The expression " absolute motion of translation" Streintz correctly pronounces as devoid of meaning and consequently declares certain analytical deduc- tions, to which he refers, superfluous. On the other hand, with respect to rotation, Streintz accepts New- ton's position, that absolute rotation can be distin- guished from relative rotation. In this point of view, therefore, one can select every body not affected with absolute rotation as a body of reference for the ex- pression of the law of inertia. I cannot share this view. For me, only relative motions exist (Erhaltung der Arbeit, p. 48 ; Science of Mechanics, p. 229), and I can see, in this regard, no APPENDIX. 543 distinction between rotation and translation. When a body moves relatively to the fixed stars, centrifugal forces are produced ; when it moves relatively to some different body, and not relatively to the fixed stars, no centrifugal forces are produced. I have no objec- tion to calling the first rotation "absolute" rotation, if it be remembered that nothing is meant by such a designation except relative rotation with respect to the fixed stars. Can we fix Newton's bucket of water, rotate the fixed stars, and then prove the absence of centrifugal forces? The experiment is impossible, the idea is mean- ingless, for the two cases are not, in sense-perception, distinguishable from each other. I accordingly re- gard these two cases as the same case and Newton's distinction as an illusion (Science of Mechanics, page 232). But the statement is correct that it is possible to find one's bearings in a balloon shrouded in fog, by means of a body which does not rotate with respect to the fixed stars. But this is nothing more than an indirect orientation with respect to the fixed stars ; it is a mechanical, substituted for an optical, orienta- tion. I wish to add the following remarks in answer to Streintz's criticism of my view. My opinion is not to be confounded with that of Euler (Streintz, pp. 7, 50),, who, as L/ange has clearly shown, never arrived at any settled and intelligible opinion on the subject. Again, I never assumed that remote masses only, and not near ones, determine the velocity of a body (Streintz, p. 7); I simply spoke of an influence inde- pendent of distance. In the light of my expositions at pages 222-245, the unprejudiced and careful reader 5 4 4 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. will scarcely maintain with Streintz (p. 50), that after so long a period of time, without a knowledge of Newton and Euler, I have only been led to views which these inquirers so lorg ago held, but were afterwards, partly by them and partly by others, re- jected. Even my remarks of 1872, which were all that Streintz knew, cannot justify this criticism. These were, for good reasons, concisely stated, but they are by no means so meagre as they must appear to one who knows them only from Streintz's criticism. The point of view which Streintz occupies, I at that time expressly rejected. Lange's treatise is, in my opinion, one of the best that have been written on this subject. Its methodi- cal movement wins at once the reader's sympathy. Its careful analysis and study, from historical and criti- cal points of view, of the concept of motion, have produced, it seems to me, results of permanent value. I also regard its clear emphasis and apt designation of the principle of "particular determination" as a point of much merit, although the principle itself, as well as its application, is not new. The principle is really at the basis of all measurement. The choice of the unit of measurement is convention ; the number of measurement is a result of inquiry. Every natural inquirer who is clearly conscious that his business is simply the investigation of the interdependence of phenomena, as I formulated the point at issue a long time ago (1865-1866), employs this principle. When, for example {Mechanics , p. 218 et seq.), the negative inverse ratio of the mutually induced accelerations of two bodies is called the mass-ratio of these bodies, this is a convention, expressly acknowledged as arbi- trary ; but that these ratios are independent of the APPENDIX. 545 kind^and of the order of combination of the bodies is a result of inquiry. I might adduce numerous similar nstances from the theories of heat and electricity as well as from other provinces. Compare Appendix II. Taking it in its simplest and most perspicuous form, the law of inertia, in Lange's view, would read as follows : Three material points, JPi, jP 2 , P 8 , are simultane- ously hurled from the same point in space and then left to themselves. The moment we are certain that the points are not situated in the same straight line, we join each separately with any fourth point in space, <2- These lines of junction, which we may respec- tively call 6*1, G^ G$, form, at their point of meeting, a three-faced solid angle. If now we make this solid angle preserve, with unaltered rigidity, its form, and constantly determine In such a manner Its position, that PI shall always move on the line G\> P<z on the line G^ P% on the line G^ these lines may be regarded as the axis of a coordinate or Inertial system, with respect to which every other material point, left to It- self, will move In a straight line. The spaces de- scribed by the free points in the paths so determined will be proportional to one another. A system of coordinates with respect to which three material points move in a straight line Is, ac- cording to Lange, under the assumed limitations, a simple convention. That with respect to such a system also a fourth or other free material point will move in a straight line, and that the paths of the different points will all be proportional to one another, arc re- sults of inquiry. In the first place, we shall not dispute the fact that the law of inertia can be referred to such a system 546 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. of time and space coordinates and expressed HI this form. Such an expression is less fit than Strelntz's for practical purposes, but, on the other hand, Is, for its methodical advantages, more attractive. It espe- cially appeals to my mind, as a number of years ago I was engaged with similar attempts, of which not the beginnings but only a few remnants {Mechanics, pp. 234235) are left. I abandoned these attempts, be- cause I was convinced that we only apparently evade by such expressions references to the fixed stars and the angular rotation of the earth. This, in my opin- ion, is also true of the forms in which Streintz and L,ange express the law. In point of fact, it was precisely by the considera- tion of the fixed stars and the rotation of the earth that we arrived at a knowledge of the law of inertia as It at present stands, and without these foundations we should never have thought of the explanations here discussed (Mechanics, 232233). The considera- tion of a small number of isolated points, to the ex- clusion of the rest of the world, is in my judgment In- admissible {Mechanics, pp. 229235). It Is quite questionable, whether a fourth material point, left to itself, would, with respect to Lange's "inertial system," uniformly describe a straight line, if the fixed stars were absent, or not invariable, or could not be regarded with sufficient approximation as Invariable. The most natural point of view for the candid In- quirer must still be, to regard the law of inertia pri- marily as a tolerably accurate approximation, to refer it, with respect to space, to the fixed stars, and, with respect to time, to the rotation of the earth, and to await the correction, or more precise definition, of APPENDIX. 547 our knowledge from future experience, as I have ex- plained on page 237 of this book. I have still to mention the discussions of the law of inertia which have appeared since 1889. Reference may first be made to the expositions of Karl Pearson {Grammar of Science, 1892, page 477), which agree with my own, save in terminology. P. and J. Fried- lander {Absolute und relative Bewcgung, Berlin, 1896) have endeavored to determine the question by means of an experiment based on the suggestions made by me at pages 217-218; I have grave doubts, however, whether the experiment will be successful from the quantitative side. I can quite freely give my assent to the discussions of Johannesson {Das J3eharrung$~ gesetz, Berlin, 1896), although the question, remains unsettled as to the means by which the motion of A body not perceptibly accelerated by other bodies Is to be determined. For the sake of completeness, the predominantly dialectic treatment by M. E. Vicaire, Soring scientifique de Bruxelles, Jrf>5 3 as well as the in- vestigations of J. G. MacGregor, Royal Society of Can- ada, Jr8(?5, which are only remotely connected with the question at issue; remain to be mentioned. I have no objections to Budde's conception of space as a sort of medium (compare page 230), although I think that the properties of this medium should be demonstrable physically in some other manner, and that they should not be assumed ad hoc. If all apparent actions at a distance, all accelerations, turned out to be effected through the agency of a medium, then the question would appear in a different light, and the solution is to be sought perhaps in the view set forth on page 230. 54 8 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. XXI. (See page 255.) Section VIII., "Retrospect of the Development of Dynamics," was written in the year 1883. It con- tains, especially in paragraph 7, on pages 254 and 255, an extremely general programme of a future sys- tem of mechanics, and it is to be remarked that the Mechanics .of Hertz, which appeared in the year 1894,* marks a distinct advance in the direction indicated. It is impossible in the limited space at our disposal to give any adequate conception of the copious ma- terial contained in this book, and besides it is not our purpose to expound new systems of mechanics, but merely to trace the development of ideas relating to mechanics. Hertz's book must, in fact, be read by every one interested in mechanical problems. Hertz's criticisms of prior s}^stems of mechanics, with which he opens his work, contains some very noteworthy epistemological considerations, which from our point of view (not to be confounded either "with the Kantian or with the atomistic mechanical concepts of the majority of physicists), stand in need of certain modifications. The constructive images f (or better, perhaps, the concepts), which we consciously and purposely form of objects, are to be so chosen that the " consequences which necessarily follow from them in thought " agree with the " consequences which nec- essarily follow from them in nature." It is demanded of these images or concepts that they shall be logically *H. Hertz, Die Princijtzen der Mechanik zn neuem Zusam?nenhange dar~ gestellt. Leipzig, 1894. t Hertz uses the term Bild (image or picture) in the sense of the old Eng- lish philosophical use of zVfta, and applies it to systems of ideas or concepts relating to any province. APPENDIX. 549 admissible, that is to say, free from all self-contradic- tions ; that they shall be correct, that Is, shall con- form to the relations obtaining between objects; and finally that they shall be appropriate, and contain the least possible superfluous features. Our concepts, it is true, are formed consciously and purposely by us, but they are nevertheless not formed altogether arbi- trarily, but are the outcome of an endeavor on our part to adapt our ideas to our sensuous environment. The agreement of the concepts with one another is a requirement which is logically necessary, and this logical necessity, furthermore, is the only necessity that we have knowledge of. The belief in a necessity obtaining in nature arises only in cases where our concepts are closely enough adapted to nature to ensure a correspondence between the logical infer- ence and the fact. But the assumption of an adequate adaptation of our ideas can be refuted at any moment by experience. Hertz's criterion of appropriateness coincides with our criterion of economy. Hertz's criticism that the Galileo-Newtonian sys- tem of mechanics, particularly the notion of force, lacks clearness (pages 7, 14, 15) appears to us justified only in the case of logically defective expositions, such as Hertz doubtless had in mind from his student days* He himself partly retracts his criticism in another place (pages 9, 47) \ or at any rate, he qualifies it. But the logical defects of some individiial interpretation cannot be imputed to systems as such* To be sure, it is not permissible to-day (page 7) "to speak of a force acting in one aspect only, or, in the case of cen- tripetal force, to take account of the action of inertia twice, once as a mass and again as a force.** But neither is this necessary, since Huygens and Newton 55 o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS, were perfectly clear on this point. To characterise forces as being frequently "empty-running wheels/' as being frequently not demonstrable to the senses, can scarcely be permissible. In any event, "forces" are decidedly in the advantage on this score as com- pared with "hidden masses " and "hidden motions." In the case of a piece of iron lying at rest on a table, both the forces in equilibrium, the weight of the iron and the elasticity of the table, are very easily demon- strable. Neither is the case with energic mechanics so bad as Hertz would have It, and as to his criticism against the employment of minimum principles, that it in- volves the assumption of purpose and presupposes tendencies directed to the future, the present work shows in another passage quite distinctly that the simple import of minimum principles Is contained In an entirely different property from that of purpose. Every system of mechanics contains references to the future, since all must employ the concepts of time, velocity, etc. Nevertheless, though Hertz's criticism of existing systems of mechanics cannot be accepted in all their severity, his own novel views must be regarded as a great step in advance. Hertz, after eliminating the concept of force, starts from the concepts of time, space, and mass alone, with the idea In view of giv- ing expression only to that which can actually be ob- served. The sole principle which he employs may be conceived as a combination of the law of Inertia and Gauss's principle of least constraint. Free masses move uniformly in straight lines. If they are put In connexion In any manner they deviate, In accordance with Gauss's principle, as little as possible from this APPENDIX. 551 motion; their actual motion is more nearly that of free motion than any other conceivable motion. Hertz says the masses move as a result of their connexion in a straightcst path. Every deviation of the motion of a mass from uniformity and rectilinearity is due, in his system, not to a force but to rigid connexion with other masses. And \\here such matters are not vis- ible, he conceives hidden masses with hidden motions. All physical forces are conceived as the effect of such actions. Force, force-function, energy, in his system, are secondary and auxiliary concepts only. Let us now look at the most important points singly, and ask to what extent was the way prepared for them. The notion of eliminating force may be reached in the following manner. It is part of the general idea of the Galileo-Newtonian system of mechanics to conceive of all connexions as replaced by forces which determine the motions required by the connexions ; converse^'', everything that appears as force may be conceived to be due to a connexion. If the first idea frequently appears in the older systems, as being his- torically simpler and more immediate, in the case of Hertz the latter is the more prominent. If we reflect that in both cases, whether forces or connexions be presupposed, the actual dependence of the motions of the masses on one another is given for every in- stantaneous conformation of the system by linear dif- ferential equations between the co animates of the masses, then the existence of these equations may be considered the essential thing, the thing established by experience. Physics indeed gradually accustoms itself to look upon the description of the facts by dif- ferential equations as its proper aim, a point of "view which was taken also in Chapter V. of the present 55 2 TJIE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. work (1883). But with these the general applicabil- ity of Hertz's mathematical formulations is recognised without our being obliged to enter upon any further interpretation of the forces or connexions. Hertz's fundamental law may be described as a sort of generalised law of Inertia, modified by connex- ions of the masses. For the simpler cases, this view was a natural one, and doubtless often forced Itself upon the attention. In fact, the principle of the con- servation of the center of gravity and of the conserva- tion of areas was actually described in the present work (Chapter III.) as a generalised law of inertia. If we reflect that by Gauss's principle the connexion of the masses determines a minimum of deviation from those motions which it would describe for Itself, we shall arrive at Hertz's fundamental law the moment we consider all the forces as due to the connexions. For on severing all connexions, only isolated masses mov- ing by the law of inertia are left as ultimate elements. Gauss very distinctly asserted that no substantially new principle of mechanics could ever be discovered. And Hertz's principle also is only new In form, for it is identical with Lagrange's equations. The minimum condition which the principle involves does not refer to any enigmatic purpose, but its Import Is the same as that of all minimum laws. That alone takes place which is dynamically determined (Chapter III.). The deviation from the actual motion Is dynamically not determined ; this deviation is not present ; the actual motion is therefore unique.* *See Petzoldt's excellent article "Das Gesetz der Eindeutigkeit " (Vftr- teljahrsschrift fur vuissenschaftliche Philosophie, XIX., page 146, especially page 186). R. Henke is also mentioned in this article as having approached Hertz's view in his tract Ueber die Methode der kle fnsten Quadrate (Lfclpsic t 1894). APPENDIX. 553 It is hardly necessary to remark that the physical side of mechanical problems is not only not disposed of, but is not even so much as touched, by the elabo- ration of such a formal mathematical system of me- chanics. Free masses move uniformly in straight lines. Masses having different velocities and direc- tions if connected mutually affect each other as to velocity, that is, determine in each other accelera- tions. These physical experiences enter along with purely geometrical and arithmetical theorems into the formulation, for which the latter alone would In no wise be adequate ; for that which is uniquely deter- mined mathematically and geometrically only, is for that reason not also uniquely determined mechani- cally. But we discussed at considerable length in Chapter II., that the physical principles in question were not at all self-evident, and that even their exact significance was by no means easy to establish* In the beautiful ideal form which Hertz has given to mechanics, its physical contents have shrunk to an apparently almost imperceptible residue. It is scarcely to be doubted that Descartes if he lived to- day would have seen in Hertz's mechanics, far more than in Lagrange's " analytic geometry of four dimen- sions," his own ideal. For Descartes, who in his op- position to the occult qualities of Scholasticism would grant no other properties to matter than extension and motion, sought to reduce all mechanics and phys- ics to a geometry of motions, on the assumption of a motion indestructible at the start It is not difficult to analyse the psychological cir- cumstances which led Hertz to his system. After in- quirers had succeeded in representing electric and magnetic forces that act at a distance as the results 554 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. of motions in a medium, the desire must again have awakened to accomplish the same result with respect to the forces of gravitation, and if possible for all forces whatsoever. The Idea was therefore very nat- ural to discover whether the concept of force generally could not be eliminated. It cannot be denied that when we can command all the phenomena taking place in a medium, together with the large masses contained in it, by means of a single complete pic- ture, our concepts are on an entirely different plane from what they are when only the relations of these isolated masses as regards acceleration are known. This will be willingly granted even by those \\ho are convinced that the interaction of parts in contact is not more intelligible than action at a distance. The , present tendencies in the development of physics are entirely in this direction. If we are not content to leave the assumption of occult masses and motions in its general form, but should endeavor to investigate them singly and in de- tail, we should be obliged, at least in the present state of our physical knowledge, to resort, even in the sim- plest cases, to fantastic and even frequently question- able fictions, to which the given accelerations would be far preferable. For example, if a mass m is mov- ing uniformly in a circle of radius r, with a velocity z>, which we are accustomed to refer to a centripetal force proceeding from the center of the circle, we might instead of this conceive the mass to be rigidly connected at the distance 2r with one of the same size having a contrary velocity. Huygens 7 s cen- tripetal impulsion would be another , example of a force replaced by a connexion. As an ideal program APPENDIX. 535 Hertz's mechanics Is simpler and more beautiful, but for practical purposes our present S3 T stem of mechan- ics is preferable, as Hertz himself (page 47), with his characteristic candor, admits.* XXII. (See page 255.) The views put forward in the first two chapters of this book were worked out by me a long time ago. At the start they were almost without exception coolly rejected, and only gradually gained friends. All the essential features of my Mechanics I stated originally In a brief communication of five octavo pages entitled On the Definition of Mass. These were the theorems now given at page 243 of the present book. The communication was rejected by Poggendorf's Anna- len, and it did not appear until a year later (1868), In Carl's Rcpertorium. In a lecture delivered in 1871, I outlined my epistemological point of view in natural science generally, and with special exactness for phys- ics. The concept of cause is replaced there by the concept of function; the determining of the depend- ence of phenomena on one another, the economic ex- position of actual facts, is proclaimed as the object, and physical concepts as a means to an end solely. I did not care now to impose upon any editor the re- sponsibility for the publication of the contents of this lecture, and the same was published as a separate tract in i872.f In 1874, when Kirchhoff In his Me- chanics came out with his theory of "description" and ""Compare J, Classen, "Die Principien der Mochanik hen flrt/ tint! Boltzniann " (Jnhrlnich tier Ifambuvgischtit itoi&sM$chaftlfch<*M v?//AiW/f>r , XV., p. i, Hamburg, 1898). f J&rhaltung der Arbeit^ Prague, 1872. 55 6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. other doctrines, which were analogous in part only to my views, and still aroused the "universal astonish- ment " of his colleagues, I became resigned to my fate. But the great authority of Kirchhoff gradually made itself felt, and the consequence of this also doubtless was that on its appearance in 1883 my Me- chanics did not evoke so much surprise. In view of the great assistance afforded by Kirchhoff, it is alto- gether a matter of indifference with me that the pub- lic should have regarded, and partly does so still, my interpretation of the principles of physics as a contin- uation and elaboration of Kirchhoff's views ; whilst in fact mine were not only older as to date of publica- tion, but also more radical.* The agreement with my point of view appears upon the whole to be increasing, and gradually to ex- tend over more extensive portions of my work. It would be more in accord with my aversion for polem- ical discussions to wait quietly and merely observe what part of the ideas enunciated may be found ac- ceptable. But I cannot suffer my readers to remain in obscurity with regard to the existing disagreements, and I have also to point out to them the way in which they can find their intellectual bearings outside of this book, quite apart from the fact that esteem for my opponents also demands a consideration of their criticisms. These opponents are numerous and of all kinds: historians, philosophers, metaphysicians, logi- cians, educators, mathematicians, and physicists, I can make no pretence to any of these qualifications in any superior degree. I can only select here the most important criticisms, and answer them in the capacity of a man who has the liveliest and most ingenuous in- *See the preface to the first edition. APPENDIX. 557 terest in understanding the growth of physical ideas. I hope that this will also make it easy for others to find their way in this field and to form their own judg- ment. P. Volkmann in his writings on the epistemology* of physics appears as my opponent only In certain criticisms on individual points, and particularly by his adherence to the old systems and by his predilec- tion for them. It is the latter trait, in fact, that sepa- rates us ; for otherwise Volkmann's views have much affinity with my own. He accepts my adaptation of ideas, the principle of economy and of comparison, even though his expositions differ from mine in indi- vidual features and tary in terminology. I, for my part, find in his writings the important principle of isolation and superposition, appropriately emphasised and admirably described, and I willingly accept them. I am also willing to admit that concepts which at the start are not very definite must acquire their "retro- active consolidation" by a "circulation of knowl- edge/' by an "oscillation ' T of attention. I also agree with Volkmann that from this last point of view New- ton accomplished in his day nearly the best that it was possible to do; but I cannot agree with Volk- mann when he shares the opinion of Thomson and Tait, that even in the face of the substantially differ- ent epistemological needs of the present day, New- ton's achievement is definitive and exemplary. On the contrary, it appears to me that if Volkmann's pro- cess of "consolidation" be allowed complete sway, it must necessarily lead to enunciations not differing in * Erkenntnisstheoretische Grund&ngederNaturwfsstinsfhttft, Loipadg, t8}6 Ueber Newton's Phflosojhia Natural/*. Kttnigshntx, i$tfi<>J5fwfnJtrui9ff fn das Studium dur theoretzschen Physik, Leipsie, igco. Our references ar to the last-named work. 55 8 TfJ SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. any essential point from my own. I follow with gen- uine pleasure the clear and objective discussions of G. Heymans.* The differences which I have with Hoflerf and Poske J relate in the main to individual points. So far as principles are concerned, I take precisely the same point of view as Petzoldt, and we differ only on questions of minor importance. The numerous criticisms of others, which either refer to the arguments of the writers just mentioned, or are supported by analogous grounds, cannot out of regard for the reader be treated at length. It will be suffi- cient to describe the character of these differences by selecting a few individual, but important, points. A special difficulty seems to be still found in ac- cepting my definition of mass. Streintz (compare p. 540) has remarked in criticism of it that it is based solely.upon gravity, although this was expressly ex- cluded in rny first formulation of the definition (1868). Nevertheless, this criticism is again and again put forward, and quite recently even by Volkmann (/t><r. ctt., p. 1 8). My definition simply takes note of the fact that bodies in mutual relationship, whether it be that of action at a distance, so called, or whether rigid or elastic connexions be considered, determine in one another changes of velocity (accelerations). More than this, one does not need to know in order to be able to form a definition with perfect assurance and without the fear of building on sand. It is not correct as *Die Gesetze ^lnd Elements des 'wisscnschaftlicken Denkcns, II., Leipzig 1894. \Studien zur g-egen'wi.irt/g'en Philoso$hle der mathematischen dlechetnik, Leipzig, 1900. J Vierteljahrsschrift fur vuzssenschaftliche Philosophic^ Leipzig, 1884* P a # * 385. " Das Gesetz der Eindeutigkeit ( Vierteljahrsschriftfnr ivfssenschaftltche e^ XIX. , page 146). APPENDIX. 559 Hofler asserts (Joe. cit., p. 77), that this definition tacitly assumes one and the same force acting on both masses. It does not assume even the notion of force, since the latter is built up subsequently upon the no- tion of mass, and gives then the principle of action and reaction quite independently and without falling into Newton's logical error. In this arrangement -one concept is not misplaced and made to rest on another which threatens to give way under it. This is, as I take it, the only really serviceable aim of Volkrnann's "circulation" and "oscillation." After we have de- fined mass by means of accelerations, it is not difficult to obtain from our definition apparently new variant concepts like "capacity for acceleration, 7 ' "capacity for energy of motion" (Hofler, loc. cit., page 70). To accomplish anything dynamically with the concept of mass, the concept in question must, as I most em- phatically insist, be a dynamical concept. Dynamics cannot be constructed with quantity of matter by it- self, but the same can at most be artificially and arbi- trarily attached to it (loc, cit., pages 71, 72). Quantity of matter by itself is never mass, neither is it thermal capacity, nor heat of combustion, nor nutritive value, nor anything of the kind. Neither does "mass" play a thermal, but only a dynamical r61e (compare Hofler, loc. cit., pages 71, 72). On the other hand, the different physical quantities are proportional to one another, and two or three bodies of unit mass form, by virtue of the dynamic definition, a body of twice or three times the mass, as is analogously the case also with thermal capacity by virtue of the ther- mal definition. Our instinctive craving for concepts involving quantities of things, to which Hdfler (&>r. cit , page 72) is doubtless seeking to give expression, 5 6o THE SCIENCE OF MECJIAJ\ JCS. and which amply suffices for every-day purposes, is something that no one will think of denying. But a scientific concept of "quantity of matter" should -properly be deduced from the proportionality of the single physical quantities mentioned, instead of, con- trariwise, building up the concept of mass upon " quantity of matter." The measurement of mass by means of weight results from my definition quite nat- urally, whereas in the ordinary conception the meas- urability of quantity of matter by one and the same dynamic measure is either taken for granted outright, or proof must be given beforehand by special experi- ments, that equal weights act under all circumstances as equal masses. In my opinion, the concept of mass has -here been subjected to thorough analysis for the first time since Newton. For historians, mathema- ticians, and physicists appear to have all treated the question as an easy and almost self-evident one* It is, on the contrary, of fundamental significance and is deserving of the attention of my opponents* Many criticisms have been made of my treatment of the law of inertia. I believe I have shown (1868), somewhat as Poske has done (1884), that any deduc- tion of this law from a general principle, like the law of causality, is inadmissible, and this view has now won some support (compare Heymans, loc. cif., page 432). Certainly, a principle that has been universally recognised for so short a time only cannot be regarded as a fHori self-evident. Heymans {loc. cit., p. 427) cor- rectly remarks that axiomatic certainty was ascribed a few centuries ago to a diametrically opposite form of the law. Heymans sees a supra-empirical element only in the fact that the law of inertia is referred to absolute space, and in the further fact that both in APPENDIX. 561 the law of Inertia and in its ancient diametrically op- posite form something constant is assumed in the con- dition of the body that is left to itself (loc. cit*, page 433)- We shall have something to say further on re- garding the first point, and as for the latter it is psy- chologically intelligible without the aid of metaphys- ics, because constant features alone have the power to satisfy us either intellectually or practically, which is the reason that we are constantly seeking for them. Now, looking at the matter from an entirely unprejudiced point of view, the case of these axio- matic certainties will be found to be a very peculiar one. One will strive in vain with Aristotle to con- vince the common man that a stone hurled from the hand would be necessarily brought to rest at once after its release, were it not for the air which rushed in be- hind and forced 1 it forwards. But he would put just as little credence in Galileo's theory of infinite uni- form motion. On the other hand, Benedetti's theory of the gradual diminution of the vis imprcssa, which belongs to the period of unprejudiced thought and of liberation from ancient preconceptions, will be ac- cepted by the common man without contradiction. This theory, in fact, Is an immediate reflexion of ex- perience, while the first-mentioned theories, which Idealise experience in contrary directions, arc a pro- duct of technical professional reasoning. They exer- cise the illusion of axiomatic certainty only upon the mind of the scholar whose entire customary train of thought would be thrown out of gear by a disturbance of these elements of his thinking. The behavior of inquirers toward the law of inertia seems to me from a psychological point of view to be adequately ex- plained by this circumstance, and I am inclined to 562 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. allow the question of whether the principle is to be called an axiom, a postulate, or a maxim, to rest in abeyance for the time being. Heymans, Poske, and Petzoldt concur in finding an empirical and a supra- empirical element in the law of inertia. According to Heymans (Joe. cit., p. 438) experience simply afforded the opportunity for applying an a priori valid prin- ciple. Poske thinks that the empirical origin of the principle does not exclude its a priori validity (loc. czt.y pp. 401 and 402). Petzoldt also deduces the law of inertia in part only from experience, and regards it in its remaining part as given by the law of unique determination. I believe I am not at variance with Petzoldt in formulating the issue here at stake as fol- lows : It first devolves on experience to inform us what particular dependence of phenomena on one an- other actually exists, what the thing to be determined is, and experience alone can instruct us on this point. If we are convinced that we have been suffi- ciently instructed in this regard, then when adequate data are at hand we regard it as unnecessary to keep on waiting for further experiences ; the phenomenon is determined for us, and since this alone is determi- nation, it is uniquely determined. In other words, if I have discovered by experience that bodies determine accelerations in one another, then in all circumstances where such determinative bodies are lacking I shall expect with unique determination uniform motion in a straight line. The law of inertia thus results imme- diately in all its generality, without our being obliged to specialise with Petzoldt ; for every deviation from uniformity and rectilinearity takes acceleration for granted. I believe I am right in saying that the same fact is twice formulated in the law of inertia and in APPENDIX. 563 the statement that forces determine accelerations (p. 143). If this be granted, then an end is also put to the discussion as to whether a vicious circle is or is not contained in the application of the law of inertia (Poske, Hofler). My inference as to the probable manner in which Galileo reached clearness regarding the law of inertia was drawn from a passage in his third Dialogue,* which was literally transcribed from the Paduan edi- tion of 1744, Vol. III., page 124, in my tract on The Conservation of Energy (Kng. Trans., in part, in my Popular Scientific Lectures, third edition, Chicago, The Open Court Publishing Co.). Conceiving a body which is rolling down an inclined plane to be con- ducted upon rising inclined planes of varying slopes, the slight retardation which it suffers on absolutely smooth rising planes of small inclination, and the re- tardation zero, or unending uniform motion on a hori- zontal plane, must have occurred to him. Wohlwill was the first to object to this way of looking at the matter (see page 524), and others have since joined * " Constat jam, quod mobile ex quiete In A descendens per AB, pjnulus acquirit velocitatis juxta temporis ipsius inerementnm : gradum vero in B esse maximum, acquisitonnn, et stiapte natura immntnbil tor improssuw, sublatis scilicet causis accelerationis novae, aut retardationis : accclcrationis Fig. 241. Inquam, si adhuc super extenso piano tiltcmis progrcdorottu" ; nstnrdationis vero, dum super planum acclive /?C fit reflexio : in hori/.ontuli antum (>"// nequabilis motus juxta gradum valocitatis ex A in /;? acquisttac In infunttnu ^ixtenderetxir/' " It is plain now that a movable body, starting from rest at A and da- 564 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. him. He asserts that uniform motion in a circle and horizontal motion still occupied distinct places in Ga- lileo's thought, and that Galileo started from the an- cient concepts and freed himself only very gradual!}- from them. It is not to be denied that the different phases in the intellectual development of the great in- quirers have much interest for the historian, and sonic one phase may, in its importance in this respect, be relegated into the background by the others. One must needs be a poor psychologist and have little knowledge of oneself not to know how difficult it is to liberate oneself from traditional views, and how even after that is done the remnants of the old ideas still hover in consciousness and are the cause of occa- sional backslidings even after the victory has been practically won. Galileo's experience cannot have been different. But with the physicist it is the in- stant in which a new view flashes forth that is of greatest interest, and it is this instant for which he will always seek. I have sought for it, I believe I have found it; and I am of the opinion that it left its unmistakable traces in the passage in question. Poske (Joe. cit., page 393) and Hofler (Joe. cit., pages in, 112) are unable to give their assent to my interpreta- tion of this passage, for the reason that Galileo does not expressly refer to the limiting case of transition from the inclined to the horizontal plane ; although scending down the inclined plane AR, acquires a velocity proportional to the increment of its time : the velocity possessed at B is the greatest of the velocities acquired, and by its nature immutably impressed, provided all "uses of new acceleration or retardation are taken away: I say accelcru- m, having in view its possible further progress along the plane extended ; APPENDIX. 565 Poske grants that the consideration of limiting cases was frequently employed by Galileo, and although Hofler admits having actually tested the educational efficacy of this device with students. It would indeed be a matter of surprise if Galileo, who may be re- garded as the inventor of the principle of continuity, should not in his long intellectual career have applied the principle to this most important case of all for him. It is also to be considered that the passage does not form part of the broad and general discus- sions of the Italian dialogue, but is tersely couched, in the dogmatic form of a result, in Latin. And in this way also the "velocity immutably impressed'* may have crept in.* *Even granting that Galileo reached his knowledge of the law of inertia only gradually, and that it was presented to him merely as an accidental dis- covery, nevertheless the following passages which arc taken from the Paduau edition of 1744 will show that his limitation of the law to horizontal iioti was justified by the inherent nature of the subject treated ; and the assump- tion that Galileo toward the end of his scientific career did not possess a full knowledge of the law, can hardly he maintained. "Sagr. Ma quando I'artigliena si piantasse non a perpendicolo, ma in- clinata verso qualche parte, qual dovrehbe e&ser 1 il ruoto delhi pa'la ? and- rebbe ella forse, come nel 1'altro tiro, per la linea porpemlteolant, o ritor- nando anco poi per 1'istessa ? " 'Simpl. Questo non farebbe ella, ma uscita del pe.tf/o segmterebbe il sno moto per la linea retta, rho contmua la dirittura dellu cunna, notion in quanto il proprio peso la farebhe declinar da tal dirittura verso ten a," "Sagr. Talche la dirittura della canna e la regolatrico del moto della palla : ne. fuori di tal linea si rmiove, o muoverebbe, so 'I peso proprio mm la facesse delinare in gift. . . ," J3t\tfaje> sojfrnt t dut r MUSSIM* sisf^tnt t/t'l innndo, <( Sagr. But if the gtm were not placed in the prpmidietilui\ Inn were in- clined in some direction; what then would bes the motion of the ball ? Would it follow, perhaps, as in the other case, the perpendicular, and in rrttmuMg fall also by the same line ? " *' Simpl. This it will not do, but having left the cannon it will follow Jt own motion in the straight line which in a continuation of ilm axis of- dm barrel, save in so far as its own weight shall cause it 10 dovtaiu from that direction toward the earth." * Sagr. So that the axis of the barrel is the regulator f 'he itmtiim of the l>all : and it ne'ther does nor will move outside of that line unless, it** own , weight causes it to drop downwards, , . .'* 566 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. The physical instruction which I enjoyed was in all probability just as bad and just as dogmatic as it was the fortune of my older critics and colleagues to enjoy. The principle of inertia was then enunciated as a dogma which accorded perfectly with the system. I could understand very well that disregard of all ob- stacles to motion led to the principle, or that it must be discovered, as Appelt says, by abstraction ; never- theless, it always remained remote and within the comprehension of supernatural genius only. And where was the guarantee that with the removal of all obstacles the diminution of the velocity also ceased? Poske (loc. cit., p. 395) is of the opinion that Galileo, to use a phrase which I have repeatedly employed, " disce?'ned" or "perceived" the principle immediately. But what is this discerning? Enquiring man looks here and looks there, and suddenly catches a glimpse of something he has been seeking or even of some- thing quite unexpected, that rivets his attention. Now, I have shown how this "discerning" came about and in what it consisted. Galileo runs his eye over several different uniformly retarded motions, and suddenly picks out from among them a uniform, in- "Attendere insuper licet, quod velocltatis gradus, quicunque in mobill reperiatur, est in illo suapte natura indelebiliter irnpressus, dum externae causae accelerations, aut retardationis tollantur, quod in solo horizontal! piano contingit : nam in planis declivibus ad est jam causa accelerationis majoris, in acclivibus vero retardationis. Ex quo pariter sequitur, matum in horizontal! esse quoque aeternum : si enim est aequabllis, nori debiliatur, aut remittitur, et multo minus tollitur," Discorsi e ditnastrazioni inatema,- ticke. Dialogo terzo. " Moreover, it is to be* remarked that the degree of velocity a body has is indestructibly impressed in it by its own nature, provided external causes of acceleration or retardation are wanting, which happens only on. horizontal planes: for on descending planes there is greater acceleration, and on as- cending planes retardation. Whence it follows that motion in a horizontal plane is perpetual : for if it remains the same, it is not diminished, or abated, much less abolished." APPENDIX. 567 finitely continued motion, of so peculiar a character that if it occurred by itself alone it would certainly be regarded as something altogether different in kind. But a very minute variation of the Inclination trans- forms this motion into a finite retarded motion, such as we have frequently met with in our lives. And now, no more difficulty is experienced in recognising the identity between all obstacles to motion and re- tardation by gravity, wherewith the ideal type of un- influenced, infinite, uniform motion is gained. As I read this passage of Galileo's while still a young man, a new light concerning the necessity of this ideal link in our mechanics, entirely different from that of the dogmatic exposition, flashed upon me. I believe that every one will have the same experience who will ap- proach this passage without prior bias. I have not the least doubt that Galileo above all others experi- enced that light. May my critics see to it how their assent also is to be avoided. I have now another important point to discuss in opposition to C. Neumann, * whose well-known publi- cation on this topic preceded minef shortly. I con- tended that the direction and velocity which Is taken into account in the law of inertia had no comprehen- sible meaning if the law was referred to cc absolute space." As a matter of fact, we can metrically deter- mine direction and velocity only in a space of which the points are marked directly or indirectly by given bodies. Neumann's treatise and my own were suc- cessful in directing attention anew to this point, which *Dze PHncipien d?r Galilei-Newton* schen Theorie^ Leipzig, 1870. * Erhaltung der Arbeit , Prague, 18721, (Translated in part in the article on "The Conservation of Energy," Popular Scientific Lectures, third edition, Chicago, 1898. 568 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. had already caused Newton and Euler much Intellec- tual discomfort; yet nothing more than partial at- tempts at solution, like that of Streintz, have resulted. I have remained to the present day the only one who insists upon -referring the law of inertia to the earth, and in the case of motions of great spatial and tempo- ral extent, to the fixed stars. Any prospect of com- ing to an understanding with the great number of my critics is, in consideration of the profound differences of our points of view, very slight. Rut so far as I have been able to understand the criticisms to which my view has been subjected, I shall endeavor to an- swer them. Hofler is of the opinion that the existence of "ab- solute motion" is denied, because it is held to be "inconceivable." But it is a fact of "more painstak- ing self-observation" that conceptions of absolute motion do exist. Conceivability and knowledge of absolute motion are not to be confounded. Only the latter is wanting here (Joe. cit., pages 120, 164). . . . Now, it is precisely with knowledge that the natural inquirer is concerned. A .thing that is beyond the ken of knowledge, a thing that cannot be exhibited to the senses, has no meaning in natural science. I have not the remotest desire of setting limits to the Imagi- nation of men, but I have a faint suspicion that the persons who imagine they have conceptions of Cf ab- solute motions," in the majority of cases have in mind the memory pictures of some actually experienced relative motion; but let that be as it may, for It Is in any event of no consequence. I maintain even more than Hofler, viz., that there exist sensory illusions of absolute motions, which can subsequently be repro- duced at any time. Every one that has repeated my .//7Y:'.V/;/A'. 569 experiments on the sensations of movement has ex- perience d the full sensory power of such illusions. One imagines one is flying off with one's entire en- vironment, which remains at relative rest with respect to the body; or that one is rotating in a space that is distinguished by nothing that is tangible. But no measure can be applied to this space of illusion ; its existence cannot be proved to another person, and it cannot be employed for the metrical and conceptual description of the facts of mechanics; it has nothing to do with the space of geometr}'.* Finally, when Holler (loc. cit., p. 133) brings forward the argument that "in every relative motion one at least of the bodies moving with reference to each other must be affected with absolute motion," I can only say that for the person who considers absolute motion as mean- ingless in physics, this argument has 110 force what- ever. But I have no further concern here with philo- sophical questions. To go into details as Hofler has in some places {loc. cit., pp. 124-126) would serve no purpose before an understanding had been reached on the main question. Heymans {loc. cit., pp. 412, 448) remarks that an inductive, empirical mechanics could have arisen, but that as a matter of fact a different mechanics, based on the non-empirical concept of absolute motion, has arisen. The fact that the principle of inertia has always been suffered to hold for absolute motion which is nowhere demonstrable, instead of being re- *I flatter myself on being able to resist the temptation to infustj li^htrnwn into a serious discussion by showing its ridiculous sido, but in reflecting on these problems I was involuntarily forced to think of the question which n very estimable but eccentric man once debated with in as to whether a yard of cloth in one's dreams is as long: as a real yard of cloth, Is the dream-yard to be really introduced into mechanics as a standard of mtmsuremt-nt ? 57 o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. garded as holding good for motion with respect to some actually demonstrable system of co-ordinates, is a problem which is almost beyond power of solution by the empirical theory. Heymans regards this as a problem that can have a metaphysical solution only. In this I cannot agree with Heymans. He admits that relative motions only are given in experience. With this admission, as with that of the possibility of an empirical mechanics, I am perfectly content. The rest, I believe, can be explained simply and without the aid of metaphysics. The first dynamic principles were unquestionably built up on empirical founda- tions. The earth was the body of reference ; the tran- sition to the other co-ordinate systems took place very gradually. Huygens saw that he could refer the motion of impinging bodies just as easily to a boat on which they were placed, as to the earth. The devel- opment of astronomy preceded that of mechanics con- siderably. When motions were observed that were at variance with known mechanical laws when re- ferred to the earth, it was not necessary immediately to abandon these laws again. The fixed stars were present and ready to restore harmony as a new sys- tem of reference with the least amount of changes in the concepts. Think only of the oddities and difficul- ties which would have resulted if in a period of great mechanical and physical advancement the Ptolemaic system had been still in vogue, a thing not at all in- conceivable. But Newton referred all of mechanics to absolute space! Newton is indeed a gigantic personality; little worship of authority is needed to succumb to his in- fluence. Yet even his achievements are not exempt from criticism. It appears to be pretty much one and APPENDIX. 57* the same thing whether we refer the laws of motion to absolute space, or enunciate them in a perfectly ab- stract form ;. that is to say, without specific mention of any system of reference. The latter course is un precarious and even practical; for in treating special cases every student of mechanics looks for some ser viceable system of reference. But owing to the fact that the first course, wherever there was any real issue at stake, was nearly always interpreted as having the same meaning as the latter, Newton's error was fraught with much less danger than it would other- wise have been, and has for that reason maintained itself so long. It is psychologically and historically intelligible that in an age deficient in epistemological critique empirical laws should at times have been elaborated to a point where they had no meaning. It cannot therefore be deemed advisable to make meta- physical problems out of the errors and oversights of our scientific forefathers, but it is rather our duty to correct them, be they small people or great. I would not be understood as saying that this has never hap- pened. Petzoldt (loc. cit, pp. 192 et seq.), who is in ac- cord with me in my rejection of absolute motion, ap- peals to a principle of Avenarius,* by a consideration of which he proposes to remove the difficulties in- volved in the problem of relative motion. I am per- fectly familiar with the principle of Avenarius, but I cannot understand how all the physical difficxiltics in- volved in the present problem can be avoided by re- ferring motions to one's own body. On the contrary, in considering physical dependencies abstraction must *Dcr menschttchc Wvltbegr?j[f, Leipzig, 1891, p. 130. 572 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. be made from one's own body, so far as it exercises any influence.* The most captivating reasons for the assumption of absolute motion were given thirty years ago by C. Neumann (loc. cit., p. 27). If a heavenly body be conceived rotating about its axis and consequently subject to centrifugal forces and therefore oblate, nothing, so far as we can judge, can possibly be altered in its condition by the removal of all the re- maining heavenly bodies. The body in question will continue to rotate and will continue to remain oblate. But if the motion be relative only, then the case of rotation will not be distinguishable from that of rest. All the parts of the heavenly body are at rest with re- spect to one another, and the oblateness would neces- sarily also disappear with the disappearance of the rest of the universe. I have two objections to make here. Nothing appears to me to be gained by making a meaningless assumption for the purpose of eliminat- ing a contradiction. Secondly, the celebrated mathe- matician appears to me to have made here too free a use of intellectual experiment, the fruitfulness and value of which cannot be denied. When experiment- ing in thought, it is permissible to modify unimportant circumstances in order to bring out new features in a given case; but it is not to be antecedently assumed that the universe is without influence on the phenom- enon here in question. If it is eliminated and contra- dictions still result, certainly this speaks in favor of the importance of relative motion, which; if it involves difficulties, is at least free from contradictions. * Analyse der E,mfindit<ngeiii zweite Anflage, Jena. 1900, pp, ir, 12 33, 38 208; English translation, Chicago, The Open Court Pub, Co., 1897, pp. 13 et seq. APPENDIX. 573 Volkmann (loc. cit., p. 53) advocates an absolute orientation by means of the ether. I have already spoken on this point (comp. pp. 230, 547), but I am extremely curious to know how one ether particle is to be distinguished from another. Until some means of distinguishing these particles is found, it will be pref- erable to abide by the fixed stars, and where these forsake us to confess that the true means of orienta- tion is still to be found. Taking everything together, I can only say that I cannot well see what is to be altered in my exposi- tions The various points stand in necessary connex- ion. After it has been discovered that the behavior of bodies toward one another is one in which acceler- ations are determined, a discovery which was twice formulated by Galileo and Newton, once in a general and again in a special form as a law of inertia, it is possible to give only one rational definition of mass, and that a purely dynamical definition. It is not at all, in my judgment, a matter of taste.* The concept of force and the principle of action and reaction fol- low of themselves. And the elimination of absolute motion is equivalent to the elimination of what is physically meaningless. It would be not only taking a very subjective and short-sighted view of science, but it would also be foolhardy in the extreme, were I to expect that my views in their precise individual form should be in- corporated without opposition into the intellectual systems of my contemporaries. The history of sci- ence teaches that the subjective, scientific philoso- *My definition of mass takes a more organic and more natural placet i i Hertz's mechanics than his own, for it contains implicitly the (gorm of hin ** fundamental law." 574 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. phies of individuals are constantly being corrected and obscured, and in the philosophy or constructive image of the universe which humanity gradually adopts, only the very strongest features of the thoughts of the greatest men are, after some lapse of time, recognisable. It is merely incumbent on the in- dividual to outline as distinctly as possible the main features of his own view of the world. XXIII. (See page 273.) Although signal individual performances in sci- ence cannot be gainsaid to Descartes, as his studies on the rainbow and his enunciation of the law of re- fraction show, his importance nevertheless is con- tained rather in the great general and revolutionary ideas which he promulgated in philosophy, mathe- matics, and the natural sciences. The maxim of doubting everything that has hitherto passed f.or es- tablished truth cannot be rated too high ; although it was more observed and exploited by his followers than by himself. Analytical geometry with its mod- ern methods is the outcome of his idea to dispense with the consideration of all the details of geometrical figures by the application of algebra, and to reduce everything to the consideration of distances. He was a pronounced enemy of occult qualities in physics, and strove to base all physics on mechanics, which he conceived as a pure geometry of motion. He has shown by his experiments that he regarded no physi- cal problem as Insoluble by this method. He took too little note of the fact that mechanics is possible only on the condition that the positions of the bodies are determined in their dependence on one another by APPENDIX. 575 a relation of force, by a function of time; and Leibnitz frequently referred to this deficiency. The mechani- cal concepts which Descartes developed with scanty and vague materials could not possibly pass as copies of nature, and were pronounced to be phantasies even by Pascal, Huygens, and Leibnitz. It has been re- marked, however, in a former place, how strongly Descartes's ideas, in spite of these facts, have per- sisted to the present day. He also exercises a power- ful influence upon physiology by his theory of vision, and by his contention that animals were machines, a theory which he naturally had not the courage to extend to human beings, but by which he anticipated the idea of reflex motion (compare Duhem, IS Evolution des theories physiques, Louvain, 1896). XXIV, (See page 378.) To the exposition given on pages 377 and 378, in the year 1883, I have the following remarks to add. It will be seen that the principle of least action, like all other minimum principles in mechanics, is a sim- ple expression of the fact that in the instances in question precisely so much happens as possibly can happen under the circumstances, or as is determined, viz., uniquely determined, by them. The deduction of cases of equilibrium from unique determination has already been discussed, and the same question will be considered in a later place. With respect to dynamic questions, the import of the principle of unique de- termination has been better and more perspicuously elucidated than in my case by J. Petzoldt in a work entitled Maxima, Minima und Oekonomic (Altenburg, 1891). He says (loc. cit., page u): "In the case of 57 6 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. all motions, the paths actually traversed admit of be- ing interpreted as signal instances chosen from an in- finite number of conceivable instances. Analytically, this has no other meaning than that expressions may always be found which yield the differential equations of the motion when their variation is equated to zero, for the variation vanishes only when the integral assumes a unique value." As a fact, it will be seen that in the instances treated at pages 377 and 378 an increment of velocity is uniquely determined only in the direction of the force, while an infinite number of equally legitimate incremental components of velocity at right angles to the force are conceivable, which are, however, for the reason given, excluded by the principle of unique de- termination. I am in entire accord with Petzoldt when he says : " The theorems of Euler and Hamilton, and not less that of Gauss, are thus nothing more than analytic expressions for the fact of experience that the phenomena of nature are uniquely deter- mined." The uniqueness of the minimum is determi- native. I should like to quote here, from a note which I published in the November number of the Prague Lotos for 1873, the following passage: "The static and dynamical principles of mechanics may be ex- pressed as isoperimetrical laws. The anthropomor- phic conception is, however, by no means essential, as may be seen, for example, in the principle of vir- tual velocities. If we have once perceived that the work A determines velocity, it will readily be seen that where work is not done when the system passes into all adjacent positions, no velocity can be ac- quired, and consequently that equilibrium obtains. APPENDIX. 577 The condition of equilibrium will therefore be 8A ^=0; where A need not necessarily be exactly a maximum or minimum. These laws are not absolutely restricted to -mechanics; they may be of very general scope. If the change in the form of a phenomenon J3 be de- pendent on a phenomenon A, the condition that JB shall pass over into a certain form will be 3-4 = 0." As will be seen, I grant in the foregoing passage that it is possible to discover analogies for the prin- ciple of least action in the most various departments of physics without reaching them through the circuit- ous course of mechanics. I look upon mechanics, not as the ultimate explanatory foundation of all the other provinces, but rather, owing to its superior formal development, as an admirable prototype of such an explanation. In this respect, my view differs appar- ently little from that of the majority of physicists, but the difference is an essential one after all. In further elucidation of my meaning, I should like to refer to the discussions which I have given in my Principles of Heat (particularly pages 192, 318, and 356, German edition), and also to my article " On Comparison in Physics" {Popular Scientific Lectures -, Knglish trans- lation, page 236). Noteworthy articles touching on this point are: C. Neumann, "Das Ostwald'sche Axiom des Energieurnsatzes" (JBerichte dcr k. sacks* Geselhchctft, 1892, p. 184), and Ostwald, " Ueber das Princip des ausgezeichneten Falles" {l&c. cit.> 1893, p. 600). XXV. (See page 480.) The Ausdehnungslchre of 1844, in which Grassmarm expounded his ideas for the first time, is in many re- 57 8 TJJE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. spects remarkable. The Introduction to it contains epistemological remarks of value. The theory of spa- tial extension is here developed as a general science, of which geometry is a special tri-dimensional case ; and the opportunity is taken on this occasion of sub- mitting the foundations of geometry to a rigorous cri- tique. The new and fruitful concepts of the addition of line-segments, multiplication of line-segments, etc., have also proved to be applicable in mechanics. Grassmann likewise submits the Newtonian principles to criticism, and believes he is able to enunciate them in a single expression as follows: "The total force (or total motion) which is inherent in an aggregate of material particles at any one time is the sum of the total force (or total motion) which has inhered in it at any former time, and all the forces that have been imparted to it from without in the intervening time; provided all forces be conceived as line-segments constant in direction and in length, and be referred to points which have equal masses." By force Grass- mann understands here the indestructibly impressed velocity. The entire conception is much akin to that of Hertz. The forces (velocities) are represented as line-segments, the moments as surfaces enumerated in definite directions, etc., a device by means of which every development takes a very concise and perspicuous form. But Grassmann finds the main advantage of his procedure in the fact that every step in the calculation is at the same time the clear ex- pression of every step taken in the thought ; whereas, in the common method, the latter is forced entirely into the background by the introduction of three arbi- trary co-ordinates. The difference between the ana- lytic and the synthetic method is again done away APPENDIX. 579 with, and the advantages of the two are combined. The kindred procedure of Hamilton, which has been illustrated by an example on page 528, will give some idea of these advantages. XXVI. (See page 485.) In the text I have employed the term "cause" in the sense in which it Is ordinarily used. I may add that with Dr. Carus,* following the practice of the German philosophers, I d^sting^cish " cause, " or jR.ea.l- grund, from Erkenntnissgrund* I also agree with Dr. Carus in the statement that "the signification of cause and effect is to a great extent arbitrary and depends rquch upon the proper tact of the observer. ""f The notion of cause possesses significance only as a means of provisional knowledge or orientation. In any exact and profound investigation of an event the inquirer must regard the phenomena as dependent on one another in the same way that the geometer regards the sides and angles of a triangle as dependent on one another. He will constantly keep before his mind, in this way, all the conditions of fact. xxvn. (See pa& 494-) My conception of economy of thought was devel- oped out of my experience as a teacher, out of the work of practical instruction. I possessed this con- ception as early as 1861, when. I began my lectures as Privat-Docent, and at the time believed that I was * See his Grund, Ursache und Zvtjt>c& t R. v. Grumbkow, Dresden, x88* and his Fundamental Problems^ pp. 79-91, Chicago: The Open Court Publish- ing Co., 1891. t Fundamental Problems, p. 84, 5 8o THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. in exclusive possession of the principle, a conviction which will, I think, be found pardonable. I am now, on the contrary, convinced that at least some presenti- ment of this idea has always, and necessarily must have, been a common possession of all inquirers who have ever made the nature of scientific investigation the subject of their thoughts. The expression of this opinion may assume the most diverse forms ; for ex- ample, I should most certainly characterise the guid- ing theme of simplicity and beauty which so distinctly marks the work of Copernicus and Galileo, not only as sesthetical, but also as economical. So, too, New- ton's Regulcz philosophandi are substantially influenced by economical considerations, although the economi- cal principle as such is not explicitly mentioned. In an interesting article, " An Episode in the History of Philosophy," published In The Open Court for April 4> 1^95, Mr. Thomas J. McCormack has shown that the idea of the economy of science was very near to the thought of Adam Smith (Essays}. In recent times the view in question has been repeatedly though di- versely expressed, first by myself in my lecture Ueber die ILrhaltzmg der Arbeit (1875), then by Clifford in his Lectures and ILssays (1872), by Kirchhoff in his Mechanics (1874), and by Avenarius (1876). To an oral utterance of the political economist A. Herrmann I have already made reference in my Erhaltung der Arbeit (p. 55, note 5); but no work by this author treating especially of this subject is known to me. I should also like to make reference here to the supplementary expositions given in my Popular Scien- tific Lectures (English edition, pages 186 et seq.) and in my Principles of Heat (German edition, page 294). In the latter work, the criticisms of Petzoldt (Vicrtel- APPENDIX. 581 jahrsschrift fur wissenschaftliche Philosophic, 1891) are considered. Husserl, in the first part of his work, Logische Untersuchungen (1900), has recently made some new animadversions on my theory of mental economy; these are in part answered in my reply to Petzoldt. I believe that the best course is to post- pone an exhaustive reply until the work of Husserl is completed, and then see whether some understanding cannot be reached. For the present, however, I should like to premise certain remarks. As a natural inquirer, I am accustomed to begin with some special and definite inquiry, and allow the same to act upon me in all its phases, and to ascend from the special aspects to more general points of view. I followed this custom also in the investigation of the develop- ment of physical knowledge. I was obliged to pro- ceed in this manner for the reason that a theory of theory was too difficult a task for me, being doubly difficult in a province in which a minimum of indis- putable, general, and independent truths from which everything can be deduced is not furnished at the start, but must first be sought for. An undertaking of this character would doubtless have more prospect of being successful if one took mathematics as one's subject-matter. I accordingly directed my attention to individual phenomena : the adaptation of ideas to facts, the adaptation of ideas to one another,* mental * Popular Scientific Lectures^ English edition, pp 244 tit seq.> whore the adaptation of thoughts to one another is described as the object of theory proper. Grasstnann appears to me to say pretty much the same In tho intro- duction to his Ausdehnungslehre of 3:844, page xix: **Tho firnt division of all the sciences is that into real and formal, of which the real sciences depict reality in thought as something independent of thought, and find their truth in the agreement of thought with that reality ; the formal sciences, ot tho other hand, have as their object that which has been posited by thought and itself, find their truth in the agreement of the mental processes with one another." 582 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. economy, comparison, Intellectual experiment, the constancy and continuity of thought, etc. In this in- quiry, I found it helpful and restraining to look upon every-day thinking and science in general, as a bio- logical and organic phenomenon, in which logical thinking assumed the position of an ideal limiting case. I do not doubt for a moment that the investi- gation can be begun at both ends. I have also de- scribed my efforts as epistemological sketches.* It may be seen from this that I am perfectly able to dis- tinguish between psychological and logical questions, as I believe every one else is who has ever felt the necessity of examining logical processes from the psychological side. But it is doubtful if anyone who has carefully read even so much as the logical analysis of Newton's enunciations in my Mechanics, will have the temerity to say that I have endeavored to erase all distinctions between the < blind " natural thinking of every-day life and logical thinking. Even if the logical analysis of all the sciences were complete, the biologico-psychological investigation of their develop- ment would continue to remain a necessity for me, which would not exclude our making a new logical analysis of this last investigation. If my theory of mental economy be conceived merely as a teleological and provisional theme for guidance, such a concep- tion does not exclude its being based on deeper foun- dations,")" but goes toward making it so. Mental econ- omy is, however, quite apart from this, a very clear logical ideal which retains its value even after its logi- cal analysis has been completed. The systematic form of a science can be deduced from the same prin- * Principles of Heat, Preface to the first German edition. ^Analysis of the Sensations, second German edition, pages 64-65. APPENDIX. 583 ciples in many different manners, but some one of these deductions will answer to the principle of econ- omy better than the rest, as I have shown in the case of Gauss's dioptrics.* So far as I can now see, I do not think that the investigations of Husserl have .affected the results of my inquiries. As for the rest, I must wait until the remainder of his work is pub- lished, for which I sincerely wish him the best suc- cess. When I discovered that the idea of mental econ- omy had been so frequently emphasised before and after my enunciation of it, my estimation of my per- sonal achievement was necessarily lowered, but the idea itself appeared to me rather to gain in value on this account; and what appears to Husserl as a de- gradation of scientific thought, the association of it with vulgar or " blind" (?) thinking, seemed to me to be precisely 'an exaltation of it. It has outgrown the scholar's study, being deeply rooted in the life of hu- manity and reacting powerfully upon it. xxvin. (See page 4970 The paragraph on page 497, which was written In 1883, met with little response from the majority of physicists, but it will be noticed that physical exposi- tions have since then closely approached to the ideal there indicated. Hertz's "Investigations on the Prop- agation of Electric Force" (1892) affords a good in- stance of this description of phenomena by simple differential equations. * Principles of Heat, German edJtim, page 394, 584 THE SCIENCE OF MECHANICS. XXIX. (See page 501.) In Germany, Mayer's works at first met "with a very cool, and in part hostile, reception ; even difficulties of publication were encountered; but in England they found more speedy recognition. After they had been almost forgotten there, amid the wealth of new facts being brought to light, attention was again called to them by the lavish praise of Tyndall in his book Heat a Mode of Motion (1863). The consequence of this was a pronounced reaction in Germany, which reached its culminating point in Diihring's work Robert Mayer, the Galileo of the Nineteenth Century (1878). It almost appeared as if the injustice that had been done to Mayer was now to be atoned for by injustice towards others. But as in criminal law, so here, the sum of the injustice is only increased in this way, for no algebraic cancelation takes place. An enthusiastic and thoroughly satisfactory estimate of Mayer's per- formances was given by Popper in an article in A.US- land (1876, No. 35), which is also very readable from the many interesting epistemological apergus that it contains. I have endeavored (Principles of If eat ^ to give a thoroughly just and sober presentation of the achievements of the different inquirers in the domain of the mechanical theory of heat. It appears from this that each one of the inquirers concerned made some distinctive contribution which expressed their respective intellectual peculiarities. Mayer may be regarded as the philosopher of the theory of heat and energy; Joule, who was also conducted to the prin- ciple of energy by philosophical considerations, fur- APPENDIX. 585 nishes the experimental foundation ; and Helmholtz gave to it its theoretical physical form. Helmholtz, Clausius, and Thomson form a transition to the views of Carnot, who stands alone in his ideas. Each one of the first-mentioned inquirers could be eliminated. The progress of the development would have been retarded thereby, but it would not have been checked (compare the edition of Mayer's works by Weyrauch, Stuttgart, 1893). xxx. (See page 504.) The principle of energy is only briefly treated in the text, and I should like to add here a few remarks on the following four treatises, discussing this subject, which have appeared since 1883